j LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

Shelf ±£$L1 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



DISCIPLINES 



OF THE 



UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIS' 

PART I. 
IN ENGLISH, 1814-1841. 

PART II. 
IN GERMAN, 1814-1819, 1841. 



TRANSLATED AND REPRINTED FROM THE ORIGINALS. 



EDITED BY 




DAYTON, OHIO: 
United Brethren Publishing House, 
W. J. Shuey, Publisher. 
1895. 




Copyright, 1895, 
By W. J. Shttey, Publisher. 



CONTENTS. 



Introduction, - - -, - - ..-v 

PART I. 

DISCIPLINES IN ENGLISH. 

Discipline Prior* to 1815. Translated by Prof. A. W. Drury, D.D., - - 3 
Discipline of 1815. Translated by Prof. A. W. Drury, D.D., ... 7 
Discipline of 1817. Translated by Rev. E. Ligbt, D.D., .... 23 
Discipline of 1817— Edition of 1819, --------- 43 

Discipline of 1821, ------- 67 

Discipline of 1825, 93 

Discipline of 1829, - 117 

Discipline of 1833, 137 

Discipline of 1837, - 163 

Discipline of 1841, - 199 

Certification, 232 

PART n. 

DISCIPLINES IN GERMAN. 

Discipline Prior to 1815, 3 

Discipline of 1815, 7 

Discipline of 1817, 25 

Discipline of 1817— Edition of 1819, - 47 

Discipline of 1841, 73 

Certification, 109 

iii 



INTRODUCTION. 



The republication of the early Disciplines of the Church of 
the United Brethren in Christ has long been regarded not only 
as desirable, but as necessary. Of the edition of the Discipline 
issued after the first General Conference, convened in 1815, but 
a single copy is known to be extant. An earlier Discipline, 
assigned to the year 1814, is extant in a single manuscript copy. 
Other Disciplines are getting to be almost equally rare. For- 
tunately, with the exception of a few mutilated pages in the 
Discipline of 1815 and the absence of a number of the pages 
of the Discipline of 1829, the entire list of Disciplines is yet 
preserved intact at the Publishing House. The Historical 
Society, founded in 1885, has awakened a new and special inter- 
est in the early archives of the Church. The fit thing would 
have been for the Historical Society to have begun a series 
of Historical Society publications. But in the absence of special 
funds for this purpose, the most that the Historical Society 
could do was to enlist itself ' on the editorial side of the work 
and leave the publishing to the Publishing House, trusting 
that the interest in the volumes published will lead to the reim- 
bursing of the House for all money expended. A second volume, 
consisting of the General and Annual Conference minutes up 
to 1830 or 1833, has • already been arranged for. Other volumes 
should follow later. 

The present volume is not a history of the Disciplines, but a 
publication of the Disciplines themselves down to the year 1841. 
As the Church began among the Germans and then passed over 
prevailingly to the English side, the German form in the earlier 
Disciplines requires special attention, while in the later Dis- 
ciplines the English form holds the more important place. At 
a session of the Board of Managers of the Historical Society 
the writer was asked to take editorial charge of the two volumes 
proposed, and to call to his assistance what help might be 
necessary. He accordingly has translated the Disciplines of 

v 



vi 



INTRODUCTION 



1814 and 1815, and Rev. E. Light, English and German chaplain 
of the Central National Soldiers' Home, has furnished the trans- 
lation for the Discipline of 1817. The edition of the Discipline 
bearing date " 1819 ' ' and all others immediately following were at 
the time translated from the German to the English under the 
authority of the General Conference. Since 1837 the English 
form has been the standard. The Disciplines are here reproduced 
as found, no effort being made to correct errors, typographical 
or otherwise. 

As the present plan contemplates giving the Disciplines rather 
than a comment on their contents, after a few explanations 
included in this preface, the Disciplines will follow without 
note or comment. 

The Discipline occupying the first place in the following pages, 
namely, the manuscript Discipline assigned to 1814, preserved, no 
one knows how long, at the Publishing House, belongs, be3^ond 
all doubt, to the relative position indicated. The first germs of 
Discipline were taken from the rules adopted in 1785 for Otter- 
bein's church in Baltimore. In allusion to the part performed by 
the Conference of 1789, Mr. Spayth uses the following language: 
" The disciplinary rules which governed the Church from the first 
conference held in Baltimore, 1789, up to 1815, the reader will not 
be displeased to find here in chief, although noticed before, 
comprising the Confession of Faith, same as in Discipline, and 
the following rules. ' ' Especially with reference to the Confession 
of Faith the above statement seems to be in the main correct. 

The rules of Discipline cited by Mr. Spayth are more closely in 
accord with the rules adopted by the Baltimore congregation in 
1785 than with the special rules handed down in definite form. 
These rules seem to have been given special definiteness, begin- 
ning with 1809, and by 1813 and 1814 to have attained that pre- 
cision with which they appear in the manuscript Discipline and 
entered into the Discipline of 1815 under the head of duties of 
"Members in General." 

As bearing on the date of the manuscript Discipline, no one 
can fail to see that it is the basis of the Discipline of 1815. That 
a definite Discipline was in existence in 1813 is clearty shown 
by the following extract from the minutes of that year of the 
Eastern Conference: "Resolved, That the Confession of Faith and 
the Christian Discipline of the United Brethren in Christ be 
printed." In 1814, at the session of the Conference in the East, 



INTRODUCTION 



vii 



according to Mr. Spayth, "two manuscript copies of [a Disci- 
pline] were laid on the table, one by Bro. Christopher Grosh and 
the other by Bro. C. Newcomer." The first error in the statement 
is in affirming that two Disciplines were presented, instead of one 
Discipline signed by both of the persons named, due in part 
perhaps to the fact that in 1812 Mr. Grosh had presented to the 
Conference an elaborate confession over his own name. The 
second error is in the implication that what was presented was 
simply offered and not adopted. A point indicating the adoption 
of the Discipline is that Newcomer, who had been previously 
elected bishop for one year, was in 1814 elected bishop for three 
years, according to the article on that subject in the manuscript 
Discipline. Another testimony is a paragraph in the Miami 
Conference minutes of 1814, which recites that the Discipline of 
the Church, evidently that adopted earlier in the year by the 
Conference in the East, was protested against. The article in 
the manuscript Discipline on temperance, really in advance of 
the times and the existing sentiment of the Church, will awaken 
Special interest. 

Miami Conference, after the action just referred to, took the 
initiative in convening the first General Conference, in 1815, 
which revised the previous Discipline and provided for its print- 
ing, as shown in the following extract from the minutes : "The 
Confession of Faith and the Discipline were considered; some- 
what enlarged, some things omitted; on the whole improved and 
ordered printed." 

Though generally, and properly, called the "Discipline of 
1815," the date on the printed Discipline was "1816," doubtless 
due to the fact that the printing was delayed till that year. 
This Discipline was exclusively in the German language. It 
may be proper to say that the word "church," either the English 
word or the German equivalent, except in composition, does not 
occur in any of the early disciplines; yet in translation the word 
"church" has in some cases been used where clearness seemed 
to require it. In early usage the term "society" was used for a 
local church, and also for the church at large. In the latter 
sense, however, sometimes the expression was the "whole 
society." In the German the term for circuit, presiding elder's 
district, and conference district, and for some other uses as well, 
was the same. The more common English term in each of these 
cases has been used in the translation. 



viii 



INTRODUCTION 



The second General Conference met after an interval of two 
years, in 1817, though from the first it was intended that the 
regular interval should be four years. After the fuller and 
printed Discipline had been resolved upon in 1815, there were 
misgivings among the members of the General Conference as to 
whether too much of form, after the manner of some of the old 
and lifeless churches, had not been introduced, and so the next 
General Conference was ordered to be held in two years. Other 
reasons also may have contributed to this. 

The Discipline bearing date "1819" has been an enigma to. 
many, as no General Conference was held between 181 7 and 
1821. The explanation is this: The General Conference of 1817 
had ordered the Discipline printed in English as well as in Ger- 
man. The Discipline bearing date "1817" was in German 
exclusively. In 1819, in order to comply with the order of the 
General Conference, a new edition was printed having the 
German text and the English translation on opposite pages. A 
slight difficulty is occasioned by the fact that the German text 
of 1819 varies somewhat from the German text of 1817. It is 
doubtless the case that the form in w T hich things should appear 
was left largely w T ith the editor of the Discipline, who was 
usually the secretary of the General Conference, in 1817 Rev. 
H. G. Spayth was the secretary, and he doubtless prepared the 
Discipline of 1817 and no doubt also the German text and trans- 
lation of 1819. That the variations in the edition of 1819 were 
not due simply to liberty taken by the editor of the Discipline 
is evident by the fact that subsequent General Conferences 
retained in the main the changes made. The method followed 
was the regular method for the time. Yet the differences in 
the body of the two editions were, for the most part, purely 
verbal. A greater difference appears in the appendix, which 
may or may not have been regarded as part of the Discipline 
proper. In the appendix the forms for ' 4 Ordinations " and the 
''Marriage Ceremony" were varied somewhat and consider- 
ably extended, and an entirely new article was added on the 
"Necessity of Union Among Ourselves." The most natural 
explanation for the appearance of the new article is that it was 
adopted in 1817, but for some cause had not been incorporated 
in the Discipline published that year. The Discipline of 181 7, 
in the section on the origin of the Church, inserted for the 
first time a list of the preachers present at the Conference of 



INTRODUCTION 



ix 



1800. The list was in part incorrect. The edition of 181 9 gave 
the list correctly, with the exception that the name of Jacob 
Banlus should probably be added. In addition to giving this 
correction, the edition of 1819 inserted a short account of the 
conferences of 1789 and 1791. The edition of 1819 has special 
importance, in that it established, through the English transla- 
tion then made, what continued to be the basis of the English Dis- 
cipline. From this time on the changes in the German editions 
of the Discipline are sufficiently indicated by the English text. 
Beginning with 1837 the German text was a translation of the 
English text. 

The Discipline of 1821 will awaken special interest because 
of its references to slavery and intoxicating drinks. The Dis- 
cipline of 1825 gives an important addition to the Confession 
of Faith, which new feature was itself modified in 1841, and 
again in 1857. For the manifold changes made from time to 
time, the reader is referred to the republished Disciplines them- 
selves. The Discipline of 1829 gives the first law on Free- 
masonry. The Discipline of 1833 shows a disposition to guard 
more carefully the Confession of Faith. The Discipline of 1837 
gives the new Constitution adopted that year, which was valid 
from the first, but was to be made binding under the terms 
of the final article by action of the General Conference four 
years later. The Discipline of 1841 gives the "new constitution" 
adopted that year by the General Conference. The conception 
and action of the General Conference of 1841 were doubtless 
foreshadowed by the following editorial expression in the Relig- 
ious Telescope of November 25, 1840: "Any act of the General 
Conference is the act of the whole Church through their repre- 
sentatives thus assembled. ' ' Rev. A. Biddle, a surviving mem- 
ber of the Conference of 1841, states that the amendment clause 
of the Constitution then adopted was understood at the time 
as meaning that the action of the General Conference through 
the required majority was the action of the whole Church. An 
item of interest, furnished also by Mr. Biddle, is that the draft 
of the Constitution, as submitted to the General Conference, 
was drawn up by Mr. Spayth. 

On some accounts it is believed to be of sufficient interest and 
importance to give the German text of the Discipline for 1841. 
This will accordingly be found following the German text of 
1819. 



X 



INTRODUCTION 



It is sincerely hoped that this volume will prove but the 
beginning in making easily accessible the early documents and 
publications of the Church, and that through the materials thus 
furnished a more intelligent interest will be awakened in the 
history and work of the Church. 

A. W. Drury. 

Dayton, Ohio, August 15, 1895. 



PART I. 
Disciplines in English, 
1814-1841. 



THE DOCTRINE OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN 
CHRIST. 

Article i. In the name of God we confess before all men, 
that we believe in the only true God, Father, Son, and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one; the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence with both; 
that this God created heaven and earth and all that in them 
is, visible as well as invisible, and sustains, governs, protects, 
and supports the same. 

Art. 2. We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is very God and 
man, Saviour and Redeemer of the whole world; that all men 
through him may be saved if they will; that this Jesus suffered 
for us; that he died and was buried, rose on the third day, 
ascended into heaven, and that he will come again, at the last 
day, to judge the living and the dead. 

Art. 3. We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he proceeds from 
the Father and the Son ; that we through him must be sanctified 
and receive faith, thereby being cleansed from all filthiness of the 
flesh and spirit. 

Art. 4. We believe that the Bible is the word of God; that 
it contains the true way to our souls' well-being and salvation; 
that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it, 
with the influences of the Spirit of God, as his only rule and 
guide; and that without repentance, faith in Jesus Christ, for- 
giveness of sins, and following after Jesus Christ, no one can be 
a true Christian. 

Art. 5. We believe that the doctrine which the Holy Scrip- 
tures contain, namely, the fall in Adam and salvation through 
Jesus Christ, shall be preached and proclaimed throughout the 
whole world. 

We recommend that the outward signs and ordinances, namely, 
baptism and the remembrance of the Lord in the distribution of 
the bread and wine, be observed; also the washing of feet, where 
the same is desired. 



3 



4 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



NOW [FOLLOW] THE RULES OF THE UNITED 
BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

Article i. Only such brethren shall be acknowledged as 
preachers by the United Brethren in Christ, who have been pro- 
posed at the conference or a great meeting and by the same have 
been regularly examined and have answered the following ques- 
tions: whether he believes in Christ, whether he has received the 
forgiveness of his sins, whether he follows after peace and holi- 
ness, whether the salvation of his soul, along with the salvation of 
his fellow-men, lies on his heart, whether he will submit him- 
self to the counsel of his brethren. Such persons shall receive 
a written permission. 

Art. 2. Such preachers shall, at the conference, every three 
years, elect bishops by a majority of votes. 

Art. 3. What are the duties of a bishop ? ( 1 ) To preside at 
the conference. (2) He shall have the right, with the consent 
of the conference, to act. (3) By the consent of the conference 
he has the liberty to choose elders. 

Art. 4. To whom are the bishops, elders, and preachers answer- 
able for immoral conduct? To the general \_allgemeine~\ confer- 
ence. But where the conduct is contrary to the Bible and the 
evidence is sufficient, the one to whom the case is known shall 
take other preachers with him and investigate the case. If it is 
found to be contrary to the Bible, then shall the accused remain 
silent till the conference. 

Art. 5. Every preacher shall use diligence to build up the 
Church, as far as possible, by doctrine and life, by prayer and a 
godly walk. He shall seek to become acquainted with all the 
members of his society, so that he can call the same by name, 
and when it is possible, to talk with them about the salvation of 
their souls. 

Art. 6. In each society leaders shall be chosen, whose duty it 
shall be to open and close the prayer-meetings and private meet- 
ings; also to visit the sick, and to exhort and keep in love every 
member of the society, and to keep a watch upon themselves. 

Art. 7. Every member of the Church shall confess that he 
receives the Bible as the word of God; that from now on he will 
strive from his heart to seek his welfare in Christ, and to work 
out his salvation with fear and trembling, and flee the eternal 
wrath of God. 



DISCIPLINE PRIOR TO 1815. 



5 



Art. 8. Every member shall endeavor to lead a strict and 
godly life, to be diligent in prayer, especially in private, and 
whenever possible, to be present at all meetings, both public 
services and prayer-meetings, for his own edification. 

Art. 9. Heads of families should never omit to pray with 
their families morning and evening and to set them a good 
example in all Christian virtues. 

Art. 10. Every member shall endeavor to walk circumspectly 
as in the presence of God, to habituate himself to communion 
with God in his business occupations, to practice love toward 
friend and foe, to do good to the poor, and seek to be a follower 
of Jesus Christ indeed. 

Art. 11. Every member shall abstain from strong drink, and 
use it only on necessity as medicine. 

Art. 12. Every member shall abstain from ordinary occupa- 
tions on Sunday, buying or selling, but spend the time in devo- 
tion, in singing spiritual songs to the [honor] and glory of God. 

Art. 13. Every member of this Church shall contribute 
quarterly, with a free will, as much as his circumstances will 
allow for the support of the traveling preachers. 

Art. 1*4. It is the duty of every member of this Church to 
live a peaceable, quiet, and godly life in his intercourse with all 
men, as it behooves a Christian to live in peace; especially shall 
each one be obedient to the government and the laws of the land, 
for government is ordained of God. 

Art. 15. If disputes should arise between two or more breth- 
ren of the Church concerning debts, or any other cause, and the 
disputing parties cannot come to an agreement, then the preacher 
who has the oversight of the society shall investigate the matter, 
and shall recommend to the disputing parties a reference to a 
committee, which shall consist of three members of the society, 
of whom the plaintiff shall choose one, the defendant another, 
[and these two a third,] and these three shall settle the difficulties. 
In case, however, one of the contending parties should be dis- 
satisfied with the decision, he may appeal to the next great 
meeting, by making this known to the preachers, to have a second 
settlement. If the preachers find sufficient reason therefor, a 
second settlement shall be allowed, in which case each of the 
parties shall choose two members of the Church, and these four a 
fifth, who shall decide the difficulties fully. If one of the persons 
should still not be satisfied with this decision, he thereby excludes 



6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



himself from the Church. If a member of the Church should 
refuse, in case of debts or other difficulties, to allow the matter 
to be settled, after this has been recommended to him by the 
preachers who have oversight of the society, or should a member 
of the Church begin suit before the civil court before the fore- 
going regulations have been followed, he shall be expelled from 
the Church, unless the difficulties are of such a kind that they 
demand and justify a legal decision. 

Christopher Grosh and Christian Newcomer. 



DOCTRINE 

AND 

. DISCIPLINE 

OF THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



HAGERSTOWN : 
Printed by John F. Koch. 
1816. 



7 



OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN 



IN CHRIST. 

In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world, to raise up anew 
a fallen Christianity and preach the doctrine of Christ crucified 
in its purity. 

At the same time he remembered also the Germans in America, 
who lived here and there in this extended country, and had 
therefore but seldom an opportunity to hear the preaching of the 
gospel of the cross for their edification, and but seldom in their 
mother tongue, and in many places not declared with the purity 
and earnestness demanded. 

Among others he awakened an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a 
Geeting, and armed them with his spirit, grace, and power, to 
labor in his neglected vineyard, that he might call also, among the 
Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed 
the call of their Lord and Master, saw the divine blessing on 
their labors, and established in various places excellent societies, 
and led to Christ many precious souls. Their sphere of action at 
length extended itself more and more, so that they were com- 
pelled to look about for more laborers in the vineyard; for the 
harvest was so great, and the laborers but few. God awakened 
others, whom he also made willing to consecrate their powers to 
the Lord. Such persons were accepted by one or another of the 
preachers and by them designated to the preacher's office. 

The number of members in the different parts of the Church 
increased from time to time, and extended through the States of 
Pennsylvania, Maryland, and Virginia. At the same time, at 
great meetings, Otterbein held at times conferences with the 
preachers who were present. He placed before them the impor- 
tance of the preacher's office, how necessary it was to use all 
earnestness in the work of saving souls. They took, therefore, 
counsel as to how they might be most useful, and received such 
persons as fellow-laborers of whom they had reason to believe 
that they had experienced religion in their hearts, were faithful, 

9 



IO UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

and had qualified minds. These persons the}' armed for the 
work of the Lord. The number of members continued to in- 
crease more and more. In order now to labor in a truly useful 
and church-like way, the preachers saw themselves obliged to 
appoint a conference where they might come together to unite 
themselves properly; because some were Reformed, others Luth- 
erans, others Mennonites, etc. They therefore appointed the 
25th of September, 1800, at the house of Frederick Kemp, in 
Frederick County, Maryland, for the conference. There came 
together thirteen preachers, who united themselves into a society 
which bears the name, "The United Brethren in Christ." They 
elected William Otterbein and Martin Boehm as superintendents 
or bishops. Each one was allowed liberty to baptize accord- 
ing to his own view. . 

From this time forth the society increased more and more. 
Preachers were appointed who traveled continually (because the 
preaching places could not otherwise be supplied). The work 
extended itself into the States of Ohio and Kentuck}*. It became 
now necessary to appoint a conference in the State of Ohio, be- 
cause it was too difficult to go annually so far to the conference. 

Meantime, Brother Boehm died and Brother Otterbein desired 
that a bishop should be elected (because he was himself no 
longer able to superintend) who should take charge of the 
work and thereby preserve discipline and order, because it was 
determined at the first conference that if one of the bishops 
should die another should be elected. Therefore, Brother 
Christian Newcomer was elected bishop for a certain time to take 
the oversight of the Church. 

For a long time the want of a discipline in the Church had 
been deeply felt, and already at different times something thereat 
had been done. Finally, it was resolved at the conference in the 
State of Ohio, that a head or general conference snould be held 
which should undertake the work of making the discipline 
in some respects more perfect, as might seem best for the Church. 

The members of this conference were to be elected from the 
preachers in the various parts of the Church by the members 
of the Church through a majority vote. There were present at 
the conference the following preachers, namely: Christian New- 
comer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Trover, 
George Benedum, Abraham Troxel, Christian Berger, Abraham 
Mayer, John Snyder, Henry Kumler, Henry Spayth, Isaac 



DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 



II 



Niswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met 
June 6, 1815, near Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland County, Penn- 
sylvania, where they, after mature deliberation, approved as 
proper and useful the following - doctrine and rules, and delivered 
the same in love and humility to the Church, with the sincere 
wish that this doctrine and these rules, along" with the Word 
of God, might be observed. For God is a God of order, and 
where no order or discipline is, there love and fellowship are lost. 
Therefore, let us follow the counsel of the Lord, who taught us 
that we, through humility, should esteem one another better 
than ourselves, and seek to have the same mind as Jesus Christ, 
who took upon him the form of a servant and became obedient 
even unto the death of the cross, that he might obtain for us 
grace and strength, that we, out of love and humility, might 
submit one to another. Whoever cannot submit himself lacks 
grace, love, and humility. Therefore said Jesus, "Whoever 
among you desires to be the greatest, let the same be the servant 
of others." Thus must we love one another. Therefore said 
Jesus, "Thus .shall all men know that you are my true disciples, 
if you love one another; and whoever has not love abides in 
death." Thus let us practice love, that we may obtain the glory 
which Jesus besought from his Father for his disciples, that we 
may be one even as he and the Father are one. Therefore, 
beloved brethren, let us seek to be like-minded, in unison, helpful, 
no one thinking or speaking evil of another, but imploring the 
Lord that he will grant us his Spirit and earnestness, that we may 
live a true Christian life, to his glory and to our eternal welfare. 
Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 

THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN 
CHRIST. 

In the name of God we confess before all men, that we believe 
in the only true God, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; that these 
three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son in the Father, and 
the Holy Ghost equal in essence with both; that this triune God 
created heaven and earth, and all that in them is, visible as well 
as invisible, sustains, governs, protects, and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is very God and man; that 



12 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



he, by the Holy Ghost, assumed his human nature in Mary, and 
was born of her; that he is the Saviour and Redeemer of the 
whole human race, if they with faith in him accept the grace 
proffered in Jesus ; that this Jesus suffered and died on the cross 
for us, was buried, rose again on the third day, ascended into 
heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to intercede for us; 
and that he shall come again at the last day, to judge the living 
and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he is equal in being with 
the Father and the Son; that he proceeds from both; that we are 
through him enlightened; through faith justified and sanctified. 

We believe in a holy church, communion of saints, resurrec- 
tion of the' flesh, and a life everlasting. 

We believe that the Bible, Old and New Testament, is the 
word of God; that it contains the true way to our salvation; 
that every true Christian is bound to receive it with the influ- 
ences of the Spirit of God, as his only rule, and that without 
faith in Jesus Christ, true penitence, forgiveness of sins, and 
following after Christ, no one can be a true Christian. 

We believe that the doctrine which the Holy Scriptures con- 
tain, namely, the fall in Adam and the redemption through 
Jesus Christ, shall be preached throughout the whole world. 

We believe that the outward means of grace are to be in use 
in all Christian societies, namely: that baptism and the remem- 
brance of the death of the Lord in the distribution of the bread 
and wine are to be in use among his children, according to the 
command of the Lord Jesus; the mode and manner, however, 
shall be left to the judgment of every one. Also, the example 
of feet-washing remains free to every one. 

SECTION SECOND. 

OF THE GENERAL AND ANNUAL CONFERENCES. 

In what manner and order shall the transactions of the con- 
ferences be conducted ? 

It is desired that on these occasions all things be done as in 
the presence of God; that whoever has anything to say, rise and 
speak freely whatever he has in his heart. 

How and after what manner shall the members of the General 
Conference be chosen ? 



DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 



13 



In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are present 
(if such are not present, then the local preachers residing on 
the district), shall advise the societies that they elect two elders 
from their district. But all of the elders of the district who are 
capable of going to the Conference shall be put in nomination 
and the same made known some time beforehand, and those two 
who shall have a majority of votes shall be the members of the 
General Conference. The votes taken at each place shall be 
recorded in writing and be attested by a preacher present or a 
leader. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the 
statement, and should any two have a like number of votes, he 
shall decide which of them is elected. 

How often shall the General Conference be held ? 

Every four years. 

Has the General Conference any power which the annual con- 
ference has not ? 

Yes ; it alone has the power to elect a bishop from the presid- 
ing elders every four years, and to alter or amend the discipline 
or rules as it may find proper, under the conditions and with 
the exception that no article shall be established which shall 
abolish or do away the itinerant plan. The General Conference 
shall also determine the districts where the annual conferences 
shall be held. 

Who are the members of the annual conference? 

All of the elders and preachers who have received a written 
permission and are in the district of such conference or shall be 
received by the same. 

In what manner and order shall the transactions be con- 
ducted ? 

1. There shall first be read a chapter from the Bible, and 
brief remarks made thereon; also singing and prayer as often as 
the conference convenes, with singing and prayer again at the 
close. 

2. The conference shall elect a presiding elder and a secre- 
tary to act with the bishop. 

3. The preachers shall be examined as to their conduct 
toward God, toward one another, and toward their fellow-men; 
whether their conduct is blameless; whether they employ as 
much time as possible in extending the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 

5. What preachers must continue longer on trial ? 



14 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



6. Are any to be elected elders ? 

7. Have any of the preachers died ? 

8. Who are the presiding elders ? 

9. Who offers himself to travel ? 

10. What has been collected to meet contingent expenses, and 
what to make up the allowance of the traveling preachers ? Has 
reckoning been made with them? Have they received their 
dues ? 

11. When and where shall the next conference be held? 

12. Have the elders been ordained ? 

13. On what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 

14. Is there anything more to do ? 

15. Has the conference appointed the districts within its 
bounds for the election of members of the General Conference ? 

16. Has all that has been done been entered upon the protocol ? 

SECTION THIRD. 

OF THE ELECTION AND ORDINATION OF A BISHOP, AND OF HIS 
OFFICE AND DUTY. 

How is a bishop constituted ? 

The General Conference shall elect him by a majority of votes, 
from the presiding elders who have been elected to the General 
Conference; but the conference is at liberty to retain a bishop 
yet another four years. A bishop or a bishop-elect must be 
capable of traveling the different districts and conferences; 
otherwise he cannot be elected. A bishop thus elected shall be 
ordained by the laying on of hands by a bishop and a presiding 
elder. Should no bishop be present, two presiding elders are 
authorized to act. 

What are the duties of a bishop ? 

1. To preside at our conferences, along with a presiding elder 
chosen for this purpose. 

2. He shall, along with two presiding elders whom he may 
choose, appoint the traveling preachers to their various circuits; 
provided, however, that no preacher shall remain longer than 
three consecutive years at the same place, unless on account of 
family circumstances, and with the consent of the conference, 
no limits as to the time should be set. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 



15 



3. The bishops shall designate the districts to be traveled by 
the presiding elders. 

4. In the intervals of the conferences, he has power, along 
with the presiding elders in his district, to change traveling 
preachers where they think it best; also to receive or to suspend 
preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall travel throughout the bounds of the various con- 
ferences, and shall have in spiritual things the oversight of all 
the societies. 

6. To him it belongs to perform the rite of ordination. 

7. If a bishop ceases to serve the various conferences in the 
Church and to travel the districts, can he still exercise his epis- 
copal office among us? No; unless he should be sick, or there 
should be other like circumstances. 

8. If at any time it should so occur that our Church, by reason 
of death, suspension, or other cause, should have no bishop, what 
course shall be taken ? Each annual conference shall choose a 
president from the presiding elders, who shall serve in the 
bishop's place during the session of the conference. The presi- 
dent thus chosen shall also attend the other conference. He 
shall take his seat along with the president there chosen, that he 
may act with him in the conference, and the president there 
chosen shall in like manner attend the other conference; so that 
each conference may know the state of affairs in the other con- 
ference, and that love and communion' may be maintained, etc., 
until the General Conference, which shall again elect a bishop. 

SECTION FOURTH. 

OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS: THEIR ELECTION, OFFICE, AND 
DUTIES. 

How shall the presiding elders be elected? 

The bishop shall propose to the conference some of the elders 
who have finished their probation, and, with the consent of the 
conference, elect them for two years. 

What are the duties of a presiding elder? 

1. To travel the district assigned him, and to preach as often 
as he can. 

2. He shall have oversight of the traveling and local preach- 



i6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



ers on his district, and see that they conduct themselves agree- 
ably to the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible conduct them, administer the Lord's Supper, hold 
quarterly conferences with the preachers, exhorters, and leaders 
present, examine whether the traveling and local preachers do 
their duty, — especially whether the local preachers, where pos- 
sible, preach every Sunday, and where there are several change 
them at times, so that the most good may result, — and exhort 
them that they maintain discipline, order, love, and earnestness 
in the societies. 

4. He can also exchange the traveling preachers on his 
district, but he must first consult the bishop. He can also 
receive or suspend preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall give the bishop a report of the condition of his dis- 
trict, and have a reckoning with the traveling preachers, that he 
may la} T the same before the conference. He shall allow a single 
man eighty dollars, and a married man and his wife twice that 
amount. Only traveling preachers who travel a circuit are to be 
reckoned with. Local preachers shall receive nothing, unless for 
a time the}' serve a circuit, in which case they shall receive an 
allowance for the time. Where a preacher is stationed in a city, 
the society there must support him. 

6. How long may a bishop place a presiding elder over a 
given district ? As long as is believed useful and proper. 

7. Should it so happen that there should be a time when 
there is no bishop, each presiding elder shall exercise special 
care over the societies in his district, that everything ma}- be 
preserved in love and earnestness, and that the}' each give the 
other imformation as to the condition of his district. Should it 
so happen that one or the other district should be without a 
presiding elder, what course should be taken? Information 
thereof should be given to the bishop, who should, from the 
elders of the district, make an appointment thereto 1 [to act till 
the conference, where it is possible. In case there should be no 
bishop, then the nearest presiding elder shall appoint one in 
case he cannot himself take charge of the work. 

1 Here the page is mutilated. The corresponding passage in the Discipline of 
1817 is given in brackets, extending to "Section Fifth," on the following page. 



DISCIPLINE) OF 1815. 



17 



[SECTION FIFTH.] 
OF THE ELDERS : THEIR ELECTION, OFFICE AND DUTY, AND 
ORDINATION. 

How is an elder constituted ? 

After a probation of two years he may be accepted by the 
annual conference; may, by the bishop and 1 [[a presiding 
elder] with the laying on of their hands, be ord?ined; on this 
condition, however: that the conference is convinced that the 
requirements of verses 6-9 of the first chapter of Paul's Epistle 
to Titus are fulfilled in him. This Scripture shall be read to 
each one at his ordination. 

[What is an elder's office and duty? 

[ 1. To preach as often and as much as] he can, and to baptize, 
to solemnize marriage, to assist the presiding elders in adminis- 
tering the Lord's Supper, and when the presiding elder cannot 
be present one or two elders shall perform this office ; he shall 
also conduct all parts of public divine worship, establish class- 
meetings where it is practicable, and hold the same, and help in 
the election of leaders. 

2. To take quarterly a voluntary collection for the traveling 
preachers and for the poor, to take a statement thereof at every 
place and by the 8 [leader attested, and if there is no leader 
present, then it shall be signed by a member, enabling him thus 
to make settlement with the presiding elder, that everything 
may be done in order.] 

3. Where a local elder or preacher preaches at a place where no 
traveling preacher comes, he shall take a collection and take a 
statement of the same and send it to the presiding elder, or bring 
or send it to the conference. 

4. Should a traveling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
circuit assigned him, he shall first notify the presiding elder. 
Should any one leave or neglect his charge unless through sick- 
ness or other unavoidable circumstances, he shall be answerable 
therefor to the next conference. 

^he break here may be supplied from the Discipline of 1817, as in brackets, 
extending to "as much as." 

2 Here a torn page must be restored from the Discipline of 1817, as in brackets. 



2 



iS 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION SIXTH. 

OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR OFFICE 
AND DUTIES. 

How shall a preacher be received by the annual conference? 

1. In the time between conferences, by the bishop or the pre- 
siding elder of the district, or an elder who supplies the place of 
the presiding elder at an annual or great meeting, till the next 
session of the conference. No one will be received otherwise 
than on probation. One who is on probation may be admitted 
or rejected without any injustice being done him. Otherwise 
there would be no probation. 

2. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined by 
the conference, and the following questions shall be asked: 

Has he known God in Christ as a sin-pardoning God ? 
Has he received the forgiveness of his sins ? 
Is the love of God through the Holy Ghost shed abroad in 
your heart ? 

Has he received the peace of God ? 
Does he follow after holiness ? 

Has he a right knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- 
tion, and sanctification, and redemption ? 

3. Does the salvation of his own soul and the salvation of his 
fellow-men lie nearer his heart than all else in the world beside ? 

Can he subject himself to the counsel of his brethren? 

Will he be obedient, speaking or remaining silent as the breth- 
ren may think best ? 

Is he willing, as far as he is able, to uphold the itinerant plan 
(or traveling the circuit), and to support the same as much as 
possible? 

4. What is the duty of a preacher? 

To preach Christ crucified wherever he can find hearers; to 
establish class-meetings where it is practicable; to converse with 
the members on the condition of their souls; to seek to direct 
aright the tempted, to seek to stimulate the slothful, and to seek 
to build up all as far as possible in faith, in the grace and knowl- 
edge of Jesus Christ; never to fail to visit the sick; to seek to 
confirm the word which he preaches by his life and walk. 

5. What are the directions given to a preacher? 

That he be diligent, never trifle away his time in unnecessary 



DISCIPLINE OF 1815. 



19 



things at any place, always be serious; that his motto be, "Holi- 
ness unto the Lord"; that he avoid all lightness and jesting; 
that he speak with moderation, and conduct himself discreetly 
with women, and demean himself as a true Christian. 

6. He shall ever be averse to crediting evil reports, unless 
with sufficient evidence, and always, as far as is consistent with 
truth, put the most favorable construction on all things. He 
shall speak evil of no one; whatever may be his thought, he 
should keep it to himself until he can declare it to the person 
concerned. 

7. Let his business be to save as many souls as possible; to 
this employment he shall give himself up. He should visit 
those in need; in all things act not according to his own will, 
but as a son in the gospel. As such, it becomes him to employ 
his time in the manner before described,— in preaching, in 
visiting from house to house, in teaching, and prayer, and medi- 
tating on the word of God; with these to be occupied till the 
Lord shall come. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY ARE 
TO BE DEALT WITH. 

What shall be done if a bishop, or presiding elder, or elder, or 
preacher is reported guilty of an offense which in the Word of 
God is made an act requiring expulsion ? 

1 . If a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall he be 
dealt with ? Where such accusation prejudicial to the gospel 
may occur, it shall be made known to a presiding elder and to 
an elder, who shall make an examination whether there is just 
cause of complaint. But, as the apostle says, they should not 
receive an accusation without two or three witnesses. Should 
it now appear that he is justly accused, they shall make a 
written statement of the case and send a copy to the bishop, 
and appoint a time when they may come together, when the 
accuser and the bishop may be present. An investigation shall 
be made by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is 
found guilty, he shall remain silent till the annual conference. 
There the presiding elders and the elders shall again make an 



20 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



investigation. If he is found guilty, he shall be suspended from 
his office. 

2. If a presiding elder is accused of immoral conduct, what 
shall be done ? Where such accusations prejudicial to the gospel 
may occur, the nearest elder and a preacher shall investigate. 
Should it appear that he is guilty, they shall make a written 
statement of the case and send a copy to the presiding elder, and 
appoint a time when they shall come together, when the accuser 
and the presiding elder may be present. In the absence of the 
bishop another presiding elder and two elders shall be sum- 
moned, who shall make an investigation. If he is found guilty, 
he shall remain silent till the conference; there shall he be 
answerable. 

3. If an elder, or preacher, or exhorter shall be accused of 
immoral conduct, what shall be done? The preacher in the 
vicinity, to whom the matter is known, shall take with him an- 
other preacher, or an exhorter, or a leader and make an investiga- 
tion. Should it appear that he is guilty, notice thereof shall be 
given him and a time appointed when they and the accuser and 
the accused may be present. In the absence of the bishop or 
presiding elder three elders or preachers shall make an investiga- 
tion. If he is found guilty, he shall be silent till conference, 
w T here he shall be answerable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

OF MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Every member of the Church shall confess that he receives the 
Bible as the word of God; that he will strive from his heart to 
seek his welfare in Christ Jesus, and to work out his salvation 
with fear and trembling, that he may flee the eternal wrath to 
come. 

Every member shall endeavor to lead a strict and godly life, 
to be diligent in prayer, especially in private, and whenever 
possible, to be present at all meetings, both public services and 
prayer-meetings, for his own edification. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and to set them a good example in all 
Christian virtues. 

Every one shall endeavor to walk circumspectly, as in the 



discipline; of 1815. 



21 



presence of God, to habituate himself to communion with God 
in his business occupations, never to speak evil of his fellow- 
men, to practice love toward friend and foe, to do good to the 
poor, and seek to be a follower of Jesus Christ indeed. 

Every member shall refrain from all unnecessary work on 
Sunday; neither buy nor sell, but spend the time in devotion, in 
reading and hearing the Word of God, and in singing spiritual 
hymns, to the honor and glory of God. 

Every member of this Church shall contribute quarterly, with 
a free will, as much as his circumstances will allow, for the sup- 
port of the traveling preachers. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a peaceable, quiet, and 
godly life in his intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- 
tian to live in peace. Especially shall each one be subject to the 
government, as the Word of God requires. 

Among such members of the Church the preachers shall 
establish one or more class-meetings, where it is practicable. 
The members shall, where it is possible, assemble themselves 
once in each week at an appointed place to hold prayer-meetings 
among themselves, that they may be built up in the presence 
of God and in love for good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class, leaders shall be elected in the presence of the 
preacher, whose duty it shall be to appoint prayer-meetings; to 
open and close them; also to hold class-meetings at times; to 
exhort and preserve in love every member, and to keep watch 
upon himself. 

If members trespass against each other as brethren or sisters, 
correct the fault first between thee and him alone. If he hear 
thee, thou hast won him. If he hear thee not, take with thee 
one or two more in order that in the mouth of two or three 
witnesses the whole matter may be established. If he will not 
hear them, tell the matter to the church. If he will not hear the 
church, let him be to thee as a heathen and publican. 

If disputes should arise between two or more members of the 
Church concerning debts or any other cause, and the disputing 
parties cannot come to an agreement, the preacher who has the 
oversight of the society, or the preacher who resides in the 
vicinity, shall investigate the matter and shall recommend to 
the disputing parties a reference to a committee, which shall 
consist of three members of the society; of whom the plaintiff 
shall choose one, the defendant another, and these two a third. 



22 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



These three shall settle the difficulties. In case, however, one 
of the contending persons should be dissatisfied with the deci- 
sion, he may appeal to the next quarterly or great meeting, by 
making this known to the presiding elder or elders, to have a 
second settlement. If the preachers find sufficient reason there- 
for, a second settlement shall be allowed; in which case each of 
the parties shall choose two members of the Church, and these 
four a fifth, who shall decide the difficulties fully. If one of the 
persons should still not be satisfied with this decision, he thereby 
excludes himself from the Church. If a member of the Church 
should refuse, in case of debts or other difficulties, to allow the 
matter to be settled, after this has been recommended to him by 
a preacher or leader who has the oversight; or a member of the 
Church should begin suit at law, before the foregoing regula- 
tions have been followed, he shall be expelled from this Church, 
unless the difficulties are of such a kind that they demand and 
justify a legal decision, as in the case of executors or adminis- 
trators. 



DOCTRINE 



AND 



DISCIPLINE 



OF THE 



UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 



PRINTED BY ORDER OF A GENERAL CONFERENCE HELD ON THE 
SECOND DAY OF JUNE, IN THE YEAR OF OUR LORD, 
1817, IN MOUNT PLEASANT, WESTMORE- 
LAND COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA. 



GREENSBURG, PENN.: 

PRINTED BY JOHN ARMBRUST & CO- 

1817. 



23 



CONCERNING THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED 
BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God to raise 
up men in the different parts of the world who should restore 
again the decayed Christianity, and preach the doctrine of the 
cross in its purity. 

He remembered at the same time the Germans in America, 
who resided widely scattered over this extensive land; who, 
therefore, had seldom opportunity to hear the preaching of the 
cross for their edification, and rarely in their mother tongue, 
and in many places not in that purity and earnestness of presen- 
tation as it should have been. 

Among others he raised up also an Otterbein, a Boehm, and a 
Geeting, and equipped them with spirit, grace, and power to 
labor in his so sadly neglected vineyard, that he might also call 
sinners to repentance among the Germans in America. These 
obeyed the call of their Lord and Master, were blessed in their 
labor, and so raised up here and yonder prosperous societies, and 
led many precious souls to Christ. Gradually the circle of their 
labors widened so that they felt constrained to look about for 
fellow-laborers in the vineyard, for the harvest was great and the 
laborers but few. God awakened others, who also became will- 
ing to consecrate their powers to the Lord. These were then 
received by one or another as fellow-laborers. 

The number of Church members in the different portions of 
the land grew from time to time, and spread themselves in the 
States of Maryland, [Pennsylvania, and Virginia,] for which reason 
Otterbein would sometimes hold conference with the preachers 
who were present at the great meetings. He represented to them 
the solemnity of the ministerial ofiice— -how necessary it was to 
put forth earnest endeavors to save souls. They likewise coun- 
seled how they might be most useful, and received such as 
colaborers of whom they had reason to believe that they had 
experienced Christianity at heart. The number of members 
increased constantly more and more. That they might now labor 

25 



26 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



quite advantageously together, the preachers saw themselves 
obliged to appoint a conference, where they might meet to unite 
themselves thoroughly, for some were Reformed, others Lutheran, 
others Mennonites, etc. Therefore, they determined to meet on 
the 25th of September, 1800, in the house of Frederick Kemp, 
in Frederick County, Maryland. There met of their number 
thirteen, namely, W. Otterbein, J. Boehm, J. Geeting, C. New- 
comer, P. Lehman, G. Pfrimmer, P. Kemp, C. Grosh, D. 
Strickler, C. Krum, H. Krum, A. Herschey. They united them- 
selves into a society bearing the name, "The United Brethren in 
Christ." They chose William Otterbein and Martin Boehm as 
superintendents or bishops. They agreed to grant each one liberty 
to baptize in conformity with his own views. 

Henceforth the society spread more and more. They received 
preachers who traveled constantly (inasmuch as the appoint- 
ments could not be served otherwise). The work spread into 
the States of Ohio and Kentucky. It was now necessary to 
hold a conference in the State of Ohio, as it was too burdensome 
for those preachers to travel annually so far to conference. 

Brother Boehm died meanwhile, and Brother Otterbein desired 
that a bishop should be elected (because he himself could no 
longer superintend) who should take upon himself the work of 
maintaining discipline and order, for it was decided upon at the 
first conference that if one of the bishops died another should be 
chosen. Then Brother Christian Newcomer was chosen bishop 
for a time, who should assume the superintendence of the societj 7 . 

The want of a discipline in the society had been felt for a long 
time, and several attempts toward this end had been made. 
Finally, it was resolved in the conference in Ohio that a principal 
or general conference should be held, which should undertake to 
make the discipline in some respects more perfectly to accord 
with the Word of God. 

The members of this General Conference should be chosen from 
the preachers in the different portions by a majorit}' vote of the 
members of the society; and the following preachers were pres- 
ent at the Conference, namely: Christian Newcomer, Abraham 
Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Troyer, George Benedum, Abra- 
ham Troxel, Christian Berger, Abraham Mayer, John Snyder, 
Henry Kumler, Hen^ Spayth, Isaac Niswander, Christian 
Krum, and Jacob Baulus. These met on the 6th of June, 1815, 
near Mount Pleasant, in Westmoreland County, Pennsylvania, 



DISCIPLINE OF I817. 



27 



where, after due consideration, they found the following doctrine 
and rules as proper and profitable for recommendation to the 
society, in love and humility, with the sincere wish that this 
doctrine and these rules, in connection with the Word of God, 
may be observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is 
no discipline there all love and union decline. Therefore, let us 
follow the counsel of the Lord, which teaches that we humbly 
seek in honor to prefer one another and seek the mind that was in 
Jesus Christ, who took the form of a servant and became obedient 
unto death upon the cross, that he might secure us grace and 
power to submit ourselves one to another in love and humility. 
Whoever is not able to submit himself is yet in lack of grace, 
love, and humility. Wherefore, Jesus says, " Whosoever among 
you would be the greatest shall be the servant of the others. ' ' Thus 
we must love one another. Jesus says, "Thus shall all men 
know that ye are my true disciples, when ye have love one to 
another; and he that doth not love abideth in death." Therefore, 
let us practice love, that we may obtain the glory for which 
Jesus prayed the Father in behalf of his disciples, that we 
might be one even as he and the Father are one. Therefore, ye 
beloved brethren, let us seek to be of one mind, abiding in unity 
and harmony. Let no one speak or think evil of another, but pray 
the Lord that he may give us his spirit and zeal, that we may 
promote Christianity thoroughly, to his glory and our eternal 
welfare. Amen. 



SECTION FIRST. 

THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN 
CHRIST. 

In the name of God we confess before all men, that we believe 
in the one true God, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost; that these 
three are one, the Father in the Son, and the Son in the Father, 
and the Holy Ghost of like being with both; that this triune 
God has created, sustains, governs, protects, and preserves 
heaven and earth, and all that therein is, both visible and invis- 
ible. 

We believe in Jesus Christ; that he is truly God and man; 
that he assumed his humanity through the Holy Spirit in Mary, 



28 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



and that lie was born of her; that he is the Saviour and Redeemer 
of the whole human race, if they accept the proffered grace of 
Jesus by faith in him; that this Jesus suffered for us; that he 
died on the cross, was buried, rose again on the third da}-, 
ascended to heaven, is at the right hand of God and intercedes for 
us, and will come again at the last day to judge the living and 
the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost; that he is of like being with 
the Father and Son; that he comforts the believers, and guides 
them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian church, the fellowship of the 
saints, resurrection of the flesh, and an eternal life. 

We believe that the Bible, Old and New Testament, is God's 
word ; that it contains the true way to our salvation ; that every 
true Christian shall accept it under the influence of God's Spirit 
as his only guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, genu- 
ine repentance, forgiveness of sins, and following Christ, no one 
can be a true Christian. 

We believe that what the Holy Scriptures contain, namely, 
the fall in Adam and the redemption through Jesus Christ, should 
be preached to all the world. 

We believe that the external means should be practiced in 
Christian societies, namely, baptism and the remembrance of the 
death of the Lord Jesus, among his children. The mode and 
manner shall, however, be left to the judgment of the individual. 
Also, the example of feet-washing is left to the judgment of the 
individual. 

SECTION SECOND. 

CONCERNING THE GENERAL AND ANNUAL CONFERENCES. 

Ouestio?i. According to what manner and order shall the pro- 
ceedings of the conferences be conducted? 

Answer. It is desired that whatever may be done upon such 
an occasion shall be done as in the presence of God; whoever 
has anything to say, shall rise and speak freely, as it is in his 
heart. 

Ques. How and in what manner shall the members of a Gen- 
eral Conference be elected? 
Ans. In each district the itinerant preachers, if there be any 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



29 



such (if not, then the local preachers who live in the circuit), 
shall represent to the societies that they elect two elders from 
their district. They shall not fail to put all the elders on the 
district who can go to the Conference in nomination, and make 
it known some time in advance; and the two who obtain the 
majority of votes shall be the members of the General Confer- 
ence. The votes shall, however, be recorded at each place and 
subscribed by a preacher who was present, or by a leader. The 
presiding elder of the district shall examine it, and should two 
of them have an equal number of votes, he shall decide which 
of the two is elected. 

Ques. How often shall the General Conference be held? 

Ans. Every four years. 

Ques. Has the General Conference any power which the 
annual conference does not have ? 

Ans. Yes; it alone has the power to choose quadrennially 
two bishops from among the elders, and to change or improve 
the discipline or rules according as it sees fit, under the condi- 
tion and exception that no clause be enacted which should 
suspend or put away the traveling of circuits [the itineracy]. 
The General Conference shall also determine the districts where 
the annual conferences shall be held. 

Ques. Who are the members of the annual conference ? 

Ans. All the elders and preachers who have received a' writ- 
ten license and reside within the bounds of such conference or 
are received into it. 

Ques. After what manner and order shall the proceedings be 
undertaken? 

Ans. 1. A chapter from the Bible shall be read and brief 
remarks made upon it; then there shall be singing and prayer, 
and this as often as the conference sits, also closing it with sing- 
ing and prayer. 

2. The conference shall elect a secretary, and should one of 
the bishops be absent, elect also one of the presiding elders to 
assist in presiding. 

3. The preachers are to be examined as to their conduct 
toward their neighbors; whether their conduct is blameless; 
whether they devote as much time as possible to the spreading 
of the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be received on probation ? 

5. What preachers are to be continued on probation? 



30 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



6. Are there any to be elected to elders' orders? 

7. Have any of the preachers died ? 

8. Who are the presiding elders? 

9. Who is willing to travel ? 

10. What has been collected to defray contingent expenses 
and to raise the salary of the itinerant preachers ? Has settle- 
ment been made with them? Have they received what is due 
them? 

1 1 . When and where shall the next conference be held ? 

12. Have the elders been ordained ? 

13. On what circuits have the preachers this year been ap- 
pointed ? 

14. Is there anything more to be done ? 

15. Has the conference determined the districts in its bounds 
for the purpose of electing the members of the General Confer- 
ence? 

16. Have all the proceedings been recorded ? 

SECTION THIRD. 

CONCERNING THE ELECTION AND ORDINATION OF THE 
BISHOPS, AND MATTERS PERTAINING TO 
THEIR OFFICE AND DUTY. 

Ques. How shall the bishops be constituted ? 

Ans. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority 
of the votes ot the elders constituting the General Conference. 
The Conference is also at liberty to reelect the bishops for other 
four years. The bishops must, however, be able to travel over 
the different circuits and conferences; otherwise they cannot be 
elected. Those who are chosen shall be ordained through the 
laying on of hands by a bishop and one elder; but should there 
be no bishop present, the ordination may be performed by two 
elders. 

Ques. What are the duties of the bishops ? 
Ans. 1. To preside at our conferences. 

2. They shall, with the assistance of an elder, whom they 
choose, appoint the itinerant preachers to their respective circuits, 
with the limitation that no itinerant preacher shall remain 
longer than three successive 3*ears at the same place, except in 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



31 



view of special circumstances and with the consent of the 
bishops. 

3. The bishops shall assign the presiding elders to the dis- 
tricts which they shall travel. 

4. During the interim between the conferences, they have 
power, along with the presiding elders, to change the itinerant 
preachers where they shall deem it better; also to receive or 
suspend preachers until the time of conference. 

5. They shall travel over the different conferences, as far as 
their boundaries extend, and have the spiritual supervision over 
all the societies. 

6. It is their duty to conduct the ordination service. 

7. If a bishop ceases to serve the different conferences in the 
Church, and to travel over the different districts, can he never- 
theless perform the functions of his office among us ? No; unless 
he should be sick, or hindered by other circumstances of like 
character. 

8. Should it occur that our Church should at any time be 
without a bishop, because of death, or suspension, or on what- 
ever account, what shall be the advice in such case ? The elder 
who shall be chosen in the absence of a bishop to preside at the 
conference shall serve in the place of the bishop as long as the 
conference continues. This thus elected chairman shall also serve 
the other conference. He shall preside with the chairman chosen 
by the other conference concurrently, and the latterly chosen 
chairman shall in like manner serve the other conference, so that 
each conference may know the state of affairs in the other con- 
ference; so that love and fellowship, etc., may be maintained 
until the General Conference, which again elects bishops. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to provide for a suitable 
sermon to the preachers present at the close of each conference. 

SECTION FOURTH. 

CONCERNING THE PRESIDING ELDERS : THEIR ELECTION, 
OFFICE, AND DUTIES. 

Ques. How shall the presiding elders be chosen ? 

Ans. The bishops shall nominate several of the elders who 
have stood their probation, and, with the consent of the con- 
ference, choose them for four years. 



52 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ques. What are the duties of the presiding elder? 
Ans. i. To travel the district to which he was appointed by 
the bishops, and preach as often as he can. 

2. He has the supervision of the itinerant and local preachers 
in his district, to the end that they conduct themselves in con- 
formit}* with the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarter^ and great meetings, and if 
possible conduct them, administer the Lord's Supper, hold 
quarterly conferences with the preachers, exhorters, and leaders 
present, and inquire whether the traveling and local preachers 
perform their duties, — especially whether the local preachers 
preach, as far as possible, every Sunday, and where there are a 
number of them cause them to exchange sometimes, as ma} 7 
result in the accomplishment of most good, — and exhort them to 
maintain discipline, and order, and love, and zeal in the societies. 

4. He can also exchange the itinerant preachers in his dis- 
trict (he shall, however, advise with a bishop); he can also 
receive preachers or suspend them until conference. 

5. He shall inform the bishop of the condition of his district, 
and see to it that the itinerant preachers receive quarterly a 
proportionate support, inasmuch as their salary is taken from 
the money they collect upon their circuits. A single preacher 
shall, however, not receive over eighty dollars, and a married 
one shall be allowed one hundred and sixty dollars. Should the 
amount collected on one or the other circuit, however, not suffice, 
then it shall be put into the hands of a committee of the confer- 
ence, which shall take off from other mone} 7 collected and add to 
that which is deficient, according to their judgment. In the case 
of a preacher stationed in a city, the congregation must care for 
him. 

6. Should it occur at an} 7 time that there should be no bishop, 
the presiding elders shall, each in his own district especially, 
care for the societies, that all things may be conserved in love 
and zeal; and information as to the condition of circuits shall be 
mutually exchanged between the elders. Should it occur, how- 
ever, that there should be no presiding elder in one or the other 
district, what shall be advised ? The bishop shall be informed 
thereof. He shall appoint one from among the elders in the dis- 
trict until conference. Should there be no bishop, however, then 
the adjoining presiding elder shall choose one if he cannot do 
the work himself. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



33 



SECTION FIFTH. 

CONCERNING THE ELECTION, OFFICIAL DUTY, AND 
ORDINATION OF ELDERS. 

Ques. How shall an elder be chosen ? 

A?is. After a probation of two years he may be presented 
to the annual conference for ordination by the bishops with the 
laying on of hands, on this condition, however: that the confer- 
ence is convinced that the requirements of verses 6, 7, 8, and 9 of 
the second chapter of Paul's Epistle to Titus are fulfilled in him. 
This shall be read to each candidate at the time of his ordination. 

1. What is an elder's office and duty? To preach as often 
and much as he can, and baptize, solemnize marriages, assist the 
presiding elder at communion, and when the presiding elder 
cannot be present one or two of the elders shall administer in his 
stead. He shall take part in all the public services of God, seek 
to establish class-meetings, where the majority of the members 
regard it advisable, conduct the same, and help to elect leaders. 

2. To take quarterly a free-will contribution for the itinerant 
preachers and the poor, keep a record of the same at each place, 
attested by the subscription of the leader, and if there is no 
leader present, then it shall be signed by a member, enabling 
him thus to make settlement with the presiding elder and have 
everything done in proper order. 

3. Where a local elder or preacher, who is not in need of sup- 
port, preaches at a place where no itinerant preacher serves, he 
shall take a collection and keep an account of the same and send 
it to the presiding elder or to the conference, or take it there, for 
the support of the needy local preachers who are poor and preach 
among the poor. 

4. Should an itinerant preacher or elder wish to leave the 
circuit assigned him, then he shall first give the presiding elder 
written notice. Should any one leave or neglect [his charge], 
except on account of sickness or other unavoidable circumstan- 
ces, he shall be accountable for it to the next conference. 

5. Where there are local preachers who are poor and needy, 
of whom it is desired that they preach, it is proper that the 
elders take collections in the societies to support such preachers 
according to the time they serve, yet not above that to which the 
itinerant preacher is limited. 

3 



34 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION SIXTH. 

CONCERNING THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR 
OFFICE AND DUTIES. 

Ques. How sliall a preacher be received through the annual 
conference ? 

1. In the time between the conferences, by the bishop, or the 
presiding elder of the circuit, or an elder who represents the office 
of a presiding elder at an annual or great meeting, until the 
next ensuing session of conference. No one will be received 
otherwise than upon probation. One who has been received on 
probation may be accepted or rejected without any injury to 
him. Otherwise there would be no probation. 

2. Each person proposed for the ministry shall be examined 
by the conference on the following questions : 

Ques. Has he learned to know God in Christ as a sin-pardon- 
ing God ? 

Has he obtained the pardon of his sins ? 

Has the love of God been shed abroad in your heart through 
the Holy Spirit ? 

Has he obtained the peace of God? 
Does he follow after holiness ? 

Has he a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifi- 
cation, sanctification, and redemption? 

3. Has he more concern for his and his neighbor's salvation 
than for all else in the world ? 

Can he submit to the advice of his brethren ? 

Will he be obedient to speak or hold his peace as the brethren 
may deem best ? 

Is he willing to aid in sustaining the itinerant plan (or to 
travel the circuit) to the extent of his abilit}', and to support the 
same as much as possible? 

4. What is the duty of a preacher? 

Ans. To preach Christ the crucified one wherever hearers are 
found; to establish class-meetings where it is profitable; to speak 
with the people concerning their souls' condition; to guide 
the tempted, to stir up the Likewarm, and to edify all in the 
faith, grace, and knowledge of Jesus Christ as much as possi- 
ble; never to neglect visiting the sick, and with his life and con- 
duct to enforce the word he preaches. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



35 



5. What counsel shall be given a preacher? 

Ans. He shall be industrious, never squander time in un- 
necessary things at any place, be always grave; his motto be, 
"Holiness unto the Lord." He shall avoid all frivolity and jest- 
ing, speak modestly, and exercise discretion in his association 
with the female sex, and deport himself like a true Christian. 

6. He shall always decline to believe accusations, unless they 
are sufficiently evident; he shall construe everything favorably 
as far as it can be made to agree with the truth. He shall speak 
evil of no one; whatever he may think of one, he shall keep it 
to himself until he can tell the one himself whom it concerns. 

7. Let his employment be to save as many souls as possible; to 
this employment he shall consecrate himself entirely. He shall 
visit the needy. In all things he shall act not in view of self, 
but as a son of the gospel. As such it becomes him to use his 
time as prescribed, — in preaching, visiting from house to house, 
teaching and pra}ring, and the study of the Word of God; thus 
he shall employ himself till the Lord comes. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

CONCERNING THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS : HOW 
TO DEAL WITH THEM. 

Ques. What shall be done in case a bishop, or presiding elder, 
or preacher is reported to have been guilty of an offense for which 
the Word of God requires expulsion? 

Ans. If a bishop be accused of immoral conduct, how shall 
he be dealt with? If accusation occurs which would be prejudi- 
cial to the gospel, it shall be made known to a presiding elder 
and an elder, who shall examine whether there is anything in 
the case; but they shall accept no complaint unattested by two 
or three witnesses, as the apostle says. Does it appear that he 
is justly accused, they shall put the case in writing and send 
the bishop a copy of it, and appoint a time to meet when the 
accuser and the bishop can be present, and the case shall be 
examined by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is 
found guilty, he shall be silenced until the annual conference, 
where the presiding elders and elders shall examine the case 
again. If he is found guilty, he shall be suspended from his 
office. 



36 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ques. 2. If a presiding elder is accused of immoral conduct, 
what shall be done ? 

Ans. In case of accusations detrimental to the gospel, the 
case shall be examined by the nearest elder and a preacher. 
Does it appear as if he were guilty, they shall make a written 
statement of the case and send the presiding elder a copy of it, 
and appoint a time when they shall meet, when the accusers and 
the presiding elder can be present. In the absence of the bishop 
another presiding elder and two elders shall be called. These 
shall examine the case. If he is found guilty, he shall be 
silenced till conference, where he shall be accountable. 

Ques. 3. If an elder, or preacher, or exhorter be accused of 
immoral conduct, what shall be done? 

Ans. The preacher in the vicinity, to whom it is known, shall 
take with him another preacher, or exhorter, or leader and exam- 
ine the case. Should it appear that he is guilty, he shall be 
notified, and a time shall be appointed when the accusers and 
the accused shall be present. In the absence of the bishop or 
presiding elder three elders or preachers shall examine the case. 
If he is found guilt}^, he shall be silenced until conference, where 
he shall be answerable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

CONCERNING MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Each member of the Church should confess that he believes 
the Bible to be the word of God; that he will henceforth endeavor 
to seek his salvation in Christ Jesus, and to work out his salva- 
tion with fear and trembling, that he may escape the impending 
eternal wrath. 

Each member shall endeavor to lead a strictly godly life; to 
be diligent in prayer, especially in secret praj^er, and attend, 
if possible, all the meetings, both public divine services and 
pra3 r er-meetings, for his edification. 

Heads of families shall never neglect to have famil}* prayers 
morning and evening, and set a good example in all Christian 
virtues. 

Every one shall endeavor to walk strictly as in the presence 
of God; to accustom himself in his business to a close fellowship 
with God; never to speak evil of his neighbor, to manifest love 



DISCIPLINE OP IS17. 



37 



toward friend and enemy, do good to the poor, and seek in very 
deed to be a follower of Jesus Christ. 

Kvery member shall keep the Sabbath, as required by the Word 
of God; not to buy or sell, but to spend the same in meditation, 
with reading and hearing the Word of God, and singing spirit- 
ual hymns to the honor and glory of God. 

Kvery member in this society should freely contribute every 
three months as much as his circumstances will allow to support 
the itinerant preachers. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a peaceable, quiet, and 
godly life; in his association with all people to live in peace as 
becometh a Christian. Especially shall every one be subject to 
the government, as the Word of God requires. 

Where the majority of the members regard it as profitable, the 
preacher shall establish one or more class-meetings, where the 
members, as many as can, shall meet once a week to hold prayer- 
meetings together for mutual edification in the presence of God, 
and in love for good works in Christ Jesus. 

In each class, leaders should be elected in the presence of the 
preacher, whose duty it shall be to appoint prayer-meetings, to 
open and close them, and sometimes to hold class-meetings; to 
exhort each member, and conserve them in love, and to keep 
watch upon himself. 

When members offend against each other as brethren or sisters, 
rebuke first between thee and him alone. If he hears thee, then 
thou hast won him. If he hears thee not, then take one or two 
with thee, so that everything may be attested by the mouths of 
two or three witnesses. If he refuses to hear them, tell it to the 
church. If he refuses to hear the church, regard him as a heathen 
and publican. 

If a dispute should arise between two or more members of the 
Church, because of debts or any other cause, and the contending 
parties cannot come to an agreement, then the preacher who 
has charge of the society, or the preacher who resides in the 
vicinit}', shall examine the matter, and shall propose to the 
disputing parties a reference to a committee, which shall consist 
of three members of the Church, of whom the accuser shall 
choose one, the accused another, and these two the third, and 
these three shall adjust the dissension. In case one of the 
contending parties should be dissatisfied with the 'decision, 
he may appeal to the next quarterly or great meeting by making 



3S 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



it known to the presiding elder, or an elder, and apply for a 
second endeavor to make peace. And if the preachers see a suffi- 
cient reason in this appeal, they shall grant it; in which case each 
party shall choose two members from the congregation and these 
four shall choose a fifth one; these shall determine the question in 
dispute finally. Should either of the persons, however, still be 
dissatisfied with the decision rendered, he shall thereby exclude 
himself from the Church. And if a member of the Church should 
refuse to submit a case of indebtedness or dispute, after it was 
recommended to him by a preacher or leader who had charge, or 
if a member of the Church enters suit at law, before the meas- 
ures aforesaid have been adopted, then such member shall be 
expelled from this Church, unless the matter in dispute had been 
of a nature to require or justify a legal decision, as in the case 
of executors or administrators. 

SUPPLEMENT. 

CONCERNING VISITATIONS FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND THE 
ENFORCEMENT OF A PRACTICAL CHRISTIANITY. 

Ques. How can we further assist those who submit them- 
selves to our supervision? 

Ans. In this: that we impart to them instruction in their 
homes, which is very necessary to foster faith in and communion 
with God; further, by avoiding a worldly disposition and culti- 
vating a heavenly one; in that we foster brotherty love, so that 
there may exist no evil thinking or judging in one against the 
other, and that we do as we wish to be done by. 

2. Each preacher must consider it his duty to visit the people 
in their houses, and exhort them to abound to ever}- good work. 
Until this is done, and that seriously and zealously, we shall, 
upon the whole, be little benefited, and our godliness will not 
have a sufficiently deep foundation. Consequent^, wherever we 
may be, we should not indulge in vain conversation. 

These visitations from house to house and special exhortations 
are, no doubt, founded upon the solemn words of the apostle, 
"I charge thee therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ, 
who shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing, Preach 
the word; be instant in season, out of season; reprove, rebuke, 
exhort, with all longsuffering." 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



39 



CONCERNING THE INSTRUCTION OF THE YOUTH. 

Ques. What shall be done in behalf of the rising generation ? 

A?is. Whosoever has any zeal for God and the welfare of 
sonls, let him begin the work without delay. Where there are 
children whose parents belong to the Church, let him gather 
them as often as practicable and profitable; converse with, in- 
struct, and exhort them in and to that which is good; pray with 
them earnestly, but simply, that they may learn to know their 
Creator and Redeemer in their youth. 

MANNER AND METHOD OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

On the day appointed for the purpose a sermon and exhorta- 
tion shall be delivered, in which the office of the ministry and its 
duties shall be explained. 

Thereafter the bishop shall speak to the brethren present as 
follows : "Is there any among you to whom any trespass or other 
hindrance is known why one or the other of these persons 
should not be ordained to the office of an evangelical preacher, 
let him come forward in the name of God and make said transgres- 
sion known." 

If any violation or hindrance is discovered, the bishop shall 
defer the ordination of such person until the accused is found 
innocent. 

Then shall one of the elders read impressively the sixth, 
seventh, eighth, and ninth verses of the first chapter of Paul to 
Titus. Thereafter the bishop shall proceed with the following 
examination of him who is to be ordained: 

Ques. Have you assurance that you are inwardly moved 
through the Holy Spirit to take upon you the office of a 
preacher, to serve God therein to his name's glory and the 
edification of his church? 

Ans. I trust I am. 

Q?ies. Do you believe without reserve all the canonical books 
of the Old and New Testaments ? 
A?is. I do believe them. 

Ques. Will you use diligence to order your walk according to 
the doctrine of Christ, and as much as in you lieth present 
yourself to the flock of Christ as an example of Christian living ? 

Ans, I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Ques. Will you reverently obey those to whom the oversight 



40 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES, 



over you is entrusted, and follow their good exhortations with a 
willing and peaceable heart? 

Ans. I will strive to do so by the grace of God. 

The bishops (or a bishop and an elder) will now place their . 
hands upon the head of each one severally, and the bishop 
shall say: 

"Take thou herewith authority to execute the office of an evan- 
gelical preacher in the church of God, in the name of God, the 
Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost." 

The bishop shall then present to each one the Bible and say: 
"Take thou herewith authority to preach and interpret the 
Word of God in the church of Christ." 

MANNER AND METHOD OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. 

After prayer, the twentieth chapter of the Acts of the Apostles 
may be read from the seventeenth verse to the close. 

Then shall the bishop say to the one that is to be ordained: 

' ' Brother, inasmuch as the Holy Scriptures command us not to 
lay hands hastily upon any one to rule in the church of Christ, 
you will answer the following questions:" 

Ques. Are you convinced that the Word of God contains all 
that is necessary to our salvation through Christ, and are you 
determined to teach the people from out of it ? 

Ans. Yes. 

Ques. Will you be faithful in ordaining others by laying on of 
hands and sending them out ? 
Ans. Yes. 

Then shall the bishop and one or two elders lay their hands 
upon the chosen person kneeling before them, and the bishop 
shall say: 

"Receive thou the grace of God to the office and service of a 
bishop in the church of God, which is herewith, by the laying on 
of our hands, committed unto you in the name of the Father, 
the Son, and the Hoi 3^ Ghost. Amen." 
Then shall the bishop present the Bible, saying: 
"Give heed unto reading, doctrine, and exhortation. Consider 
well the things contained in this book; be a shepherd of the 
flock of Jesus Christ, feeding them; assist the weak; seek the 
lost; be compassionate, that thou mayest receive the unfading 
crown of eternal life when the Chief Shepherd of the sheep shall 
appear. Amen." 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817. 



41 



ADDRESS TO CANDIDATES FOR MARRIAGE. 

" Much Beloved: We are here gathered in the sight of God 
and in the presence of these witnesses, for the purpose of unit- 
ing these two persons in wedlock as man and wife. 

Taber: Will you take this woman to be your wedded wife, 
to live with her in wedlock, to love, comfort, and honor her, to 
support and cherish her in sickness and in health, and forsaking 
all others keep thee only unto her, and that as long as God shall 
spare thy life? If this is your purpose, then answer, 'Yes.' " 

Then the preacher shall address the woman: 

"B. Cathar : Will you take this man to be your husband, to 
live with him in wedlock after the ordinance of God; will you 
render him obedience, helpfulness, love, and honor; in health 
and sickness cherish him, and forsaking all others, keep thee 
only unto him as long as God shall spare thy life ? If this is 
your purpose, then answer, ' Yes.' 

"Extend to each other the right hand." 

The preacher will take their two hands together and say: 
" 'What God hath joined together let no man put asunder.' And 
so I pronounce you man and wife, in the name of the Father, the 
Son, and the Holy Ghost. God the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost 
bless you and keep you in the Lord, look upon you in mercy, and 
endow you with his spiritual gifts and grace, that ye may so live 
together in this world that in the future world ye may have 
eternal life. Amen." 



DOCTRINE 

AND 

DISCIPLINE 

OF THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



HAGERS-TOWN : 
PRINTED BY GRUBER & MAY. 
1819. 



43 



OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN 
IN CHRIST. 

In the century last past it pleased the Lord our God, to awaken 
persons in different parts of the world, who should raise up the 
Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of 
Christ crucified in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otterbein, a Bcehm, and a 
Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour 
in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans in 
America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call of 
their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they established 
in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious soul 
to Jesus Christ. There sphere of action spread itself more and 
more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more 
fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, and 
the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also were 
willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, were 
accepted by one or the other of the preachers as fellow labourers. 

The number of members of the society, in the different parts 
of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the 
gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and 
held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and the 
necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one of 
these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all 
the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in 
what manner they might be most useful. 

The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the 
year 1789. There were present: 

45 ■ 



4 6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Bcehm, John Ernst, 

George Adam Gnething, Henry Weidener. 

Christian Newcomer, 
The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise 
township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, 
where there were present the following persons, viz. 
William Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Bcehm, John G. Pfrimmer, 

George Adam Guething, John Neidig, 

Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, 

Adam Lehman, 

And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most 
usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such 
as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they 
had experienced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time the number of members continued to in- 
crease more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to 
appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more 
closelv, and labour most usefully to one common end; for some 
were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, 
others Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. They, 
therefore, appointed a conference to be held the 25th of Septem- 
ber 1800, in Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother 
Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: 
William Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

George Adam Guething, John Hershey, 

Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Bcehm, 

Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf 

John George Pfrimmer, 
They there united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of " The United Brethren in Christ;" and elected William 
Otterbein and Martin Bcehm, as superintendants or bishops, and 
agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptise in such 
manner, as should best accord with his conviction. 

From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers 
were appointed, who travelled continually ( because the number 
of preaching places could in no other wise be attended), and the 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 



47 



work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It 
became necessary therefore to appoint a conference in the state 
of Ohio, because it was conceived too labourious for the preachers, 
who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to 
the conference. 

In the mean time brothers Bcehm and Guething died, and 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected 
(because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer), who should take charge of the society, and preserve 
discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was 
resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be 
elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was 
then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of 
the society. 

The want of a discipline in the society has long since been 
deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times 
been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the 
state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who 
should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to 
accord with the word of God. The members of this conference 
were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different 
parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members 
of the society; and there were present at the conference, that were 
duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian New- 
comer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George 
Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, 
John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac Nigh- 
swander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. 

These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, 
Westmoreland county, Penn. where they, after mature deliber- 
ation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to de- 
liver the following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the 
'society in love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these 
doctrines and rules together with the Word of God might be 
attended to and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, 
and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and 
communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel 
of our Lord, who taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we 
should esteem each other better than ourselves. Seek to be 
minded as Jesus Christ also was! Who took upon him the form 
of a servant, and became obedient even unto the death of the 



4 3 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives 
of love and humility, might submit one to the other. He -who 
cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humil- 
ity; hence Jesus saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire to be 
the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are to be 
the servants of each other, we must love one another. Jesus 
saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are n^ true disciples, 
if ye have love to one another; and whoso hath not love, the 
same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, that 
we may enjoy the glory and felicity, which Jesus obtained hy 
prayer for his disciples, of his heavenly father, that we may be 
one even as he and the father are one. Therefore, beloved 
brethren, let us strive to be likeminded, unanimous and con- 
cordant; and no one speak or think evil of the other : but implore 
the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his spirit and an 
earnest desire to lead a truly Christian life, to the honour and 
glory of his holy name, and to our own eternal welfare. Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 
THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that 
we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with 
both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, 
and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- 
more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate b}^ the power of the Holy Ghost in the 
virgin Mary, and was born of her; that he is the saviour and 
mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered 
and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the 
third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand 
of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the 
last day to judge the quick and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OP 1819. 



49 



We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 

We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the 
word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; 
that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it 
with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and 
guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true 
penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one 
can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and the redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We further think, that the outward means, namely: baptism 
and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord 
Jesus, are to be in use and practised in all Christian societies; 
and that it is incumbent on his children particularly to practise 
them: But the manner in which, ought always to be left to the 
judgment and understanding of each. So also the practice or 
example of washing the feet must remain free to the judgment 
of every one. 

SECTION SECOND. 
OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner and order are the transactions of 
the conferences to be considered ? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these oc- 
casions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every person 
rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Qst. How and after what manner are the members of a 
General conference to be chosen ? 

Ans. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are 
present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the 
district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect 
two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the 
district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put 
in nomination, and the same made known some time previous to 
the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of votes, 
shall be considered as members of the General conference. The 
votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and 

4 



50 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there 
present. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the 
statement, and should any two or more have an equal number 
of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are 
elected. 

Qst. How often are the General conferences to be held? 
A?is. Every four years. 

Quest. Has the General conference any other powers, which 
the Annual conference has not? 

A?is. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have 
the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four 
years ; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they 
may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not estab- 
lish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put aside the 
itinerant plan. The general conference has further to fix upon 
or determine the districts, where the yearly conferences are to be 
held. 

Quest. Which are the members of the yearly conference? 

Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a 
written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where 
the conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowledged 
in the same. 

Quest. In what manner and order are the transactions of a 
conference to be conducted ? 

Ans. i. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief 
remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer 
performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sit- 
ting closed with singing and pra3 T er. 

2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the 
bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in con- 
junction with the bishop. 

3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment 
towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be 
blameless and whether they emplo}^ as much time as possible to 
promote or spread the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 

5. What preachers are yet to continue on trial? 

6. Are any to be elected as elders? 

7. Have any of the preachers died? 

8. Who are the presiding elders ? 

9. Who gives himself up to travel ? 



DISCIPLINE OE 1817 — EDITION OE 1819. 



51 



10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expences, 
and partly for making np the allowances of the travelling preach- 
ers? Has reckoning been made with them? Have they received 
their dnes? 

if. When and where shall our next conference be held? 

12. Are the elders ordained ? 

13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 

14. Is there any thing more to do? 

15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, 
for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the 
General conference ? 

16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol? 



SECTION THIRD. 

OF THE ELECTION AND CONSECRATION OF THE BISHOPS AND 
THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted ? 

Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the 
majority of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the 
General conference: But the conference may still be at liberty 
to retain the bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, 
however, as well as the bishops retained, must be capable of 
travelling the different circuits and of attending to the confer- 
ences, otherwise they cannot be elected. The persons thus 
elected shall be ordained by the laying on of the hands of our 
bishops and one or more elders, but if no bishop be present, then 
two elders shall perform the rite. 

Quest. What are the duties of the bishops ? 

Ans. 1. To preside in our conferences. 

2. They have, in conjunction with an elder, whom they select, 
to fix the appointments of the itinerant preachers for the several 
circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant preacher to 
remain in the same station more than three years sucessively, 
unless particular circumstances require it, and then only with 
consent of all the bishops. 

3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be travelled 
by the presiding elders. 

4. They have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, 



52 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- 
ant preachers, where they conceive it necessary, and also to 
receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until the 
conference. 

5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, attend 
to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the 
societies. 

6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordination. 

7. "When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, 
and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he 
still exercise his episcopal office among us? No, unless it be 
that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more 
might be. 

8. If, at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of 
death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be with- 
out a bishop ; how is this want to be relieved ? The elder, who 
shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the ab- 
sence of a bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the 
sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other confer- 
ence, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act 
in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the 
president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner 
attend to the other conference: so that each conference may know 
and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and the 
love and communion be maintained &c. unto the next general 
conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of 
every conference. 

SECTION FOURTH. 
OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY, 

Quest. How are the presiding elders to be elected? 

Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of 
the elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with 
the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. 

Quest. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? 

Ans. 1. To travel through the district appointed him of the 
bishops, and preach as often as he can. 



DISCIPLINE OF 18.17 — EDITION OF 1819. 



53 



2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers 
in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably 
to the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and 
hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters 
and leaders ; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether 
the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly 
whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every 
Sunday; and where there are more of them, to change them at 
times, where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort 
them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and ser- 
iousness in their societies. 

4. He can also change the travelling preachers in his district, 
but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or sus- 
pend preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his 
district; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a propor- 
tioned part of their support quarterly, by giving them their 
allowance out of the money they may have collected in their 
districts; a single man, however, shall not be allowed more than 
eighty dollars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dol- 
lars : should the collection of one or the other district be insuffi- 
cient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the 
conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency 
out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a 
town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 

6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be 
without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, 
have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, 
that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they 
give each other all necessary information of the state of their 
districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other 
district should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be 
done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the 
bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where 
it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there 
should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder 
shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the 
district. 



54 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION FIFTH. 
OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 
Quest. How is an elder constituted ? 

Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented 
before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by lay- 
ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and 
full} 7 satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 and 9th verses of 
St. Paul to Titus in his first chapter, are founded to be inherent 
in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who 
is ordained, at his ordination. 

1. What is the duty of an elder? To preach as often as he 
can and to baptise; to perform the office of matrimony, and assist 
the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper, but when 
the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall 
perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine 
worship, endeavour to establish and hold class-meetings, where a 
majority of the members conceive it necessar} 7 , and assist in 
electing the leaders. 

2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarter^, for the 
travelling preachers and for the poor; to take specification or 
catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when 
there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 
ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all 
things be done in an orderly manner. 

3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes 
to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to 
the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor 
and who preach amongst poor people- 

4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder 
of his intention by writing; and should a.ny one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstance, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- 
ference. 

5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is 
reasonable and just that the elders should provide for their sup- 
port in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 



55 



a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their 
district, though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to 
travelling preachers. 

SECTION SIXTH. 

OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND OF THEIR 
DUTY. 

Quest. How is a preacher to be received ? 
Ans. 1. By the yearly conference. 

2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the 
presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the 
place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until 
the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted 
otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may 
either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, 
otherwise it would be no trial at all. 

3. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by 
the conference, and the following questions put to him, viz. 

Have you known God as a pardoning God in Christ ? 

Have you obtained forgiveness of 3-our sins ? 

Is the love of God, through Christ, shed abroad in your heart? 

Have you obtained peace with God ? 

Do you follow after holiness? 

Have you a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifi- 
cation, holiness and redemption? 

Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart, than all other things in the 
world ? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, 
as the brethren may think fit and expedient ? 

Are you willing, as much as in you lies, to assist in upholding 
the itinerary plan (or travelling the circuit) and to support the 
same as much as possible ? 

Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher ? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, 
and establish class meetings where they may be found useful ; to 
converse with the members on the situation or condition of their 



56 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct those 
who are afflicted and labour under temptations; to animate the 
indolent or slothful, and endeavour as much as possible to edify 
and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus 
Christ; never to omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to 
strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers by a well 
ordered exemplary life. 

Quest. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher ? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- 
sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto 
be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- 
verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; 
demean 3-ourself in all respects as a true Christian. 

2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most 
favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the 
subject, consistent with truth, will bear. 

Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in. his conduct. 

3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; to 
this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need 
it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a 
Son in the Gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ } T our 
time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and visiting 
from house to house; in instructing and prayer, and in meditating 
on the word of God; with these be occupied until our Lord cometh. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY 
ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a Bishop, a presiding 
elder or a preacher is under report of being guilt}' of sonie crime 
forbidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practise, suffi- 
cient for excommunication? 

Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how shall 
he be dealt with ? When charges happen to be made, which are 
prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a presiding elder 
and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to inquire into and 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 



57 



examine whether they are founded in truth; but, as the Apostle 
says, they shall not receive an accusation without two or three 
witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly accused, they shall 
take down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof 
to the bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the 
accusers and accused shall be present to each other, when the cause 
shall be tried by two presiding elders and three elders. If he is 
found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the yearly conference, 
where the presiding elders and elders shall again examine and try 
the same; and if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from 
office. 

Quest. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral 
conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presid- 
ing elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the 
duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into 
and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they 
shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the 
accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the 
accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each 
other. And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding 
elder and two elders shall be called, who shall examine the 
charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till 
the conference, where he shall be accountable. 

Quest. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged 
with immoral conduct, what shall be done? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, the 
accusers and the accused shall meet and be present to each other. 
And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, three elders 
or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if he be con- 
victed, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall 
be accountable. 

SECTION EIGHTH.' 

OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the Holy Word of 



58 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



God ; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus ; and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling to the end that he may be enabled to flee from 
the eternal wrath to co?ne. 

Every member should endeavour to walk closel}' and lead a 
godly life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for 
his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, 
at all meetings, both public worship and private prayer meetings. 

Heads of families should never omit to-pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of 
God; also accustom himself to a close communion with God in 
all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, 
but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and 
endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ i?i deed. 

Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy , as required in 
the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honour and glory of God. 

Every member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- 
tian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, 
every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Amongst the members of the societ} 7 the preachers shall 
establish one or more class-meetings, where a majority of the 
members may conceive it necessary; and the members, when 
practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer 
meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, 
and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of 
the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint prayer-meetings, 
and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their duty 
to hold class meetings at times, to exhort the members and 
preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethern or 
sisters, correct the fault first between thee and him alone: If he 
hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 



59 



thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of 
two or three witnesses every word may be established. And if 
he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but if he 
neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man 
and a Publican. 

On any dispute between two or more of the members of our 
society, concerning the payment of debts or other cause, which 
cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has 
the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, 
shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recom- 
mend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one 
arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defend- 
ant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third: the 
three arbiters are then to deside the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 
ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, 
and if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a 
second arbitration, in which case each party shall choose two 
arbiters, and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment 
of the majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing 
to abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society. And 
if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or 
other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- 
mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of 
the society; or shall enter into a law suit with another member, 
before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting 
the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process 
at law, as: executors or administrators. 

APPENDIX. 

OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known) of the 
evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dread- 
ful consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, 
what can stand before us? If we divide, we shall destroy 
ourselves — the work of God, and the souls of our people. 

Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with 
each other? 



6o 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ans. I. I,et us be deeply convinced of the absolute neces- 
sity of it. 

2. Pra}^ earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each, other. 

3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. I,abour, in honour, each to prefer the other before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart, and church divisions. 

OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Quest. How can we further assist those under our care ? 

Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
of unspeakable necessity, in order to promote confidence and 
communion with God among us; further to wean us of the love 
of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; 
also to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, 
that no evil thinking or judging of one another be found 
amongst us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would 
wish to be done by. 

2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the 
people from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all 
good. Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, upon 
the whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not be 
deeply enough founded; therefore, wherever we may be, we 
should guard against useless or loose talking. 

Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to 
house and exhorting the people, is founded or implied in those 
solemn words of the Apostle: 

"I charge thee before God and the Lord fesus Christ, who shall 
judge the quick and dead at his appearing, preach the Word; be 
instant in season, out of season: Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with 
all long suffering. ' ' 

OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

Quest. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? 
Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 6l 

Souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children 
are found, whose parents are in society, meet them as often as 
possible; speak freely with them, and instruct them diligently; 
exhort them to be good, and pray with them earnestly, yet simply 
and plain, that they may learn to know their Creator and 
Redeemer in the days of their youth. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 

2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall 
say unto the people present: 

3. Beloved Brethren in Christ! Is there any amongst you, 
who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons 
to be ordained elders (or deacons as the case may be), for which 
he ought not to be admitted to that office, let him come forth in 
the name of God and shew what the crime or impediment is. 

4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall 
surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party 
accused shall be found clear of the crime. 

Then shall be read 1 Tim. 3.8 — 13. 

Likewise must the deacons be grave, not double tongued, not 
given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre; holding the 
mystery of the faith in a pure conscience. And let these also 
first be proved, then let them use the office of a deacon, being 
found blameless. Even so must their wives be grave, not slan- 
derers; sober, faithful in all things. Let the deacons be the 
husbands of one wife, ruling their children and their own houses 
well. For they that have used the office of a deacon well, pur- 
chase to themselves a good degree, and great boldness in the 
faith which is in Christ Jesus. 

Quest. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God 
in the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy 
name? 

Ans. I trust, with the help of God. 

Quest. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- 
ment ? 
Ans. I do believe them. 

Quest. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 



62 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make 
yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholsome example of the 
flock of Christ ? 
Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Quest. Will you reverently obey them, to whom the charge 
and government over you is committed, following with a glad 
mind and will their godly admonitions ? 

Ans. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. 
Then prayer is made. 

After prayer, the bishops ( or bishop and elders ) shall lay their 
hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say: 

' ' Take thou authority to execute the office of an elder ( or 
minister) in the church of God. In the name of the Father, 
and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost," Amen. 

Hereupon the bishop shall deliver to every one of them the 
Holy Bible, saying: 

' ' Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in 
the church of Christ. ' ' 

Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke 
v. 35—38: 

Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and 
ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, w T hen he will 
return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knocketh, 
they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those ser- 
vants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. 
Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make 
them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. And 
if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third 
watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. 

Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After 
which the following benediction is pronounced by the bishop: 

The Peace of God keep your hearts a?id minds in the knowledge 
of fesus Christ our Lord, Amen. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. 

After prayer the bishop reads as follows: 
Hear ye the Word of the Lord! 

Matth 28. v. 18 — 20. And Jesus came and spake unto them, 
saying: All power is given unto me in Heaven a?id in Earth. 
Go ye therefore, and teach all nations, baptizing them in the ?ia?ne 



DISCIPLINE OF 1817 — EDITION OF 1819. 



63 



of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost; teaching 
them to observe all things, whatever I have commanded you; and, 
to, I am with you alway, even unto the e?id of the world. 

Acts 20. v. 27 — 32. For I have not shunned to declare unto you 
all the counsel of God. Take heed therefore, unto yourselves, 
and to all the flock, over which the Holy Ghost hath made you 
overseers, to feed the church of God, which he hath purchased 
with his own blood. For I know this, that after my departing 
shall grievous wolves enter in among you, not sparing the flock. 
Also of your own-selves shall men arise, speaking perverse 
things, to draw away disciples after them. Therefore watch, and 
remember, that by the space of three years I ceased not to warn 
every one night and day with tears. And now, brethren, I com- 
mand you to God, and to the word of his grace, which is able to 
build you up, and to give you an inheritance among all them, 
which are sanctified. 

1 Tim. 3. v. 1 — 7. This is a true saying, If a man desire the 
office of a bishop, he desireth a good work. — A bishop then must 
be blameless, the husband of one wife, vigilant, sober, of good 
behaviour, given to hospitality, apt to teach; not given to wine, 
no striker, not greedy of filthy lucre; but patient, not a brawler, 
not covetous; one that ruleth well his own house, having his 
children in subjection with all gravity; (for if a man know not 
how to rule his own house, how shall he take care of the church 
of God?) not a novice, lest being lifted up with pride, he fall' 
into the condemnation of the Devil. Moreover he must have a 
good report of them, which are without; lest he fall into re- 
proach, and the snare of the Devil. 

When the gospel and epistles are read, and the discourse there- 
after following ended, the bishop requires the person elected to 
step forth, moves the congregation to prayer, and then addresses 
him, who is to be ordained, as follows: 

Brother! For as much as the holy scriptures command, that 
we should not be hasty in laying on hands, and admitting any 
person to government in the church of Christ, which he hath 
purchased with no less price than the effusion of his own blood; 
therefore, before I admit you to this administration, I will ques- 
tion you on some certain points relative thereto. 

The Bishop. Are you persuaded, that the old and new testa- 
ments contain sufficiently all doctrine required of necessity for 
eternal salvation, through faith in Jesus Christ? and are you 



64 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



determined out of the same holy scriptures to instruct the 
people committed to your charge, according to the ability, which 
God shall grant you, and to teach or maintain nothing, but what 
may be concluded and proven by the same ? 

Ans. Yes, I am persuaded, and will, with the help of God, do 
according thereto. 

The Bishop. Are you willing to exercise yourself faithfully in 
the same holy scriptures, and to call upon God by prayer for the 
true understanding of them, so that you may be able to teach 
wholesome doctrine ? 

Ans. I am willing with the help of God so to do. 

The Bishop. Will you, as much as in you lieth, maintain and 
set forth a kind and peaceable disposition towards every one, and 
endeavour to promote the like good will amongst others, accord- 
ing to the authority vested in you by the word of God ? 

Ans. I will so do, the Lord being my helper. 

The Bishop. Will you, in ordaining, sending abroad and laying 
hands upon others, act faithfully and with a good conscience? 

Ans. I will so do by the help of God. 
Then the bishop shall say: 

Almighty God, our heavenly father, grant unto you strength 
and power to perform all these things, that you may be found to 
be a true and faithful minister at the day of account, through 
Jesus Christ our Lord, Amen. 

The Bishop. Let us pray. 

After prayer the bishop and elders present, shall laj r their 
hands upon the head of the elected person kneeling before them 
upon his knees, the bishop saj'ing: 

Receive the Holy Ghost for the office and work of a bishop in 
the church of God, now committed unto thee by the imposition 
of our hands, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of 
the Holy Ghost, Amen. 

Then the bishop shall deliver him the Bible, sa} T ing: 

Give heed unto reading, exhortation and doctrine. Think 
upon the things contained in this holy Book. Be diligent to 
practise them. Take heed unto thyself, and to tlry doctrine. 
Feed the flock of Christ. Hold up the weak. Be compassionate, 
and administer discipline with mercy, that you may receive the 
crown of glory, through Jesus Christ our Lord, Amen. 

Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall conclude with 
prayer. 



DISCIPLINE OF I817 — EDITION OP 1819. 



65 



THE FORM OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. 
ADDRESS. 

Dear Beloved! 

We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, 
namely N. and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- 
mony: which is an honourable estate, instituted of God in the 
time of man's innocency. 

Quest. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just 
cause why these two persons may not lawfully be joined together, 
let him now speak, or else hereafter for ever hold his peace. 

If no impediment be alledged, then shall the minister say unto 
the man : 

N. N. wilt thou have this woman (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, 
to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love her, com- 
fort her, honour and keep her, in sickness and in health; and 
forsaking all other, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both 
shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then shall the minister say unto the woman: 

N. N. wilt thou have this man (N. N.) to thy wedded husband, 
to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou obey him, 
serve him, love, honour, and keep him in sickness and in health; 
and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him, so long as ye 
both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together, and the minister shall say: 

Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put 
asunder. 

For as much as N. and N. have consented together in wedlock, 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses 
present, I pronounce that they are man and wife together, in the 
name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. 
The God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and 
this woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal life, 
Amen. 

Iyet us pray. 

THE END. 



5 



DOCTRINE 

AKD 

DISCIPLINE 

OP THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



HAGERS-TOWN: 
PRINTED BY J. GRUBER and D. MAY. 
1822. 



67 



OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHERN 



IN CHRIST. 

In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should 
raise up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach 
the gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otterbein, a Bcehm, and a 
Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour 
-in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans 
in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call 
of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- 
lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a 
precious soul to Jesus Christ. There sphere of action spread 
itself more and more, so that they found it necessary to look 
about for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest 
was great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, 
who also were willing to devote their strength to his service; 
such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, 
as fellow labourers. 

The number of members of the society, in the different parts 
of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the 
gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and 
held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one 
of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of 
all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and 
in what manner they might be most useful. 



69 



70 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the 
year 1789. There were present: 

William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Bcehm, John Ernst, 

George Adam Guething, Henry Weidener. 

Christian Newcomer, 
The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise 
township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, 
where there were present the following persons, viz. 
William Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Bcehm, John G. Pfrimmer, 

■ George Adam Guething, John Neidig, 

Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, 

Adam Lehman, 

And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most 
usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such 
as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they 
had experienced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time the number of members continued to increase 
more and more ; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint 
an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closel} T , 
and labour most usefully to one common end; for some were 
Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, others 
Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. The}- therefore 
appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in 
Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick 
Kemp. There were present as follows : 

William Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Bcehm, Henry Krum, 

George Adam Guething, John Hershe}-, 

Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Bcehm, 

Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf. 

John George Pfrimmer, 
They there united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of "The United Brethren in Christ-" and elected William 
Otterbein and Martin Bcehm, as superintendants or bishops, and 
agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such 
manner, as should best accord with his conviction. 

From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers 



DISCIPLINE) OF 1 82 1. 



71 



were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number 
of preaching places could in no other wise be attended ), and the 
work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It 
became necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state 
of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, 
who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually 
to the conference. 

In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected 
(because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer, ) who should take charge of the society, and preserve 
discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was 
resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be 
elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was 
then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of 
the society. 

The want of a discipline in the society has long since been 
deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times 
been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the 
state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who 
should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to 
accord with the word of God. The members of this conference 
were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different 
parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members 
of the society; and there were present at the conference, that 
were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian 
Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, 
George Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham 
Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac 
Nighswander, Christian Krum, and Jacob Baulus. 

These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, West- 
moreland county, Penn. where they, after mature deliberation, 
found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to deliver the fol- 
lowing Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in love 
and humility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines and 
rules, together with the Word of God, might be attended to and 
strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where there is 
no order and discipline, there all love and communion will be 
lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our Lord, who 
taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we should esteem each 
other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded, as Jesus Christ 



7 2 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



also was ! Who took upon him the form of a servant, and became 
obedient even unto the death of the cross, to obtain for us grace 
and strength, that we, from motives of love and humility, might 
submit one to the other. He who cannot submit himself, the 
same lacketh grace, love and humility; hence Jesus saith: Whoso 
amongst you shall desire to be the greatest, shall be the other's 
servant. If then we are to be the servants of each other, we must 
love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that 
ye are my true disciples, if ye have love to one another; and 
whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. Then let us 
practise love, that we may enjoy the glory and felicity, which 
Jesus obtained by prayer for his disciples of his heavenly father, 
that we may be one even as he and the father are one. There- 
fore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be likeminded, unanimous 
and concordant; and no one speak or think evil of the other: 
but implore the L,ord, that he would graciously grant us his 
spirit and an earnest desire to lead a truly christian life, to 
the honour and glory of his holy name, and our own eternal 
welfare. Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 
THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, 
that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with 
both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, 
and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- 
more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost in the 
virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the saviour and 
mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus suf- 
fered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the 
third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand 
of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the 
last day to judge the quick and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 82 1. 



73 



the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 

We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is 
the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salva- 
tion; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and 
receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only 
rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also 
true penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no 
one can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We further think, that the outward means, namely: baptism 
and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord 
Jesus, are to be in use and practised in all Christian societies; 
and that it is incumbent on his children particularly to practise 
them: But the manner in which, ought always to be left to the 
judgment and understanding of each. So also the practice or 
example of washing the feet must remain free to the judgment 
of every one. 

SECTION SECOND. 

OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner and order are the transactions 
of the conferences to be considered ? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these 
occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- 
son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Qst. How and after what manner are the members of a Gen- 
eral conference to be chosen ? 

Ans. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are 
present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the 
district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect 
two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the 
district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put 
in nomination, and the same made known some time previous to 
the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of votes, 



74 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



shall be considered as members of the General conference. The 
votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and 
attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there pres- 
ent. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the state- 
ment, and should any two or more have an equal number of 
votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are 
elected. 

Qst. How often are the General conferences to be held ? 
Ans. Every four years. 

Qst. Has the General conference any other powers, which the 
Annual conference has not? 

Ans. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have 
the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four 
years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as 
they may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not 
establish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put 
aside the itinerant plan. The general conference has further to 
fix upon or determine the districts, where the yearly conferences 
are to be held. 

Quest. Which are the members of the yearly conference ? 

Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a 
written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where 
the conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowledged 
in the same. 

Quest. In what manner and order are the transactions of a 
conference to be conducted? 

Ans. i. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief 
remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer 
performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the 
sitting closed with singing and prayer. 

2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the 
bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in con- 
junction with the bishop. 

3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment 
towards their fellow beings is ; whether their conduct in life be 
blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible to 
promote or spread the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 

5. What preachers are yet to continue on trial ? 

6. Are any to be elected as elders? 

7. Have any of the preachers died ? 



discipline: op 182 1. 



75 



8. Who are the presiding elders? 

9. Who gives himself up to travel? 

10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expences, 
and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling 
preachers ? Has reckoning been made with them ? Have they 
received their dues ? 

11. When and where shall our next conference be held? 

12. Are the elders ordained? 

13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 

14. Is there any thing more to do ? 

15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, 
for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the 
General conference? 

16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol ? 

SECTION THIRD. 

OF THE ELECTION AND CONSECRATION OF THE BISHOPS AND 
THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted? 

Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority 
of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- 
ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the 
bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as 
well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the 
different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise 
they cannot be elected. The persons thus elected shall be 
ordained by the laying on of the hands of our bishops and one 
or more elders, but if no bishop be present, then two elders 
shall perform the rite. 

Quest. What are the duties of the bishops ? 

Ans. 1. To preside in our conferences. 

2. They have, in conjunction with an elder, whom they 
select, to fix the appointments of the itinerant preachers for the 
several circuits, provided they shall not allow any itinerant 
preacher to remain in the same station more than three years 
successively, unless particular circumstances require it, and then 
only with consent of all the bishops. 

3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be trav- 
elled by the presiding elders. 



76 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



4. They have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, 
power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- 
ant preachers, where they conceive it necessary, and also to 
receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until 
the conference. 

5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, attend 
to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the 
societies. 

6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- 
tion. 

7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several confer- 
ences, and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, 
can he still exercise his episcopal office among us? No, unless 
it be that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more 
might be. 

8. If, at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of 
death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be 
without a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, 
who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the 
absence of the bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop dur- 
ing the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other 
conference, and take his seat with the president there elected, to 
act in conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and 
the president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner 
attend to the other conference: so that each conference may know 
and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and that 
love and communion be maintained &c. unto the next general 
conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every 
conference. 

SECTION FOURTH. 

OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Quest. How are the presiding elders to be elected ? 

Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the 
elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with the 
consent of the conference, elect them for four years. 

Quest. What are the duties of a presiding elder? 



DISCIPLINE OF 182 1 



77 



Ans. 1. To travel through the district appointed him of the 
bishops, and preach as often as he can. 

2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers 
in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to 
the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and 
hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters 
and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether 
the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly 
whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every 
Sunday; and where there are more of them, to change them at 
times, where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort 
them, that they maintain discipline and order and love and 
seriousness in their societies. 

4. He can also change the travelling preachers in his district, 
but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or 
suspend preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- 
trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned 
part of their support quarterly, b}' giving them their allowance 
out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a 
single man however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dollars, 
and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annually. 
Should the collection of one or the other district be insufficient, 
then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, 
who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of 
other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town 
must be supported by the congregation he attends. 

6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be 
without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, 
have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, 
that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they 
give each other all necessary information of the state of their 
districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other 
district should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be 
done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the 
bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where 
it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there should 
be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder shall appoint 
one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. 



78 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION FIFTH. 

OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 
Quest. How is an elder constituted? 

Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented 
before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by 
laying on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced 
and fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 and 9th verses 
of St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are found to be inherent 
in and with him. These verses shall be read to every one, who 
is ordained, at his ordination. 

1. What is the duty of an elder? To preach as often as he 
can and to baptize; to perform the office of matrimony, and assist 
the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when 
the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall 
perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine 
worship; endeavour to establish and hold class-meetings, where 
a majority of the members conceive it necessary, and assist in 
electing the leaders. 

2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the 
travelling preachers and for the poor; to take specification or 
catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when 
there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 
ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all 
things be done in an orderly manner. 

3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes 
to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to 
the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor 
and who preach amongst poor people. 

4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder 
of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstance, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- 
ference. 

5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- 
sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support 
in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making a 



DISCIPLINE OF 182 1. 



79 



collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district, 
though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling 
preachers. 

SECTION SIXTH. 

OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND OF THEIR DUTY. 

Quest. How is a preacher to be received ? 
Arts. 1. By the yearly conference. 

2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the 
presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the 
place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until 
the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted 
otherwise, than on trial; aud one who is taken on trial, may 
either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, 
otherwise it would be no trial at all. 

3. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by 
the conference, and the following questions put to him, viz. 

Have you known God as a pardoning God iu Christ? 

Have you obtained forgivenesss of your sins ? 

Is the love of God, through Christ, shed abroad in your heart? 

Have you obtained peace with God ? 

Do you follow after holiness ? 

Have you a correct knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justi- 
fication, holiness and redemption? 

Does your own salvation, and the salvation of 3 r our fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart, than all other things in the 
world ? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethern? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as 
the brethren may think fit and expedient ? 

Are you willing, as much as in you lies, to assist in upholding 
the itinerary plan (or travelling the circuit) and to support the 
same as much as possible ? 

Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, 
and establish class meetings where they may be found useful; 
to converse with the members on the situation or condition of 
their souls, and seek to administer relief, strengthen and direct 
those who are afflicted and labour under temptations, to animate 



So 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



the indolent or slothful, and endeavour as much as possible to 
edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge 
of Jesus Christ; never to omit to visit the sick, but on all occa- 
sions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines he delivers by 
a well ordered exemplar} 7 life. 

Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- 
sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto 
be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- 
verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; 
demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 

2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most 
favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the 
subject, consistent with truth, will bear. 

Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 

3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; to 
this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need 
it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a 
Son in the Gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ 
your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and 
visiting from house to house; in instructing and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until 
our Lord cometh. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW 
THEY ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a Bishop, a presiding 
elder or preacher is under report of being guilty of some crime 
forbidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practice, suffi- 
cient for excommunication? 

Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how 
shall he be dealt with? When charges happen to be made, 
which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a 
presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to 
inquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; but, 



DISCIPLINE OP 182 1. 



8l 



as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation without 
two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is justly 
accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, and 
send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a time 
and place where the accusers and accused shall be present to each 
other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders and 
three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till 
the yearly conference, where the presiding elders and elders 
shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, 
he shall be suspended from office. 

Quest. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral 
conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presid- 
ing elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the 
duty of the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into 
and examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they 
shall take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the 
accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the 
accusers with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. 
And in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and 
two elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and 
if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, 
where he shall be accountable. 

Quest. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged 
with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, 
the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each 
other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, 
three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and 
if he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, 
where he shall be accountable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess, 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the Holy Word of 
6 



82 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

God; that lie will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to flee 
from the eternal wrath to come. 

Every member should endeavour to walk closely and lead a godly 
life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for his 
own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at 
all meetings, both public worship and private prayer meetings. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence 
of God; also accustom himself to a close communion with God 
in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, 
but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and 
endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. 

Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in 
the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, and 
with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. 

Every member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- 
tian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, 
every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall estab- 
lish one or more class-meetings, where a majorit} 7 of the members 
may conceive it necessary; and the members, when practicable, 
shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, 
in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote 
the love to good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence 
of the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint pra3^er-meet- 
ings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their 
duty to hold class-meetings at times, to exhort the members and 
preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethren or 
sisters, correct the fault first between thee and him alone: If he 
hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 82 1. 



83 



thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth 
of two or three witnesses every word may be established. And 
if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but 
if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a 
Heathen man and a Publican. 

On any dispute between two or more of the members of our 
society, concerning the payment of debts or other cause, which 
cannot be settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has 
the oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, 
shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall recom- 
mend to the contending parties a reference, consisting of one 
arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen by the defend- 
ant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the third: the 
three arbiters are then to deside the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 
ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and 
if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second 
arbitration; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the 
majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to 
abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society. And 
if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or 
other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- 
mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge 
of the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another mem- 
ber, before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except- 
ing the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a proc- 
ess at law, as: executors or administrators. 

APPENDIX. 
OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known) of the 
evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful 
consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what 
can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, 
the work of God, and the souls of our people. 

Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with each 
other ? 



34 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ans. i. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity 
of it. 

2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 

3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. Labour, in honour, each to pefer the other before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart, and church divisions. 

OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Quest. How can we further assist those under our care ? 

Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
of unspeakable necessity, in order to promote confidence and 
communion with God among us; further to wean us of the love 
of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also 
to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that 
no evil thinking or judging of one another be found amongst 
us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would wish to be 
done by. 

2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the peo- 
ple from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all good. 
Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, upon the 
whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not be deeply 
enough founded; therefore, wherever we may be, we should 
guard against useless or loose talking. 

Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to 
house and exhorting the people, is founded or implied in those 
solemn words of the Apostle: 

' '/ charge thee before God and the Lord fesus Christ, who shall 
judge the quick and dead at his appearing, preach the Word; be 
instant in season, out of season: Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with 
all lo?ig suffering." 

OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

Quest. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? 
Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the 



DISCIPLINE OF l82I. 



85 



souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are 
found, whose parents are in society, meet them as often as possi- 
ble; speak freely with them, and instruct them diligently; exhort 
them to be good, and pray with them earnestly, yet simply and 
plain, that they may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer 
in the days of their youth. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 

2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall 
say unto the people present: 

3. Beloved Brethren in Christ! Is there any amongst you, 
who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons 
to be ordained elders (or deacons as the case may be), for which 
he ought not to be admitted to that office, let him come forth in 
the name of God and shew what the crime or impediment is. 

4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall 
surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party 
accused shall be found clear of the crime. 

Then shall be read 1 Tim. 3, 8—13. 

Likewise must the deacons be grave, not double tongued, not 
given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre; holding the 
mystery of the faith in a pure conscience. And let these also 
first be proved, then let them use the office of a deacon, being 
found blameless. Even so must their wives be grave, not slan- 
derers; sober, faithful in all things. Let the deacons be the 
husbands of one wife, ruling their children and their own houses 
well. For they that have used the office of a deacon well, pur- 
chase to themselves a good degree, and great boldness in the 
faith which is in Christ Jesus. 

Quest. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God 
in the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy 
name? 

Ans. I trust, with the help of God. 

Quest. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- 
ment? 

Ans. I do believe them. 

Quest. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 



86 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make 
yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the 
flock of Christ ? 
Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Quest. Will you reverently obey them, to whom the charge 
and government over you is committed, following with a glad 
mind and w T ill their godly admonitions; 

Ans. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. 
Then prayer is made. 

After prayer, the bishops (or bishop and elders) shall lay 
their hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say. 

"Take thou authority to execute the office of an elder (or min- 
ister) in the church of God. In the name of the Father, and of 
the Son, and the Holy Ghost." Amen. 

Hereupon the bishop shall deliver to every one of them thd 
Holy Bible, saying: 

' ' Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in 
the church of Christ." 

Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, 
v. 35—38: 

Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and 
ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he 
will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- 
eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those 
servants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. 
Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them 
sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. And if he 
shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and 
find them so, blessed are those servants. 

Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After 
which the following benediction is pronounced 03' the bishop: 

The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge 
of Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING A BISHOP. 

After prayer the bishop reads as follows: 
Hear ye the Word of the Lord! 

Matth 28. v. 18 — 20. And Jesus came and spake unto them, 
saying: All power is given unto me in Heaven and in Earth. 
Go ye therefore, and teach all nations, baptizi?ig them in the na?ne 



DISCIPLINE OF l82I. 87 

of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost; teaching 
them to observe all things, whatever I have commanded you: and, 
to, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world. 

Acts 20. v. 27 — 32. For I have not shunned to declare unto 
you all the counsel of God. Take heed therefore, unto your- 
selves, and to all the flock, over which the Holy Ghost hath 
made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which he hath 
purchased with his own blood. For I know this, that after my 
departing shall grievous wolves enter in among you, not sparing 
the flock. Also of your ownselves shall men arise, speaking 
perverse things, to draw away disciples after them. Therefore 
watch, and remember, that by the space of three years I ceased 
not to warn every one night and day with tears. And now, 
brethren, I command you to God, and to the word of his grace, 
which is able to build you up, and to give you an inheritance 
among all them, which are sanctified. 

1 Tim. 3, v. 1 — 7. This is a true saying: If a man desire the 
office of a bishop, he desireth a good work. — A bishop then must 
be blameless, the husband of one wife, vigilant, sober, of good 
behaviour, given to hospitality, apt to teach; not given to wine, 
no striker, not greedy of filthy lucre, but patient, not a brawler, 
not covetous; one that ruleth well his own house, having his 
children in subjection with all gravity; (for if a man know not 
how to rule his own house, how shall he take care of the church 
of God?) not a novice, lest being lifted up with pride, he fall 
into the condemnation of the Devil. Moreover he must have a 
good report of them which are without, lest he fall into reproach, 
and the snare of the Devil. 

When the gospel and epistles are read, and the discourse there- 
after following ended, the bishop requires the person elected to 
step forth, moves the congregation to prayer, and then addresses 
him, who is to be ordained, as follows ; 

Brother! For as much as the holy scriptures command that 
we should not be hasty in laying on hands, and admitting any 
person to government in the church of Christ, which he hath 
purchased with no less price than the effusion of his own blood; 
therefore, before I admit you to this administration, I will ques- 
tion you on some certain points relative thereto. 

The Bishop. Are you persuaded, that the old and new testa- 
ments contain sufficiently all doctrine required of necessity for 
eternal salvation, through faith in Jesus Christ? And are you 



88 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



determined out of the same holy scriptures to instruct the people 
committed to your charge, according to the ability, which God 
shall grant you, and to teach or maintain nothing, but what may 
be concluded and proven by the same ? 

Ans. Yes, I am persuaded, and will with the help of God, do 
according thereto. 

The Bishop. Are } r ou willing to excercise yourself faithful^ in 
the same holy scriptures, and to call upon God by prayer for the 
true understanding of them, so that }-ou may be able to teach 
wholesome doctrine? 

Ans. I am willing with the help of God so to do. 

The Bishop. Will you, as much as in you lieth, maintain and 
set forth a kind and peaceable disposition towards every one, 
and endeavour to promote the like good will amongst others, 
according to the authority vested in you by the word of God ? 

A?is. I will so do, the Lord being my helper. 

The Bishop. Will you, in ordaining, sending abroad and la}~- 
ing hands upon others, act faithfully and with a good conscience ? 

Ans. I will so do by the help of God. 
Then the Bishop shall say: 

Almighty God, our heavenly father, grant unto 3-ou strength 
and power to perform all these things, that you may be found to 
be a true and faithful minister at the day of account, through 
Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. 

The Bishop. Let us pray. 

After prayer the bishop and elders present, shall lay their 
hands upon the head of the elected person kneeling before them 
upon his knees, the bishop saying: 

Receive the Holy Ghost for the office and work of a bishop in 
the church of God, now committed unto thee by the imposition 
of our hands, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of 
the Holy Ghost. Amen. 

Then the bishop shall deliver him the Bible, saying: 

Give heed unto reading, exhortation and doctrine. Think 
upon the things contained in this holy Book. Be diligent to 
practise them. Take heed unto thyself, and to thy doctrine. 
Feed the flock of Christ. Hold up the weak. Be compassionate, 
and administer discipline with mere}', that 3-ou ma} r receive the 
crown of glory, through Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. 

Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall conclude with 
prayer. 



DISCIPLINE OF 182 1. 



s 9 



THE FORM OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. 

ADDRESS. 

Dear Beloved! 

We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, 
namely, N. and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- 
mony; which is an honorable estate, instituted of God in the 
time of man's innocency. 

Quest. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just 
cause why these two persons may not lawfully be joined together, 
let him now speak, or else hereafter forever hold his peace. 

If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto 
the man: 

N. N. wilt thou have this woman (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, 
to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love her, com- 
fort her, honour and keep her in sickness and in health; and 
forsaking all other, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both 
shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then shall the minister say unto the woman: 

N. N. wilt thou have this man (N.N.) to thy wedded husband, 
to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou obey him, serve 
him, love, honour and keep him in sickness and in health; and 
forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him, so long as ye both 
shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together, and the minister shall say: 

Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put 
asunder. 

For as much as N. and N have consented together in wedlock, 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses 
present, I pronounce that they are man and wife together, in the 
name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. 
The God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and 
this woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal 
life. Amen. 

L,et us pray. 



90 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



FURTHER APPENDIX 

OF THE GENERAL CONFERENCE, HELD THE 15th DAY OF MAY, 
1821, AT THE HOUSE OF DEWALD MECHLING, IN FAIR- 
FIELD COUNTY, IN THE STATE OF OHIO. 

1. Resolved, that the preachers in towns or cities, who stand 
under the direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, 
shall also account at the annual conference, and limit their sala- 
ries according to their support and necessary expences; and should 
a surplus of their salary remain, to make a return of the same to 
the General conference, to be expended for the support of the 
itinerant preachers. 

2. Resolved, that the presiding elder and preachers of each 
district appoint a Stewart, and in each class an assistant stewart, 
to make quarterly collections in money or produce, which pro- 
duce to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, 
and an account kept thereof, and to be proportionably distributed 
among the travelling preachers. All assistant Stewarts to sub- 
mit their accounts to the stewart of the district and settle with 
him quarter yearly; the district Stewarts to submit their accounts 
to the presiding elder at the quarterly meetings, and the presid- 
ing elder to submit the same to the Annual conference, in order to 
show what each travelling minister has received, and that order 
and equality be observed. 

3. Resolved, that the presiding elders hold a conference at all 
quarterly meetings with the preachers and classleaders; and 
where a person is recommended as a preacher or exhorter, the 
presiding elder is to examine him in the presence of the preach- 
ers; and should he be found competent in his standing and 
abilities, he may permit such brother to preach or exhort; and 
he shall transmit his testimony and examination in writing to 
the Annual conference, to be by them approved or disapproved, 
according as they may conceive the same consonant with the 
honor and glory of the Supreme Being. And the presiding 
elder and preacher shall have power to silence an admitted 
brother for unchristian like behaviour before the Annual confer- 
ence, if they think proper. 

4. Resolved, That all slavery, in ever}' sense of the word, be 
totally prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. 
Should some be found therein, or others apply to be admitted as 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 82 1. 



91 



members, who hold slaves, they can neither remain to be mem- 
bers or be admitted as such, provided they do not personally 
manumit or set free such slave, wherever the laws of the state 
shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly conference, to 
be by them specified, what length of time such slave shall serve 
his master or other person, until the amount given for him, or 
for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case 
shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. 

5. Resolved, That if any member of this society shall pub- 
licly transgress as aforesaid, such member shall likewise be 
publicly reprimanded, and in case such member shall not hum- 
ble, the same shall be publicly excluded from the congregation. 



THE END. 



DOCTRINE 

AND 

DISCIPLINE 

OF THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



BALTIMORE: 
PRINTED BY JOHN T. HANZSHE, 
1826 



93 



OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN 



IN CHRIST. 

In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to awaken 
persons in different parts of the world who should raise up the 
Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the gospel of 
Christ crucified in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otterbei?i, a Boehm, and a 
Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour 
in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans 
in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call 
of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- 
lished in many places excellent societies, und led many a precious 
soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more 
and more, so that they found it necessary to look about for 
more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was great, 
and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who also 
were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, 
were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow 
labourers. 

The number of members of the society, in the different parts 
of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the 
gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and 
held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one 
of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of 
all the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how; and 
in what manner they might be most useful. 



95 



9 6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the 
year 1789. There were present: 

William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Boehm, John Ernst, 

George Adam Guething, Henry Weidener, 
Christian Newcomer. 

The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise 
township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, 
where there were present the following persons, viz. 

William Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, 

George A. Guething, John Neidig, 

Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, 

Adam Lehman, 

And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most 
usefully in the vinej^ard of the Lord, they again appointed such 
as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they 
had experienced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time the number of members continued to in- 
crease more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to 
appoint an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more 
closely, and labour most usefully to one common end; for some 
were Presbyterians, or church Reformed, some were Lutherans, 
others Mennonites, and yet others were Methodists. They there- 
fore appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 
1800, in Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother 
Frederick Kemp. There were present as follows: 

William Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

George Adam Guething, John Hershey, 

Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, 

Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, 
John George Pfrimmer. 

They there united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of " The United Brethren in Christ;" and elected William 
Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops and 
agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such 
manner, as should best accord with his conviction. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



97 



From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers 
were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number 
of preaching places could in no other wise be attended), and the 
work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It 
became necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state 
of Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, 
who laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually 
to the conference. 

In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, und 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected 
(because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer, ) who should take charge of the society and preserve 
discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was 
resolved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should 
be elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer 
was then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance 
of the society. 

The want of a discipline in the society has long since been 
deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times 
been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the 
state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who 
should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to 
accord with the word of God. The members of this conference 
were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different 
parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the members 
of the society; and there were present at the conference, that 
were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian 
Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, 
George Benedum, Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham 
Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac 
Nighswander, Christian Kruni, and Jacob Baulus. 

These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, West- 
moreland County, Penn. where they, after mature deliberation, 
found it to be necessary, good and beneficial to deliver the 
following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the society in 
love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these doctrines 
and rules, together with the Word of God, might be attended to 
and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, and where 
there is no order and discipline, there all love and communion 
will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel of our I,ord, 
who taught us: That in lowliness of mind, we should esteem 
7 



9 8 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



each other better than ourselves. Seek to be minded, as Jesus 
Christ also was! Who took upon him the form of a servant, and 
became obedient even unto the death of the cross, to obtain for 
us grace and strength, that we, from motives of love and humil- 
ity, might submit one to the other. He who cannot submit 
himself, the same lacketh grace, love and humility; hence Jesus 
saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire to be the greatest, shall 
be the other's servant. If then we are to be the servants of each 
other, we must love one another. Jesus saith: Thus shall all 
men know that ye are my true disciples, if ye have love to one 
another; and whoso hath not love, the same continueth in death. 
Then let us practise love, that we may enjoy the glory and 
felicity, which Jesus obtained by prayer for his disciples of his 
heavenly father, that we may be one even as he and the father 
are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like- 
minded, unanimous and concordant and no one speak or think 
evil of the other but implore the Lord, that he would graciously 
grant us his spirit and an earnest desire to lead a truly christian 
life, to the honour and glory of his holy name, and our own 
eternal welfare. Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 

THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, that 
we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being with 
both. That this triune God created the heavens and the earth, 
and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and further- 
more sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the 
virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the saviour and 
mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in him, 
accept the grace profferred in Jesus. That this Jesus suffered and 
died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again on the third daj', 
ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God to 
intercede for us; and, that he shall come again at the last day to 
judge the quick and the dead. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



99 



We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 

We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is the 
word of God; that it contains the only true way to our salvation; 
that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge and receive it 
with the influence of the spirit of God, as their only rule and 
guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as also true peni- 
tence, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, no one can 
be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We are convinced that the outward means of grace, namely: 
baptism & the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our 
Ivord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practised by all Christian 
societies: and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, 
particularly to practise them; but the manner in which ought 
always to be left to the judgment and understanding of every 
individual. So also the exemple of washing the feet is left to 
the judgment of every one to practise or not: but it is not becom- 
ing any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose 
judgment and understanding in this respect are different from 
his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make 
himself guilty in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of 
his brethren and shall therefore be answerable to the annual con- 
ference. 

SECTION SECOND. 

OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner and order are the transactions 
of the conferences to be considered ? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these 
occasions, as in the immediate presence of God.- That every 
person rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Qst. How and after what manner are the members of a 
General conference to be chosen ? 



IOO 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ans. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are 
present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the 
district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect 
two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the 
district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be 
put in nomination, and the same made known some time pre- 
vious to the election; and those two, who shall have a majority 
of votes, shall be considered as members of the General confer- 
ence. The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, 
and attested by one of the preachers or leaders then and there 
present. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the 
statement, and should any two or more have an equal number 
of votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are 
elected. 

N. B. The votes shall be taken by an exhorter, leader, or 
Stewart. 

Qst. How often are the General conferences to be held? 
Ans. Every four years. 

Qst. Has the the General conference any other powers, which 
the Annual conference has not? 

A?is. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have 
the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four 
years; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as 
they may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not 
establish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put 
aside the itinerant plan. The General conference has further to 
fix upon or determine the districts, where the yearly conferences 
are to be held. 

Qst. Which are the members of the yearly conference? 

Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a 
written permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where 
the conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowl- 
edged in the same. But none then ordained preachers shall have 
a vote in the conference. 

Qst. In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- 
ference to be conducted ? 

Ans. i. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief 
remarks made on the contents; there will be sung and prayer 
performed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sit- 
ting closed with singing and prayer. 

2. The conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the 



DISCIPLINE OP 1825. 



IOI 



bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in 
conjunction with the bishop. 

N. B. Wherever it is necessary two secretaries shall be elected, 
andthe records of the proceedings of the conference shall be 
kept, both in the English and German languages. 

3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment 
towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be 
blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible to 
promote or spread the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 

5. What preachers are yet to continue on trial ? 

6. Are any to be elected as elders ? 

7. Have any of the preachers died? 

8. Who are the presiding elders ? 

9. Who gives himself up to travel ? 

10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, 
and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preach- 
ers ? Has reckoning been made with them? have they received 
their dues ? 

1 1 . When and where shall our next conference be held ? 

12. Are the elders ordained ? 

13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 

14. Is there any thing more to do? 

15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, 
for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the 
General conference? 

16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol ? 

SECTION THIRD. 
OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted ? 

Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority 
of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- 
ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the 
bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as 
well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the 
different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise 
they cannot be elected. 

Qst. What are the duties of the bishops ? 



102 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ans. I. To preside in our conferences. 

2. They have, in conjunction with the presiding elder, that 
may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the 
travelling preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall 
not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station 
more than three years successively, unless particular circum- 
stances require it, and then only with consent of all the 
bishops. 

3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be travelled 
by the presiding elders. 

4. They have also, in connection with the presiding elders, 
power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itinerant 
preachers, where they conceive it necessary, and also to receive 
and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until the con- 
ference. 

5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, attend 
to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns of the 
societies. 

6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- 
tion. 

7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, 
and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he 
still exercise his episcopal office among us? No, unless it be 
that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more 
might be. 

8. If at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of 
death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be with- 
out a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, who 
shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in the absence 
of the bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop during the 
sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the other confer- 
ence, and take his seat with the president there elected, to act in 
conjunction with him at the conference then sitting; and the 
president there elected shall also in turn, and in like manner 
attend to the other conference: so that "each conference ma} r know 
and be acquainted with the proceedings of the others, and that 
love and communion be maintained &c. unto the next General 
conference, who are then to elect bishops anew. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of every 
conference. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



103 



SECTION FOURTH. 

OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How are the presiding elders to be elected? 

Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the 
elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with the 
consent of the conference, elect them for four years. 

Qst. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? 

Ans. 1. To travel through the district appointed him of the 
bishops, and preach as often as he can. 

2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers 
in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably to 
the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lords supper, and 
hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters 
and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether 
the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly 
whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- 
day; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, 
where the most benefit is likely to result, & to exhort them, that 
they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness in 
their societies. 

4. He can also change the travelling preacher in his district, 
but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or sus- 
pend preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- 
trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned 
part of their support quarterly, by giving them their allowance 
out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a 
single man however, shall not be allowed more than eighty dol- 
lars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annually. 
Should the collection of one or the other district be insufficient, 
then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the conference, 
who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency out of other 
collections made. But a preacher stationed in a town must be 
supported by the congregation he attends. 

6. Should it so happen, that the society at a time should be 
without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, 
have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, 



io4 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they 
give each other all necessary information of the state of their 
districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other dis- 
trict should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be 
done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the 
bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where 
it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there 
should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder 
shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. 

SECTION FIFTH. 
OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 
Qst. How is an elder constituted ? 

Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented 
before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by lay- 
ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and 
fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 & 9th verses of 
St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are found to be in and with 
him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, 
at his ordination. 

1. What is the duty of an elder? To preach as often as he 
can and to baptize; to perform the office of matrimony, and assist 
the presiding elder to administer the Lord's supper; but when 
the presiding elder cannot attend, then one or two elders shall 
perform this duty ; he shall also perform all parts of divine wor- 
ship; endeavour to establish and hold classmeetings, and assist 
in electing the leaders. 

2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the 
travelling preachers and for the poor.- to take specification or 
catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when 
there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 
ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all 
things be done in an orderly manner. 

3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes 
to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata- 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to the 
conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor and 
who preach amongst poor people. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding eldef 
of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- 
ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary from the time he 
may have travelled during the year. 

5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is 
reasonable and just that the elders should provide for their sup- 
port in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making 
a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district 
though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling 
preachers. 

SECTION SIXTH. 

OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS AND OF THEIR 
DUTY. 

Qst. How is a preacher to be received ? 
Ans. 1. By the yearly conference. 

2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the pre- 
siding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the place 
of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until the next 
sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, 
than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may either be 
admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise 
it would be no trial at all. 

No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher 
in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation 
of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of some 
trustworthy persons, who are known as such to the conference 
or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference may take 
him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time of the con- 
ference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him licence to 
preach until the next annual conference in his district. 

4. Every person proposed as preacher shall be examined by 
the conference and the following questions put to him: 

Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, 
and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? 



io6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed 
abroad in your soul by the hoi}* spirit ? 
Do you follow after holiness? 

Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that 
therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation ? 

What foundation have you for such belief? » 

What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the 
gospel? 

What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- 
tion, sanctification, and redemption? 

Does your own salvation, & the salvation of your fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart then all other things in the 
world ? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace as 
the brethren may think it fit or expedient. 

Are you willing as much as in your power to assist in uphold- 
ing the itinerant plan and support the same as much as possible. 

Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, 
and establish class meetings ; to converse with the members on 
the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer 
relief, strengthen and direct those who are afflicted and labour 
under temptations, to animate the indolent or slothful, and 
endeavour as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, 
in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never to omit to 
visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and con- 
firm the doctrines he delivers by a well ordered exemplary life. 

Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher ? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away* your time with unneces- 
sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto 
be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- 
verse sparingly, & conduct yourself prudently with women; 
demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 

2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most 
favourable construction on such matters, as the nature of the 
subject, consistent with truth, will bear. 

Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



107 



3. L,et your business be to save as many souls as possible; to 
this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who need 
it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but as a 
son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ 
your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and 
visiting from house to house; in instructing and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our 
Lord cometh. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY 
ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a bishop, a presiding elder 
or preacher is under report of being guilty of some crime for- 
bidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practice, sufficient 
for excommunication ? 

Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how 
shall he be dealt with? When charges happen to be made, 
which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a pre- 
siding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, to 
inquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; 
but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation 
without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is 
justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writ- 
ing, and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint 
a time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present 
to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding 
elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his 
peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding elder and 
elders shall again examine and try the same/ and if found guilty 
again, he shall be suspended from office. 

Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral con- 
duct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presiding 
elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of the 
next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and examine 
them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall take 
down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, 
a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers 



io8 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And 
in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two 
elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he 
is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where 
he shall be accountable. 

Qst. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhort er is charged 
with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, 
the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each 
other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, 
three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if 
he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where 
he shall be accountable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? 

Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire 
to become a member of our society, then the preacher present 
shall put to him the following question : 

Have you experienced pardon of your sins and are you now 
determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? 

If the person answers this question in the affirmative, and no 
objection by any person on account of his moral conduct, then 
the preacher shall give him the hand, and he shall henceforth be 
esteemed a full member of our society ; but so long as he is not 
able truly to answer the above question in the affirmative, shall 
he not be considered a full member, but only a seeker, and as 
long as he remains a seeker he has no vote in the society. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess, 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy word of 
God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to flee 
from the eternal wrath to come. 

Bvery member should endeavour to walk closely and lead a 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



109 



good life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for 
his own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, 
at all meetings, both public worship & private prayer meetings. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of 
God; also accustom himself to a close communication with God 
in all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow 
being, but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the 
poor, and endeavour to be a follower of Jesus Christ i?i deed. 

Kvery member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in 
the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of God. 

Kvery member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- 
tian to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, 
every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall estab- 
lish one or more classmeetings, where a majority of the members 
may conceive it necessary; and the members, when practicable, 
shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer meetings, 
in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and promote 
the love to good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence of 
the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint prayer-meet- 
ings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also be their 
duty to hold class-meetings at all times, to exhort the members 
and preserve them in love, and to look well to their own conduct. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethren or sis- 
ters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone: If he hear 
thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear thee, 
then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or 
three witnesses every word may be established. And if he shall 
neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but if he neglect to 
hear the church, let him be unto thee as a Heathen man and a 
Publican. 



no 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



On any dispute between two or more of the society, concerning 
the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be settled by 
the parties concerned, the preacher who has the oversight of the 
society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, shall inquire into 
the circumstances of the case; and shall recommend to the con- 
tending parties a reference, consisting of one arbiter chosen by 
the plaintif, and another chosen by the defendant; which two 
arbiters so chosen shall choose the third: the three arbiters are 
then to decide the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 
ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and 
if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second 
arbitration; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the 
majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to 
abide by such judgment, shall be excluded the society. And if 
any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt or other 
disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recommended to 
him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of the society; or 
shall enter into a law-suit with another member, before these 
measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting the case be of 
such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, as exec- 
utors or administrators. 

If any member of this society shall publicty transgress, such 
member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case 
such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicly ex- 
cluded from the congregation. 

SECTION NINTH. 

IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. 

Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally 
prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. 

Should some be found in our society, or others desire to be 
admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue 
to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- 
alty mannumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the 
state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- 
ence, to be by them specified, what length of time such slave 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



Ill 



serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for him, 
or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no case 
shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. 

SECTION TENTH, 

Qst. 1. How and in what manner shall the bishops and 
preachers be provided for and how shall the necessary means be 
collected ? 

Ans. A collection shall annually be liftted for the bishops, 
at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the 
preachers shall pay over this collection to their respective pre- 
siding elders at the annual conference and the presiding elders 
shall give an account thereof to their respective annual confer- 
ences, out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; 
provided, that one who has a family does not receive more than 
$160 and his travelling expenses, and if without a family, #80 and 
his travelling expenses. 

2d. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the 
direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive 
their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but 
it is their duty to give an account to the annual conference, and 
limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, and 
if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the annual 
conference, to be applied for the benefit of the travelling 
preachers. 

3d. For the support of the travelling preachers the presiding 
elder and preachers shall appoint on each circuit a Stewart, and in 
each class an assistant Stewart, to make quarterly collections in 
money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may be 
worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and 
to be proportionabty distributed among the travelling preachers. 
All assistant Stewarts will submit their accounts to the Stewart 
of the circuit and settle with him quarterly; the circuit Stewarts 
will submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly 
meeting and the presiding elder will submit his account to the 
annual conference, in order to show what each travelling preacher 
has received, that order and equality be observed. The annual 
salary of a travelling preacher or travelling presiding elder is 
also limitted like the salary of the bishops to $160, if with a 
family, or $80 if without family and travelling expenses. 



112 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



APPENDIX. 

OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensible ( from what we have known ) of the 
evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful 
consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what 
can stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, 
the work of God, and the souls of our people. 

Quest. What can be done in order to a closer union with each 
other ? 

Ans. i. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity 
of it. 

2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 

3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. Labour, in honour, each to prefere the other, before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart and church divisions. 

OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Quest. How can we further assist those under our care? 

Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
of unspeakable necessity, in order to promote confidence and 
communion with God among us ; further to wean us of the love 
of the world, and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; 
also to encourage us to strive after and practise brotherly love, 
that no evil thinking or judging of one another be found amongst 
us; and lastly that we may learn to do as we would wish to be 
done by. 

2. Every preacher must make it his duty to instruct the 
people from house to house, and exhort them to be apt in all 
good. Till this be done, and that in good earnest, we shall, 
upon the whole, be but little better, and our godliness will not 
be deeply enough founded; therefore, wherever we may be, we 
should guard against useless or loose talking. 

Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



113 



to house and exhorting- the people, is founded or implied in 
those solemn words of the apostle: 

" I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall 
judge the quick and dead at his appearing, preach the Word; be 
instant in season, out of season: Reprove, rebuke, exhort, with 
all long suffering." 

OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation ? 

Ans. Iyet him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the 
souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children 
are found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with 
them, and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, 
and pray with them earnestly, yet simply and plain, that they 
may learn to know their Creator and redeemer in the days 
of their youth. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF . ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 

2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop shall 
say unto the people present: 

3. Beloved Brethren in Christ \ Is there any amongst you, 
who knoweth any impediment or crime in any of those persons 
to be ordained elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to 
that office, let him come forth in the name of God and shew what 
the crime or impediment is. 

4. If any crime or impediment be objected, the bishop shall 
surcease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party 
accused shall be found clear of the crime. 

Then shall read Titum 1, 5 — 9: 

"For this cause left I thee in Crete, that thou shouldest set in 
order the things that are wanting and ordain elders in every city, 
as I have appointed thee. 

"If any be blameless, the husband of one wife, having faith- 
full children, not accused of riot or unruly. 

"For, a Bishop must be blameless, as the Stewart of God, not 
selfwilled, not soon angry, not given to wine, not striker, not 
given to filthy lucre. 



ii4 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



' ' But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, 
holy, temperate; 

"Holding fast the faithfull word as he had been taught, that he 
, may be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince 
the gainsayers, 

Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry to serve God in 
the church of Christ, to the honour and glory of his holy name? 

Ans. I trust with the help of God. 

Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures old and new testa- 
ment? 

Ans. I do believe them. 

Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 
your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make 
yourself as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the 
flock of Christ? 

Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Qst. Will you reverently obey them, to whom the charge and 
government over you is committed, following with a glad mind 
and will their godly admonitions? 

Ans. I will endeavour, through the grace of God, so to do. 

Then prayer is made. 

After prayer, the bishops (or bishop and elders) shall lay their 
hands upon the heads of every one of them, and say: 

' ' Take thou authority to execute the office of an elder in the 
church of God. In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and 
the Holy Ghost. ' ' Amen . 

Hereupon the bisbop shall deliver to every one of them the 
Holy Bible, saying: 

' ' Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in 
the church of Christ." 

Then the bishop shall read from the 12th chapter of St. Luke, 
v. 35—38: 

Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and 
ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their Lord, when he 
will return from the wedding, that when he commeth and knock- 
eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those serv- 
ants, whom the Lord when he cometh shall find w r atching. 
Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make 
them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1825. 



115 



And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third 
watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. 

Then the bishop, or one whom he appoints, shall pray. After 
which the following benediction is pronounced by the bishop: 

The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge 
of fesus Christ our Lord. Amen. 

THE FORM OF SOLEMNIZATION OF MATRIMONY. 

ADDRESS. 

Dear Beloved ! 

We are gathered together here, in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together these two persons, 
namely N. and N. as man and wife in the holy estate of Matri- 
mony; which is an honorable estate, instituted of God in time 
of man's innocency. 

Qst. Is there any one here present, who can shew any just 
cause why these two persons may not lawfully be joined together, 
let him now speak, or else hereafter forever hold his peace. 

If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto 
the man: 

N. N. wilt thou have this woman: (N. N.) to thy wedded wife, 
to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou love her, com- 
fort her, honour and keep her in sickness and in health; and for- 
saking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long as ye both 
shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then shall the minister say unto the woman: 

N. N. wilt thou have this man ( N. N. ) to thy wedded husband, 
to live together after God's ordinance? Wilt thou obey him, 
serve him, love, honour and keep him in sickness and in 
health; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him, so 
long as ye both shall live? If so, then answer: I will. 

Then the minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together, and the minister shall say: 

Those, whom God hath joined together, let no man put asunder. 

For asmuch as N. and N. have consented together in wedlock, 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses 
present, I pronounce that they are man and wife together, in the 
name of the Father, and of the Son, and the Holy Ghost. The 
God of Abraham, of Isaac, and of Jacob bless this man and this 
woman, and sow into their hearts the seeds of eternal life. Amen. 
Iyet us pray. 

THE END. 



DOCTRINE 



AND 



DISCIPLINE 



OF THE 



United Brethren in Christ 



PUBLISHED BY JACOB ANTRIM 
GERMANTOWN. 



CINCINNATI : 
PRINTED BY JOHN M'CALLA 
1829. 



117 



OF THE ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN 
IN CHRIST. 



In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world who should raise 
up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the 
gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans in 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otterbei?i, a Boehm, and a 
Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labour 
in his neglected vineyard, and call, also, amongst the Germans 
in America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call 
of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- 
lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious 
soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread - itself 
more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about 
for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was 
great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who 
also were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, 
then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fel- 
low labourers. 

The number of members of the society, in the different parts 
of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the 
gracious work spread itself thro' the states of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland, and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and 
held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavors to save souls. At one 
of those conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all 
the preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in 
what manner they might be most useful. 

119 



J20 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the 
vear 1789. There were present: 

William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Boehm, John Ernst, 

George A. Gnething, Henry Weidener, 
Christian Newcomer, 

The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise 
township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, 
where there were present the following persons, viz: 

William Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer, 

Geo. A. Guething, John Neidig, 

Chris' n Newcomer, Benedict Sander, 

Adam Lehman, 

And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most 
usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such 
as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they 
had experienced true religion in their souls. 

In the mean time the number of members continued to increase 
more and more; the preachers therefore were obliged to appoint 
an annual conference, in order to unite themselves more closely, 
and labour most usefully to one common end; for some were 
Presbyterians, or church reformed, some were Lutherians, others 
Menonites, and yet others were Methodists. They therefore 
appointed a conference to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in 
Frederick county, Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick 
Kemp. There were present as follows: 

William Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

George A. Guething, John Hershey, 

Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, 

Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, 
John George Pfrimmer. 

They there united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of "The United Brethren in Christ;'" and elected William 
Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops, and 
agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such 
manner, as should best accord with his conviction. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



121 



From this time forth the society increased still more; preachers 
were appointed, who travelled continually (because the number of 
preaching places could in no wise be attended,) and. the work 
spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. It became 
necessary, therefore, to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, 
because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers who 
laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the 
conference. 

In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected 
(because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer,) who should take charge of the society and preserve 
discipline and order; for at a conference formerly held, it was re- 
solved, that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be 
elected in his place. — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was 
then elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of 
the society. 

The want of a discipline in the society has long since been 
deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times 
been made, it was at length resolved at the conference in the 
state of Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who 
should take upon themselves to complete the same, so as to ac- 
cord with the word of God. The members of this conference 
were to be elected from amongst the preachers in the different 
parts of the country, by a majority of the votes of the mem- 
bers of the society; and there present at the conference, that 
were duly elected, the following preachers, namely: Christian 
Newcomer, Abraham Hiestand, Andrew Zellar, Daniel Treyer, 
Abraham Tracksel, Christian Berger, George Benedum, Abraham 
Meyer, John Schneider, Henry Kumler, Henry Spade, Isaac 
Nighswander, Jacob Baulus, and Christian Krum. 

These met on the 6th of June, 1815, near Mountpleasant, 
Westmoreland county, Pennsylvania, where they, after mature 
deliberation, found it to be necessary, good and beneficial, to 
deliver the following Doctrines and Rules of discipline to the 
society in love and humility, with the sincere desire, that these 
doctrines and rules, together with the Word of God, might be 
attended to, and strictly observed. For God is a God of order, 
and where there is no order and discipline, there all love and 
communion will be lost. Therefore, let us attend to the counsel 
of our L,ord, who taught us: That in lowness of mind, we 



122 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



should esteem each other better than ourselves. Seek to be 
minded, as Jesus Christ also was! Who took upon him the form 
of a servant, and became obedient even unto the death of the 
cross, to obtain for us grace and strength, that we, from motives 
of love and humility, might submit one to the other. He who 
cannot submit himself, the same lacketh grace, love and 
humility; hence Jesus saith: Whoso amongst you shall desire 
to be the greatest, shall be the other's servant. If then we are 
to be the servants of each other, we must love one another. 
Jesus saith: Thus shall all men know that ye are my true 
disciples, if ye have love to one another; and whoso hath not 
love, the same continueth in death. Then let us practise love, 
that we may enjoy the glory and felicity, which Jesus obtained 
by prayer for his disciples of his Heavenly Father, that we 
may be one even as he and the father are one. Therefore, 
beloved brethren, let us strive to be like-minded, unanimous 
and concordant and no one speak or think evil of the other, 
but implore the Lord, that he would graciously grant us his 
spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly christian life, to 
the honor and glory of his holy name and our eternal welfare. 

SECTION FIRST. 
THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, 
that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence, or being 
with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the 
earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and 
furthermore sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the 
Virgin Mary, and was born of her; that he is the saviour and 
mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus 
suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again 
on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right 
hand of God to intercede for us; and, that he shall come again 
at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



I23 



We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 

We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new testaments, is 
the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our 
salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge 
and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their 
only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, as 
also true penitence, forgiveness of sins and following after 
Christ, no one can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We are convinced that the outward means of grace, namely: 
baptism and the remembrance of the sufferings and death of our 
Lord Jesus Christ, are to be in use and practised by all Christian 
societies; and that it is incumbent on all the children of God, 
particularly to practise them; but the manner in which ought 
always to be left to the judgment and understanding of every 
individual. So also the example of washing the feet is left to 
the judgment of every one to practise or not; but it is not becom- 
ing any of our preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose 
judgment and understanding in this respect are different from 
his own, either in public or in private; whosoever shall make 
himself guilty in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of his 
brethren and shall therefore be answerable to the annual confer- 
ence. 

SECTION SECOND. 
OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner and order are the transactions 
of the conferences to be considered? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these 
occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- 
son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Question. How and after what manner are the members of a 
General conference to be chosen ? 

Answer. In every district the itinerant preachers, if such are 



124 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



present, if not, the stationed or local preachers, who live in the 
district, shall advise the members of the society, that they elect 
two elders from out of their district; but all the elders in the 
district, who are capable of going to the conference, shall be put 
in nomination, and the same made known some time previous 
to the election; and those two, who shall have a majority of 
votes, shall be considered as members of the General conference. 
The votes taken at each place, shall be couched in writing, and 
attested by one of the leaders or preachers then and there pres- 
ent. The presiding elder of the district shall examine the 
statement, and should any two or more have an equal number of 
votes, he shall determine by lot, who or which of them are 
elected. 

N. B. The votes shall be taken by an exhorter, leader, or stewart. 
Question. How often are the General conferences to be held ? 
Answer. Every four years. 

Question. Has the General conference any other powers, 
which the annual conference has not ? 

Ans. Yes, the members of the General conference alone have 
the power to elect two bishops from amongst the elders for four 
years ; as also to alter and amend the discipline according as they 
may find it necessary and expedient: provided they do not estab- 
ish any article, which may tend to abolish, undo or put aside the 
itinerant plan. The general conference has further to fix upon or 
determine the districts, where the yearly conferences are to be 
held. 

QsT. Which are the members of the yearly conference ? 

Ans. All the elders and preachers, who have obtained a writ- 
ten permit, and are, for the time being, in the district where the 
conference is held, or who may be taken up and acknowledged in 
the same. But none then ordained preachers shall have a vote in 
the conference. 

QsT. In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- 
ference to be conducted ? 

Ans. There will be read a chapter in the Bible, and brief re- 
marks made on the contents ; there will be sung and prayer per- 
formed, and that as often as the conference sits; and the sitting 
closed with singing and prayer. 

2. The Conference elects a secretary, and in case one of the 
bishops be absent, also one of the presiding elders, to act in con- 
junction with the bishop. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



125 



N. B. Wherever it is necessary two secretaries shall be elected, 
and the records of the proceedings of the conference shall be 
kept, both in the English and German languages. 

3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment 
towards their fellow beings is; whether their conduct in life be 
blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible to 
promote or spread the kingdom of God. 

4. What preachers are to be admitted on trial ? 

5. What preachers are to continue on trial ? 

6. Are any to be elected as elders? 

7. Have any of the preachers died? 

8. Who are the presiding elders ? 

9. Who gives himself up to travel ? 

10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, 
and partly for making up the allowances of the travelling preach- 
ers? Has reckoning been made with them ? Have they received 
their dues ? 

11. When and where shall our next conference he held? 

12. Are the elders ordained ? 

13. In what circuits are the preachers stationed this year? 

14. Is there any thing more to do? 

15. Has the conference appointed the districts in their circuit, 
for the purpose of holding the election for the members of the 
General conference ? 

16. Is all that has been transacted, entered in the protocol? 

SECTION THIRD. 
OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the bishops to be constituted? 

Ans. The General conference shall elect them by the majority 
of the votes of the elders, who were elected to the General con- 
ference: But the conference may still be at liberty to retain the 
bishops yet other four years. The newly elected, however, as 
well as the bishops retained, must be capable of travelling the 
different circuits and of attending to the conferences, otherwise 
they cannot be elected. 

Qst. What are the duties of the bishops ? 

Ans. 1. To preside in our conferences. 

2. They have, in conjunction with the presiding elder, that 



126 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the 
travelling preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall 
not allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station 
more than three years successively, unless particular circum- 
stances require it, and then only with consent of all the 
bishops. 

3. The bishops point out the circuits, which are to be travelled 
by the presiding elders. 

4. They have also, in connexion with the presiding elders, 
power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- 
ant preachers, where they conceive it necessary, and also to 
receive and suspend preachers, as necessity may require, until 
the conference. 

5. They have to travel through the connexion at large, 
attend to the conferences, and oversee the spiritual concerns 
of the societies. 

6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rights of ordi- 
nation. 

7. When a bishop ceases to attend to the several conferences, 
and neglects to travel through the connexion at large, can he 
still exercise his episcopal office among us? No, unless it be 
that he were sick, and what the like circumstances more might 
be. 

8. If at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of 
death, suspension or other cause, our communion should be 
without a bishop ; how is this want to be relieved ? The elder, 
who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in 
the absence of the bishops, shall perform the duties of a bishop 
during the sitting of the conference; he shall also 'attend the 
other conference, and take his seat with the president there 
elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then 
sitting; and the president there elected, shall also in turn, and 
in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each 
conference may know, and be acquainted with the proceed- 
ings of the other, and that love and communion be maintained 
&c. until the next General conference, who are then to elect 
bishops anew. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of 
every conference. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



I27 



SECTION FOURTH. 
OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How are the presiding elders to be elected? 

Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the 
elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with 
the consent of the conference, elect them for four years. 

Qst. What are the duties of a presiding elder ? 

Ans. 1. To travel through the district appointed him of the 
bishops, and preach as often as he can. 

2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers 
in his district, and see that they conduct themselves agreeably 
to the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's supper, and 
hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters 
and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether 
the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particularly 
whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- 
day; and where there are more of them, to change them at times, 
where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort them, 
that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness 
in their societies. 

4. He can also change the travelling preacher in his district, 
but he must first consult a bishop; he can further receive or 
suspend preachers till the conference. 

5. He shall give the bishop notice of the condition of his dis- 
trict; and see that the travelling preachers obtain a proportioned 
part of their support quarter^, by giving them their allowance 
out of the money they may have collected in their districts; a 
single man, however, shall not be allowed more than eighty 
dollars, and a married man one hundred and sixty dollars, annu- 
ally. Should the collection of one or the other district be insuf- 
ficient, then it shall be left to a committee, appointed by the 
conference, who, in their discretion, shall make up the deficiency 
out of other collections made. But a preacher stationed in a 
town must be supported by the congregation he attends. 

6. Should it so happen, that the socity at a time should be 
without a bishop, then the presiding elders shall, each of them, 
have special charge of the societies in their respective districts, 



128 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



that all may be kept in love and earnest together, and that they 
give each other all necessary information of the state of their 
districts. And should it also happen, that one or the other dis- 
trict should be without a presiding elder, what shall then be 
done? Information thereof shall immediately be given to the 
bishop, who shall appoint one of the elders in the district, where 
it can be done, to act till the conference. And in case there 
should be no bishop, then the next or nearest presiding elder 
shall appoint one, if he himself cannot take charge of the district. 

SECTION FIFTH. 

OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION, AND DUTY. 
Qst. How is an elder constituted ? 

Ans. After a probation of two years, he may be presented 
before the yearly conference and ordained of the bishops by lay- 
ing on of their hands: provided the conference be convinced and 
fully satisfied, that the contents of the 6, 7, 8 & 9th verses of 
St. Paul to Titus in the first chapter, are found to be in and with 
him. These verses shall be read to every one, who is ordained, 
at his ordination. 

1. What are the duties of an elder? To preach as often as he 
can and to babtize ; to perform the office of matrimony, and assist 
the presiding elder to administer the ford's supper; but when 
the presiding elder Cannot attend, then one or two elders shall 
perform this duty; he shall also perform all parts of divine wor- 
ship; -endeavor to establish and hold classmeetings, and assist in 
electing the leaders. 

2. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly for the 
travelling preachers and for the poor; to take specification or 
catalogue thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when 
there is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 
ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all 
things be done in an orderly manner. 

3. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer wan^ 
himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher come 
to, he shall make the collection and in like manner take a cata 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to 
the conference, for the support of needy preachers, who are poor 
and who preach amongst poor people. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



I29 



4. Should a travelling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder 
of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- 
ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary from the time he 
may have travelled during the year. 

5. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- 
sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support 
in proportion to the time they may be employed, by making a 
collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district 
though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to travelling 
preachers. 

SECTION SIXTH. 
OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR DUTY. 

QST. ,How is a preacher to be received? 
Ans. 1. By the yearly conference. 

2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the 
presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the 
place of a presiding elder at a yearly or great meeting, until 
the next sitting of the conference. No one will be admitted 
otherwise, than on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may 
either be admitted or rejected, without doing him any wrong, 
otherwise it would be no trial at all. 

No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher 
in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation 
of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of 
some trustworthy persons, who are known as such to the con- 
ference, or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference 
may take him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time 
of the conference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him 
license to preach until the next annual conference in his dis- 
trict. 

4. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined 
by the conference and the following questions put to him: 

Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, 
and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? 

9 



130 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed 
abroad in your soul by the holy spirit? 
Do you follow after holiness ? 

Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that 
therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation? 

What foundation have you for such belief? 

What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the 
gospel ? i 

What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justification, 
sanctification and redemption ? 

Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the 
world? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your bretheren? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as 
x the brethren may think it fit or expedient ? 

Are you willing as much as in your power, to assist in uphold- 
ing the itinerant plan, and support the same as much as possible? 

QsT. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, 
and establish class meetings; to converse with the members on 
the situation or condition of thek souls, and seek to administer 
relief, strengthen and direct those who are afflicted and labour 
under temptations, to animate the indolent or slothful, and en- 
deavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in 
grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never to omit to 
visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce and con- 
firm the doctrines he delivers by a well ordered exemplary life. 

QsT. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- 
sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto 
be Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- 
verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; 
demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 

2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favor- 
able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, 
consistent with truth, will bear. 

Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



3. L,et your business be to save as many souls as possible; 
to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who 
need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but 
as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ 
your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and 
visiting from house to house; in instructing and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until 
our Lord cometh. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY 
ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a bishop, a presiding elder 
or preacher is under report of being guilty of some crime for- 
bidden in the word of God, as an unchristian practice, sufficient 
for excommunication ? 

Ans. When a bishop is accused of immoral conduct, how 
shall he be dealt with? When charges happen to be made, 
which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of a 
presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, 
to enquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; 
but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation 
without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is 
justly accused they shall take down their proceedings in writing, 
and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a 
time and place where the accusers and the accused shall be 
present to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two 
presiding elders and three elders. If he is found guilty, he shall 
hold his peace till the yearly conference, where the presiding 
elder and elders shall again examine and try the same; and 
if found guilty again, he shall be suspended from office. 

Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is charged with immoral 
conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. Where charges happen to be brought against a presiding 
elder, which are prejudicial to the gospel, it shall be the duty of 
the next or nearest elder and a preacher to inquire into and 
examine them, and if the accused appear to be guilty, they shall 
take down their proceedings in writing and send him, the accused, 
a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the accusers 



132 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



with the accused shall meet and be present to each other. And 
in the absence of the bishop, another presiding elder and two 
elders shall be called, who shall examine the charges, and if he 
is found guilty, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where 
he shall be accountable. 

Qst. 3. When an elder, a preacher or an exhorter is charged 
with immoral conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or leader and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, 
the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each 
other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elders, 
three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if 
he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where 
he shall be accountable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? 

Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire 
to become a member of our society, then the preacher present 
shall put to him the following question : 

Have you experienced pardon of your sins and are you now 
determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? 

If the person answers this question in the affirmative, and no 
objection by any person on account of his moral conduct, then 
the preacher shall give him the hand, and he shall henceforth 
be esteemed a full member of our society; but so long as he is 
not able truly to answer the above question in the affirmative, 
shall he not be considered a full member, but only a seeker, and 
as long as he remains a seeker, he has no vote in the society. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the hoh T word of 
God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling to the end, that he may be enabled to flee 
from the eternal wrath to come. 

Every member should endeavour to walk closely and lead a good 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



133 



life; be diligent in prayer, particularly in private; and, for his 
own edification, to be present and attend, when practicable, at 
at all meetings, both public worship and private prayer meet- 
ings. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk closely, as in the presence of 
God; also accustom himself to a close communication with God in 
all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow being, 
but practice love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and 
endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. 

Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in 
the wordof God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glor} 7 of God. 

Every member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a 
Christian to live in peace— particularly to the higher or ruling 
powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall 
establish one or more classmeetings, where a majority of the 
members may conceive it necessary; and the members, when 
practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold 
prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence 
of God, and promote the love to good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class the leaders should be elected in the presence 
of the preacher, and their duty shall be to appoint prayer 
meetings, and to commence and conclude them; it shall also 
be their duty to hold classmeetings at all times, to exhort the 
members and preserve them in love, and to look well to their 
own conduct. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethren or 
sisters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone: If he 
hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear 
thee j then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of 
two or three witnesses every word may be established. And 
if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church: but 



134 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a 
heathen man and a publican. 

On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- 
ing the payment of debts or other causes, which cannot be 
settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the 
oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, 
shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall 
recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting 
of one arbiter to be chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen 
by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the 
third: the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 
ing, and apply to the presidiag elder for a second arbitration, and 
if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second 
arbitration ; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the 
majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to 
abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. 
And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt 
or other disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- 
mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of 
the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, 
before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, excepting 
the case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at 
law, as executors or administrators. 

If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such- 
member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case 
such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicly 
excluded from the congregation. 

SECION NINTH. 

IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. 

Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally 
prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. 

Should some be found in our society, or others desire to be 
admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue 
to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- 
ally manumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the 



DISCIPLINE OF 1829. 



135 



state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- 
ence, to be by them specified, what length of time such slave 
shall serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for 
him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in 
no case shall a memher of our society be permitted to sell a slave. 

SETCION TENTH. 

Qst. 1. How and in what manner shall the bishops and 
preachers be provided for, and how shall the necessary means be 
collected ? 

Ans. A collection shall annually be lifted for the bishops, at 
every preaching place throughout our whole society, the preach- 
ers shall pay over this collection to their respective presiding 
elders at the annual conference and the presiding elders shall 
give an account thereof to their respective annual conferences, 
out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; pro- 
vided, that one who has a family does not receive more than $160 
and his travelling expenses, and if without a family, $80 and his 
travelling expenses. 

2d. The preachers in towns or cities who stand under the 
direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive 
their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but 
it is their duty to give an account to the annual conference, and 
limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, 
and if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the 
annual conference, to be applied for the benefit of the travelling 
preachers. 

3d. For the support of the travelling preachers the presiding 
elder and preachers shall appoint on each circuit a Stewart, and 
in each class an assistant Stewart, to make quarterly collections 
in money or produce, which produce to be valued what it may 
be worth between man and man, and an account kept thereof, and 
to be proportionably distributed among the travelling preachers. 
All assistant Stewarts will submit their accounts to the Stewart 
of the circuit and settle with him quarterly; the circuit Stewarts 
will submit their accounts to the presiding elder at the quarterly 
meeting and the presiding elder will submit his account to the 
annual conference, in order to show what each travelling preacher 
has received, that order and equality be observed. The annual 
salary of a travel- 



DOCTRINE 

AND 

DISCIPLINE 

OP THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



HARRISBURG, PA. 

PRINTED BY J. & F. WYETH. 
1833. 



137 



ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 



In the century last past it pleased the Lord, our God, to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world who should raise 
up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the 
gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans of 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
hut seldom, an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otter-bein, a Boehm, and a 
Guething, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labor 
in his neglected vineyard, and call, amongst the Germans in 
America, sinners to repentance. These men obeyed the call 
of their Lord and Master; their labours were blessed; they estab- 
lished in many places excellent societies, and led many a precious 
soul to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself 
more and more, so that they found it necessary to look about 
for more fellow labourers in the vineyard; for the harvest was 
great, and the labourers but few. The Lord called others, who 
were willing to devote their strength to his service; such, then, 
were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, as fellow 
labourers. 

The number of members of the society, in the different parts 
of the country, continued from time to time to increase, and the 
gracious work spread itself through the states of Pennsylvania, 
Maryland and Virginia. Great meetings were appointed and 
held annually several times; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present, represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavours to save souls. At one 
of these conversations, it was resolved to hold a conference of all 
the preachers in order to take into consideration, how, and in 
what manner they might be most useful. 

The first conference was accordingly held in Baltimore, in the 
year 1789. — There were present: 

139 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



William Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Boehm, John Ernst, 

George A. Guething, Henry Weidener, 
Christian Newcomer. 

The second conference was held in York county, in Paradise 
township, at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 1791, 
where there were present the following persons, viz. 

William Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Boehm, John G. Pfrimmer 

George A. Guething, John Neidig, 

Christian Newcomer, Benedict Sander, 

Adam Lehman. 

And after mature deliberation, how they might labour most 
usefully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such 
as fellow labourers, of whom they had cause to believe that they 
had experienced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time the number of members continued to increase 
and the preachers were obliged to appoint an annual conference, 
in order to unite themselves more closely, and labour more use- 
fully to one common good : for some were Presbyterians, or 
church Reformed, some were Lutherians, others Mennonites, and 
yet others were Methodists. They therefore appointed a confer- 
ence to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, 
Maryland, at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. There were 
present as follows: 

William Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

George A. Guething, John Hershey, 

Christian Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, 

Abraham Dracksel, Dietrick Aurauf, 
John G. Pfrimmer. 

There they united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of "The United Brethren in Christ;" and elected William 
Otterbein & Martin Boehm, as superintendants or bishops and 
agreed that each of them should be at liberty to baptize in such 
manner, as should best accord with his conviction. 

From this time the society increasing still more, preachers 
were appointed who traveled continually (because the number of 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



HI 



preaching places could in no other wise be attended to;) and 
the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. 
It became necessary to appoint a conference in the state of Ohio, 
because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, who 
laboured in those states, to travel such a distance annually to the 
conference. 

In the mean time brothers Boehm and Guething died, and 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected 
(because infirmity and age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer,) who should take charge of the society and preserve 
discipline and order; for at a conference formly held, it was re- 
solved that whenever one of the bishops die, another should be 
elected in his place — Therefore brother Christian Newcomer was 
elected as bishop, to take charge of the superintendance of the 
society. 

The want of a discipline in the society has long since been 
deeply felt; and partial attempts thereto having at different times 
been made, it was resolved at the conference held in the state of 
Ohio, that a general conference should be held, who should take 
upon themselves to complete the same, so as to accord with the 
word of God. The members of this conference were to be elected 
from amongst the preachers in the different parts of the country, 
by a majority of the votes of the members of the society; and 
there were present at the conference, that were duly elected, the 
following preachers, namely; Christian Newcomer, Abraham 
Hiestand, Andrew Zeller, Daniel Treyer, George Benedum, Abra- 
ham Tracksel, Christian Berger, Abraham Meyer, John Schneider, 
Henry Kumler, Henry G. Spayth, Isaac Nighswander, Christian 
Krum and Jacob Baulus. 

These met on the 6th of June 1815, near Mount Pleasant, 
Westmoreland county, Pennsylvania. Where they after mature 
deliberation, presented to their brethren, the following doctrine 
and discipline with the sincere desire that these doctrines and 
rules, with the word of God, should be observed. God is a God 
of order, but where there is no order nor church discipline the 
spirit of love and charity will soon be lost. 

Therefore, brethren, we beseech you follow the example of our 
Ivord. As it is written, be kindly affectionate one to another 
with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the 
mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon him 
the form of a servant, humbled himself & became obedient unto 



142 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



death, even the death of the cross, that by his grace we may sub- 
mit ourselves one to another in the fear of God. He who will 
not submit, is in want of humble love; Jesus said, whosoever 
will be chief among you, let him be your servant. By this shall 
all men know that ye are my disciples, if you have love one to 
another, and whoso loveth not, abideth in death. Let us walk 
in newness of life, that the prayer of our Lord may be answered 
in us; that we may be one in him, and that he may give us the 
glory, which he gave to his disciples, that we may be one even 
as he and the Father. Therefore beloved brethren, let us strive 
to be like-minded, having the same love, being of one accord, of 
one mind, let no one speak or think evil of his brother, but pray 
God that he may grant us his spirit, and an earnest desire to lead 
a truly devoted life, to the honor and glory of his holy name. 
Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 
THE CONFESSION OF FAITH OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, 
that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the holy Ghost equal in essence or being 
with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the 
earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, & 
furthermore sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate by the power of the holy Ghost in the 
virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the saviour and 
mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus 
suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again 
on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right 
hand of God to intercede for us; and that he shall come again 
at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the father and the son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



143 



We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new Testaments, is 
the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our 
salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge 
and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their 
only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, 
true repentance, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, 
no one can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We believe that the ordinances, namely: baptism and the re- 
membrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, 
are to be in use and practised by all Christian societies: and that 
it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to 
practice them; but the manner in which ought always to be 
left to the judgment and understanding of every individual. 
So also the example of washing the feet is left to the judgment 
of every one to practice or not; but it is not becoming any of our 
preachers to traduce any of his brethren whose judgment and 
understanding in this respect are different from his own, either 
in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty 
in this respect shall be accounted a traducer of his brethren and 
shall therefor be answerable to the annual conference. 

SECTION SECOND. 

OF THE GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner and order are the transactions 
of the conferences to be considered? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these 
occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- 
son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Qst. How and in what manner are the members of the 
general Conference elected ? 

Ans. It shall be the duty of each annual conference, preceding 
the general conference, to nominate not less than four elders, 
(who have stood in that capacity for a period of two years at 
least,) as candidates; two of which number shall be elected by 
the brethren within the bounds of each conference. And for the 
better regulation, it shall be the duty of the said conferences ( at 



144 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



the same time ) to nominate and elect two individuals, to whom 
the several election accounts, as taken in each society, shall be 
sent by the class leaders, or preachers, whose duty it shall be 
immediately after the annual conference, to hand each class a 
list of the candidates thus nominated for election; moreover, 
when all the returns are received by the individuals thus 
appointed, it shall be their duty in the presence of a third indi- 
vidual, to open and count all the votes, after which the two candi- 
dates who may have the majority, shall receive immediate 
information of their election, in writing, from the individuals as 
above appointed. Should any two or more of the candidates 
have an equal number of votes, the individuals thus appointed, 
shall determine by lot who or which of them is elected. 

N. B. The votes shall be taken by anexhorter, leader, orsteward. 

Qst. How often are the General conferences to be held. 

Ans. Every four years. 

Qst. Has the General conference any other power, which 
the Annual conference has not ? 

Ans. The General conference has the power alone to elect one 
or more Bishops, from among the elders for a period of four 
years, furthermore to adopt such rules as may be necessary for 
the better interest of the society in general. Yet, nothing shall 
• be done by the said conference, which would in any wise affect 
or change the article of faith, neither the spirit, intent, or mean- 
ing of the rules or discipline as they now stand. The General 
conference has to determine the districts and bounds of the yearly 
conferences. 

Qst. Who are the members of the yearly conference ? 

Ans. All the elders and licentiate preachers, who are for the 
time being in the district where the conference is held; but when 
such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the elders 
only shall determine the same by their vote. 

Qst. In what manner and order are the transactions of a con- 
ference to be conducted ? 

Ans. i. A portion of scripture shall be read at the opening of 
the conference, also singing and prayer, the latter of which shall 
be performed during the sitting and adjournment of the same. 

2. The conference also elect two secretaries, one for the ger- 
man and one for the english records, wherever it may be con- 
sidered necessary. 

3. The preachers will be examined, what their deportment 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



145 



towards their fellow beings is, whether their conduct in life be 
blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible to 
promote the kingdom of God. 

4. Have any of the preachers died in the last year? 

5. Who are the candidates for the Ministery ? 

6. What preachers are yet to continue on trial. 

7. Are any to be ordained to the office of an elder ? 

8. Who is willing to travel the ensuing year without reserve ? 

9. Who are the presiding elders ? 

10. What has been collected, partly for contingent expenses, 
and partly for making up the allowances of the traveling preach- 
ers? Has reckoning been made with them? have they received 
their dues ? 

11. When and where shall our next conference he held ? 

12. In what circuits are the different preachers placed? 

13. Is there any thing more to do? 

14. Is all that has been transacted entered upon record? 

SECTION THIRD. 
OF THE ELECTION OF THE BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the Bishops to be elected? 

Ans. The General conference shall elect them by a majority 
of votes, yet the conference may at their option retain the former 
Bishop or Bishops, yet other four years. The newly elected, 
however, as those retained, must be capable of attending the 
conferences appointed them, otherwise they cannot be elected. 

Qst. What are the duties of the Bishops ? 

Ans. 1. To preside in our conferences- 

2. They have, in conjunction with the presiding elder that 
may be present at the conference, to fix the appointments of the 
traveling preachers for the several circuits, provided they shall 
not allow any itinerant preachers to remain in the same station 
more than three years successively, unless particular circum- 
stances require it, and then only with the consent of the con- 
ference. 

3. The bishops point out the circuits which are to be traveled 
by the presiding elders. 

4. They have also, in connection with the presiding elders, 

power, in the intervals of the conferences, to change the itiner- 

10 



146 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



ant preachers where they conceive it necessary, and also receive 
and suspend preachers as necessity may require, until the ensu- 
ing conference. 

5. They have to attend the conferences, and oversee the spirit- 
ual concerns of the societies. 

6. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordi- 
nation. 

7. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several con- 
ferences committed to his charge, can he be suffered to retain his 
office? No, unless it be through sickness or some other unavoid- 
able circumstance. 

8. If at any time, it should so happen, that by reason of 
death, suspension or other cause, our society should be with- 
out a bishop; how is this want to be relieved? The elder, 
who shall have been elected to preside at the conference, in 
the absence of the bishop, shall perform the duties of a bishop 
during the sitting of the conference; he shall also attend the 
other conference, and take his seat with the president there 
elected, to act in conjunction with him at the conference then 
sitting; and the president there elected shall also in turn and 
in like manner attend to the other conference: so that each 
conference may know and be acquainted with the proceed- 
ings of the others, and that love and communion be maintained 
&c. until the next general conference when and where, one or 
more Bishops shall be elected. 

9. It shall be the duty of the bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at the close of 
every conference. 

SECTION FOURTH. 
OF THE PRESIDING ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How are the presiding elders elected ? 

Ans. The bishops shall propose to the conference some of the 
elders, who have finished their time of probation; and with 
the consent of the conference, elect them for one year. 

Qst. What are the duties of a presiding elder. 

Ans. 1. To travel through the district appointed him by the 
bishops, and preach as often as he can. 

2. He has to take charge of the traveling and local preachers 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



147 



in his district and see that they conduct themselves agreeably 
to the gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and great meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lords supper, and 
hold quarterly meeting conferences with the preachers, exhorters 
and leaders; he shall further inquire into, and examine whether 
the traveling and local preachers do their duty, particularly 
whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every Sun- 
day: and where there are more of them, to changevthem at times, 
where the most benefit is likely to result, and to exhort them, 
that they maintain discipline and order and love and seriousness 
in the societies. 

4. He can also change the traveling preacher in his district, 
he can further receive and suspend preachers till the conference. 

5. And should it so happen that a district should be without 
a presiding elder, information thereof shall immediately be given 
to the Bishop, who will appoint an elder in the district, to act as 
presiding elder till conference, and in the absence of the presid- 
ing elder, at any quarterly meeting, or conference, an elder 
present shall perform the duty of the presiding elder. 

SECTION FIFTH. 
OF THE ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How is an elder constituted f 

Ans. 1. After a probation of three years, a preacher may be 
presented to the yearly conference, for consideration, and if on 
examination by the conference, he should be chosen to be an 
elder, he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a 
Bishop and two elders. 

2. What is the duty of an elder? — To preach as often as he 
can and to baptize; and assist the presiding elder to administer 
the Tord's supper; but when the presiding elder cannot attend, 
then one or two elders shall perform this duty; he shall also 
perform all parts of divine worship; endeavour to establish and 
hold class meetings, and assist in electing the leaders. 

3. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly, for the 
traveling preachers and for the poor; to take specification 
thereof, signed by the leader, at each place, and when there 
is no leader present, to have it signed by some other mem- 



148 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



ber, in order to account with the presiding elder, so that all 
things be done in an orderly manner. 

4. Where a local elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no traveling preacher comes 
to, he shall make a collection and in like manner take a cata- 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the presiding elder or to 
the conference, for the support of needy preachers who preach 
amongst poor people. 

5. Should a traveling preacher or elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the presiding elder 
of his intention by writing ; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he shall be accountable therefor to the next con- 
ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary for the time he 
may have traveled during the year. 

6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- 
sonable and just that the elders should provide for their support 
in proportion to the time they may be employed, and by making 
a collection for their benefit amongst the societies in their district, 
though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to traveling 
preachers. 

SECTION SIXTH. 

OF THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS AND THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How is a preacher to be received? 
Ans. 1. By the yearly conference. 

2. In the interval of the conference, by the bishop, or the 
presiding elder of the district, or an elder, who supplies the 
place of a presiding elder at a great meeting, until the next sit- 
ting of the conference. No one will be admitted otherwise, than 
on trial; and one who is taken on trial, may either be admitted 
or rejected, without doing him any wrong, otherwise it would be 
no trial. 

3 . No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher 
in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation 
of his standing and behaviour from his own society, or of 
some trust- worthy persons, who are known as such to the con- 
ference or to the presiding elder. In such case the conference 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



149 



may take him on trial for one year, or in the intermediate time 
of the conference, the bishop or presiding elder may give him 
licence to preach nntil the next annual conference in his dis- 
trict. 

4. Every person proposed as a preacher shall be examined 
by the conference and the following questions put to him: 

Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, 
and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? 

Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed 
abroad in your soul by the holy spirit? 

Do you follow after holiness ? 

Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that 
therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation ? 
What foundation have you for such belief? 

What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the 
gospel ? What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of jus- 
tification, sanctification, and redemption? 

Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the 
world ? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace as 
the brethren may think it expedient. 

Are you willing as much as in your power to assist in uphold- 
ing the itinerant plan and support the same as much as possible. 

Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher. 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers, 
and establish class meetings; to converse with the members on 
the situation or condition of their souls, and seek to administer 
relief, strengthen and direct those -that are afflicted and labour 
under temptations, to animate the indolent, and endeavor as 
much as possible to edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and 
in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never omit to visit the sick, 
but on all occasions to strive to enforce and confirm the doctrines 
he delivers by a well ordered and exemplary life. 

Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher. 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with unneces- 
sary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let your motto 
be, Holiness to the Lord. — Avoid all lightness and jesting. Con- 
verse sparingly, and conduct yourself prudently with women; 
demean yourself in all respects as a true Christian. 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favour- 
able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, 
consistent with truth, will admit. 

Speak evil of no one; whatsoever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 

3. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible; 
to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who 
need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but 
as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ 
your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching, and 
visiting from house to house; in instruction and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until 
our Lord cometh. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

OF THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY 
ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. I. What shall be done, when a bishop, presiding elder, 
or preacher is reported of being guilty of some crime forbidden 
in the word of God. 

Ans. When a bishop is thus accused, it shall be the duty of a 
presiding elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, 
to inquire into and examine whether they are found in truth; 
but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation 
without two or three witnesses. If it then appears that he is 
justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, 
and send a copy thereof to the bishop accused, and appoint a 
time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present 
to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two presiding elders 
and three elders. — If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace 
till the yearly conference, where the presiding elder and elders 
shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, 
he shall be suspended from office. 

Qst. 2. When a presiding elder is thus accused. 

Ans. It shall be the duty of the next or nearest elder and a 
preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused 
appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a 
time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet 
and be present to each other. And in the absence of the bishop, 
another presiding elder and two elders shall be called who shall 
examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his 
peace till the conference, where he shall be accountable. 

Qst. 3. When an elder or preacher is charged with immoral 
conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter or a leader and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, 
the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each 
other. And, in the absence of the bishop or presiding elder, 
three elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, and if 
he be convicted, he shall hold his peace till the conference, where 
he shall be accountable. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

OF THE MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? 

Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire 
to become a member of our society, then the preacher present 
shall put to him the following question; 

Have you experienced the pardon of your sins and are you 
now determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? 

If the person answers the question in the affirmative, and no 
objection made by any member, on account of his, or her, moral 
conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as 
members of our society, and with consent of the person, the 
preacher will record his or her name on the class book, but so long 
as any member can not answer the above question in the affirma- 
tive, such will have no vote in the society. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy word of 
God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled to flee 
from the wrath to come. 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Every member should endeavour to lead a good life; be diligent 
in prayer, particularl} 7 in private; and, for his own edification, 
to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, 
both public worship and prayer meetings. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk as in the presence of God; 
also accustom himself to a close communication with God in 
all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow beings, 
but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and 
endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. 

Every member shall keep the Sabbath day ho^, as required in 
the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of 
God. 

Every member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Christian 
to live in peace — particularly to the higher or ruling powers, 
every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Amongst the members of the society the preachers shall 
establish one or more class-meetings, and the members, when 
practicable, shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold 
prayer meetings, in order to edify themselves in the presence 
of God, and promote the love of good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every class the leader should be elected in presence 
cf the preacher, and it is his duty to appoint prayer and class 
meetings, to commence and conclude the same; the freedom of 
our prayer and class meetings shall extend to any sincere and 
well disposed person or persons, who may desire to attend them, 
although such persons be not members of our society. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethren or 
sisters, correct the faults first between thee and him alone : If he 
hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear 
thee, the?i take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of 
two or three witnesses every word may be established. And 
if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



153 



if lie neglect to hear the church; let him be unto thee as a 
Heathen man and a Publican. 

On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- 
ing the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be 
settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the 
oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, 
shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall 
recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting 
of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen 
by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the 
third; the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 
ing, and apply to the presiding elder for a second arbitration, and 
if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second 
arbitration ; in which case each party shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the 
majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to 
abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. 
And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt 
or other disputes to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- 
mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of 
the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, 
before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except the 
case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, 
as executors or administrators, or when a member is in danger 
of suffering an unexpected loss of property, which will allow 
him immediate legal process. 

If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such 
member shall likewise be publicly reprimanded, and in case 
such member shall not humble, the same shall be publicly 
excluded from the congregation. 

SECTION NINTH. 

IN RESPECT TO SLAVERY. 

Resolved, that all slavery in every sense of the word be totally 
prohibited and in no way tolerated in our community. 

Should some be found in our society, or others desire to be 
admitted as members, who hold slaves, they can neither continue 



154 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



to be members, or be admitted as such, without they do person- 
ally manumit or set free such slaves wherever the law of the 
state shall permit it, or submit the case to the quarterly confer- 
ence, to be by them specified what length of time such slave 
shall serve his master or other person, until the amount paid for 
him, or for raising him, be compensated to his master. But in no 
case shall a member of our society be permitted to sell a slave. 

SECTION TENTH. 

Qst. i. How and in what manner shall the bishops and 
preachers be provided for and how shall the necessary means be 
collected ? 

Ans. A collection shall annually be lifted for the bishops, 
at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the 
preachers shall pay over this collection to their respective pre- 
siding elders at the annual conference, and the presiding elders 
shall give an account thereof to their respective annual confer- 
ences; out of this collection the bishops shall receive their salary; 
provided, that one who has a family does not receive more than 
$160 and his traveling expenses, and if without a family, |8o and 
his traveling expenses. 

2d. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the 
direction of the conference with the itinerant preachers, receive 
their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but 
it is their duty to give an account to the annual conference, and 
limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, 
and if their should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the 
annual conference, to be applied for the benefit of the traveling 
preachers. 

3d. For the support of the traveling preachers the presiding 
elder and preachers shall appoint in each class a Stewart, to 
make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce 
to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an 
account kept thereof, and proportionably distributed among the 
traveling preachers. All stewards will submit their accounts 
to the presiding elder at the quarterly meeting, and the presiding 
elder will submit his account to the annual conference, in order 
to show what each traveling preacher has received, that order 
and equality be observed. The annual salary of a traveling 
preacher or traveling presiding elder is also limited like the 



discipline of 1833. 



155 



salary of the bishops to $160, if with a family, or $80, if without 
family, and traveling expenses. 

4. Yet when a traveling- preacher has a family of children, the 
yearly conference of which he is a member, will in that case grant 
him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in their 
judgment will accord with the wants of said preacher's family. 

5. Should the collection of any one d strict be insufficient, 
then it shall be left to a committee appointed by the conference, 
who will as they may find it advisable, make up such deficiency, 
out of other collections made. 

6. Resolved, that the presiding elders shall receive pay only 
in proportion to the time they may actually have traveled. 

APPENDIX. 
OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known) of the 
evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful 
consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can 
stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the 
work of God, and the souls of our people. 

Qst. What can be done in order to a closer union with eachother? 

Ans. 1. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity 
of it. 

2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 

3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. Labour, in honour, each to prefer the other, before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart and church divisions. 

OF VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? 
Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
necessary in order to promote confidence and communion with 



156 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



God among us; further to wean us from the love of the world, 
and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage 
us to strive after and practice brotherly love, that no evil think- 
ing or judging of one another be found among us; and lastly 
that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 

2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the 
people on every occasion, both public and private, and exhort 
them to be diligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this be 
done, and that in sincerity, we shall upon the whole, be of little 
use, and our good shall be evil spoken of, therefore wherever we 
may be, we should guard against useless and idle conversation. 

Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to 
house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these 
solemn words of the apostle: 

" / charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall 
judge the quick and the dead at his appearing, preach the Word; 
be instant in season, and out of season; Reprove, rebuke, exhort \ 
with all long suffering.'" 

OF THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation? 

Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God and the 
souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are 
found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, 
and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray 
with them earnestly, yet simply and plainly, that they may learn 
to know their Creator & Redeemer in the days of their youth. 

THE FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 

2. After their names have been read aloud, the bishop or elder 
shall say unto the people present: 

3. Beloved Brethre?i in Christ ! Is there any among you, who 
know any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be 
ordained elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to that 
office, let him come forth in the name of God and show what the 
crime or impediment may be. 

4. If any crime or impediment be alleged, the bishop shall 
cease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party 
accused .shall be found clear of said crime. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1833. 



157 



5. If no accusation be alleged, the Bishop, or elder, shall read 
the following articles, to any and all who may be chosen for 
ordination. 

"For an elder must be blameless, as the Stewart of God, not 
self willed, not soon angry, not given to wine, no striker, not 
given to filthy lucre. 

"But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, 
holy, temperate: 

"Holding fast the faithful word as he had been taught, that he 
may be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince 
the gainsayers." 

Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry, to serve God in 
the church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy name? 

Ans. I trust with the help of God. 

Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures, old and new testa- 
ment? 

Ans. I do believe them: 

Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 
your own life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make 
yourself, as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of th 
flock of Christ? 

Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- 
ment over you is committed, following with a glad mind and 
will their godly admonitions? 

Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. 
Then prayer is made. 

After prayer the bishop and elder shall lay their hands upon 
the heads of every one of them, and say: 

' 4 Take authority to execute the office of an elder in the church 
of God. In the name of the Father, the Son and the Holy 
Ghost." Amen. 

Hereupon the bishop or elder shall deliver to every one of 
them the Holy Bible, saying: 

"Take authority to read and preach the word of God in the 
church of Christ" 

Then the Bishop or elder shall read from the 12th chapter of 
St. Luke, 35-38: 

Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and 
ye yourselves like unto men that wait for the Lord, when he 



158 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- 
eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those 
servants whom the L,ord when he cometh shall find watch- 
ing. Verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and 
make them sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve 
them. 

And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third 
watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. 

Then the bishop, or elder shall pray. After which the follow- 
ing benediction is pronounced. 

The Peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge 
of fesus Christ onr Lord. — Amen. 

THE FORM TO SOLEMNIZE MARRIAGE. 

ADDRESS. 

We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as man 
and wife. If any person present know any just cause or impedi- 
ment why these two persons should not be joined in marriage 
they will now speak or for ever hereafter hold their peace. 

If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister, say unto 
the man. 

N. N. Wilt thou have this woman M. M. to thy wedded wife, 
to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor 
and comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and ad- 
versity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long 
as ye both shall live ; If so, then answer yes. 

Then shall the Minister say unto the woman. 

M. M. Wilt thou have this man N. N. to thy wedded husband, 
to live together after God's ordinance, wilt thou love, honor 
and obey him, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in ad- 
versity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him so long as 
ye both shall live; If so, then answer yes. 

Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together and say. 

Those whom God hath joined together let no man put asunder. 
In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, 
I pronounce them man and wife, in the name of the Father, Son 
and Holy Ghost. — Amen. 



discipline op 1833. 



i59 



. OATH OF PURGATION. 

We, the United Brethren in Christ, Do believe, that the prac- 
tise of swearing, either by the Bible, or in the name of Almighty 
God, is, in our opinion, contrary to the word of our Eord Christ 
Jesus, who says, "swear not at all," and that the mode of testi- 
fying to the Truth, when thereto required so to do in a legal form, 
by way of affirmation, is on us solemnly, conscienciously and 
fully binding before God and man to tell the truth, the whole 
truth & nothing but the truth. 

HOW TO RECEIVE AN EXHORTER. 

Any Brother desiring license to exhort, will first make it known 
to the class leader, and the class leader will procure a recommen- 
dation from the class of which the applicant is a member at the 
time, upon which the presiding elder with the advice of the 
quarterly conference will license the brother. 

RESPECTING BOOK PRINTING. 

Resolved, that none of our members, either preachers or lay- 
men, shall be permitted to become the author of a Doctrinal Book, 
or Pamphlet, in a printed form, without the approbation of the 
annual conference or a select comniittee N by them chosen. 

THE VENDING AND DISTILLATION OF ARDENT SPIRITS 

Should any Exhorter, Preacher, or Elder, from and after the 
next annual conferences in 1834, be engaged in the distillation or 
vending of ardent spirits, he shall for the first and second offence be 
accountable to the quarterly or yearly conference, of which he is a 
member; said conferences will in meekness admonish the offending 
brother to desist from the distillation or vending of ardent spirits, 
as the case may be; should these friendly admonitions fail, and the 
party continue to act in the same and it be proven tothesatisfaction 
of the yearly conference, if a preacher or elder, and if an exhorter 
proven before a quarterly conference, such preacher, elder or ex- 
horter, will for the time not be considered a member of this 
church. 

FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. 

Whereas it is made the duty of elders and preachers to form 
and hold class meetings, which should always be done in great 
moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any 



l6o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

means or measure to hinder or prevent an elder or preacher in the 
discharge of this their duty, a member acting to the contrary 
must be accountable to the next quarterly conference. 

RESPECTING FREE-MASONRY. 

Resolved, that Free-Masonry in every sense of the word, be 
totally discountenanced, and in no wise tolerated in our society, 
should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, or 
join as a member of Free-Masonry in any of their processions, 
or otherwise join the fraternity, he will by so doing be no longer 
a member of this church. 

RESPECTING PRESENTS. 

Every traveling preacher in our society shall yearly account 
to the conference for all presents he may have received on his 
circuit, to the amount of one dollar or more, for the use of him- 
self or family. And if the conference be convinced that any one 
circuit has given presents instead of collections, or that the 
preacher endeavoured to get such in the place of collections, in 
such case presents shall be considered as collections by the con- 
ference. But if on examination it should not so appear, then those 
preachers receiving presents shall hold them as their own, and 
in addition receive all the discipline allows them. 



THE END. 



discipline; of 1833. 161 



INDEX. 

page. 

Origin of the United Brethren in Christ 139 

The Confession of Faith 142 

Of the General and Yearly Conferences 143 

Of the election of the Bishops and their Duty 145 

Of the Presiding Elders, their election and Duty 146 

Of the Elders, their election, Ordination and Duty 147 

Of the method of receiving Preachers and their Duty 148 

Of the immoral conduct of Preachers, and how they are to be disposed of. 150 

Of the members in general 151 

In respect to Slavery 153 

Of the support of traveling Preachers 154 

Of the necessity of Union among ourselves 155 

Of Visiting from House to House 155 

Of the instruction of Children 156 

The form and manner of Ordaining Preachers 156 

The form to solemnize Marrriage 158 

Oath of Purgation 159 

How to receive an Exhorter 159 

Respecting Book Printing 159 

The vending and distillation of ardent Spirits 159 

Forming and Meeting Classes 159 

Respecting Free-Masonry 160 

Respecting Presents 160 



11 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



GENERAL CONFERENCE HELD JUNE, 14m 1833, AT GEO. & 
JONATHAN DRESBACH'S, PICKAWAY COUNTY OHIO. 

MEMBERS PRESENT. 
Henry Kumler, Bishop. 

Pennsylvania Conference. 
William Brown, Jacob Erb, 

Ezekiel Boring, James Niman, 

Jacob Snider, Frederick Gilbert. 

Virginia Conference 
John Dorcas, W. R. Rhinehart. 

Muskingum Conference 

Christian Knegey, 
John Echard, 

Sciota Conference. 

George Benedum, 
Daniel Davis, 
John Rnssel, 

Miami Conference. 

Fred. Bonebrach, 
A. S. Decker, 
Daniel Kiser, 

Indiana Conference. 

Josiah Davis, 
Aaron Former, 



G. H. Spayth, 
Adam Hetzel, 
S. C. Briggs. 

Jacob Baulus, 
Samuel Hiestand, 
John Coonts, 
William Hastings. 

Henry Kumler, Jr7 
John Federhof, 
S. Hofner, 
J. Sweaningen. 

John Denham, 
John McNamer, 
James Griffith. 



ORIGIN, 

CONSTITUTION, 

DOCTRINE 

AND 

DISCIPLINE, 

OF THE 

United Brethren in Christ 



CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO: 
PRINTED AT THE CONFERENCE OFFICE. 
1837. 



163 



ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 



In the century last past, it pleased the Lord our God, to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise 
up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the 
gospel of Christ crucified, in its purity. 

At this time the Lord in mercy remembered the Germans of 
America, who, living scattered in this extensive country, had 
but seldom an opportunity to hear the gospel of a crucified 
Saviour preached to them in their native language. 

Amongst others he raised up an Otterbein, a Boehni, and a 
Geeting, armed them with spirit, grace and strength, to labor 
in his neglected vineyard, and call, among the Germans in 
America, sinners to repentance. — These men obeyed the call of 
their Lord and Master; their labors were blessed; they established 
in many places, excellent societies and led many precious souls 
to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of action spread itself more and 
more, so that they found it necessary to look about for more 
fellow laborers, to engage in the vineyard of the Lord; for the 
harvest was great, and the laborers but few. The Lord called 
others, who were willing to devote their strength to his service; 
such, then, were accepted by one or the other of the preachers, 
as fellow laborers. 

The number of members in the society, in different parts of 
the country, continued to increase from time to time; and the 
gracious work of reformation, spread through the states of Penn- 
sylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Several great meetings were 
appointed, and held annually; when, on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present; represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavors to save souls. At one of 
these meetings, it was resolved to hold a conference with all the 
preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what 
manner they might be most useful. 

The first Conference was held in the City of Baltimore, Md. ; 
in the year of our Lord, 1789. The following preachers were 
present 

165 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Wm. Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Boehm, John Ernst, 

Geo. A. Geeting, Henry Weidner. 
Chr. Newcomer, 

The second Conference was held in York county.Pa., in Para- 
dise township; at the house of brother Spangler, in the year 
of our Lord 1791: — The following preachers were present: — 

Wm. Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Boehm, John Pfremmer, 

Geo. A. Geeting, John Neidig, 

Chr. Newcomer, Benedict Sander. 
Adam Lehman, 

After a mature deliberation, how they might labor most use- 
fully in the vineyard of the Lord; they again appointed such 
as fellow laborers, of whom they had cause to believe had experi- 
enced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time, the number of members continued to increase, 
and the preachers were obliged to appoint an annual Conference, 
in order to unite themselves more closely, and labor more success- 
fully in the vineyard of the Lord: for some were Presbyterians, or 
church Reformed; some were Lutherians, others Mennonites, and 
some few Methodists. They accordingly appointed a Conference, 
to be held the 25th of September, 1800, in Frederick county, 
Maryland; at the house of brother Frederick Kemp. — The 
following preachers were present: — 

Wm. Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

Geo. A. Geeting, John Hershey, 

Chr. Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, 

Abr'm Dracksel, Diet'k Auraue. 
John Pfremmer, 

There they united themselves into a society, which bears the 
name of "UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST;" and elected 
William Otterbein and Martin Boehm, as superintendants or 
bishops, and agreed that each of them should be at liberty, as 
to the mode and manner of baptism, and to perform it according 
to their own convictions. 

From this time, the society increasing still more and more, 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



167 



preachers were appointed to travel regularly, inasmuch as 
the number of preaching places could not otherwise be attended to; 
and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky: 
It then became necessary to appoint a Conference in the state of 
Ohio, because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers, 
who labored in those states, to travel, annually, such a great 
distance, to the Conference. 

In the mean time, brothers Boehm and Geeting died, and 
brother Otterbein desired, that another bishop should be elected, 
because infirmity and old age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer, who should take charge of the society and preserve 
Discipline and order. It was resolved at a former Conference, 
that whenever one of the bishops died, another should be elected 
in his place; — accordingly, brother Christian Newcomer was elected 
bishop, to take charge and superintend the concerns of the society. 

The want of a Discipline in the society, had long been deeply felt; 
and partial attempts having been made at different times ; it was 
resolved at the Conference held in the State of Ohio, that a General 
Conference be held, in order to accomplish the same, in a manner, 
not derogatory to the word of God. The members of this Confer- 
ence were to be elected from among the preachers, in the different 
parts of the country ; by a vote of the members throughout the 
society in general. The following brethren were duly elected: 

Chr. Newcomer, Daniel Treyer, 

Ab'RM. HlESTAND, GEO.BENEDUM, 

Andrew Zeleer, Ab'rm. Tracksee, 

Christian Berger, Henry G. Spayth, 

Abraham Meyer, I. Nighsw anger, 

John Schneider, Christian Krum, 

Henry Kumeer, & Jacob Bowees. 

The Conference convened on the 6th of June 1835, near Mount 
Pleasant, Westmoreland county, Pennsylvania. After a mature 
deliberation, they presented to their brethren, a Discipline, con- 
taining the doctrine and rules of the church ; desiring that they, 
together with the word of God, should be strictly observed. 

God is a God 01 order, but where there is no order nor church 
Discipline, the spirit of love and charity will soon be lost. 

Therefore, brethren, we beseech you to follow the example of 
our Lord. As it is written, be kindly affectionate one to another 
with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon himself the 
form of a servant, humbled himself and became obedient unto 
death, even the death of the cross, that by his grace we may submit 
ourselves one to another in the fear of God. — He who will not 
submit, is in want of humble love; Jesus said, whosoever will be 
chief among you, let him be your servant. By this shall all men 
know that ye are my disciples, if ye have love one to another, and 
whoso loveth not, abideth in death. Let us walk in newness of life, 
that the prayer of our Lord may be answered in us ; that we may 
be one in him, and that he may give us the glory, which he gave 
to his disciples, that we may be one, even as he and the Father are 
one. — Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to be like-minded, 
having the same love, being of one accord, of one mind; let no one 
speak or think evil of his brother, but pra}^ God that he ma}^ grant 
us his spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a truly devoted life, to 
the honor and glory of his holy name. Amen. 

CONSTITUTION OF THE CHURCH. 

WE as members of the Church of the UNITED BRETHREN 
IN CHRIST, in order to retain a perfect union, — accomplish the 
ends of justice and equity \ — insure ecclesiastical, as well as do?nestic 
tranquility ; provide for the com?no?i interest of the Church, — 
promote the general welfare of society, and to secure the blessi?igs 
of the gospel to owselves, our posterity, and our fellow men in 
general; do ordain and establish the following CONSTITUTION, 
for the Church aforesaid. 

ARTICLE I. 

Sec. i. — All ecclesiastical power herein granted, to make or 
reppeal any rule of Discipline, shall be vested in a General Con- 
ference, which shall consist of ministers chosen and elected by 
the members, in every Conference district, throughout the 
society. Nevertheless, nothing shall be done, so as to change 
the article of faith, or in anywise destroy the itinerant plan. 

Sec. 2. — No minister shall be considered eligible for election, 
until he has stood in the capacity as Elder, for the term of three 
years; having maintained a good moral character, during that 
time. Any Elder, receiving a transfer, from one Conference 
to another, shall not be considered eligible for election, undei a 
term of two years; and not then, without a sufficient recommen- 
dation from the Conference, of which he had been a member. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



169 



Sec. 3. — The number of delegates from each Conference Dis- 
trict, shall not exceed one, for every five hundred members. But 
should it. so happen, that a Conference would be formed in a 
territory, not having five hundred members within its District; 
that Conference, shall nevertheless, have one delegate to repre- 
sent its members in General Conference. 

Sec. 4. — If any vacancies should occur, through sickness or 
otherwise, after the election of delegates ; it shall be the duty of 
the Presiding Elder or Elders, immediately, to notify the next 
highest on the list of votes, that he is now a member, to repre- 
sent that District, in the ensuing General Conference. 

Sec. 5. — The Bishops shall upon all occasions, be considered 
members of the General Conference, to preside as the organs of 
that body, as in annual Conferences. Bishops shall be elected 
every four years, during the sitting of the General Conference, 
by the members of that body, from among the Elders throughout 
the Church; who may have stood in that capacity for a term, not 
less than six years. 

Sec. 6. — The General Conference shall be held once, every 
four years. At the adjournment of which, it shall be the duty 
of the same, to publish or cause to be published, (excepting such 
parts as may not be considered expedient,) all their proceedings, 
for the benefit of society in general. 

ARTICLE II. 

Sec. 1. — The members in each Conference District, shall solely 
have the privilege of choosing and electing the delegates for 
General Conference; which shall invariably de done, at least, 
three months previous to the sitting of the same. 

Sec. 2. — In the election of delegates for General Conference; it 
shall be the duty of each annual Conference, to appoint a committee 
of three, in their several Conference Districts, to receive and count 
the votes, and immediately apprize those who may have been 
elected. 

Sec. 3. — It shall also be the duty of the annual Conference, to 
furnish the Presiding Elders, with a list of all the Elders, eligi- 
ble for election: The Presiding Elders shall furnish each circuit 
preacher in charge; whose duty it shall be, to furnish each class- 
leader or steward throughout the circuit, with a copy of the same. 

Sec. 4. — It shall be the duty of each classleader or steward, to 
appoint a meeting of the members of each class; for the purpose of 



170 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



electing, by ballot or otherwise, one or more delegates to repre- 
sent them in General Conference. 

Sec. 5. — It shall also be the dnty of each classleader or steward, 
to sign, enclose and seal, each bill of election — hand it over to 
the preacher in charge; he again, to the Presiding Elder; whose 
dnty it shall be, to transmit the same, to the committee appointed 
by the annual Conference. 

Sec. 6. — The committee appointed to receive and count the 
votes, shall make a list of all the persons voted for, and the num- 
ber of votes for each. Should any two or more of the candidates, 
have an equal number of votes, the individuals thus appointed, 
shall determine by lot, who, or which of them are elected. They 
shall also forward the names of those elected, to the Conference 
Printing Establishment, for publication. 

ARTICLE III. 

Sec. 1. — Each annual Conference shall come fully under the 
jurisdiction of the General Conference; except, under such regu- 
lations as the General Conference may deem expedient, in relation 
to local matters, so as not to prove prejudicial to the interest of 
the whole society. 

Sec. 2. — The business of each annual Conference, shall strictly 
be done according to Discipline. 

Sec. 3. — Any annual Conference, acting in violation of the doings 
of General Conference, shall by impeachment, be tried by the same. 

Sec. 4.— No annual Conference, shall have the exclusive right, 
to form or admit any new Conference within the bounds of 
society, without the consent of the General Conference. 

Sec. 5. — All officers, whether Bishops, Presiding Elders, &c; 
shall, on impeachment, be dealt with according to Discipline, as 
other members, expelled or retained, as the case may require. 

ARTICLE IV. 

Sec. 1. — If at any time, after the passing of this Constitution, 
it should be contemplated either to alter or amend the same: It 
shall be the privilege of any member in society, to publish or 
cause to be published, such contemplation, at least three months, 
before the election of delegates to the General Conference. 

Sec. 2. — No General Conference, shall have the power to alter 
or amend, the foregoing Constitution, except it be, by a vote of 
two thirds of that body. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



171 



RESOLUTIONS. 

Inasmuch, as it is the indefeasible right of every man, to think 
and act for himself, in matters of faith and morality. This right 
not only being granted by the charter of his creation, but also, by 
the Discipline adopted for the better government of the Church 
of the United Brethren in Christ; be it resolved there-fore: — 

1st. That no rule be adopted by General Conference, so as to 
infringe upon the rights of any, as it relates to the mode and 
manner of baptism, the sacrament of the Lord's supper, or the 
washing of feet, &c. 

2d. Resolved, No rule or ordinance shall be passed in Gen- 
eral Conference, so as to deprive the local preachers of the 
eligibility of election, as delegates to the same. Nor yet, to 
deprive them of their legal vote in the annual Conferences, to 
which they severally belong. 

3d. Resolved, that the foregoing resolutions, shall neither be 
altered or appealed, without the unanimous consent of the whole 
Conference. 

Done in General Conference, by the unanimous consent of that 
body, this 1 ith day of May, in the year of our Lord, one thou- 
sand eight hundred and thirty-seven. In witness whereof, we 
have hereunto set our names. 

HENRY KUMEER, ) . , 

\ Bish'ps 

SAMUEE HIESTAND, ) 

JACOB ERB, 
JACOB WINTER, 
JACOB RHINEHART, 
JACOB J, GEOSSBRENNER, 
ADAM HETZEER, 
DAVID WEIMER, 
JOHN DORCAS, 
GEORGE HISKEY, 
JOHN COONS, 
WIEEIAM HANBY, 
JNO FETHERHOFF, 
WIEEIAM STUBBS, 
FRANCIS WHITCOM, 
JOHN EOPP, ' 
FREDERICK KENOYER, 
WIEEIAM DAVIS. 



172 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



CIRCULAR. 

To the members of the Church of the United Brethren in Christ, 
throughoid these United States. 

Dear brethren, by whose authority, we as a General Confer- 
ence, have been authorized to legislate, on matters pertaining to 
the government of our Church; and having long since been 
convinced, of the great necessity of a constitution, for the better 
regulation thereof; have by unanimous consent, framed and 
established the foregoing. We are well aware that we have tran- 
scended the bounds given us by our Discipline, which will be 
found in the Constitution; Article fourth, Sectio?i second: Declar- 
ing that the said Constitution, can neither be altered or amended, 
without a majority of two-thirds of a General Conference. If 
there had been a general notice given to the Church, previous to 
the election of delegates, that there would be a memorial offered 
to General Conference, prajdng them to adopt a constitution, and 
to ratify it, agreeable to Article fourth; Section second: then the 
General Conference would have had full power, to have done so. 
The object of this circular is, (feeling that the government of 
our Church is not as firm as it ought to be,) to give notice to our 
Church throughout the union, that we intend to present a mem- 
orial to the next General Conference, praying them to ratify the 
constitution now adopted, according to Article fourth; Section 
second: In testimon}^ of our ardent desire for the welfare of our 
Church, and the general spread of the gospel. 

Written by order of General Conference, Germantown, Ohio; 
May 12th 1837. 

Signed in behalf of the same, by 

William R. Rhinehart, Sec'ry. 

SECTION FIRST. 

THE CONFESSION OF FAITH. 

In the name of God we declare and confess before all men, 
that we believe in the only true God, the Father, Son and Holy 
Ghost; that these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the Hoi y Ghost equal in essence or being 
with both. That this triune God created the heavens and the 
earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and 
furthermore, sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



173 



We believe in Jesus Christ, that he is very God and man, that 
he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost in the 
Virgin Mary, and was born of her: that he is the Saviour and 
Mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace proffered in Jesus. That this Jesus 
suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again 
on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right 
hand of God, to intercede for us, and that he shall come again 
at the last day to judge the quick and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the Father and the Son, and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting. 

We believe, that the Holy Bible, old and new Testament, is 
the word of God; that it contains the only true way to our 
salvation; that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge 
and receive it with the influence of the spirit of God, as their 
only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, 
true repentance, forgiveness of sins and following after Christ, 
no one can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the holy scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We believe that the ordinances, namely: baptism and the re- 
memberance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, 
are to be in use and practiced by all Christian societies: and that 
it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to 
practice them; but the manner in which, ought always be 
left to the judgment and understanding of every individual. 
Also, the example of washing feet, is left to the judgment of 
every one to practice or not; but it is not becoming, for any of our 
preachers to traduce any of his brethren, whose judgment and 
understanding, in this respect, are different from his own, either 
in public or in private; whosoever shall make himself guilty 
in this respect, shall be considered a traducer of his brethren, and 
shall be answerable for the same, to the annual Conference. 



174 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION SECOND. 

GENERAL AND YEARLY CONFERENCES. 

Question. After what manner, are the transactions of the Con- 
ferences to be considered ? 

Answer. It is desired, that all things be considered on these 
occasions, as in the immediate presence of God: That every per- 
son rise and speak freely whatever is in his heart. 

Qst. How, and in what manner are the members of General 
Conference elected? — ffSg^See Constitution. — 

Qst. How often are the General Conferences to be held. 

A?zs. Every four years. 

Qst. Has the General Conference any other power, which 
the annual Conference has not ? 

Ans. The General Conference has the power alone to elect one 
or more Bishops from among the Elders, for a period of four 
years; furthermore, to adopt such rules as may be necessary for 
the better interest of the society in general. Yet, nothing shall 
be done by the said Conference, which would in any wise affect 
or change the article of faith; neither the spirit, intent, or mean- 
ing of the rules or Discipline as they now stand. The General 
Conference has to determine the districts and bounds of the yearly 
Conferences. 

Qst. Who are the members of the yearly Conference ? 

Ans. All the Elders & licentiate preachers, who are for the 
time being in the District where the Conference is held; but when 
such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the Elders 
only shall determine the same by vote. 

Qst. In what manner are the transactions of a Conference to 
be conducted ? 

Ans. A portion of scripture will be read; also singing and 
prayer each day, at the opening of Conference; — singing and 
prayer at the close. 

2. The Conference shall also elect two Secretaries, one German 
and one English, wherever it may be necessary. 

3. The preachers will be examined, respecting their deport- 
ment towards their fellow beings; whether their conduct in life 
be blameless and whether they employ as much time as possible 
to promote the kingdom of God. 

4. Have any of the preachers died during the last year? 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



175 



5. Who are the candidates for the Ministry? 

6. Are any to be ordained to the office of Eldership ? 

7. Who is willing to travel the ensuing year, without reserve ? 

8. Who are the Presiding Elders? 

9. What has been collected for contingent expenses, and the 
salary of travelling preachers ? 

10. Has reckoning been made with the travelling preachers ? 

1 1 . Have they received their dues ? 

12. Where are the preachers stationed this year? 

13. When and where shall our next Conference he held? 

14. Is there any thing more to do ? 

15. Is all that has been done entered upon record? 

SECTION THIRD. 
ELECTION OF BISHOPS AND THEIR DUTY. 

Qst. How are the Bishops to be elected? 

Ans. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority 
of votes, nevertheless, the Conference may, at their option, retain 
the former Bishop or Bishops, yet other four years. The newly 
elected, however, as well as those retained, must be capable of 
attending the Conferences appointed them, otherwise they cannot 
be elected. 

Qst. What are the duties of the Bishops ? 
Ans. 1. To preside in our Conferences. 

2. They have in conjunction with the Presiding Elders, of the 
past and present year, to fix the appointments of the travelling 
preachers for the several circuits, provided, they shall not allow 
any itinerant preachers to remain in the same station, more than 
three years successively; unless particular circumstances require 
it, and only then, with the consent of the Conference. 

3. The Bishops, in conjunction with two Elders appointed by 
Conference; shall point out the Districts which are to be travelled 
by the Presiding Elders. 

4. They have to attend the Conferences, and oversee the spirit- 
ual concerns of the Church. 

5. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordi- 
nation. 

6. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several Con- 
ferences committed to his charge, he cannot be suffered to retain 



176 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



his office; unless it be through sickness or some other unavoidable 
circumstance. 

7. If our Church should at any time, be destitute of a Bishop, 
in consequence of death, suspension or otherwise; a chairman 
shall be elected from among the Elders, at each annual Confer- 
ence, — each chairman shall attend the next succeeding Confer- 
ence, in conjunction with the chairman there elected; that a reg- 
ular correspondence be maintained, until the ensuing General 
Conference, where one or more Bishops shall be elected. 

8. It shall be the duty of the Bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present, during the sitting 
of every annual Conference. 

SECTION FOURTH. 

PRESIDING ELDERS, ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How are the Presiding elders elected. 

A ns. The Bishops shall propose to the Conference some of 
the Elders, who have stood their time of probation, and with 
the consent of the Conference, elect them for one year. 

Qst. What are the duties of a Presiding Elder. 

Ans. 1. To travel through the District appointed him, and 
preach as often as he can. 

2. He has to take charge of the travelling and local preachers 
in his District, and see that they conduct themselves as becometh 
the gospel of Christ. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and camp-meetings, and if 
possible attend them; he shall administer the Lord's Supper, and 
hold quarterly-meeting Conferences with the preachers, exhorters, 
leaders and stewards; he shall further enquire into, and examine 
whether the travelling and local preachers do their duty, particu- 
larly, whether the local preachers, when practicable, preach every 
Sunday : and where there are more than one, to change them at 
times , where the most benefit is likely to result ; and to exhort them , 
that they maintain discipline and order, love and seriousness in 
the societies. 

4. He can also, in conjunction with two Elders, preachers, ex- 
horters or leaders, (one from each circuit,) change the preachers 
on his District. Should any circuit be found without a travelling 
preacher, it shall be his duty to employ a preacher to travel on 
that circuit, until the next annual Conference. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 177 

5. And should it so happen, that a District should be without 
a Presiding Elder, information thereof shall immediately be given 
to a Bishop, who shall appoint an Elder in the district, to act as 
Presiding Elder until the ensuing annual Conference. 

SECTION FIFTH. 

DUTY OF CIRCUIT PREACHERS AND HOW RECEIVED. 

Qst. What are the duties of a circuit preacher ? 
Ans. To submit peaceably to the station appointed him by 
Conference. 

2. He shall attend the appointments on his circuit regularly, 
preach to the people, and hold society meetings with the mem- 
bers, wherever it is acceptable with the class. 

3. It shall be the duty of the preacher in charge, to see that 
there are suitable persons appointed in each class, as steward, 
leader or leaders. 

4. He shall read three sections of our Discipline, every six 
months, in each class; namely, — the Article of Faith, the Duty of 
Members, and the Duty of Leaders and Stewards. 

5. He shall sit as president on the trial of members, and keep 
a correct account of the same. 

6. He shall render a strict account of the condition of his 
circuit, to the Presiding Elder, at each quarterly Conference. 

7. He shall give charge to all sub-agents of the Religious 
Telescope, to keep an account of all its subscribers, in their re- 
spective neighborhoods. 

8 He shall also make settlement with the sub-agents once a 
year, and render an account thereof to the district agent. 

9. He shall furthermore make out a list of all the appoint- 
ments on his circuit, and present them to the Presiding Elder, at 
each annual Conference, for the benefit of the next who may 
travel that circuit. 

SECTION SIXTH. 
ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 
Qst. How is an Elder constituted ? 

Ans. After a probation of three years, a preacher may be 
presented to the yearly Conference, for consideration; and if on 



178 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



examination by the Conference, he should be chosen as an Elder, 
he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a Bishop 
and two Elders. It shall, however, be the privilege of an Annual 
Conference, to grant a permit to licentiates, to perform the ordi- 
nance of baptism, and administer the sacrament where circum- 
stances make it necessary. 

2. What is the duty of an Elder? — To preach as often as he 
can and to baptize; and assist the Presiding Elder to administer 
the Lord's supper; but when the Presiding Elder cannot attend, 
then one or two Elders shall perform this duty; he shall also 
perform all parts of divine worship; endeavor to establish and 
hold class-meetings, and assist in the election of leaders and 
stewards. 

3. To make a collection, freely contributed, quarterly, for the 
traveling preachers and for the poor; to take specification thereof, 
signed by the leader, at each place, and when there is no leader 
present, to have it signed by some other member, in order to 
account with the Presiding Elder, so that all things be done in a 
regular manner. 

4. Where a local Elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no traveling preacher comes 
to, he shall make a collection and in like manner take a cata- 
logue thereof, and bring or send it to the Presiding Elder or to 
the Conference, for the support of needy preachers who preach 
among poor people. 

5. Should a traveling Preacher or Elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the Presiding Elder 
of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, unless it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he shall be accountable to the next annual Con- 
ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary for the time he 
may have traveled during the year. 

6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is rea- 
sonable and just that the Elders should provide for their support 
in proportion to the time they may be employed, and by making 
a collection for their benefit among the societies in their District; 
though not to exceed the sum fixed and allotted to the travelling 
preachers. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



179 



SECTION SEVENTH. 
THE METHOD OF RECEIVING PREACHERS, AND THEIR DUTY. 
Qst. How is a preacher to be received ? 

Ans. Any person desiring license to preach among ns, must 
obtain a recommendation from the class to which he belongs, or 
one or more trustworthy persons, and present it to a Quarterly 
Conference, where he may be, (if in their judgment, expedient,) 
licensed, until the setting of the next Annual Conference, whose 
duty it shall be to examine said applicant agreeable to Discipline, 
and act accordingly. No one, however, can be admitted other- 
wise than on trial, and one who is taken on trial, may either be 
admitted or rejected without doing him any harm, otherwise it 
would be no trial 

2. No preacher of any other society can be taken up as a preacher 
in our society, without being able to produce a recommendation 
of his standing and behavior from his own society, or of 
some trust-worthy persons who are known as such to the Con- 
ference or to the Presiding Elder. In such case, the quarterly 
or annual Conference may take him on trial for one year, after 
which, if his conduct prove to be in accordance with the Gospel 
of Christ; he shall be considered as standing in the same capacity 
among us, as he did in the society from which he came. 

3. Every person proposed as a preacher, shall be examined by 
the conference and the following questions put to him: — 

Have you known God in Christ Jesus as a sin pardoning God, 
and have you obtained forgiveness of your sins ? 

Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed 
abroad in your heart by the holy spirit ? 

Do you follow after holiness ? 

Do you believe the Bible to be the word of God, and that 
therein only is contained the true way to our soul's salvation ? 

What foundation have you for such belief? 

What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the 
gospel ? 

What is your knowledge of faith, of repentance, of justifica- 
tion, sanctification, and redemption? 

Does your own salvation, and the salvation of your fellow 
mortals lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the 
world? 



l8o UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace as 
the brethren may think it expedient ? 

Are you willing as much as is in your power, to assist in up- 
holding the itinerant plan, and support the same as much as 
possible ? 

Qst. 2. What are the duties of a preacher? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get 
hearers, and establish class-meetings; to converse with the 
members on the situation or condition of their souls, and seek 
to administer relief, strengthen and direct those that are afflicted 
and labor under temptations, to animate the indolent, and 
endeavor as much as possible to edify and instruct all in 
faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of Jesus Christ; never 
omit to visit the sick, but on all occasions to strive to enforce 
and confirm the doctrines he delivers by a well-ordered and ex- 
emplary life. 

Qst. 3. What are the directions given to a preacher? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time with un- 
necessary things, at any place. Be always serious. Let 
your motto be, Holiness to the Lord. Avoid all lightness 
and jesting. Converse sparingly, and conduct yourself pru- 
dently with women; demean yourself in all respects as a true 
Christian. 

2. Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil 
of no one without good evidence; and always put the most favor- 
able construction on such matters, as the nature of the subject, 
consistent with truth, will admit. 

Speak evil of no one; whatsoever may be your thoughts, keep 
them within your own breast, till you can tell the person con- 
cerned, what you think wrong in his conduct. 

3. Let your business be, to save as many souls as possible; 
to this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who 
need it, and act in all things not according to your own will, but 
as a son in the gospel. As such it becomes your duty to employ 
your time in the manner here prescribed: in preaching and 
visiting from house to house; in instruction and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God ; with these be occupied until our 
Lord cometh. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



I8l 



SECTION EIGHTH. 

THE IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS, AND HOW THEY 
ARE TO BE DISPOSED OF. 

Qst. 1. What shall be done, when a Bishop, Presiding Elder, 
or preacher is reported of being guilty of some crime forbidden 
in the word of God? 

Ans. When a Bishop is thus accused, it shall be the duty of a 
Presiding Elder and an elder, after being duly notified thereof, 
to inquire into and examine whether they are founded in truth; 
but, as the Apostle says, they shall not receive an accusation 
without two or three witnesses. If it then appear that he is 
justly accused, they shall take down their proceedings in writing, 
and send a copy thereof to the Bishop accused; and appoint a 
time and place where the accusers and accused shall be present 
to each other, when the cause shall be tried by two Presiding Elders 
and three Elders. If he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace 
till the yearly Conference, where the Presiding Elder and Elders 
shall again examine and try the same; and if found guilty again, 
he shall be suspended or expelled as the case may require. 

Qst. 2. When a Presiding Elder is thus accused. 

Ans. It shall be the duty of the next or nearest Elder and a 
preacher to inquire into and examine them, and if the accused 
appear to be guilty, they shall take down their proceedings in 
writing and send him, the accused, a copy thereof, and appoint a 
time and place where the accusers with the accused shall meet 
and be present to each other. And in the absence of the Bishop, 
another Presiding Elder and two Elders shall be called, who shall 
examine the charges, and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his 
peace till the Conference, where he shall be accountable. 

Qst. 3. When an Elder or preacher is charged with immoral 
conduct, what shall be done ? 

Ans. The preacher thereabout, to whom it shall be known, 
shall take with him another preacher or exhorter, or leader, and 
examine into the charge; should he appear guilty, then notice 
thereof shall be given him, and a time appointed, where they, 
the accusers and the accused, shall meet and be present to each 
other. Three Elders or preachers shall try and determine his case, 
which are to be appointed by the parties concerned, each party 
appointing one, and the two a third; and if he be convicted, he 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



shall hold his peace till the conference, where he shall be ac- 
countable. 

But should sufficient satisfaction be given in either of the fore- 
going cases, by an expression of repentance or otherwise, they 
may be retained if considered expedient. 

SECTION NINTH. 

MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Qst. How shall members be taken into our society? 

Ans. When at any meeting a person makes known his desire 
to become a member of our society, then the preacher present 
shall put to him the following question : 

Have you experienced the pardon of your sins, and are you 
now determined by the grace of God to save your soul ? 

If the person answers the question in the affirmative, and no 
objection be made by any member, on account of his, or her moral 
conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as 
members of our society, and with consent of the person, the 
preacher will record his or her name on the class book, but so long 
as any member cannot answer the above question in the affirma- 
tive, such will have no vote in the society. 

Every member of this society should acknowledge and confess, 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy Word of 
God; that he will henceforth strive with all his heart to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled to fiee 
from the wrath to come. 

Every member should endeavor to lead a good life; be diligent 
in prayer, particularly in private; and, for his own edification, 
to be present and attend, when practicable, at all meetings, 
both public worship and prayer meetings. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families 
morning and evening, and set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to walk as in the presence of God; 
also accustom himself to a close communion with God in 
all his employments, and never speak evil of his fellow beings, 
but practise love towards friend and foe, do good to the poor, and 
endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ in deed. 

Every member shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in 



DISCIPLINE OP 1837. 



183 



the word of God. Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 
exercise of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of 
God. 

Every member of this society should contribute something 
quarterly towards the support of the itinerant preachers, if his 
circumstances will admit of it, willingly and freely. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet, peaceable and 
godly life in the intercourse with all men, as it becomes a Chris- 
tian to live in peace, particularly to the higher or ruling 
powers, every one shall be subject, as the word of God requires. 

Among members of the society, the preachers shall establish 
one or more class-meetings, and the members when practicable, 
Shall assemble at the place appointed, to hold prayer-meetings, 
in order to edify themselves in the presence of God, and pro- 
mote the love of good works in Christ Jesus. 

In every Class, the leader should be elected in presence of 
the preacher, whose duty it is to appoint prayer and class 
meetings, to commence and conclude the same; the freedom of 
our prayer and class-meetings shall extend to any sincere and 
well-disposed person or persons, who may desire to attend them, 
although such persons be not members of our society. 

When members trespass against each other, as brethren or 
sisters, correct the faults " first between thee and him alone : If he 
hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother. But if he will not hear 
thee, then take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of 
two or three witnesses, every word may be established. And 
if he shall neglect to hear them, tell it unto the church; but 
if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as a 
Heathen man and a Publican. 

On any dispute between two or more of the society, concern- 
ing the payment of debts or other cause, which cannot be 
settled by the parties concerned, the preacher who has the 
oversight of the society, or the preacher residing thereabouts, 
shall inquire into the circumstances of the case; and shall 
recommend to the contending parties a reference, consisting 
of one arbiter chosen by the plaintiff, and another chosen 
by the defendant; which two arbiters so chosen, shall choose the 
third; the three arbiters are then to decide the dispute. 

But if one of the parties be dissatisfied with the judgment 
given, such party may refer to the next quarterly or great meet- 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



ing, and apply to the presiding Elder for a second arbitration, and 
if the preachers find sufficient cause, they shall grant a second 
arbitration; in which case each part}- shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four arbiters shall choose a fifth, the judgment of the 
majority of whom shall be final; and any person refusing to 
abide by such judgment, shall be excluded from the society. 
And if any member of the society shall refuse in cases of debt 
or other disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration, when recom- 
mended to him by a preacher or leader, who has the charge of 
the society; or shall enter into a law-suit with another member, 
before these measures are taken, he shall be expelled, except the 
case be of such a nature as to require and justify a process at law, 
as executors or administrators, or when a member is in danger 
of suffering an unexpected loss of property, which will allow 
him immediate legal process. 

If any member of this society shall publicly transgress, such 
member shall likewise be publicfy reprimanded, and in case 
such member shall not humble himself, the same shall be 
publicly excluded from the church. 

SECTION TENTH. 

SALARY OF PREACHERS. 

Qst. i. How and in what manner shall the Bishops and 
preachers be provided for, and how shall the necessary means be 
collected ? 

Ans. A collection shall annually be lifted for the Bishops, 
at every preaching place throughout our whole society, the 
preachers shall pa}- over this collection to their respective Pre- 
siding Elders at the annual Conference, and the Presiding Elders 
shall give an account thereof to their respective annual Confer- 
ences; out of this collection the Bishops shall receive their salary; 
provided, that one who has a family does not receive more than 
$160 and his travelling expenses; and if without a family, $80 and 
his traveling expenses. 

2nd. The preachers in towns or cities, who stand under the 
direction of the Conference with the itinerant preachers, receive 
their salary from the respective societies whom they serve; but 
it is their duty to give an account to the annual Conference, and 
limit their salary to the usual salary and necessary expenses, 
and if there should be a surplus, to pay the same over to the 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



185 



annual Conference, to be applied for the benefit of the traveling 
preachers. 

3rd. For the support of the traveling preachers, the Presiding 
Elder and preachers shall appoint in each class a steward, to 
make quarterly collections in money or produce, which produce 
to be valued what it may be worth between man and man, and an 
account kept thereof, and proportionably distributed among the 
traveling preachers. All stewards will submit their accounts 
to the Presiding Elder at the quarterly meeting, and the Presiding 
Elder will submit his accounts to the annual Conference, in order 
to show what each traveling preacher has received, that equal- 
ity be observed. The annual salary of a traveling preacher, 
or traveling Presiding Elder is also limited, like the salary of the 
Bishops to $160, if with a family; or $80, if without a family, and 
traveling expenses. 

4. Yet when a traveling preacher has a family of children, the 
yearly Conference of which he is a member, will in that case grant 
him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in their 
judgment will accord with the wants of said preacher's family. 

5. Should the collection of any one District be insufficient, 
then it shall be left to a committee appointed by the Conference, 
who will as they may find it advisable, make up such deficiency, 
out of other collections made. 

6. Resolved, that the Bishops, Presiding Elders, and Circuit 
Preachers, shall receive pay only in proportion to the time they 
may actually have traveled. 

Provided however, that they shall not be docked for any provi- 
dential interventions, such as sickness, &c. &c. 

APPENDIX. 
OF THE NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensibly ( from what we have known ) of the 
evil of a division in principle, spirit, or practice, and the dreadful 
consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can 
stand before us ? If we divide, we shall destroy ourselves, the 
work of God, and the souls of our people. 

Qst. What can be done in order to a closer union with each other ? 

Ans. 1. I*et us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity 
of it. 



i86 



UNITE) D BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each other. 

3. When we meet, let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each other's gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's character in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. Labor, in honor, each to prefer the other, before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart and church divisions. 

VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE, AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? 

Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
necessary in order to promote confidence and communion with 
God among us ; further to wean us from the love of the world, 
and inure us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also to encourage 
us to strive after and practice brotherly love, that no evil think- 
ing or judging of one another be found among us; and lastly, 
that we may learn to do as we would wish to be done by. 

2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the 
people on every occasion; both public and private, and exhort 
them to be diligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this be 
done, and that in sincerity, we shall, upon the whole, be of little 
use, and our good shall be evil spoken of, therefore wherever we 
may be, we should guard against useless and idle conversation. 

Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to 
house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these 
solemn words of the apostle: 

" I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall 
judge the quick and the dead at his appearing, preach the Word; 
be instant in seaso?i, and out of season; Reprove, rebuke, exhort, 
with all long suffering.'" 

THE INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

Qst. What shall be done to benefit the rising generation? 

Ans. Let him, who is in any wise zealous for God, and the 
souls of men, begin the work without delay. Where children are 
found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, 
and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and pray 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



187 



with them earnestly, yet simply and plainly, that they may learn 
to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days of their youth. 

FORM AND MANNER OF ORDAINING PREACHERS. 

1. On the day appointed, there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 

2. After their names have been read aloud, the Bishop or Elder 
shall say unto the people present: — 

3. Beloved Brethren in Christ ! Is there any among - you, who 
know any impediment or crime in any of those persons to be 
ordained Elders, for which he ought not to be admitted to that 
office, let him come forth in the name of God, and show what the 
crime or impediment may be. 

4. If any crime or impediment be alleged, the Bishop shall 
cease from ordaining that person, until such time as the party 
accused shall be found clear of said crime. 

5. If no accusation be alleged, the Bishop, or Elder, shall read 
the following articles to any and all who may be chosen for 
ordination. 

"For an Elder nxust be blameless, as the steward of God, not 
self-willed, not soon angry, not given to wine, no striker, not 
given to filthy lucre. 

"But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, 
holy, temperate: 

" Holding fast the faithful word as he had been taught, that he 
may be able by sound doctrine, both to exhort and to convince 
the gainsayers." 

Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the Holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry, to serve God 
in the church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy 
name? 

Ans. I trust with the help of God. 

Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures; old and new Testa- 
ment? 

Ans. I do believe them. 

Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 
your life according to the doctrine of Christ; and to make 
yourself, as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the 
flock of Christ? 

Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- 



188 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



ment over you is committed, following with a glad mind and 
will, their godty admonitions? 

Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. 

[Then prayer is made.] 

After prayer, the Bishop and Elder shall lay their hands upon 
the heads of eve^ one of them, and say: 

' ' Take thou authority to execute the office of an Elder in the 
Church of God. In the name of the Father, the Son, and the 
Holy Ghost." Amen. 

Hereupon the Bishop or Elder, shall deliver to every one of 
them the Holy Bible, saying: 

" Take thou authority to read and preach the Word of God in 
the church of Christ." 

Then the Bishop or Elder shall read from the 12th chapter of 
St. Luke, 35—38: 

Let your loins be girded about and your lights burning, and 
ye 3^ourselves like unto men that wait for the Lord, when he 
will return from the wedding, that when he cometh and knock- 
eth, they may open unto him immediately. Blessed are those 
servants whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching. 
Verily I say unto } 7 ou, that he shall gird himself, and make them 
sit down to meat, and will come forth to serve them. 

And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third 
watch, and find them so, blessed are those servants. 

Then the Bishop or Elder shall pray. — After which the follow- 
ing benediction is pronounced. 

The peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge 
of Jesus Christ our Lord. Amen. 

THE FORM TO SOLEMNIZE MARRIAGE. 

ADDRESS. 

We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as man 
and wife, if any person present know any just cause or impedi- 
ment why these two persons should not be joined in marriage, 
they will now speak or for ever hereafter hold their peace. 

If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto 
the man. 

N. N. Wilt thou have this woman M. M. to tlw wedded wife, 
to live together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



and comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in 
adversity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long 
as ye both shall live : — If so, then answer yes. 

Then shall the Minister say unto the woman. 

M. M. Wilt thou have this man N. N. to thy wedded husband, 
to live together after God's ordinance; wilt thou love, honor, 
and obey him, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and in ad- 
versity, forsaking all others, keep thee only unto him so long as 
ye both shall live; — If so, then answer yes. 

Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together and say. 

Those whom God had joined together let no man put asunder. 
In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage, 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, 
I pronounce them man and wife, in the name of the Father, Son, 
and Holy Ghost. Amen. 

HOW TO RECEIVE AN EXHORTER. 

Any Brother desiring license to exhort, will first make it known 
to the class-leader, and the class-leader will procure a recommen- 
dation from the class of which the applicant is a member at the 
time, upon which the Presiding Elder with the advice of the 
Quarterly Conference, will license the brother. 

FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. 

Whereas it is made the duty of Elders and Preachers to form 
and hold class-meetings, which should always be done in great 
moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any 
means or measures to hinder or prevent an Elder or Preacher in the 
discharge of this their duty, a member acting to the contrary 
shall be accountable to the next quarterly Conference. 

BOOK PRINTING. 

Resolved, that none of our members, either preachers or lay- 
men, shall be permited to become the author of a Doctrinal 
Book or Pamphlet, in a printed form, without the approbation of 
the Annual Conference, or a select committee by them chosen. 

FREE-MASONRY. 

Resolved, that Free-Masonry in every sense of the word, be 
totally discountenanced, and in no wise tolerated in our society > 



1 90 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, or 
join as a member of Free-Masonry in any of their processions, 
or otherwise join the fraternity, he will by so doing exclude him- 
self as a member of our church. 

PRESENTS. 

Every traveling preacher in our society, shall yearly account 
to the Conference, for ail presents he may have received on his 
circuit, to the amount of one dollar or more, for the use of him- 
self or family. And if the Conference be convinced that any one 
circuit has given presents instead of collections, or that the 
preacher endeavored to get such in the place of collections, in 
such case presents shall be considered as collections by the Con- 
ference. But if on examination it should not so appear, then those 
preachers receiving presents shall hold them as their own, and 
in addition receive all the Discipline allows them. 

SLAVERY. 

Resolved, That all slavery, in ever}' sense of the word, be 
totally prohibited, and in no way tolerated in our church. — Should 
any be found in our society, who hold slaves, the}* cannot con- 
tinue as members, without they do personally manumit, or set 
free such slaves. 

OATHS. 

We, the United Brethren in Christ, Do believe, that the prac- 
tice of swearing, either by the Bible, or in the name of Almighty 
God. is, in our opinion, contrary to the word of our Lord Jesus 
Christ, who says. " swear not at all," and that the mode of testi- 
fying to the Truth, when thereto required so to do in a legal form, 
by way of affirmation, is on us solemnly, conscientiously and 
fully binding before God and man to tell the truth, the whole 
truth, and nothing but the truth. 

VENDING AND DISTILLATION OF ARDENT SPIRITS. 

Should any Exhorter. Preacher, or Elder, from and after the 
next annual conference in 1S34. be engaged in the distillation or 
vending of ardent spirits, he shall for the first and second offence be 
accountable to the quarterly or yearly conference, of which he is a 
member; the said conference shall in meekness admonish the 
offending brother to desist; should those friendl}* admonitions fail, 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



I 9 I 



and the party continue to act in the same, and it be proven to the 
satisfaction of the yearly conference, such Preacher, Elder or Ex- 
horter, shall for the time being, not be considered a member 
of our church. 

CIRCULAR. 

TO THE MEMBERS OF THE CHURCH OF THE " UNITEDBRETHREN 
IN CHRIST." 

Dearly beloved Brethren in the Lord: — 

We, as your humble servants in the Gospel yoke, feeling as 
much as ever convinced of the great evil existing in our world, 
in consequence of the inordinate use of ardent spirits, do hereby 
express our entire disapprobation to the rage of that great mon- 
ster, in our land. We would therefore, in the most affectionate 
terms beseech you all by the mercies of him, who, in this lower 
world, went about doing good; and by whose authority it is said 
that no drunkard shall inherit eternal life; to withhold your 
influence from the inordinate use of the hydra monster, 
which has done so much evil in this christian land. And we 
would now ask our brethren, have any of you Distilleries in 
operation? And do you sell to the Tavern keeper, or to him 
who keeps a grocery, or to any of your neighbors, for the 
purpose of occasional drinking or public gatherings? If you 
do, Brethren! It is to be feared, that there are heavy respon- 
sibilities resting upon you. Take care that in the great day 
of eternity, you do not suffer loss, and some of your works be 
burned. We would also say, that if any of our brethren are 
engaged in selling or retailing this disgraceful traffic; they 
are in our opinion, under equal responsibilities — for to say the 
least of it; it is demoralizing in its tendency; and feeling dis- 
posed, as a General Conference, to advise, rather than legislate 
on this subject; we do say, that if our brethren regard us as 
those who are watching over their souls for good, they will 
at once desist from every kind of traffic mentioned in this 
article as a drink. And, in conclusion, we would say, that 
whatever the sacrifice may be on the part of our brethren in 
consequence of our humble request, they will have a conscious- 
ness of having complied with the request of those who wish 
them well; and we trust, a conscience void of offence towards 
God and man. 



192 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



May the great head of the church, bless us with the mind that 
was in Jesus Christ. Amen. 

Written and passed in General Conference, Germantown, 
Montgomery Co., Ohio, May 16th, 1837. 

W. R. Rhinehart, Sec'y. 

PREAMBLE. 

At a meeting of a General Conference held by the United 
Brethren in Christ, in Germantown, Ohio, May 10th 1837, it was 
resolved that a constitution should be formed, for the better 
government of a Printing Establishment, now in operat ion in 
the town of Circleville, Ohio, belonging to said Church. 

CONSTITUTION. 
ARTICLE I. 

SEC. 1. Resolved, That the above Printing Establishment be 
known by the name of the Conference Printing Establishment, 
of the United Brethren in Christ. 

Sec. 2. Resolved, That all legislative authority herein granted, 
shall be vested in the General Conference of said Church; whose 
duty it is, to make or amend any rules which in their judgment, 
may seem expedient. 

Sec. 3. Resolved, That it be the duty of the General Confer- 
ence, to appoint or elect three Trustees every four years; and 
also, to emplo3 r an Editor and Treasurer. 

Sec. 4. Resolved, If a vacancy should occur in the Editorial 
or Treasury department, by sickness, death, or otherwise, that, it 
shall be the duty of the Trustees to employ some other suitable 
person or persons to fill said vacancy, until the sitting of the 
next General Conference. 

Sec. 5. Resolved, Also, that in case a vacancy should occur 
with the Trustees either by death or otherwise, it shall be the 
duty of the remaining two, to make choice of a third person to 
fill said vacancy, until the sitting of the next General Conference. 

Sec. 6. Resolved, That the proceeds of said establishment, 
over and above contingent expenses, shall be applied to the 
traveling and worn out preachers and their widows and orphans; 
to be divided among the different annual conferences, as the 
General Conference may direct. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



193 



ARTICLE II. 

Sec. i. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Trustees to 
make settlement with the Treasurer and Editor every six 
months, and cause the Treasurer to make out and report to each 
annual Conference of the Scioto district, and also to make a 
special report to each General Conference. 

Sec. 2. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Scioto 
annual Conference, in the interval of a General Conference, to 
see that the Editor, Treasurer and Trustees, discharge their 
official duties as required in this constitution. 

Sec. 3. Resolved, That on impeachment of any of the above 
named officers, it shall be the duty of the above named annual 
Conference, to examine into said impeachment, and if guilty in 
their opinion, to dismiss them, and supply the vacancy until the 
sitting of the next Conference. 

ARTICLE III. 

SEC. i. Resolved, That it be the duty of the Editor to pay strict 
attention to all communications sent for insertion, to revise 
them if necessary, and insert them; nevertheless, if he should 
receive any, which, in his opinion are inconsistent with the 
doctrine and rules of our Church, he shall present them to the 
Treasurer, or one or more of the Trustees, and if rejected by 
them shall be withheld, otherwise inserted. 

Sec. 2. Resolved, That it be the duty of the Editor to write 
editorial for each paper, and attend strictly to the reading of 
proof-sheet; making selections, &c. ; and when not employed in 
either, to put in his time in labor in the office as other hands. 

Sec. 3. Resolved, Also, that it be the duty of the Editor to 
keep a general oversight over the hands in the office, and see 
that they do not spend their time in idleness. 

Sec. 4. Resolved, That the Trustees shall have a general over- 
sight over the Editor and Treasurer, and see that they discharge 
their duties, and if they do not, may be suspended from office, 
until the setting of the next annual Conference, who shall deter- 
mine the case; in which case said Trustees shall supply the 
vacancy, for the time being. 

ARTICLE IV. 

Sec. i. Resolved, That it shall be the duty of the Treasurer to 
take charge of all temporary concerns of the office, keep all the 
13 



194 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



books pertaining thereunto, furnish by the direction of Trustees, 
such materials as may be needed at all times, and to act as a 
general Book-agent under the instruction of said Trustees. 

Sec. 2. Resolved, That the Treasurer, when not employed in 
his official duties, shall work in the office as another hand. 

Sec. 3. Resolved, Finally, that the Trustees shall have a right 
to make any by-laws that to them may seem expedient, for the 
better regulation of the minor concerns of the office, Provided, 
they do not violate any of the provisions of this constitution. 

Signed in behalf of the Conference on the day and date above 
written. 

HENRY KTJMLER, } 
SAM' I, HEISTAND. ) P ' 

W. R. Rhinehart, Secy. 
BUILDING MEETING HOUSES, AND THE ORDER TO BE OBSERVED. 

Q. Is any thing advisable in regard to building meeting 
houses. 

A. L,et all our meeting houses be built plain and decent with 
free seats, and not more expensive than necessary. 

Q. To whom are our meeting houses and the premises belong- 
ing to them, to be deeded ? 

A. To a Board of Trustees and their successors in office, in 
trust as the property of the church of the United Brethren in 
Christ. 

Q. How is a Board of Trustees constituted ? 

A. Whenever it is contemplated by a society to build or pur- 
chase a meeting house, it shall be the duty of a leader or steward 
of such societ}^, to make it known to the Quarterly Conference 
of the circuit or station to which they belong, whose duty it shall 
be to appoint a judicious Board of Trustees, of not less than 
three in number, — Provided, however, that none be required to 
serve more than four years unless indispensably necessary. 

No person shall be considered eligible as a Trustee for any of 
of our meeting houses, who is not a regular member of our 
church. 

Q. How are the Trustees to proceed in building a meeting 
house ? 

A. They shall form an estimate of the amount necessary to 
procure a lot of ground, to build and make such other improve- 
ments as may be conceived necessary: however, they shall not 



DISCIPLINE OF 1837. 



195 



commence building, until two-thirds of the money according to 
such estimate shall be secured, or subscribed; and also, a lawful 
title for the lot upon which they intend to build. 

To hold annual meetings, and keep a fair and regular record of 
all the transactions of their board, in a book provided for that 
purpose, which shall at all times be open for inspection, by the 
Quarterly Conferences of said circuit, or station. 

To take care of the meeting-house property, furniture, prem- 
ises, burial ground, &c. 

Q. What shall be done when a vacancy or vacancies occur in 
the Board of Trustees, by ceasing to be a member, by suspensation, 
death or otherwise. 

A. It shall be the duty of the Quarterly Conference, to ap- 
point a suitable person or persons, to fill such vacancy or vacan- 
cies. 

Q. What shall be done when any of our houses are vacant ? 

A. It shall be the duty of a Quarterly Conference of the 
nearest circuit, to appoint not less than than three suitable per- 
sons for Trustees, who shall have the power when authorized by 
two-thirds of the members of that Conference, to lease, rent, or 
sell such meeting house and the appurtenances belonging to it, 
and appropriate the money arising from such lease, rent or sale, 
to what it may direct. 

Note. — The Trustees will be careful in all cases to have deeds 
of conveyance legally executed and recorded in the county 
records where the property is, that is, to have the deed made to 
them and to their successors in office, in trust for the Church of 
the United Brethren in Christ, and that they will erect and build, 
or cause to be built, a house of worship, for the use of the mem- 
bers of the said church, according to the rules o f Discipline, 
which may from time to time be adopted by the church. 

BOOK-AGENTS. 

1. Resolved — That there shall be a Book Agent appointed in 
each Annual Conference District, whose duty it shall be to take 
charge of all books, &c. sent him by the Treasurer of, and ap- 
pertaining to the Conference printing establishment, in Circle- 
ville. 

2. Resolved, That he, (the said agent) shall be accountable to 
the Treasurer of the Conference printing establishment, in Circle- 
ville, Ohio. 



196 UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 

3. Resolved — That it shall be the duty of the Book Agent, so 
far as may be safe or expedient, to distribute all the Books sent 
him by the Treasurer, to the circuit preachers, for the use of the 
church. 

4. Resolved, That the Agent keep an accurate account of all 
the distributions and collections for, and in behalf of the said 
Conference printing establishment. If books are wanted in his 
District, he is to notify the Treasurer by letter. 

5. Resolved— That the Agent shall make settlement with the 
Treasurer, by letter or otherwise, every six months. 

ERRATA. 



Eighth page — 2d line; read 1815, instead of 1835.— This error was not discovered 
until some were struck off. 



DISCIPLINE) OF 1837. I97 



INDEX. 

Page. 

Book Printing 189 

Book-agents 195 

Building meeting houses, and the order to be observed - - - - 194 

Constitution of Printing Establishment - - - 192 

Constitution of the Church 168 

Circular, to the members of the Church 191 

Duty of Circuit Preachers, and how received 177 

Election of Bishops and their duty - - - 175 

Elders, their Election, ordination and duty 177 

Forming and Meeting Classes ---------- - 189 

Form and manner of Ordaining Preachers - 187 

Free-Masonry -----189 

General and yearly Conferences - 174 

How to receive an Exhorter, 189 

Members in general - - - - 182 

Of the Necessity of Union among ourselves 185 

Oaths 190 

Origin of the United Brethren in Christ - - - - " - - - -165 

Presents - 190 

Preachers 187 

Presiding Elders, election and Duty - 176 

Slavery ----- - 190 

Salary of Preachers - -- -- 184 

The method of receiving Preachers and their duty 179 

The Instruction of Children - 186 

The form to Solemnize Marriage - - - 188 

The Immoral Conduct of Preachers, and how they are to be disposed of 181 

The Confession of Faith 172 

Vending & distillation of ardent spirits - 190 

Visiting from house to house, and enforcing Practical Religion - - - 186 



ORIGIN, 
DOCTRINE, 

CONSTITUTION 

AND 

DISCIPLINE, 

OF THE 

United Brethren in Christ. 



CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO. 
PRINTED AT THE CONFERENCE OFFICE. 
1841. 



199 



ORIGIN OF THE UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST. 



In the eighteenth century, it pleased the Lord our God, to 
awaken persons in different parts of the world, who should raise 
up the Christian religion from its fallen state, and preach the 
Gospel of Christ crucified in its purity. 

About the middle of the said century the Lord, in mercy, 
remembered the Germans of America, who, living scattered in 
this extensive country, had but seldom an opportunity to hear 
the Gospel of a crucified Saviour preached to them, in their 
native language. 

Amongst others, he raised up William Otterbein and Martin 
Boehm in the State of Pennsylvania, and George A. Geeting in 
the State of Maryland, armed them with spirit, grace and 
strength, to labor in his neglected vineyard, and to call, among 
the Germans in America, sinners to repentance. These men 
obeyed the call of their Lord and Master; their labors were 
blessed; they established, in many places, excellent societies, 
and led many precious souls to Jesus Christ. Their sphere of 
action spread more and more, so that they found it necessary 
to look about for more fellow-laborers, to engage in the vine- 
yard of the Lord; for the harvest was great, and the laborers 
but few. The Lord called others, who were willing to devote 
their strength to his service; such, then, were accepted by one 
or the other of the preachers, as fellow-laborers. 

The number of members in the society, in different parts of 
the country, continued to increase from time to time; and the 
gracious work of reformation spread through the States of Penn- 
sylvania, Maryland and Virginia. Several great meetings were 
appointed, and held annually; when on such occasions, Otterbein 
would hold particular conversations with the preachers then 
present, represent to them the importance of the ministry, and 
the necessity of their utmost endeavors to save souls. At one of 
these meetings, it was resolved to hold a conference with all the 
preachers, in order to take into consideration, how, and in what 
manner they might be most useful. 

The first conference was held in the city of Baltimore, Md. ; 

201 



202 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



in the year of our Lord, 1789. The following preachers were 
present, viz: — 

Wm. Otterbein, Adam Lehman, 

Martin Boehm, John Ernst, 

Geo. A. Geeting, Henry Weidner, 
Chn. Newcomer. 

The second conference was held in Paradise Township, York 
Co. Pa., at the house of brother Spangler, in the year of our 
Lord 1 791. The following preachers were present, viz: — 

Wm. Otterbein, John Ernst, 

Martin Boehm, J. G. Pfremmer, 

Geo. A. Geeting, John Neidig, 

Chn. Newcomer, Benedict Sander. 
Adam Lehman, 

After mature deliberation, how they might labor most use- 
fully in the vineyard of the Lord, they again appointed such, 
as fellow laborers, of whom they had cause to believe, that they 
had experienced true religion in their own souls. 

In the mean time, the number of members continued to increase, 
and the preachers were obliged to appoint an Annual Conference, 
in order to unite themselves more closely, and to labor more suc- 
cessfully in the vineyard of the Lord ; for, some had been Presby- 
terians or German Reformed, some Lutherans, and others Meno- 
nists. — They accordingly appointed a conference, to be held on 
the 25th of Sept. 1800, in Frederick Co. Md., at the house 
of brother Frederick Kemp. The following preachers were 
present, viz : — 

Wm. Otterbein, Christian Krum, 

Martin Boehm, Henry Krum, 

Geo. A Geeting, John Hershey, 

Chn. Newcomer, Jacob Geisinger, 

Adam Lehman, Henry Boehm, 

Abr'm Dracksel, Diet'k Aurauf. 
J. G. Pfremmer, 

There they united themselves into a society which bears the 
name, "UNITED BRETHREN IN CHRIST," and elected 
Wm. Otterbein and Martin Boeh?n, as superintendents or bishops, 
and agreed that each of them should be at liberty, as to the 



discipline: of 1841. 



203 



mode and manner of baptism, to perform it according to their 
own convictions. 

From this time, the society increasing still more and more, 
preachers were appointed to travel regularly, in as much as 
the number of preaching places could not otherwise be attended to; 
and the work spread itself into the states of Ohio and Kentucky. 
It then became necessary to appoint a conference in the State of 
Ohio; because it was conceived too laborious for the preachers 
who labored in those States, to travel, annually, such a great 
distance, to the Conference. 

In the mean time, brothers Boehm and Geeting died, and 
brother Otterbein desired that another bishop should be elected, 
(because infirmity and old age would not permit him to superintend 
any longer,) who should take charge of the society, and preserve 
discipline and order. It was resolved, at a former Conference, 
that whenever one of the bishops died, another should be elected 
in his place: accordingly, brother Christian Newcomer was elected 
bishop, to take charge of and superintend the concerns of the 
society 

The want of a Disc ipline in the society, had long been deeply 
felt, and partial attempts having been made at different times, 
it was resolved at the Conference held in the State of Ohio, that 
a General Conference should be held, in order to accomplish 
the same, in a manner, not derogatory to the word of God. 
The members of this Conference were to be elected from among 
the preachers, in the different parts of the country, by a vote 
of the society in general. The following brethren were duly 
elected, viz: — 

Chn. NeWcomer, Daniel Treyer, 

abr'm hlestand, geo.benedum, 

Andrew Zeller, Abr'm Tracksel, 

Christian Berger, Henry G. Spayth, 

Abraham Meyer, I. Nighswanger, 

John Schneider, ' Christian Krum, 

Henry Kumler, & Jacob Bowles. 

The Conference convened on the sixth day of June, 1815, near 
Mount Pleasant, Westmoreland Co. Pa. After a mature delib- 
eration, they presented to their brethren a Discipline, containing 
the doctrine and rules of the church, desiring that they, together 
with the word of God, should be strictly observed. 



204 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



God is a God of order, but where there is no order, nor Church 
Discipline the spirit of love and charity will be lost. 

Therefore, brethren, we beseech you to follow the example of 
our Lord; as it is written, Be kindly affectionate one to another 
with brotherly love, in honor preferring one another. Let the 
mind be in you which was in Christ, who took upon himself the 
form of a servant, humbled himself and became obedient unto 
death, even the death of the cross, that by his grace we may submit 
ourselves one to another in the fear of God. He who will not 
submit is in want of humble love. — Jesus said : Whosoever will be 
chief among you, let him be your servant. By this shall all men 
know that ye are my disciples, if ye have love one to another; and 
whoso loveth not his brother, abideth in death. Let us walk in 
newness of life, that the prayer of our Lord may be answered in 
us; that we may be one in him; and that he may give us the glory, 
which he gave to his disciples, that we may be one even as he and 
the Father are one. Therefore, beloved brethren, let us strive to 
be like minded, having the same love, being of one accord, of one 
mind; let no one speak or think evil of his brother, but pray God, 
that he may grant us his Spirit, and an earnest desire to lead a 
truly devoted life, to the honor and glory of his holy name: 
Amen. 

SECTION FIRST. 
CONFESSION OF FAITH. 

In the name of God, we declare and confess before all men, 
that, We believe in the only true God, the Father, the Son, and Holy 
Ghost; That these three are one, the Father in the Son, the Son 
in the Father, and the Holy Ghost equal in essence or being 
with both: That this triune God created the heavens and the 
earth, and all that in them is, visible as well as invisible, and 
furthermore, sustains, governs, protects and supports the same. 

We believe in Jesus Christ: That he is very God and man: That 
he became incarnate by the power of the Holy Ghost, in the 
virgin Mary, and was born of her: That he is the Saviour and 
Mediator of the whole human race, if they with full faith in 
him, accept the grace profferred in Jesus; That this Jesus 
suffered and died on the cross for us, was buried, arose again 
on the third day, ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right 



DISCIPLINE OP 1841. 



205 



hand of God, to intercede for us; and that he shall come again 
at the last day, to judge the quick and the dead. 

We believe in the Holy Ghost, that he is equal in being with 
the Father and the Son; and that he comforts the faithful, and 
guides them into all truth. 

We believe in a holy Christian Church, the communion of 
saints, the resurrection of the body and life everlasting. 

We believe that the Holy Bible, old and new Testaments, is 
the word of God; That it contains the only true way to our 
salvation: that every true Christian is bound to acknowledge 
and receive it with the influence of the Spirit of God, as the 
only rule and guide; and that without faith in Jesus Christ, 
true repentance, forgiveness of sins, and following after Christ, 
no one can be a true Christian. 

We also believe, that what is contained in the Holy Scriptures, 
to wit: the fall in Adam, and redemption through Jesus Christ, 
shall be preached throughout the world. 

We believe that the ordinances, namely, baptism and the re- 
membrance of the sufferings and death of our Lord Jesus Christ, 
are to be in use, and practised by all Christian societies: And that 
it is incumbent on all the children of God, particularly, to 
practise them; But the manner in which, ought always be 
left to the judgment and understanding of every individual: 
Also, the example of washing feet, is left to the judgment of 
every one, to practise or not; but it is not becoming, for any of 
our preachers or members to traduce any of his brethren whose 
judgment and understanding, in this respect, are different from 
his own, either in public or private. Whosoever shall make 
himself guilty in this respect, shall be considered a traducer of 
his brethren ; and shall be answerable for the same. 

SECTION SECOND. 

CONSTITUTION. 

WE, the members of the Church of the UNITED BRETHREN 
IN CHRIST, in the name of God, do, for the perfecting of the 
saints, for the work of the ministry, for the edifying of the body 
of Christ, as well as to produce and secure a uniform mode of 
action, in faith and practice, as also to define the powers and the 
business of Quarterly, Annual and General Conferences, as 



206 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



recognized by this Church, ordain the following articles of 
CONSTITUTION. 

ARTICLE I. 

Sec. i. — All ecclesiastical power herein granted, to make, or 
repeal any rule of Discipline, is vested in a General Conference; 
which shall consist of Elders elected by the members in every 
conference district, throughout the Society: Provided, however, 
such Elders shall have stood in that capacity three years, in the 
conference district to which they belong. 

Sec. 2. — General Conference is to be held every four years; 
The Bishops to be considered members and presiding officers. 

Sec. 3 — Each Annual Conference shall place before the society 
the names of all the Elders eligible to membership in the General 
Conference. 

ARTICLE II. 

Sec. i. — The General Conference shall define the boundaries 
of the Annual Conferences. 

Sec 2 — The General Conference shall, at every session, elect 
Bishops from among the elders throughout the church, who 
have stood in that capacity, six years. 

Sec. 3 — The business of each Annual Conference shall be 
done strictly according to Discipline; and any Annual Confer- 
ence, acting contrary thereunto, shall, by impeachment, be tried 
by the General Conference. 

Sec. 4 — No rule or Ordinance shall at any time be passed, to 
change or do away the Confession of Faith as it now stands; nor 
to destroy the itinerant plan. 

Sec. 5. — There shall be no rule adopted that will infringe upon 
the rights of any, as it relates to the mode of Baptism, the Sac- 
rament of the Lord's Supper, or the the washing of feet. 

Sec. 6. — There shall be no rule made that will deprive local 
preachers of their votes in the Annual Conferences to which they 
severally belong. 

Sec. 7. — There shall be no connection with secret combinations,^ 
nor shall involuntary servitude be tolerated, in any way. v 

ARTICLE III. 

The right, title, interest, and claim, of all property, whether 
consisting in lots of ground, meeting houses, legacies, bequests, 
or donations of any kind, obtained by purchase or otherwise, by 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 84 1. 



207 



any person or persons for the use, benefit, and behoof of the 
Church of the United Bretnren in Christ, is hereby fully recog- 
nized and held to be the property of the Church aforesaid. 

ARTICLE IV. 

There shall be no alteration of the foregoing constitution, un- 
less by request of two thirds of the whole society. 
May 19. 1841. 

SECTION THIRD. 

GENERAL CONFERENCE. 

Question 1st. Who are the members of the General Conference ? 

J&^See Constitution. — 

Qst. 2. How are they to be elected ? 

Ans. 1. It shall be the duty of each Annual Conference, to 
appoint a committee of three, in their several Conference Dis- 
tricts, to receive and count the votes, and immediately apprize 
those who may have been elected; also, to furnish the Presiding 
Elders with a list of all the Elders eligible 

2. The Presiding Elders shall furnish each preacher in charge, 
whose duty it shall be to furnish each class-leader or steward, 
throughout the circuits, with a copy of the same, at least six 
months before the sitting of General Conference. 

3. It shall be the. duty of each class leader or steward, to ap- 
point a meeting of the members of each class, for the purpose of 
electing by ballot or otherwise, one or more delegates to represent 
them in General Conference. 

4. It shall also be the duty of each class-leader or steward, to 
sign, enclose, and seal, each bill of election, hand it over to the 
preacher in charge, who shall deliver it to the Presiding Elder, 
whose duty it shall be to transmit it to the committee appointed 
by the Annual Conference, as aforesaid. 

5. Said committee shall make a list of all the persons voted 
for, and of the number of votes for each. And should any two 
or more of the candidates have an equal number of votes, the 
committee shall determine by lot, who, or which of them, are 
elected. They shall also forward the names of those elected, to 
the Conference Printing Establishment for publication. 

Qst. 3. What shall be the number of delegates to General 
Conference ? 



208 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Ans. Three from each Annual Conference district. 

Qst. 4. How shall the expenses of the delegates to the General 
Conference be defrayed ? 

Ans. When the class-leader, or steward, takes the vote for 
delegates to General Conference, he shall lift a collection for that 
purpose, which he shall remit to the committee which are to 
count the votes, and the committee shall pay it over to the dele- 
gates elected. 

SECTION FOURTH. 

ANNUAL CONFERENCE. 

Qst. 1. Who are the members of this Conference? 

Ans. All the Elders, and the licentiate preachers, who are, for 
the time being, in the district where the Conference is held: but, 
when such licentiate preachers are proposed for ordination, the 
Elders only shall determine the same by vote. 

Qst 2. In what manner are the transactions of a conference 
to be conducted ? 

Ans 1. A portion of Scripture is to be read; There is also to 
be singing and prayer, each day, at the opening, and at the 
closing of Conference. 

2. The conference shall elect two secretaries, one German : 
and one English, wherever it may be necessary. And when but 
one Bishop is present, the Conference shall elect a chairman to 
act in conjunction with the Bishop. 

3. The preachers shall be examined respecting their deport- 
ment towards their fellow beings, whether their conduct in life 
be blameless, and whether they employ as much time as possible 
to promote the kingdom of God. 

The following questions shall then be asked: 

1. Have any of the preachers died during- the last year? 

2 Who are the candidates for the ministry ? 

3. Are any to be ordained to the office of Elder? 

4. What has been collected for contingent expenses and the 
salary of travelling preachers? 

5 Has reckoning been made with the travelling preachers? 

6. Have they received their dues ? 

7. Who are willing to travel the ensuing year, without 
reserve? 



DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 



209 



8. Who are the Presiding Elders? 

9. Where are the preachers stationed this year ? 

10. When and where shall our next Conference he held ? 

11. Is there any thing else to be done? 

12. Is all that "has been done, entered upon record? 

SECTION FIFTH. 
RECEPTION OF PREACHERS. 
Qst How are preachers received? 

Ans. Every person proposed as a preacher, shall be examined 
by the Conference, or a select committee; and the following 
questions shall be put to him, viz: 

Have you known God in Christ Jesus to be a sin pardoning 
God, and have you obtained the forgiveness of your sins ? 

Have you now peace with God, and is the love of God shed 
abroad in your heart by the Holy Spirit ? 

Do you follow after holiness ? 

Do you believe the Bible to be the Word of God; and that 
therein is contained the true way to our salvation ? 

What foundation have you for that belief? 

What is your motive that you desire permission to preach the 
Gospel ? 

What is your knowledge of faith, of depravity, of repentance, 
justification, sanctification, and redemption? 

Does your own salvation and the salvation of your fellow- 
mortals, lie nearer to your heart than all other things in the 
world ? 

Can you subject yourself to the counsel of your brethren? 

Are you satisfied with our church government? 

Will you be obedient and ready to speak or hold your peace, as 
your brethren may think expedient? 
Are you willing, as much as is in your power, to assist in up- 
holding the itinerant plan, and supporting the same as much as 
possible ? 

\ None, however, can he admitted otherwise, than on trial: and 
may be admitted, or rejected without doing him any harm; other- 
wise it would be no trial. 



14 



2IO 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION SIXTH. 

QUARTERLY CONFERENCE. 

Qst. i. Who are the members of the quarterly Conference ? 

Ans. All the preachers, exhorters, leaders, and stewards, who 
reside within the bounds of the circuit or station. 

Qst 2. What is the business of the quarterly conference ? 

Ans. i . To elect a secretary whose duty it shall be to keep a 
correct record of all their proceedings, in a book provided for 
that purpose, in which the names of all the members composing 
the said conference, shall be entered 

2. To make a general, or, if necessary, a particular enquiry 
into the moral deportment o f all its members. 

3. To receive and try all appeals, references, and complaints, 
that may come regularly before them. 

4. To make settlement with the stewards and travelling 
preachers. 

5. To grant license to exhort, or preach, to such person or 
persons, as may have been recommended by, at least two thirds 
of the class of which he or they are members: Provided, how- 
ever, that none shall receive license, who cannot give satisfactory 
evidence of his or their call, experience, soundness in doctrine, 
and attachment to our church and government. 

Qst. 3. How are preachers from other societies received? 

Ans. If they come to us with certificates of good standing 
in the society in which thej^ have had membership; and give 
satisfaction to the Quarterly Conference, of their willingness 
to conform to our Church Government, and usages, then the 
Quarterly Conference may license them till the next Annual 
Conference ensuing; after which if their conduct is in accord- 
ance with the Gospel of Christ, they shall be considered 
as preachers or elders, who stand under a similar license 
among us. 

Qst. 4. What directions are necessary in case of appeals ? 

Ans. Any Exhorter, or Preacher, dissatisfied with the decision 
of a Quarterly Conference, shall, within thirty days after the 
Quarterfy Conference, notify the Secretary in writing, of his in- 
tention to appeal, together with his reasons for so doing; and it 
shall be the duty of the Secretary to take or send a certified copy 
of the proceedings, the notifications and reasons assigned, to the 
Annual Conference. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 



211 



It shall also be the duty of the quarterly Conference to open 
and close by singing and prayer. 

SECTION SEVENTH. 

MEMBERS IN GENERAL. 

Qst. How shall members be taken into our society ? 

Ans. When, at any meeting, a person makes known a desire 
to become a member of our society, then the preacher present 
shall put to him the following question: 

Have you experienced the pardon of your sins, and, are you 
determined by the grace of God, to save your soul ? 

If the person answers the question in the any affirmative, and no 
objection be made by any member, on account of his or her immoral 
conduct, then the preacher will give his right hand to such, as 
a member of our society, and with consent of the person, the 
preacher will record his or her name on the class book; but so long 
as any person cannot answer the above question in the affirma- 
tive, such person shall not be considered in full membership, and 
shall have no vote in the society. 

Every member of this society shall acknowledge and confess 
that he believes the Bible to be and contain the holy Word of 
God: that he will henceforth strive, with all his heart, to seek his 
eternal welfare in Christ Jesus, and work out his salvation with 
fear and trembling, to the end that he may be enabled to flee 
from the wrath to come. 

Every member shall endeavor to lead a good life, be dilligent 
in prayer, particularly in private, and, for his own edification, 
to be present at and attend to, when practicable, all meetings 
for worship. 

Heads of families should never omit to pray with their families, 
morning and evening, and to set them a good example in all the 
Christian virtues. 

Every one should strive to w T alk as in the presence of God; 
also, to accustom himself to a close communion with God, in 
all his employments, and never to speak evil of his fellow beings; 
but to practise love towards friend and foe, to do good to the poor, 
and and to endeavor to be a follower of Jesus Christ indeed. 

Every one shall keep the Sabbath day holy, as required in 
the word of God. — Neither buy nor sell, but spend the same in 



212 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



exercises of devotion, in reading and hearing the word of God, 
and with singing spiritual hymns to the honor and glory of 
God. 

It is the duty of every member to lead a quiet peaceable and 
godly life among men, as it becomes a Christian to live in peace; 
and to be subject to the higher or ruling powers, as the word 
of God requires. 

Every member of our society should willingly and freely 
contribute something quarterly, "as the I,ord has prospered 
him," i Cor. XVI, 2, towards the support of the itinerant 
preachers. 

The foregoing rules are drawn up for the better regulation of 
our society; and we believe they are founded in the word of God, 
and incumbent on all who are members of our Church to observe. 
Should any habitually neglect them, they shall be admonished, 
and if they do not reform they cannot continue among us. 

SECTION EIGHTH. 

FORMING AND MEETING CLASSES. 

Whereas it is made the duty of elders and preachers to form 
and hold class-meetings, which should always be done in great 
moderation and meekness, no member will be allowed to use any 
means to prevent an elder or preacher in the discharge of his duty. 
A member doing so, shall be accountable to the next Quarterly 
Conference. 

SECTION NINTH. 

CLASSES. 

I. A class shall consist of three or more members, who shall 
annually elect one member from their own or some other class, 
who shall be called their leader. 

Qst. What is the duty of a leader. 

Ans. It shall be his duty to meet his class in prayer-meeting 
or class-meeting, at least once a week; to speak to them concern- 
ing the spiritual welfare of their souls, and to exhort them to 
unity and love. And he shall extend the freedom of our pra3 r er 
and class-meetings to all sincere and well disposed persons who 
may desire to attend them. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 



213 



II. Every class shall annually elect one who shall be called 
class steward. 

Qst. What is the duty of a steward? 

Ans. 1. He shall collect quarterly contributions for the sup- 
port of the traveling preachers ; keep an accurate account thereof, 
and return the same to each Quarterly Conference. 

2. He shall be accountable to the Quarterly Conference, for 
the faithful discharge of his duties as steward of his class. 

Qst. What shall be done in case of immoral conduct? 

Ans. The member or members complained of, or charged with 
immorality, shall be tried by the class to which they belong, or a 
select number thereof chosen by the parties concerned, with the 
preacher in charge of the circuit or station, who shall be chair- 
man; and, if found guilty, the accused shall be expelled, unless 
satisfaction be given by an expression of repentance or other- 
wise. But, should any member be dissatisfied with the decision, 
an appeal may be had to the quarterly conference, by giving 
notice thereof to the preacher in charge. In such case, however, 
the same persons shall not sit in judgment, on the same case. 

Qst. What shall be done when members trespass against each 
other ? 

Ans. If thy brother shall trespass against thee, go and tell 
him his fault between thee and him alone; if he shall hear thee, 
thou hast gained thy brother; but, if he will not hear thee, then 
take with thee one or two more; and if he shall neglect to hear 
them, tell it unto the church; but if he neglect to hear the church, 
let him be unto thee as a heathen man and a publican. 

Qst. What shall be done, in casse of disputes between mem- 
bers or preachers ? 

Ans. The preacher to whom it shall be known, shall inquire 
into the circumstances of the case, and shall recommend to the 
contending parties a reference consisting of one arbiter chosen 
by the plaintiff and another by the defendant, and a third by 
those two; then these three are to decide. 

But, if either be dissatisfied with the decision; such may have 
a right to an appeal to the next quarterly Conference, for a 
second arbitration; where each party shall choose two arbiters, 
and the four shall choose a fifth; a decision of a majority of 
whom shall be final. Any person refusing to abide by this 
decision ; and every member refusing, in cases of debt or other 
disputes, to refer the matter to arbitration when recommended to 



214 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



him by a preacher or leader; or who shall enter into a law suit 
with another member before these measures are taken, shall be 
expelled; except when the case. is of such a nature, as to require 
and justify a process at law, as executors or administrators, or 
when a member is in danger of suffering an unexpected loss of 
property. 

Every class-leader shall keep a record of the proceedings of 
Church trials, deaths, expulsions aud removals, in a book pro- 
vided for that purpose; and it shall be his duty, in case of an 
appeal, to send said record to the Quarterly Conference. 

Any person wishing to obtain license to exhort or preach, must 
obtain, from the class of which he is a member, by a vote of two 
thirds of the members, a recommendation in writing signed by 
the leader, to the Quarterly Conference, of his circuit or station. 

SECTION TENTH. 

PREACHERS' DUTIES. 
Qst. What are the duties of preachers ? 

Ans. To preach Christ crucified, whenever he can get hearers; 
to form classes ; to converse with the members on the spiritual 
condition of their souls; to seek to administer relief; to strengthen 
and direct those that are afflicted and labor under temptations; 
to animate the indolent; to endeavor as much as possible to 
edify and instruct all in faith, in grace, and in the knowledge of 
Jesus Christ; to visit the sick on all occasions; to strive to enforce 
and confirm the doctrines he delivers, by a well ordered and 
exemplary life. 

Qst. What are the directions given to our preachers ? 

Ans. Be diligent. Never trifle away your time unnecessarily; 
always be serious; let your motto be, holiness to the Lord. Avoid 
all lightness and jesting; converse sparingly; conduct yourself 
prudently with women ; and demean yourself, in all respects, as 
a true Christian. 

Be at all times averse to crediting evil reports; believe evil of 
no one, without good evidence; put the best construction on 
every thing. 

2. Speak evil of no one; whatever may be your own thoughts, 
keep them within your own breast, till you can tell the person 
concerned what you think wrong in his conduct. 

3d. Let your business be to save as many souls as possible. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 84 1. 



215 



To this employment give yourself up wholly. Visit those who 
need it; and act in all things, not according to your own will, 
but as a son in the gospel. For as such it becomes your duty, 
to employ your time in the manner prescribed, in preaching and 
visiting from house to house, in instruction and prayer, and in 
meditating on the word of God; with these be occupied until our 
Lord cometh. 

SECTION ELEVENTH. 

CIRCUIT PREACHERS' DUTIES. 

Qst. What are the duties of a circuit preacher ? 
Ans. I. To take the circuit assigned him, willingly. 

2. To attend the appointments on his circuit, regularly; 
preach to the people; and hold society-meetings, wherever it is 
acceptable with the people. 

3. The preacher in charge is to see that there are suitable 
persons appointed in each class, as stewards, leader or leaders. 

4. To read the following three sections of our discipline, 
every six months, in each class, viz: — The Confession of Faith; 
The Duty of Members; and the Duty of Leaders and Stewards. 

5. To sit as president on the trial of members, and see that a 
correct account of the same is kept. 

6. To render a strict account of the condition of his circuit, 
to the Presiding Elder, at each Quarterly Conference, where he 
is to be held accountable for the neglect of any regular appoint- 
ments on his circuit. 

7. To give charge to all local agents of the Religious Tele- 
scope, to keep an account of all its subscribers in their respective 
neighborhoods. 

8. To make settlement with the local agents, every six 
months, and render an account thereof to the district agent. 

8. To make out a list of all the appointments on his circuit, 
and present it to the Presiding Elder at each Annual Conference, 
for the convenience of his successor. 

SECTION TWELFTH. 

ORDINATION OF ELDERS. 

I. On the day appointed there shall be a suitable sermon or 
exhortation delivered. 



2l6 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



II. After their names have been read aloud, the Bishop or Elder 
shall read the following articles to all who may be chosen for 
ordination: 

An Elder must be blameless, as the steward of God, not self 
willed, not soon angry; not given to wine, no striker not given 
to filthy lucre. But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, 
sober, just, holy, temperate; holding fast the faithful word as he 
hath been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine both 
to exhort and convince the gainsay ers. Ti. i ; 7—9. 

Qst. Do you trust that you are inwardly moved by the Holy 
Ghost, to take upon you the office of the ministry, to serve God 
in the Church of Christ, to the honor and glory of his holy 
name? 

Ans. I trust I am. 

Qst. Do you believe the Holy Scriptures; old and new Testa- 
ment? 
Ans. I do believe them. 

Qst. Will you apply all your diligence to frame and fashion 
your life according to the doctrines of Christ; and to make 
yourself, as much as in you lieth, a wholesome example of the 
flock of Christ? 

Ans. I will, the Lord being my helper. 

Qst. Will you obey them to whom the charge and govern- 
ment over you is committed, and follow their godly admoni- 
tions with a willing and ready mind. 

Ans. I will endeavor, through the grace of God, so to do. 

Then prayer is to be offered. 

(After prayer the Bishop and Elders shall lay their hands upon 
the heads of every one of them, and say:) 

"Take thou authority to execute the office of an Elder in the 
Church of God, in the name of the Father, the Son, and the 
Holy Ghost: Amen." 

( Hereupon the Bis hop or Elder shall deliver to every one of 
them the Holy Bible, saying:) 

' ' Take thou authority to read and preach the word of God in 
the Church of Christ." 

Then the Bishop or Elder shall pray. — And after prayer he 
shall read from Luke, 12 C. 35 to 38, v : ) Let your loins be girded 
about, and your lights burning, and ye yourselves like unto 
men that wait for their Lord, when he shall return from the wed- 
ding; that when he cometh and knocketh, they may open unto 



DISCIPLINE OF 1 841. 



217 



him immediately. — Blessed are those servants, whom the Lord, 
when he cometh, shall find watching. Verily I say unto you, 
that he shall gird himself, and make them sit down to meat, and 
will come forth and serve them. And if he shall come in the 
second watch, or come in the third watch, and find them so, 
blessed are those servants." 

(After this the following benediction is to be pronounced:) 
The peace of God keep your hearts and minds in the knowledge 
of Jesus Christ our Lord: Amen. 

SECTION THIRTEENTH. 

ELDERS, THEIR ELECTION, ORDINATION AND DUTY. 
Qst. How is an Elder constituted ? 

Ans. After a probation of three years, a preacher may be 
presented to the yearly Conference, for consideration; and if on 
examination by the Conference, he should be chosen as an Elder, 
he may, by the imposition of hands, be ordained by a Bishop 
and two Elders. It shall, however, be the privilege of and Annual 
Conference, to grant a permit to licentiates, to perform the ordi- 
nance of baptism, and administer the sacrament where circum- 
stances make it necessary. 

2. What is the duty of an Elder? — To preach as often as he 
can, and to baptise; and assist the Presiding Elder to administer 
the Lord's supper; but when the Presiding Elder cannot attend, 
then one or two Elders shall perform this duty; he shall also 
perform all parts of divine worship; endeavor to establish and 
hold class-meetings, and assist in the election of leaders and 
stewards. 

3. Where a local Elder or preacher, who does not suffer want 
himself, preaches at a place, where no travelling preacher comes 
to, he shall make collections — take a catalogue thereof, and 
bring or send it to the Presiding Elder or to the Conference, for 
the support of needy preachers who preach among poor people. 

4. Should a traveling Preachers or Elder desire to leave the 
district assigned him, he must first acquaint the Presiding Elder 
of his intention by writing; and should any one leave or neglect 
his station, except it be through sickness or other unavoidable 
circumstances, he shall be accountable to the next annual Con- 
ference, and shall not be entitled to any salary for the time he 
may have traveled during the year. 



2l8 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



6. Where there are preachers found to be settled at a place, 
who are poor and indigent, and yet required to preach, it is 
reasonable and just that the Elders should provide for their 
support in proportion to the time they may be employed, and 
by making a collection for their benefit among the societies in 
their District; though not to exceed the sum fixed and alloted 
to the traveling preachers. 

SECTION EOURTEENTH 

PRESIDING ELDERS— ELECTION AND DUTY. 

Qst. How are the Presiding Elders to be elected ? 

Ans. They shall be elected by the Annual Conferences, from 
among the elders, for one year. 

Qst. What are the duties of a Presiding Elder ? 

Ans. i. To travel through the District apppointed him; and 
to preach as often as he can. 

2. He is to take charge of the traveling and local preachers 
in his district ; and to see that they conduct themselves as becometh 
the Gospel. 

3. He shall appoint the quarterly and camp meetings; and, 
if possible, attend them: he shall hold Quarterly Conferences 
with the preachers, exhorters, leaders and stewards, and admin- 
ister the ordinances of God's house: he shall enquire and 
examine whether the traveling and local preachers do their duty; 
and particularly, whether the local preachers, when practicable, 
preach every Sabbath. And where there are several, he is at 
times, to change them as may seem most beneficial, and to 
exhort them to maintain discipline and order, love and serious- 
ness in the society. 

4. He can also, in conjunction with two elders, preachers, ex- 
horters, or leaders, (one from each circuit,) change the preachers 
in his district. Should any circuit be found without a traveling 
preacher, it shall be his duty to employ a preacher to travel on 
that circuit until the next Annual Conference. 

5. And should any district happen to be without a Presiding 
Elder, information shall immediately be given to a Bishop, who 
shall appoint an elder to preside in said district, until the ensu- 
ing Annual Conference. 



discipline; of 1841. 



219 



SECTION FIFTEENTH. 
BISHOPS— ELECTION AND DUTIES. 
Qst. How are the Bishops to be elected? 

Ans. The General Conference shall elect them by a majority 
of votes; yet, the Conference may, at their option retain the 
former Bishops four years longer. The newly elected, how- 
ever, as well as those retained, must be capable of attending 
the conferences appointed them; otherwise they cannot be 
elected. 

Qst. What are the duties of Bishops ? 

Ans. 1. To preside over the Annual and General Confer- 
ences. 

2. In conjunction with the Presiding Elders, of the past and 
present years, they are to fix the appointments of the traveling 
preachers for the several circuits: Provided, that they do not 
allow any itinerant preacher to remain in the same station or 
circuit more than three consecutive years; unless particular cir- 
cumstances require it; and then only, with the consent of the 
Conference. 

3. The Bishops in conjunction with two elders appointed by 
Conference, shall point out the districts which are to be traveled 
by the Presiding Elders. 

4. They are to attend to and oversee the spiritual concerns of 
the Church. 

5. It is incumbent on them to perform the rites of ordina- 
tion. 

6. When a Bishop ceases or neglects to attend the several 
Conferences committed to his charge, he cannot be suffered to 
retain his office; unless prevented by sickness or other unavoid- 

* able circumstances. 

7. If our Church should, at anytime, be destitute of a Bishop, 
a Chairman shall be elected from among the elders at each An- 
nual Conference. Each Chairman shall attend the next succeed- 
ing Conference, in conjunction with the Chairman there elected; 
that a regular correspondence be maintained until the ensuing 
General Conference. 

8. It shall be the duty of the Bishops to see that a suitable 
sermon be delivered to the preachers present at each Annual 
Conference. 



220 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION SIXTEENTH. 
IMMORAL CONDUCT OF PREACHERS. 

Qst. What shall be done when a Bishop, Presiding Elder, 
or preacher, is reported of being guilty of immorality ? 

Ans. When a Bishop is thus accused, it shall be the duty of a 
Presiding Elder and an Elder after being duly notified, to 
enquire into and examine whether it is founded in truth. 
But as the apostle says: "Receive not an accusation against 
an Elder, but before two or three witnesses," i. Tim. V. 19., 
they shall not arraign him on mere vague reports; but if it 
appears that he is justly accused, they shall arraign him; take 
down their proceedings in writing, and send a copy thereof to 
the Bishop accused, and appoint a time and place where the 
accusers and the accused shall meet; where the case shall be 
tried by two Presiding Elders and three Elders: and if he is found 
guilty, he shall hold his peace until the sitting of the Annual 
Conference next ensuing, who shall again examine and try the 
said case. And if again found guilty, he shall be suspended or 
expelled, as the case may require. 

2. When a Presiding Elder is thus accused, it shall be the 
duty of the nearest Elder and a preacher, to enquire into and 
examine the same; and if the accused be found guilty, they 
shall take down their proceedings in writing and send the 
accused a copy thereof, and appoint a time and place where the 
accusers and the accused shall meet; and in the absence of the 
Bishop, another Presiding Elder and two Elders, shall examine 
the charge; and if he is found guilty, he shall hold his peace, 
until the next Annual Conference; where he shall be accountable. 

3. When an elder or preacher is charged with immoral con- 
duct, the preacher to whom it is known, shall take with him 
another preacher exhorter, or leader, and examine into the 
charge: Should he be found guilty, notice thereof shall be 
given him, and a time and place appointed where the accusers 
and the accused shall meet. Then three elders or preachers 
shall try his case, who are to be appointed by the parties con- 
cerned, each party appointing one, and the two a third; and if 
he be convicted, he shall hold his peace, till the Annual Confer- 
ence, where he shall be accountable. But should sufficient 
satisfaction be given, in either of the foregoing cases, by an 



DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 



221 



expression of repentance, or otherwise, they may be retained, if 
considered expedient. But should the accused Preacher, Elder 
or Bishop refuse to attend, after having been notified of the time 
and place of trial, he shall be suspended; and the committee 
shall notify him to appear at the next quarterly or Annual Con- 
ference, to answer to the charges preferred against him; and if he 
fails to attend, (sickness or unavoidable circumstances excepted,) 
he shall be suspended or expelled, as conference may think 
proper. 

SECTION SEVENTEENTH. 

PREACHERS' SALARIES. 

1. The annual allowance of a traveling Bishop, or Preacher, 
if he has no family, shall be one hundred dollars, and his 
traveling expenses, if he has a family, it shall be two hundred 
dollars, his traveling expenses, and house rent not exceeding 
forty dollars. 

2. When a traveling preacher has a family of children, the 
Quarterly Conference of his Circuit, is, in that case, to grant 
him such an allowance in addition to that above stated, as in 
their judgdment, will supply the wants of his family. 

Qst. What shall be done for the needy, superannuated or worn 
out, traveling preachers, and for their widows and orphans? 

Ans. The dividend falling to the different Conferences from 
the benevolent fund, shall be appropriated to their support. — 
Provided it be strictly observed that the Benevolent Fund money 
shall not be appropriated to any other purpose. 

If there are no such claimants as the above specified, it shall 
be retained by the Conference from year to year, until such cases 
do occur. And in case the Annual Conference shall, upon 
evidence received, be satisfied that there are such claimants, it 
shall be the duty of Conference to appoint a committee, one of 
whom shall be a Bishop, to divide said fund. Provided, however, 
that a superannuated preacher shall be allowed no more annually, 
than one hundred and fifty dollars, if married, and no more than 
seventy -five dollars, if unmarried: widows, no more, annually, 
than seventy-five dollars: and an orphan, no more than twenty, 
while under twelve years of age. 

Preachers' Presents. — Every traveling preacher in our society 
shall yearly account to the Conference for all the presents he may 



222 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



have received on his circuit to the amount of one dollar or more, 
for the use of himself or family. And if the Conference be 
satisfied that any circuit has given presents instead of col- 
lections, or that the preacher endeavored to get such, in place 
of collections, in such case, presents shall be considered col- 
lections, by the Conference. But, if on examination, this 
should not appear, then those preachers having received presents 
shall hold them as their own; and in addition, receive all the 
discipline allows them. 

SECTION EIGHTEENTH. 

MARRIAGE CEREMONY. 
ADDRESS. 

We are gathered together in the sight of God, and in the 
presence of these witnesses, to join together N. and M. as husband 
and wife, if any persons present know any just cause or impedi- 
ment why these persons should not be joined in marriage, 
let the same now speak, or' for ever hereafter keep silent. 

( If no impediment be alleged, then shall the minister say unto 
the man:) 

N. Wilt thou have this woman to thy wedded wife, to live 
together after God's ordinance. Wilt thou love, honor, and 
comfort her, in sickness and in health, in prosperity and ad- 
versity; and forsaking all others, keep thee only unto her, so long 
as ye both shall live. If so then answer, Yes. ( Then shall the 
Minister say to the woman:) M. wilt thou have this man, to 
thy wedded husband, to live together after God's ordinance. 
Wilt thou love, honor and obey him, in sickness and in health, 
in prosperity and adversity; and forsaking all others, keep thee 
only unto him so long as ye both shall live. If so, then 
answer, Yes. 

(Then the Minister shall require them to join their right hands 
together, and say.) 

Those whom God hath joined together, let not man put 
asunder. 

In as much as N. and M. have consented together in marriage; 
and have witnessed the same before God and these witnesses, 
I pronounce them husband and wife, in the name of the Father, 
'the Son, and Holy Ghost: Amen. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 



223 



SECTION NINETEETH. 

NECESSITY OF UNION AMONG OURSELVES. 

Let us be deeply sensible (from what we have known,) of the 
evil of a division in principle spirit or practice; and of the dreadful 
consequences to ourselves and others. If we are united, what can 
Stand before us ? If we are divided, we shall injure ourselves, the 
work of God, and the souls of our people. 

What can be done in order to a closer union with each other? 

1. Let us be deeply convinced of the absolute necessity of it. 

2. Pray earnestly for, and speak truly and freely to each 
other. 

3. When we meet let us never part without prayer. 

4. Take great care not to despise each others gifts. 

5. Never speak lightly of each other. 

6. Let us defend each other's characters, in every thing, so far 
as is consistent with truth. 

7. Labor, in honor, each, to prefer another before himself. 

8. We recommend a serious examination of the causes, evils 
and cures of heart and church divisions. 

SECTION TWENTIETH. 

VISITING FROM HOUSE TO HOUSE, AND ENFORCING 
PRACTICAL RELIGION. 

Qst. How can we further assist those under our care ? 

Ans. 1. By instructing them at their own houses; which is 
necessary to promote confidence and communion with God 
among us, to wean us from the love of the world, and to inure 
us to a life of heavenly mindedness; also, to encourage 
us to strive after and practise brotherly love, that no evil think- 
ing or judging of one another be found among us; and lastly 
that we may learn to do, as we would wish to be done unto. 

2. Every preacher should make it his duty to instruct the 
people on every occasion, both public and private; and exhort 
them to be dilligent in all good works and doctrine. Until this 
be done and that in sincerity, we shall, upon the whole, be of 
but little use, and our good shall be evil spoken of; therefore, 
wherever we may be we should guard against useless and idle 
conversation. 



224 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Undoubtedly this private application of visiting from house to 
house, and exhorting the people, is found or implied in these 
solemn words of the Apostle: 

I charge thee therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ 
who shall judge the quick and dead at his appearing and his 
kingdom; preach the word; be instant in season and out of 
season ; reprove, rebuke, exhort, with all long suffering and doc- 
trine. 2. Tim. IV. i. 2. 

SECTION TWENTY-FIRST. 

INSTRUCTION OF CHILDREN. 

What shall be done to benefit the rising generation? 

Let him who is in any way zealous for God and the souls 
of men, begin the work without delay. Wherever children are 
found, meet them as often as possible; speak freely with them, 
and instruct them diligently; exhort them to be good, and 
pray with them, earnestly yet simply and plainly, that they 
may learn to know their Creator and Redeemer in the days 
of their youth. 

SECTION TWENTY-SECOND. 

DOCTRINAL PUBLICATIONS. 

No one of our preachers or laymen, shall become the author 
of any Doctrinal Book or pamphlet, in a printed form without 
the approbation of the Annual Conference, orof a committee chosen 
by the same. And if any preacher or la}~man violates this rule, 
he shall be accountable to the class, or to the Quarterly or 
Annual Conference, as the case may be. 

SECTION TWENTY-THIRD. 

OATHS. 

We believe that the mode of testifying to the truth, when 
required so to do, in a legal form, by way of affirmation, is on 
us solemnly, conscientiously, and fully binding before God to tell 
the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. 



DISCIPLINE OF 1841. 



225 



SECTION TWENTY-FOURTH. 
ARDENT SPIRITS. 

The distilling and vending of ardent spirits shall hereafter be 
forbidden throughout our whole society. Should any preacher, 
exhorter, leader, or layman, from and after the next Annual 
Conference in 1842, be engaged in distilling or vending ardent 
spirits, he shall be accountable to the class, the Quarterly or 
Annual Conference to which he belongs, as the case may be. If 
the offending brother be an exhorter, leader, or layman, it shall 
be the duty of the preacher in charge, to admonish him in 
meekness; if he be a preacher, it shall be the duty of the Presid- 
ing Officer of a Quarterly or Annual Conference to admonish 
him to desist from his unholy employment ; and if all friendly 
admonitions faii> such offending person or persons shall no more 
be considered as members of our church, but be expelled from 
the same. — Provided, however, that this rule shall not be so 
construed, as to prevent druggists and others from vending for 
medicinal or mechanical purposes. 

SECTION TWENTY-FIFTH. 

FREE MASONRY. 

Free Masonry, in every sense of the word, shall be totally 
prohibited, and in no wise tolerated in our society. And 
should any of our members continue to attend their lodges, 
or join as a member, in any Masonic procession, or otherwise 
join a Masonic fraternity, he shall, for so doing, be excluded 
from our church. 

SECTION TWENTY-SIXTH. 

SLAVERY. 

All slavery, in every sense of the word, is totally prohibited, 
and shall in no way, be tolerated in our church. Should any be 
found in our society, who hold slaves, they cannot continue as 
members, unless they do personally manumit or set free such 
slaves. 

15 



226 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



SECTION TWENTY-SEVENTH. 

RULES AND REGULATIONS, OF OUR PRINTING ESTABLISHMENT 
IN CIRCLEVILLE, OHIO. 

RULE I. 

ist. The above establishment shall be called the Conference 
Printing Establishment of the United Brethren In Christ. 

2d. The legislative anthority, herein granted, is vested in 
the General Conference of said Church; whose duty it is, to 
make or amend any rules, as in their judgment, may seem 
expedient. 

3d. It shall be the duty of General Conference, to appoint or 
elect three Trustees, every four years; and also, to employ an 
Editor and Treasurer. 

4th. If a vac ancy should occur in the Editorial or Treasury 
Department, it shall be the duty of the Trustees to employ some 
other suitable person or persons, to fill said vacancy, until the 
sitting of the next General Conference. 

5th. In case a vacancy in the Board of Trustees should occur, 
it shall be the duty of the remaining two, to appoint a third 
person, to fill the vacancy, until the sitting of the next General 
Conference. 

6th. The proceeds of said establishment, over and above con- 
tingent expenses, shall be applied to the traveling and worn out 
preachers, and their widows and orphans, to be equally divided 
annually, among the different Annual Conferences. 

RULE II. 

ist. It shall be the duty of the Trustees, to make settlement 
with the Treasurer and Editor, every six months ; and cause the 
Treasurer to make out a report to each Annual Conference, of 
the Scioto District; and also, to make a special report to each 
General Conference. 

2d. It shall be the duty of the Scioto Annual Conference, in 
the interval of the sessions of the General Conference, to see 
that the Editor, Treasurer and Trustees discharge their official 
duties as required. 

3rd. On impeachment of any of the above named officers it 
shall be the duty of the above named Annual Conference, to 
examine into said impeachment; and if guiltj^, in their opinion, 



DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 



227 



to dismiss them and supply the vacancy, until the sitting of the 
next General Conference. 

RULE III. 

1 st. It shall be the duty of the Editor, to pay strict attention to 
all communications sent for insertion; to revise them, if neces- 
sary, and then insert them. But, if he should receive any, 
which, in his opinion, are repugnant to the doctrine and rules 
of our church, he shall present them to the Treasurer, or to one 
or more of the trustees; and if rejected by them, they shall 
be withheld; otherwise, inserted. 

2nd. It shall be the duty of the Editor, to write editorial for 
each number of the paper; and to attend strictly to the reading 
of proof-sheet, making selections, &c. 

3d. It shall be the duty of the Editor to keep a general over- 
sight over the hands in the office; and to see that they do not 
spend their time in idleness. 

4th. The Trustees shall have a general oversight over the 
Editor and Treasurer, and see that they discharge their duty; 
and if they do not they may be suspended, until the sitting of 
the next Annual Conference, which shall determine the matter; 
in which case said Trustees shall supply the vacancy for the time 
being. 

RULE IV. 

1 st. It shall be the duty of the Treasurer to take charge of the 
temporal concerns of the office; to keep all the books pertaining 
thereunto; to furnish, at the direction of the Trustees, such ma- 
terials as may be needed at all times; and to act as general 
book-agent under the instruction of said Trustees. 

2d. The Treasurer, w T hen not employed in his official duties, 
shall work in the office as a hand. 

3d. The Trustees shall have privilege to make any by-laws, 
that may seem expedient to them, for the better regulation of 
the minor concerns of the office; provided, they do not violate 
any part of the above rules. 

SECTION TWENTY-EIGHTH. 

BOOK AGENCY 

1st. There shall be a Book Agent appointed in each Annual 
Conference district, whose duty it shall be to take charge of all 



228 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



books sent to him by the Treasurer of, and appertaining to, the 
Conference Printing Establishment in Circleville Ohio. 

2d. Said Agent shall be accountable to the Treasurer of said 
establishment. 

3d. It shall be his duty, so far as may be safe or expedient, 
to distribute to the circuit preachers, for the use of the church, 
all the books that may be sent to him by the Treasurer. 

4th. Said Agent shall keep an accurate account of all the 
distributions of books, and collections of money, for and in 
behalf of, said establishment. If books are wanted in his dis- 
trict, he is to notify the Treasurer by letter. 

5th. Said Agent shall make settlement with the Treasurer, 
by letter or otherwise, every six months. 

SECTION TWENTY-NINTH. 

ORDER TO BE OBSERVED IN BUILDING MEETING HOUSES. 

Qst. Is any thing advisable in regard to the building of 
Meeting Houses ? 

Ans. L,et all our meeting houses be built plainly and neatly 
with free seats, and not more expensive than necessary. 

Qst To whom are our meeting houses, and the premises be- 
longing to them, to be deeded ? 

Ans. To a board of Trustees, and their successors in office, 
in trust, as the property of the Church of the United Brethren 
in Christ. 

Qst. How is a board of Trustees constituted ? 

Ans. Whenever it is contemplated, by a society, to purchase 
or to build a Meeting House, it shall be the duty of a leader or 
steward of such society, to make it known to the Quarterly 
Conference of the Circuit or station to which he belongs, whose 
duty it shall be to appoint a judicious board of Trustees, of not 
less than three in number. Provided however, that none be 
required to serve more than four years, unless indispensably 
necessary. No person shall be considered eligible as a Trustee 
for any of our Meeting Houses, who is not a regular member 
of our Church. 

Qst. How are the Trustees to proceed in building a house ? 

Ans. They shall form an estimate of the amount necessary 
to procure a lot, to build, and to make such other improvements 



DISCIPLINE OF 184I. 



229 



as may be conceived necessary. However, they shall not com- 
mence building, until two thirds of the money according to such 
est imate shall have been secured or subscribed and also a lawful 
title for the lot upon which they intend to build. 

To hold annual meetings and keep a fair and regular record of 
the transactions of their Board, in a book provided for that pur- 
pose, which shall at all times be open for inspection by the 
Quarterly Conference of said circuit or station. 

To take care of the meeting house property, furniture, prem- 
ises, burial ground, &c. 

Qst. What shall be done when a vacancy or vacancies occur 
in the Board of Trustees ? 

Ans. It shall be the duty of the Quarterly Conference to ap- 
point a suitable person or persons, to fill such vacancies. 

Qst. What shall be done when any of our houses are 
vacant ? 

Ans. It shall be the duty of a Quarterly Conferance of the 
nearest circuit to appoint, not less than three suitable persons 
for Trustees, who shall have the power, when authorized by two 
thirds of the members of that Conference, to lease, rent or sell, 
such meeting house, and the appurtenances belonging to it; 
and to appropriate the money arising from such lease, rent, or 
sale, to what said Conference may direct. 

Note. — The trustees should be careful, in all cases, to have 
deeds of conveyance legally executed, and recorded in the 
county records where the property is: that is; to have the deed 
made to them and to their successors in office, in trust for, the 
Church of the United Brethren In Christ and, to erect and 
build or cause to be built, a house of worship for the use of the 
members of said Church. 

SECTION THIRTIETH. 

CERTIFICATES. 

Members of our society moving to other places and seeking 
admission there, shall procure such a certificate as this; signed 
by a leader or preacher. "This is to certify that A. B. is a mem- 
ber of good standing, in the church of the United Brethren In 
Christ, at 

(Date, &c.) 



230 



UNITED BRETHREN DISCIPLINES. 



Preachers removing from one Conference district to another, 
shall when they apply to another Conference for admission, pro- 
duce a transfer from the Conference to which he formerly 
belonged. 

CORRECTION. 

In the second article of Constitution, page 14, read — 
"Sec. 8. — The right of appeal shall be inviolate." 
[This section appears to have been overlooked by the Secre- 
taries.] 



DISCIPLINE OF 184.I. 23I 



INDEX. 

Page. 

Annual Conference - 208 

Ardent Spirits - - - 225 

Building Meeting Houses, &c. - 228 

Book Agency 227 

Bishops— Election and Duties 219 

Confession of Faith - 204 

Constitution 205 

Classes - 212 

Circuit Preachers' Duties 215 

Certificates 229 

Doctrinal Publications - - - - 224 

Elders' Election, Ordination, &c. 217 
Forming and meeting Classes - - - - 212 

Free Masonry -----225 

General Conference . -207 

Immoral Conduct of Preachers 220 

Instruction of Children . 224 

Members in General - 211 

Marriage Ceremony -222 

Necessity of Union, &c. --223 

Origin of the Church - -- - -201 

Ordination of Elders 215 

Oaths - 224 

Preachers' Duties 214 

Presiding Elders' Election and Duties ---218 

Preachers' Salaries 221 

Printing Establishment 226 

Quarterly Conference - 210 

Reception of Preachers - - . 209 

Slavery --225 

Visiting from House to House - -- -- .- .- -223 



CERTIFICATION. 



I hereby certify that the English form of the Discipline prior 
to 1815 and of the Disciplines of 1815 and 1817, as contained in 
this volume, is a correct translation of the original German text. 

A. W. Drury. 

Dayton,. Ohio, August 26, 1895. 



I hereby certify that the English Disciplines from 1819 to 1841 

inclusive, as contained in this volume, are a faithful reproduction 

of the originals, including errors of orthography, punctuation, 

capitalization, and typography. _.• a 

r W. A. Shuey. 

Dayton, Ohio, August 26, 1895. 



232 



PART II. 
Disciplines in German, 
1814-1819, 1841. 



$ie Seljre ber SBereinigten 33riikr in (£Jjrtfto. 



21 v t U e t 1. ^m Harnett ©otteg befennen roir t)or ^ebermann, baft roir 
glauben an ben ©intgen roatjren ©ott, 23ater, <Sot)n unb t)etligen ©eift, baft 
biefe brer) ©tng finb, ber 33ater im <Sot)n, ber ©or)n im $ater, unb ber tjeilige 
©eift gleiajeg 2Befen, mit beiben, baft biefer ©ott, <£immel unb (Srben, unb atfeg 
roag barinnen tft, forootjl fiajtbar alg unftctjtoar, erfajaffen t)at, unb afleg tra- 
get, regiret, fct)t|et unb erplt. 

21 rt. 2. 2Bir glauben an ^efum (Sfjriftum, baft er roatjrer ©ott unb 
3J?enfct), <Qeilanb unb 33erfbr)ner, ber ganjen SBelt ift, baft aHe menfdjen buret) 
it)n feelig roerben fonnen, roenn fie rooUen, bag biefer SefuS, fur ung gelitten, 
geftorben unb begraben, am briten tage roieber auferftanben, gen §immel ge^ 
fatjren, unb am jitngften tage, roieber fommen roirb, ju rict)ten bie lebenbigen 
unb bie toben. 

21 r t. 3. SDBir glauben an ben fjeiligen ©eift, bag er oom SBater unb <Sot)n 
auggetje, baft roir buret) it)n miiffen get)eiligt roerben, unb ben ©lauben erlangen, 
rt>elct)er ung reiniget oon 2IHer beftecfrmg beg fleifctjeg unb beg geifteg. 

21 r t. 4. 2Bir gtauben bag bie 23ibet ©otteg roort ift, baft fie ben toatjren 
roeg ju unferm feelent)eil unb feeligteit enttjalte, bag ein jeber roafjrer (Et)rift, 
biefelbe, mit ben einfliffen beg getfteg=©ott, @in?ig unb alein ?u feiner ridjt= 
fct)nur netjmen miiffe, unb bag ot)ne bufe unb glauben, an S^fum (Stjriftum 
oergebung ber fiinben, unb naajfolge ^efu (Stjrifti, niemanb ein roatjrer ©tjrift 
feon fann. 

21 rt. 5. SBir glauben bag bie Sefjre, roelctje bie tjeilige fdjrift enttjalt, 
namlict) ber faE in 2lbam, unb bie errettung buret) ^efum ©tjriftum ber garden 
2Be(t georebiget unb oerfiinbiget roerben folte. 2leuftere geictjen, unb oerorb= 
nungen namlict) bie taufe, unb bag gebact)tnig beg §erm, in augtt)eilung beg 
brobg unb SBeing, roerben anempfotjlen, roie auct) bag fuftroafctjen, roo eg be= 
gefvret roirb. 

3 



9hm tan lite 9iegcltt tat $emntgten $tutar in djrifto* 



2t r t. 1. Sftur foldje briiber, f often von ben oereinigten Sriiber in ©Ijrifto, 
al§ ifjre prebiger anerfant roerben, roela)e fid^ m bsm enbe ben tljrer ©on? 
feren?, ober einer grofjenoerfamlung angemelbet finben, beg berfelbigen, orbent* 
lid), ©ramenirt roerben, unb foIgenbe§ beantroortet, ob er an (Sfjriftum ©laube 
ob er bie oergebung feiner fiinben ©mpfangen, ob er bem frieben unb ber 
fjeiligung naajjage, 06 iE)m fein eigen fjeil, mit bem Ijeil feiner nebenmens 
ft^en am fjer^en liege, ob er bem rati) ber briiber fttt) unterroerfen roiH, folate 
foUen eine fdjriftlidje erlaubnijj erlangen. 

21 rt. 2. ©oldje prebiger foflen in ber (Sonferenj bijd^bffe erroafjlen, 
burtt) bie meJjrfjeit ber ftimmen, auf br?n jaljr. 

2Ba§ finb bie Sifcpflidje $flicf)ten. 

21 rt. 3. lten§. in ber ©onferen?, aI3 $prefibent oormfi^en, 2te3. foil 
er ba§ reajt Ijaben, mit benftimung ber ©onferenj m agiren. 3ten§. burdj 
mfttmung ber ©onferenj ift u)m freujeit gegeben altefie m ©rroa^Ien. 

21 rt. 4. ©egen men finb bie bifapfe unb altefie unb prebiger raegen 
fiiten roitrigem betragen Derantroortlia) ? gegen bie algemeine ©onferen?, mo 
aber ba§ betragen gegen bie bibel tft, bafs jeigen ba finb r)inlanglidj, fo foil 
ber bem eg befant ift, noa) mef)r prebiger ?u fia; nefjmen, unb e§ unter* 
fua)en, ift e3 gegen bie Si&el, fo foil berfelbige fdnoeigen bifj jur ©onferenj. 

21 rt. 5. (Sin jeber prebiger foil alien fleijj anroenben, bie gemeinbe 
,fo »iel aI3 moglid) m erbauen mit leljr, unb leben, mit gebdtl; unb gott= 
feeligem roanbel, er foil fia; beftreben, mit alien glibern feiner gemeinbe 
befant ?u roerben, fo ba§ er biefelben fan ben namen nennen, unb roo eg 
moglid), oon tljrem feelenmftanb mit if)nen reben. 

21 rt. 6. $n jeber gemeinbe follen trorgenger erroef)let roerben, berren 
pflia)t foil feon anfang unb enbe ober befcfjlujj m madden in ben batftunben 
unb prioatftunben, alfo bie $ranfen ?u befudjen unb ein jebeS glieb ber ges 

meinbe ?u erma^nen unb in liebe m erf)alten unb auf fia) felbft feljsn. 

■a 4 



5 



21 rt. 7. ©in jebeS glieb ber gemeinbe foil befennen, bag eg bie 93ibel 
fur ©otteg wort ^alte, bag eg fid^ Don nun an t>on t)er?en beftrebe, fein 
f)eil 2U fud)en in ©fjrtfto, unb feme feeligfeit ju fdjaffen mit furd)t unb bittern, 
unb bent ©roigen ?orn gotten m entfliefjen.. 

21 rt. 8. ©in jebeg foil fid) beftreben, einen genauen unb gottfeeligen 
roanbel ju fitfjren, fletfjig ferjn im gebcit befonberg im oerborgenen unb mo 
moglid) alien uerfamlungen benbeg offentlid)en gottegbienft unb betftunben 
fit feiner erbauung benrooljnett. 

21 rt. 9. §aubter in familien, foHen eg nid)t Derfeumen, beg morgenbg, 
unb beg abenbg mit ben if)rigen m baten, benfelben ein guteg ©r.empel fe^en, 
in alien d)rifilid)en tugenben. 

21 rt. 10. ©in jebeg glieb foil fid) beftreben, genau alg in ber gegen* 
mart gotten jit nmnbeln, bet) feinen gefdjaften an einen genauen umgang 
mit gott geroofmen, liebe iiben gegen freunbe unb feinbe, ben armen guteg 
tfjun, unb fudjen in ber tfjat, ein -ttadjfolger $efu ©Ijrifti m fein. 

21 rt. 11. ©in jebeg glieb foil fid) ftarieS entljalten, unb eg nur m not!), 
alg arjenet), unb metejin gebraudjen. 

21 rt. 12. ©in jebeg glieb roirb fid) entljalten, ©ontagg gefd)afte ?u 
treiben, ju faufen unb oerfaufen fonbern foil benfelben in anbad)t, mit fingen 
geiftreid)er liber, mr unb lob gotteg mbringen. 

21 rt. 13. ©in jebeg biefer gemeinbe folte trirteljafjrltd), aug fretem 
mitten, fo t)iel beotragen, alg eg feine umftanbe erlauben unb bie retfenben 
prebiger m unterfttttjen. 

21 r t. 14. ©g ift pflidjt eineg jeben glieb biefer gemeinbe, ein frieblidjeg, 
ftilleg, unb gottfeeligeg leben ju fiif)ren, in bem umgang mit alien menfd)en, 
rate eg einem ©fjriften ge^imet, im frieben ju leben, abfonberlid) foil jebeg, 
ber Dbrigfeit, unb ben gefe^en beg lanbeg gef)ord)en, ben bie obrigfeit ift 
oon goit oerorbnet. 

21 rt. 15. 3Benn fid) ftreitigfeiten ereignen folten, |raifd)ett jmen ober 
mefjren gliber ber gemeinben, von raegen fd)ulben, ober irgenb einer anbern 
urfad), unb bie ftreibenten partljeten, ju feinem uertrag fommen tonnen, fo 
foH ber prebiger raeldjer bie auffid)t itber bie gemeinbe fjat bie <3ad)e unter* 
fud)en, unb ben ftreibenten partfjeten eine referent anempfe^len, biefelben 
foil aug bret) glieber ber gemeinbe befte!)en, roooon ber flager einen, ber 
bellagte ben anbern, unb biefe bret) foUen bie piftigfeiten fd)Iia)ten. $n 
fall aber eineg ber ftreibenten perfonen mit biefem augfprud) unntfrteben 
fe»n fottte, fo mag eg fid) an bie nad)fte grofje »erfamlung roenben, eg ben 



6 



prebtgem befant madden unb um eine jroegte frtebenSfdjlidjturtg anfjalten, unb 
raenn bie prebtger §inlanglid) urf adj ba^u finben fo fotten fie eine jaegte 
frieben§fc|Iic|tung ertljetlen, in toelajem fall, eine jebe ber partfjeien ?roet) 
glieber au§ ber gemeinbe, unb biefe t)ier ben funften erroe^Ien follen, bie 
fallen ben ausfprud) ber ^raifrigfeiten ganoid) entfc^eiben, foUte aber einer 
ber perforten, mit biefem ausfprudj bod) nid)t jufrieben fein, fo fdjliffet er 
fid) bamit au§ ber gemeinbe au§, unb raenn fid) ein glieb ber gemeinbe 
roetgern folte, Don megen fdjulben, ober anbere mnftigfeiten, bie <Sad)e ju 
fcfjlid&ten ?u Iaffen, nadj bem eg ifjm oon ben prebtgem raeldje bie auffidji 
iiber bie gemeinbe Ijaoen anempfof)len roorben ober ein glieb ber gemeinbe 
geridjtlirf) belangen folte e§e bie oorf)ergef)enbe ma§regten genommen roorben 
fo fott baffelbe oon biefer gemeinbe au§gef6§Ioffen ferin, fepe ben ba£ 
ftretttgfeiten oon ber art roaren, bafj fie eine gerid)tltcf)e entfttjeibung erfor= 
bere unb redjifertigte, 

Gfjriftofel ©rofd) unb (Sfjrtfttan ^eufommer. 



8 c I) v e 



unb 



8ttdjt--;0ri>ttttng 



bet' 



sBcrcmifttcit *8ru*e? in <&W*fto. 



(Sebrucfi bey 3ofyarm ^ Kocfy 



7 



1816. 



II vf p t utt g 

ber 

$emmg ten Sritber in (£!)ttfte. 



$tt bem lefct cerfloffenen 2>a§rfjunbert, Ijat e§ bem §errn unferen ©ott 
gefaKen, in »erfdjiebenen ©egenben ber SBelt Scanner ju erroecfen, bte ben 
DerfaUenen ©f)riftentl)um roteber auffjelfen, unb bie Seljre (Sljriftt com ®reu$, 
in ujrer Sauterfeit cerfimbtgen foHten. 

dx gebatf)te ba&en aud) ber Steutfdjen in 2lmertfa, roeldje !jin unb roieber, 
in biefem fid) auSgeoretteten Sanbe lebten ; ba^er nur felten ©elegenfjett 
fatten, bte Sprebigt beg ©oangeltumS oom $reu| ju Ijoren um ftdj m er* 
fiauen, unb nur felten in t£)rer 9Jiutterfpradje, unb an mandjen Dertem ntdjt 
in ber Sauterfeit unb im ®rnft oorgetragen rote eg foUte. 

ttnter anbern mefyx, erroecfte er aud) etnen Dtteroem, etnen 33oJjm, unb 
einen ©titling; riiftete fie au§ mit ©etft, ©nabe unb $raft, in fetnem fo 
fefjr t>ernati}laffigten SBeinberge p, arbetten, um aud) unter ben 25eutfc§en 
in SJmerifa, ©itnber ?ur SBujje ?u rufen. 2)iefe folgten bem !Ruf tfjreS £errn 
unb 2Mfter§, arfcetteten im <Segen unb errtdjteten fjtn unb roteber Ijerrltd)e 
©emetnben, unb fitfjrten (S^rifto manege eble ©eele m. ^act> unb nad) ex- 
roetterte ftd) ifjr 2Burfung3fretjj, bafj fie ba&en genotfnget roaren, fidfj um 
MarDetter im SBein&erg ummfefjen ; benn bte ©rnbte roar fo grofj, unb ber 
2lrfcetter nur roenig. ©ott erroecfte anbere bte er audj rottttg madjte, tfjre 
JMfte bem £errn ?u roibmen. Soldje rourben bann von etuem ober bem 
anbern aB aJittarbetter angenommen unb con tfjnen mm $rebigts2lmt 6e= 
ftimmt. 

8 



9 



2)te 2In?aE)I ber ©emeinb3--©lieber in ben »erfd)iebenen ©egenben roua)3 
oon 3eit ?u 3 e ^ unD Derfcrettete fid) in ben ©taaten con 2J2art)lanb, 
^ennfgfoanien unb SStrginien. £>atjer I)at Dtterfcm auf ben grofjen Ste 
fammlungen ?u 3^en (Sonferenj gefjalten, mit ben ^rebtgern bie gegenroartig 
roaren. @r fjat tfjnen bie 2Bid)tigfett im ^rebigt=2lmt trorgeftettt ; roie notfjtg 
e§ fen, alien ©rnft anmroenben, um ©eelen ?u retten ; fie Ijielten babet) 3tatfj 
roie fie am nii|lid)ften fenn fonnten, unb nafjmen fo!d)e auf m Maroettem, 
oon benen fie Urfad) fatten §u glauben, bafj fie bag ©fjriftentfjum am ^erjen 
erfafjren fatten; bie treu roaren unb geitbte (Sinnen fatten; biefe riifteten 
fie m, jum 2Berf be§ §errn. 3)ie 2ln?af)l ber ©lieber uermeJirte fid) immer 
mef)r unb mefjr. Um je£t red)t niitjlid) unb gemeinfdjaftUd) ?u arfietten, 
fatyen fia) bie $rebtger »erpfltd;tet eine ©onferen? ?u oeftimmen, roo fie ?U; 
fammen ramen, um fid) red)t m »ereinigen; benn einige roaren 3teformirte, 
anbere Sutfjeraner, anbere 2ttenoniften, u. f. ro., bafjer fceftimmten fie ben 
25ften September, 1800, in $rtebrtd) ©ountn, SKarnlanb, im £aufe be§ 
$riebria) $emp ^ufammen ? u lommen. ©3 famen tfjrer brenjefm jufammen 
unb oereinigten fid) in eine ©efellfdjaft, bie ben ^amen fiifirt: „2)ie uer; 
etnigten Sriiber in S^rifio"; fie erroa£)Iien 2BilfjeIm Dtter&sin unb Martin 
$bf)m, m D&erauffefyem ober 23ifa)offen ; fie rourben einig einem jeben bie 
grenljeit ^u Iaffen, gu Saufen, nad) eineg jeben ©rfenntnifj. 

$on nun an »er&reitete fid) bie ©emeinbe immer mefjr unb meljr; fie 
na^men ^rebtger an bie immer reifien (benn bie ^rebigt ^3la|e fonnten 
fonft nid)t fcebient roerben ;) ba§ SBerf oer&reitete fid) in ben <5taaten »on 
Df)io unb tatucfn. (§3 roar je$t ndtfjtg eine (Sonferen? im <5taat DJjio ^u 
tjalten, inbem e§ §u cefd)roerlid) roar jafjrlitt) fo roeit nad) ber (Sonferen? ?u 
gefjen. 

2)er SBruber 93Sf)m ftarb unterbeffen, unb SSruber Dtterbein fcegefjrte 
bajj ein 23ifd)of follte geroatjlt roerben, roetl cr nta)t mefjr fel&ft naa)fef)en 
fonnte, ber bag 22err iiber fid) ne^me, bamit 3 UC P unD Orbnung gefjalten 
roiirbe; be::n e§ roar auf ber erften ©onferenj auggemad)t, bafj roenn einer 
oon ben 33ifd)offen fterben roiirbe, ba^ ein anberer erroa^lt roerben fottte. 
35a roarb 93ruber "S^riftian ^eucommer al§ 23ifa)of auf eine 3 e ^ erroa^tt, 
ber bie 2luffid)t iiber fid) ne^me ii&er bie ©emeinfd)aft. 

©d)on lange rourbe ber Mangel einer 3 u a)i°rt)mmg in ber ©emeinbe 
tief empfunben ; e§ roar fd)on meljrmal etroaS "Qavan get§an roorben ; enblia) 
rourbe auf ber (Sonferenj im (Staat D^io 6efd)loffen : bafj eine §aupt ober 
©eneral ©onferenj ge^alten roerben follte, bie e§ ii6er fid) ne^me, bie 3«<^t s 
orbnung in etroa0 ooUftanbiger §u mad)en, roie fie fid) fur bie ©emeinbe 
fa)idEen rourbe. 

16 



10 



2)ie ©lieber ?u biefer (Sonferenj foUten aug ben ^rebigern, in ben 
unterfdf)ieblicf>en ©egenben, burdj bie ©lieber ber ©emeinbe geroafjlt roer* 
ben, burdf) bie 2fteIjrJ)ett ber ©ttmmen ; unb eg roaren bie folgenben ^rebis 
ger gegenroartig auf ber ©onferen?, nemlitt) : ©fjriftian ^eucommer, 2l6ra* 
f)am <Qiefianb, 2Inbreag getter, Daniel £reoer, ©eorge Senebum, 2lBra!jam 
Xracffel, ©Ijriftian Merger, 2lBraJ)am -Jftener, $of)anneg (Sttjneiber, <Qeinricf) 
$umler, <gemrid) ©patf), $faac -tteufajtoanber, (Sljriftian tarn, unb %acob 
Saulug. 2)ie tjerfammleten fia) am 6ten ^uni, 1815, naf)e Ben SDiount 
peffing, in SBeftmorelanb ©ounta, Spemtfgfoamen, too fie nadj reifer UeBer* 
legung, bie folgenbe £ef)re unb Sftegeln fitr gut unb nu^Iicfj Befanben, fie 
ber ©emeinbe in SieBe unb Semutf) ?u iiBergeBen, mit bem ^erjliajen SBunfdj, 
bafj biefe £ef)re unb fold^e Stegeln, neBft bem SBorte ©otteg molten BeoB; 
aajtet rcerben. 2)enn ©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb rao leine Orb* 
nung unb $irdjenju$t ift, ba t>erlief)rt fid) alte SteBe unb ©emeinfefjaft ; 
bafjer laftt ung bem 9lat§ beg <gerrn folgen ber ung Iet)rt, ba| nrir burdf) 
©emutfj einer ben anbern pfjer adfjten alg ung felBft, fudjen gefinnt ^u 
fein rcie tyjuZ (Sfjriftug aucf) mar, ber tedjtg ©eftalt angenommen, rcarh 
ge^orfam Big ?um Sobe am $reu^, um ung bie ©nabe unb $raft §u er= 
roerben, baft nrir ung aug SieBe unb SDemutlj einer bem anbern unterrcerfen 
fonnten; toer fidfj ntd£)t unterraerfen fan, bem mangelt noa) ©nabe, SieBe 
unb Semutlj; ba^er fagt 3 e fag: wer unter eucf) ber ©roftte fetjn xsM, ber 
foil beg anbern £>iener fetm, fo miiffen nrir einanber lieBen; t>avan, fagt 
%e)ug : roirb jebermann erfennen, bafj ifjr meine recite ^linger fegb, fo ifjr 
SieBe fja&t, unb raer ni$t IteB fjat ber BleiBt im Sobte. <5o laffet ung 
SieBe iiBen, auf bajj nrir bie £errlid)feit Befi^en mogen, bie ^efug fetnen 
^i'mgern con feinem SSater erBeten l)at, bafj nrir etn§ fegn modjten, nrie er 
unb ber SSater eing finb. Sarum tf)r lieBen SBritber, laffet ung futtjen gleidj; 
gefinnet, ein^eKig unb eintraglidjj ju fegn, unb feing IXebel »on bem anbern 
reben ober benfen, fonbern ben §errn anflefjen, bafj er ung fe:nen ©etft unb 
@rnft geBen mott)te um bag ©fjriftentfmm red^t ?u feiner @f)re ?u fit^ren, unb 
ju unferem emigen SBofjI Slmen. 



ber 

Semmgten Stf&tr in Sljriftd. 



£>m Seamen ©otte§ befennen mir ror jebermann, ba£ rotr glauben an 
ben etmgen raafjren ©ott, $ater, ©o^rt unb Jjjbetltgen ©eift, baft biefe £>ren 
@in§ finb, ber SSater im ©ofjn, ber ©ofjn im $ater unb ber £>eilige ©eift 
gletcfjeg SBBefen mtt benben. 2)aft biefer breoemige ©ott §immel unb Srben 
unb alleg roa£ barinnen tft, fon>oI)t ftd^tBar al§ unftdjtbar, erfcf>affen fjat, 
tragi, regiert, fdjufct unb erfjalt. 

2Bir glauben an 3 e fam (Sfjriftum, baft er rcafjrer ©ott unb 9J?enfd) tft, 
baft er feme menfdjlitfie -ttatur buret) ben <getfigen ©eift in Wlax'ia ange* 
nommen, unb von ujr gebofjren ; bajj er Speilanb unb SSerfb^ner bes> gan^en 
menfcfjlidjen ©efdjledjtS tft. 2Senn fie bie in 2> e fu angebotene ©nabe im 
©lauben an ujn annefjmen; baft biefer ^efu§ fur un§ gelitten §at, ant 
©tamme be§ $reutje3 geftorben, begraben, ant britten Sage urieber aufer; 
ftanben, gen ^immet gefafjren, raeldjer tft ?ur 3?ea;ten ©otte§ ^mb tertritt 
un§ ; unb nrieber f ommen nrirb, am iiingften Sage, ?u rtcfjten bie Sebenbigen 
unb bie Sobten. 

SDStr glauben an ben §eiltgen ©eift, baft er gleid)e§ 2Sefen§ mit bem 
SSater unb bem <Sof)n, baft er con betjben au§gefjt, baft rcir burdj tfm ers 
leucfjtet, burd) ben ©lauben gereti)tfertigt unb geljetltget roerben. 

2Sir glauben an eine Sgetlige ©emeinbe, ©emeinfcfiaft ber <QeiIigen, 2lufer* 
fteljung be§ $Ietfdje3 unb ein eratge§ Seben. 

2Bir glauben ba§ bie 23ibel alteS unb neueS Seftament, ©otte§ 2Sort 
tft; baft fie ben raa^ren 2Beg m unferer ©eeligfett entfjalte, baft ein jeber 
loafjre (Sfjrift, biefelbe mit ben ©inpffen beg ©eifte§ ©otteS eirtjtg unb 



12 



aHetn fetner ^idptfdjnur nefjmen foil, unb ba£ ofme ©tauben an %e\um 
©fjriftum, ttmfjre SBufe, SBergebung ber ©unben unb 9ktf)foIge (Sfjrtfit, ni^ 
manb ein ma!)rer Shrift fenn fartn. 

SEBtr glauben bafj bte Sefjre roeldfje bie £etltge ©djrift entfjalt, nemltdj : 
ben $att in 2lbam unb bte ©rlofung burdj $> e f un t ©fjriftum, ber gan§en 
SOBelt foEte geprebtgt raerben. 

2Btr glauben bafj bie aufjere @naben=9fttttel in ben ©ememben (Sljrtftt 
geitbt roerben follten, nemlicfj: bte £aufe xtnb ba§ ©ebacfjttttjj beg Xobteg 
beg £errn, in 2lugtf)eilung beg 23robg unb 2Betn§, bie foUen nac§ bent Sefefjl 
beg %>errn ijefu, unter fetnen ^inbern geitbt rcerben ; bte 2lrt unb 2Be;fe foil 
aber einem jeben natt) fetner ©rfemttmfj iiberlaffen rcerben. 2lud) baS33et) = 
fpiel t)on ^ufjraafajen fteljet einem jeben freg. 



Stouter 9lBfdjnttt. 



$on hex 



•iftad) roeldjer SGSetfe unb 33erorbmmg, foUen bte SBerfjanbhmgen auf ben 
©onferen^en Dorgenommen toerben ? 

©g rcirb cerlangt, bafs, roag audi) immer Beg btefer ©elegenfjett getfjan 
rotrb, foil fo getljan rcerben alg ob eg in ber ©egenroart ©otteg ware; n>er 
§u reben fjat ber ftefje auf unb rebe freg, rtrie erg in [einem §er?en Ijat. 

2Bie unb auf toag 2lrr, fotten bte ©lieber enter &aupt=6onferenj geroafjlt 
toerben ? 

£m einem jeben ©tftrifte foUen bte reifenben ^rebiger, roenn folate ba 
finb, menu ntcfjt, fo foften bte fejjljaften ^rebtger bie in bem 33e?trl raofmen, 
eg ben ©ememben corfteHen, bafj fte noeg 2lelteften aug ifjrem 23e5tr! roafj-- 
len; eg foUen after aHe bte 2lelteften bte in bem 23enrf ftnb bte auf bie 
©onferen? gefyen fonnen, auf bie 2Baf)l tfmn, unb eg eintge 3ett Dormer 6e= 
famtt madden, unb bie ?roen bte bte 9M;rf)ett ber ©timmen befommen, foUen 
bte ©lieber von ber £>aupt=©onferem fegn ; bie ©timmen f oHen aber an jebem 



13 



Drte, fd&riftlici) aufgqeidjnet toerben, unb won einem antoefenben ^rebiger, 
ober von etnem SBorganger unterfct)rieben toerben. 2)er 2luffid^t^altefte im 
Se^irf foil e§ unterfutf)en, unb foUten ^toet) oon tfjnen eine gleict)e Sln^l 
Stimmen fjaben, fo foil er entfct)eiben toeldfjer oon ujnen ertoaljlt ift. 

2Bie oft fofl bie §aupt=©onferen? geljalten toerben ? 

2We oier Sa^re. 

§at bie ^auptXSonferens eine anbere ©etoalt, bie bie ^a^rlid^e nid&t Ijat ? 

$a, fie fjat aHein bie ©etoalt einen 33ifcf)of, au§ ben 2lufficf)t§alteften, 
auf t)ier S a § re 2" tocujlen; unb auct) biefe gucfjtorbnung ober 3iegeln 
oeranbern ober ?u oerbeffem, nact)bem fie es> fur gut befinbet unter ben 23es 
bingungen unb auSnafjm, bafj fein 2lrti!el gemadjt toerbe, ber ben Circuit 
m bereifen aufEjebt ober toegtljut. ©ie Spaupt^onferen? foil aucf) bie 2)i* 
[trifte beftimmen, too bie jatjrttcfjen ©onferen^en gefjalten toerben foUen. 

2BeId)e§ finb bie ©lieber ber jal^rUc^en ©onferenj ? 

2ltle bie 2lelteften unb ^rebtger, bie einen fdE)riftltcf)en (Erlaubmlfcfjein 
empfangen Ijaben, unb bie in bem 33ejirf oon einer fokt)en ©onferen? finb, 
ober in folcfjen aufgenommen toerben. 

Sftact) toeldEjer SBeife unb SBerorbnung follen bie SSer^anblungen oorge* 
nomnten toerben ? 

1. @3 toirb merft ein ©apttel au§ ber SBibel oerlefen, unb furje Sin* 
merlung bariiber gemacr):, alslbann toirb gefungen unb gebeten, unb ba§ fo 
oft aI3 bie Gonferen? fi|t ; unb tnit gefang unb gebet befcfyloffen. 

2. 2)ie ©onferen? foil einen SCuffidfjtSalteften unb einen ©ct)rei6er toafjs 
len, um tnit bem 33ifct)of m agtren. 

3. SBerben bie ^rebiger unterfuc£)t, toie U)r 23etragen gegen ©ott, gegen 
etnanber unb gegen iljren -iftebenmenfcfjen fen; ob iljv SBanbel untabel^aft, 
ob fie fo oiel 3ett rc i e moglict) antoenben um ba§ ;Weict) ©otteg auSmbreiter 

4. 2Ba§ fiir ^Srebiger finb auf bie $robe anmneljmen ? 

5. 3Ba3 fiir ^rebiger mitffen ferner auf ber ^robe bleiben ? 

6. ©inb einige ju 2lelteften m toafjlen ? 

7. ©inb tooljl einige oon ben ^rebigern geftorben ? 

8. 2BeIdje§ finb bie 2luffidjt3alteften ? 

9. 2Ber giebt ftd) auf ju reifen ? 

10. 2Ba3 ift gefammelt toorben,^tIjeil§ jufallige 2lu3gaben ?u beftretten, 
unb ben reifenben ^rebigern ifjren ©e^alt aufmmad^en? ift ^ed^nung tnit 
ifjnen get)alten toorben ? Jjaben fie bag i|rige befommen ? 

11. 3Sann unb too foil bie nactjfte ©onferen? ge^alten toerben ? 

12. <5inb bie 2lelteften georbinirt toorben ? 



14 



13. $n roa3 fiir Sejtrfe finb bie ^rebtger biefeS %af)v angefteUt ? 

14. ^ft nod) etraaS me^r m tfjun ? 

15. £at bte ©onferen? bie Siftrtfte Beftimmt in t£)rem Se^irf, um bie 
SBafyl fiir bie @lieber ber §aupt=(£onferen§ m Ijaltert ? 

16. 3 ft <*2e3 toa§ oerfjanbelt toorben, in bag ^rotofoU iiber getragen 
roorben ? 



fritter mtymtt 



IJJafjlung tmii ©rMnation be0 l^ifdjof^ 

unb 

toon feinem 5t in t itnb ^flidjt 



2Bie foil ein SSifd^of eingefe^t roerben ? 

SDie §aupti©onferen? foil ifjn roajjlen, burcf; bie -Ifteljrljeit ber ©timmen, 
au§ ben 2(uffic£)t§alteften, bie m ber ^aupt^Sonferenj geroafjlt finb ; aud) 
ftefjt e§ ber ©onferen? fret), ben 93ifd^of nocfj auf trier 3al)re fietjm&eljalten. 
2)er gerad^Ite ober SBifdfjof ntujj aber bie unterfdjieblidjen 33e?irfe unb ©on: 
ferenjen oeretfen fonnen, fonft {an er nid)t gercdfjlt roerben; ber fo gerodljlte 
fori t)on einem Sifdjof unb einem 2luffidjt3dlt2ften burdj Sluflegung ifjrer 
frctnbe orbinirt roerben; fotlte aber lein 23ifd)of ba fet;rt, fo fotten e§ ^roet) 
2luffid&t§alteften if)un. 

9Ba§ finb bent Sifdjof feme ^fltcfjten ? 

1. Sen unferen (Eonferet^en al§ Sorfifeer m agiren, ntit einem bam 
errad^Iien 2lufftcf)t§dlteften. 

2. ©r Fiat mit ?raet) 2(uffid)t3dlteften, bte er roafjlen barf, ben reifenben 
^rebigern it)re oeufdiiebeneit 33enrfe anmroeifen, bod) ntit ber ©mfdjrdnfung, 



15 

oafj !ein SJSrebtger langer alg bret) %a§ve nadj etnanber in einem geftattet 
roerbe, an bem nemlidjen Drte m bleiben, eg fen benn, in iginfidjt auf %amU 
lien Umftanbe, unb mit SeraiUigung ber ©onferen?, foUen feine ©ajranlen 
auf Die gett gefe^t fein. 

3. 2)er 33 if d) of ?eigt ben 2luffid)tgatteften ttjren Sejirl an, ben fie \u 
beretfen fjaben. 

4. 3" ber mnfdjen $eit, oon ber ©onferen?, fiat er mit ben SUiffidjtg; 
alteften in feinem Sejirl, ©eroalt, bie reifenben ^rebtger m nerroedjfeln, roo 
fie eg fur &effer anfefjen, audj ^rebiger aufmnefjmen, ober m fugpenbiren 
big auf bie ©onferen?. 

5. @r r)at bie nerfd)iebenen ©onferen^en, fo roett fie fid) erftrecfen, ?u 
bereifen, unb f)at im geiftlidjen, bie Dberauffidjt iiber aUe ©ememben. 

6. %f)\n ftefjt eg ?u, bie Drbination }u nofljiefjen. 

7. SBenn ein 33ifd)of aufprt bie t)erfa)iebenen ©onferenjen m bebienen 
in ber ©emeinfdjaft unb bie 23enr!e m beretfen, fann er bod) fein bifcpflidjeg 
2lmt unter ung augiiben? -iftein, eg fen benn bajj er franf rcare unb roag 
bergleid)en Umftanbe mefjr fenn modjten. 

8. SOBenn eg ftcf) mtragen foHte, baft unfere ©emeinfdjaft m etner 3eit 
leinen 23ifd)of fjcitte, raetf er eniroeber geftorben ober fugpenbtrt ware, ober 
rote eg immer fenn mag; roie foil ratfj gefdjaft roerben ? $ebe jafjrltdje 
©onferen? roa^It fidj einen SBorfifcer aug ben 2luffid)tatteften ; biefer foil bie 
93ifcf)ofg ©telle fo lange bebienen, alg bie ©onferen? roafyrt; biefer fo ge= 
roafjlte SBorftfcer, foil audj bie anbere (Sonferenj bebienen; er foil feinen ©tfc, 
mit bem bort geroafjlten $orft|er nefjmen, urn mit ifjm in ber (Sonferen? ?u 
agiren, unb ber bort genmpe $orft|er, foil eben fo, bie anbere ©onferen? 
audj bebienen, bamit eine jebe ©onferen? roeifj. roie eg beg ber anbern aug- 
fie£)t; unb bafj Stebe unb ©emeinfdjaft erljalten roerbe, u. f. to. big ^ur 
§aupt=©onferen?, bie mieber einen 23ifdjof racist. 



Alerter Wftititt. 



$art tun 
^ufftdjtsalteften, 

ifjr er 

mill, 5lmt ttttb pidjten. 



3Ble f often bie SCuffid^tSdlteften geroafjlt roerben ? 

£>er $8iftt)of foil ber Sonferenj etntge aug ben 2telteften, bte tfjre ^3roBs 
jeit auggefjalten, oorfajtagen, unb mtt 3wftimmung ber ©onferen? auf jroen 
2>af)re roaljlen. 

1. SBag finb bie ^BfltdEjten beg 2luffid£)tgalteften ? ben ifjm angerotefenen 
33ejtr! m bereifen, unb fo oft ju prebtgen alg er fan. 

2. @r Ijat bte tteberftdjt iiber bte 3teifenben unb fefjfjaften ^rebtger, 
in feinem SSenrf, bafj fte fitt) bem ©oangeltum gemafj oeiragen. 

3. @r fofl bte trierteljafjrltttje unb grojje $erfammlung befteHen, unb 
roo moglia; bebienen; bag SCbenbmafjl fatten, unb trier teljafjrlttt) (Sonferen? 
fjalten, mtt ben gegenroartigen ^rebigem unb ©rmafmem unb SSorgangern ; 
eg unterfud^en ob bte reifenben unb fefjfjaften ^Prebtger tljre spfltd&t tfjun, 
befonberg ob bte fef$aften ^rebtger roo moglidjj atte ©onntag prebtgen, unb 
roo meljrere finb fte ?u getten ?u oerroedfjfeln, roie am mefjrften 9?u|en ge* 
fdjaft roirb ; fie ermafmen, bafj bie 3ud)t, unb Drbnung unb Stebe unb ©rnft 
ben ben ©emetnben erfjalten. 

4. ©r fann audj bie retfenben ^rebtger in fetnem Sejirfe nerroedEjfeftt ; 
er foU aber bem SBtfd&of mit ju Siatfj jte^en; er fann audf) ^rebiger aufs 
neljmen ober fugpenbiren big auf bie Sonferen?. 

5. @r foil bem Sifd&of 3Zad^ricr)t geben, rote eg in feinem 33e?trf aug* 

fieljt, unb mtt bem reifenben ^prebiger 3?ecf)nung fatten, urn eg ber ©onfe* 

ren? oorntlegen. @r foU einem Sebigen adjtjig Staler erlauben unb einem 

^eref)lidjten unb feiner $rau, noa; fo triel. -Jiur retfenbe ^3rebtger bie ben 

Sejirf bereifen, finb ?u bem beredEjtigt; bie fefjfjaften befommen ntdEjtg, eg 

en benn, bafj einer etne 3ettlang oe " Sejirl te'okneri roiirbe, fo barf tljn 

iir bie $e\t erlaubt roerben; roo aber etn ^rebiger in einer (Stabt ftefjen 

foHte, ba mufj bte ©emeinbe ifjn nerforgen. 

16 



17 



6. 2Bie lange mag ber 33ifdf)of einen Sluffic^tdlteftert iiber ben nemlidjen 
SBejir! fe£en ? ©o lange eg fiir mi^Itdj unb ftt)icflitfj gefjalten it)irb. 

7. ©oHte eg ftdj fo mtrageu, bajj ju einer ,3 e it Jem 33tfd£)of ba rodre, 
fo foHen bie 2luffidjtaltefien, ein jeber in feinem 33ejir{ befonberg auf bie 
©ememben ad)t Ijaben, bamit atleg in Siebe unb ©rnft erljalten raerbe, unb 
einer bem anbern SRad^rid^t gebe, n>ie eg in feinem 33e?ir! augftetyt. <SoUte 
eg fid) aber mtragen, bafc lein 2lufftdjtgaltefter in bem ober jenem 23e?irf ware, 
wie foil dtatf) geftfjaft raerben? @g foH bem 23tftt)of -ttadjrittjt baoon gege; 
ben roerben ; biefer foil einen con ben 2lelteften, im SBenrf, baju beftimmen, 
bi 

al (auggeriffen) 
n 



(pnfter 9llifif)ttttt.) 

Son Sftt 

&elte|ten unb iljwr J$al)l, &mt unii 
WW un& Crbtiitttion. 

3Bte foil ein 2Ieltefter geroafjlt roerben ? 

Sftatt) einer jraen jaljrigen ^rob^eit, mag er »on ber iafjrliajen ©onferen? 
angenommen toerben, unb burcfj ben Sifdjof unb 
W 

orb (auggeriffen.) 

en 

$f unb oiel m 

er !ann unb ?u taufen, @^en einmfegnen, fjelfen bem 2lufftcfjtgaltefien bag 
2lbenbmaf)l Ijalten, unb roenn ber 2lufftd()tgaltefte nidjt gegenmartig fegn fann, 
fo foil eg ein ober pen 2lelteften tfjun ; er foH afle Sfjeile beg bffentlid&en 
©ottegbienfteg aerrtdjten, (Elaffen^erfammlungen futfjen ?u erridjten, too eg 
t^unlitt) ift, fie ana) fatten, unb Ijelfen SSorgdnger p, errodljlen. 



13 

2. SBterteliafjrliti) erne fregrattttge (Collection y\ Ije&en, fur bie reifenbeu 
^rebiger unb fur 2lrme ; ein ^er^eidmifj baoon ?u nefjmen, an jebem Drt 
unb oon bem 

ein 

(auggeriffen.) on 

n, 

bem ng 
fatten, auf §U* 

gelje. 

3. 2Co ein fefjfjafier 2XeItefter ober ^rebiger an einem Drt prebtgt, loo 
fein 9ieifenber f)tn fommt, fo foil er bie (Collection Ijelien, unb ein SSerjetdjmfj 
ebenfo baoon nefjmen, unb eg bem 2luffia)t§dlteften pfdjicfen, ober ?ur (Son* 
ferenj fajitfen ober fcringen. 

4. ©ollte ein reifenber ^Srebiger ober Sleltefter, feinen tfjm angennefenen 
33e?irf oerlaffen raoflen, fo foil er guoor bem 2tufftdjtgalteften fcr)rei6en ; foUte 
einer tljn etroa t>erlaffen ober uerfaumen, eg fen bann burd) $ranffjeit ober 
fonft unt)ermeiblitt)e Umftanbe, fo foil er ber nadjften ©onferenj t)erantraort= 
licl) bafiir fenn. 



©edjjier Pfijttitt. 

$an iier 
JlUnfe PreMger aufjuneljmett, 

unb 

i^rem $mt nub ^fltdjtett. 

SOSie foil ein ^rebiger aufgenommen raerben, burtt) bie ja^rlict)e (Eonferenj? 

1. ^n ber jroif tt)en 3 e ^ tt 01 * Der ©onferenj, burdj ben 23tfd£)of, ober 
ben 2luffxtf)tgalteften beg 93ejtrl§, ober eineg Slelteften, ber ben ^5Ia^ eineg 
2luffttt)tgalteften certritt auf einer jafjrtidjen ober grofjen SBerfammlung, big 
jur naajften (Strung ber ©onferenj; feiner rairb anberg alg auf ^robe an- 
genommen, einer ber auf $ro6e angenommen ift, mag benbefjalten ober ab* 
geraiefen toerben, oljne bajj iljm einigeg Unrest gefajefjen raiirbe, fonft roare 
eg feme ^robe. 



19 



2. (Sine jebe ^erfon bie af§ ^rebiger norgefti^agcn rairb, foil oon ber 
©onferen? unterfudjt raerben, unb il)m folgenbe $ragen norgelegt raerben: 

§at er ©ott in ©fjrtfto alg einen nergebenben ©ott erfannt ? 
£at er $ergebung feiner ©iinben erlangi ? 

3ft bie £tebe ©otteg bura) ben tyeiligen ©etft, in Sein £er? auggegoffen 

•oorben ? 

Jgat er ben $rieben ©otteg erlangt ? 
$aget er ber igeiligung nati) ? 

Spat er eine rtcfyttge (Srfenntnifc, o. ©lauben, con 33ufe, von SRedOtfertis 
gung, nnb ^eiltgung, unb ©rlofung ? 

3. Siegt ifym fein eigen §ei(, unb bag <geil beineg ^ebenmenftfien meJjr 
am iger^en, alg fonft alleS anbere in ber SBelt ? 

$ann er fid) bem 9tatl> fetner 23riiber unterroerfen ? 
2BiU er gefjorfam fenn, m reben ober fcf)roeigen, rate eg bie Sriiber fur 
gut erfennen ? 

^ft er raiHig, fo met al% in feinem ^ermogen ftef)t, ben reifenben pan 
(ober ben 33ejtrl m bereifen) Ijelfen aufrecf)t m fatten unb t§m fo niel raie 
moglttt) unterfiuijen ? 

4. 2Bag ift bie ^flidjt eineg ^rebigerg ? 

©fyrtftum ben gefreutjigten m prebigen, rao fief) nur 3uf)orer einfinben ; 
©Iaffett SBerjammlung aufridfjten, rao eg tfjunlid) ift, mit ifynen non ujrem 
©eelemguftanbe 2^ reben, bie angefocfjtenen fudfjen juredfjt ^u raeifen, bie 
Srtigen fudjen aufmmunbem, unb afte im ©lauben in ber ©nabe unb @r= 
fenntntfj 3 e f u ©§riftt fucf)en ?u erbauen, fo oiel raie mogltcf) ; nie unterlaffen 
bie $ranfen ?u befudjen, unb mtt feinem Seben unb 28anbel fudjjen feine 
SBorte ?u befrafttgen mag er geprebtget. 

5. SBslcfje 2lnraeifungen raerben einm Sprebtger gegeben ? @r fen fteifjtg, 
nie nerliere er feine geit an unnot^igen SDingen, an etntgem Drt, immer 
fen er ernftljaft, fein 2)enf[prucfj fen bem §errn geljeiligt, er meibe alien 
Seicljtfittn, unb <3djer£en, er rebe befefjeiben, unb Ijabe befiutfamen Umgang 
mit bem roeibliajen @efd)lecf)t, unb betrage ftdEj alg ein raa^rer Shrift. 

6. dv feg immer abgenetgt SBefdEjulbigungen m glauben, eg fen benn 
fjinlSngttd) erratefen er lege alleg fo triel eg mit ber 2Baf)rf)eit beftefjen mag 
>um beften aug. 

©r rebe non niemanb niajtg Uebelg, raag er je non einem benfen mag, 
befjalte er folc^eg ben fic3t) fel&ft, big er eg bemjenigen felbft, bem eg ange^t, 
fagen famt. 



20 



7. ©ein ©efcfjaft jet), ©eelen %x retten fo oiel rote mogiicfj ; m biefem 
©efd&afte gebe er fief) auf. @r Befuc^e bie eg bebitrfttg finb ; in alien Stngen 
fjanbele er nicr)t nacr) feinen eigenen ©utbenfen, fonbern alg ein ©ofjn beg 
©oangeltumg, alg ein fotdjer fter)t eg ir)m m feme $e\t, fo rate btefe Sorfdjrtft 
lautet: mit ^rebtgen, mit §augbefucr)en, mit Sefjren unb 23eten, unb Se* 
tracfjtung beg SBorteg ©otteg mmbringen bamit ger)e er urn, big ber §err 
fommt. 



©ieknter 9l6fdjmtt. 



Stttenlafen lietragm htt PreMger, 

ra t e 

mtt tljuen fall toerfaljrett toerben. 



2Bag foil getrjan raerben, raenn oon eirtem Sifcfjof, ober 2tufftd[)t§alteften, 
ober 2lelteften, ober ^rebiger, bie ;ftadEjrtd£)t etnfommt, atS rjabe er fid) eineg 
^erbrecrjeng fcfjulbig gemad^t, bag im SBorte ©otteS, alg eine augfajliefjenbe 
£anblung geboten fen ? 

1. SBenn ein SBtfd&of raegen ©ittenlofen Setragen befajulbigt rairb, rate 
foil mit tfjm »erfar)ren raerben? 2Bo fid) 93efcr)ulbigung ereignen foUte, bte 
bem ©oangelium nacfjtfjeilig raare, fo foil eg eirtem 2tufftd()tgalteften unb 
einem 2lelteften befannt gemaajt raerben, bie foUen eg unterfud()en, ob etroag 
an ber ©adfje fer; ; fie foUen aber feme $lage aufjer jroet) ober breg 3 e *9 en 
anner)men, alg raie ber 2tooftet fagt: fdEjeint eg nun, bafj er mit red^t be= 
fd§ulbtgt rairb, fo follen fie eg ftt)riftlid£) nefjmen, unb bem 93ifd)of eine 2lb= 
fcr)rift baron fd&icfen, unb eine $eit befttmmen roo fie mfammen fommen, rco 
bie $lager unb ber SBifcfjof gegenraartig fegn fotten, unb foU bura) jraen 
huffier) tgalteften unb brer) 2lelteften unterfuajt raerben ; rairb er fdjulbig ge- 
funben, fo foil er fdfjroeigen big ?ur jaf)rlicr)en ©onferen? ; ba foUen bie 9luf= 
fid)tgalteften unb 2lelteften eg nod) ein Wlal unterfuajen, rairb er fdEjulbig 
gefunben fo foil er tram 2lmt fugpenbirt raerben. 



21 



2. 2Benn ein 2luffid^t^dttefter roegen ©ittenlofen SBetragen befdjulbigt 
roiirbe, roag foil getfyan roerben? 2Bo fidj 33efcfwlbtgungen ereignen foHtert 
bie bem ©oangeltum naajtfyetlig roaren, fo foil eg ber nadjfte 2tuffidjtgaltefte 
imb ein ^rebtger unterfudjen ; jetgt eg fid) nun at^ 06 er ftfjulbig mare, fo 
foHen fie eg fd&riftlicf) nefjmen, unb bem 2lufitcfjt§altejlen eine 2l&fd&rtft baooti 
fcijitfen, unb eine gett befttmmen roo fie f often ^ufammen fommen, roo bie 
JMger unb ber 2luf[iti)tgaltefte gegenroarttg fenn ; in 2l6roefenl^eit beg Sifdjofg, 
foil ein cmberer 2htffitf)tgaltefter unb ?roer) 2Ielte[ten gerufen roerben, bie foflen 
eg unterfucfjen ; rairb er fcfjulbig gefunben, fo foil er fdjroetgen big ?ur ©on* 
feren?, ba foil er uerantroortltcf) feon. 

3. SBenn ein 2leltefter ober $rebiger ober ©rmafjner fotlte befdjulbtgt 
roerben, roegen ©tttenIofen=33etrogen, roag foil getfyan roerben? 25er Sfixe- 
biger in ber ©egenb bem eg befannt roirb, foil nodj einen ^rebiger ober ©r; 
manner ober einen SSorganger mit fid) neljmen, unb eg unterfuc^en ; follte 
eg ftfjeinen bafj er fdjjulbig roare, fo foil ujm ■ftadjridjt baoon gegeben roerben, 
unb etne $ett beftimmt roerben, roo fie, bie imager unb ber befcfjulbigte ge* 
genroartig fenn; in 2lbroefenljett beg SifdEjofg ober Slufftdjtgalteften : foCten 
eg bretj 2lelteften ober ^rebiger unterfudjen, roirb er fdtjulbig gefunben, fo 
foil er fcfjroeigen big ?ur ©onferen?, roo er oerantroortlitf) foil fenn. 



8$on &cn 
©Ueiiern $tt0cjemeut 

©in jebeg ©lieb ber ©emetnbe follte befennen, bafc eg bie 33i6el fitr 
©otteg 2Cort fjalte; baft eg fid^ con nun an oon J^er^en beftrebe, fein §eil 
in ©Ijrifto 3 e f» 2" fucf)en, unb feine ©eeligfeit \\x fd^affen mit $urdfjt unb 
3ittern, um ben mmnftigen eroigen $orn ?u entfliefjen. 

©in jebeg ©lieb foil fid^ beftreben einen genauen unb gottfeligen SBanbel 
ju fiiljren; fletftig fenn im ©ebet, befonberg im SBerborgenen; unb roo mog* 
Iia) alien SBerfammlungen benroofmen, begbeg offentlicfyen ©ottegbienft unb 
SBetftunben, ?u feiner ©rbauung. 



22 



Adapter in gfamitten foUten eg nte nerfaumen beg 9ftorgeng unb 2fbenbs 
mit ben ^fjrigen beten, unb benfelben ein guteg ©remoel fe£en, in alien 
djriftlicf)en Sugenben. 

©in jebeg foil fid; beftreben, genau alg in ber gegenraart ©otteg m 
raanbeln ; fief) ben feinen ©efefjaften an einen genauen Umgang mit ©ott 
gerabfmen; nie llebet Don feinem -ftebenmenfdjen reben; SieBe u5en gegen 
$reunb unb $einb, ben 2Irmen guteg m tfjutt, unb fucfjen in ber £f)at ein 
3^act)foIger $efu ©fjrifti m ferjn. 

(Sin jebeg ©Iieb foflte fid; entfjaften, ©onntagg unnotfjige ©efcr)dfte m 
treiben; nidjtg m faufen nod) ju oerfauf en, fonbern foil benfelben in 2lnbadjt 
mit lefen unb pren beg 3Bortg ©otteg, mit fingen geifireidjer Sieber mr 
@Fjre unb Sob ©otteg ju bringen. 

(sin jebeg ©Iieb in biefer ©emeinfdjaft follte Dierteljd^rlid) aus freoem 
IBiflen fo mel beotragen, mo eg feine Umftanbe erlauben, urn bie reifenben 
^Srebiger m unterfjalten. 

@g ift einem jeben ©liebe feine $PjIicf)t, ein frieblicfjeg ftifleg unb gott* 
feligeg Seben m fiifjren, im Umgang mit alien 2ftenfd)en, raie eg einem (St)rtften 
ge^iemt, im ^ eDe " ? u leben ; abfonberlid) foil jebeg ber Dbrigfeit unter; 
tfjan fenn, fo mie ©otteg SBort eg forbert. 

23eg foldjen ©lieb&n ber ©emeinbe, follen bie ^rebiger eine ober mef;rere 
SlaffensSSerfammlungen errtcfjten mo eg tfjunlidj ift; bafelbft follen fid; bie 
©lieber, mo eg feon fann, ein in jeber SBocfje oerfammeln, an bem bam 
beuimmten Dri, um Setftunben mit einanber ju fjalten, um fid; §u erbauen 
in ber gegenraart ©otteg unb in Siebe m guten SBerfen in ©fjrifto ^efu. 

$n ieber ©laffe fotlten SBorganger in gegenraart beg ^rebigerg geroafjlt 
raerben, beren ^Sflid^t foff femt, bie betftunben beftellen, anmfangen, unb ni 
befcfjliefsen, aud; m Qeiten ©Iaffen=llnterrebungen jn fatten, ein jebeg ©Iieb 
m ermaEjnen unb in Siebe erfjalten, unb auf fid; felbft fefjen. 

2Benn ©lieber fid; an einanber oerfiinbigen alg Sriiber ober ©d)raeftern, 
fo ftrafe eg merft mnfefjen 25ir unb igfjm aUein, fjoret er bid; fo f;aft bu 
if;:i geraonnen, Ijort er bid) rndjt, fo nimm nocf) einen ober ?raet; ju bir, auf 
baft alle ©aa;e beftefje aug ?raet;er ober breoer geigenmunbe ; fyoxet er bie 
nicf;t, fo fage eg ber ©emeinbe, fjoret er bie ©emeinbe nicfjt, fo fjalte if;n alg 
einen Sgeiben unb goflner. 

2Benn ftcf) Streitigfeiten ereignen foUten, mnfefjen ?raen ober mefjrei-en 
©liebern ber ©emeinbe, con raegen ©cfjulben ober irgenb einer anbern Uc= 
fad;e, unb bie ftreitenben ^artfjeien §u feinem 33ertrag fommen fonnen, fo 



23 



foil ber sprebiger roeldjer bie 2lufftd)t iioer bie ©emeinbe f)<xt, ober ber ^re* 
biger ber in ber ©egenb roofynt, bie <Sad)e unterfudfjen, unb ben ©treitenben 
eine 9ieferen£ anempfefjlen ; biefelfje foil au§ brer; ©liebern ber ©emeinbe 
beftefjen, roooon ber $lager einen, ber 33eflagte ben anbern, unb biefe jroet) 
ben britten erroafjlen foUen, biefe brer) foUen bann bie graiftigfeiten fdfjltdjten. 
3m $all afier eine ber ftreitenben ^erfonen mit biefem 2(u3fprucr) unmfrieben 
ferm fottte, fo tnag fie fid) an bie nadjfte t)iertelja^rlic^e ober grofje $er= 
fammlung rcenben e§ bem 2tufftdf)t§alteften ober 2letteften betannt madden, 
urn eine mjeute $rtebem>fd)lid)tung anljalten, unb raenn bie ^rebiger f)in= 
langltd) lXrfad^ bam ftnben, fo foHen fie eine ?raet)te $rieben§fdf)lidf)tung er= 
t^eilen ; in n>eld)em $aH eine jebe ber $artf)erien ?raet) ©lieber au§ ber ©e= 
meinbe, unb biefe triere, ben fiinften erwcujlen foHen; biefe follen ben-2lu3; 
fprudf) ber gnriftigfeiten gan^idf) entfttjeiben ; follte aoer eine ber ^erfonen 
mit biefem 2lu3fprud£) bod) nid)t mfrieben fo fdjltefjt er fidf) bamit 

au§ ; ein ©lieb ber ©emeinbe fid) raeig fon , 
roegen ©cfjulben ober anbern gnriftigfetten, bie ©adfje fdjlicfjten ?u laffen, 
nadjbem e§ ifjm oon einem ^rebiger ober $organger, roeldje bie 2lufftdjt 
J)a6en, anempfo^Ien raorben, ober ein ©lieb oon ber ©emeinbe r-or ©eridfjt 
jiefjen fottte efje bie oorfyergefjenbe -Jftaafjregeln genommen raorben, fo foil 
baffel&e oon biefer ©emeinbe aus>gefdf)loffen fetm, e§ fet) benn, bafj ©treitigs 
feilen oon ber 2lrt roaren, bafj fie eine gerid)tlid)e 6ntfd)eibung erforbern 
unb redjtferttge, al3 : ©gecutoren ober 2lbminiftraioren. 



8 e J) x e 

uttb 



8ttdjt--£)riittttttg 

b er 



Dtefes gebrucft auf 2Jnorbnung etner £jaupt=£onferett3, gefyalten ben 3tt>et= 
ten Cag 3 un Y/ * m 3 a ^ r unfers ^errn, \8\7, in ITtountpleafant, 
XDeftmorelanb County, penn. 



(Setnudtt benSSoljannes ^rmbruft u. (£ 0. 



17 



1817. 



25 



It t fp t tin <j 

ber 

Seremtgtett SBriiber in (^rifto. 



Sn bem te|t Derfloffenen Safjr^unbert, §at eg bem £errn unferm ®ott 
gefaHen, in oerfcfuebenen ©egenben ber SOBelt Wawaev m erroetfen, bie bem 
oerfaUenen ©tyriftentfjum roieber auffjelfen, unb bie SeJjre com $reu|, in if>rer 
^auterfett oerfunbigen follten. 

@r gebatf)te babet) aud[j ber Seutfcfjen in 2lmerifa, roeldje Ejin unb raieber 
in biefem fid^ auggebreiteten Sanbe lebten ; bafyer nur felten ©elegenfjeit fatten, 
bie ^3rebigt oonr $reu| m pren urn fttf) ni erbauen, unb nur felten in ujrer 
9Jhitterfpradje, unb an mancfien Dertern mdjt in ber Sauterfeit unb im ©rnft 
oorgetragen roie eg follte. 

Unter anbern meljr erroecfte er aud) einen Dtterbein, einen SBoEmt, unb 
einen ©iitfjing; ritftete fie au§ nut ©etft, ©nabe unb $raft, in feinem fo 
fe^r oernad^laffigten 2Beinberge \u arbeiten, um audj unter ben 2)eutfd£jen in 
2lmerifa, ©iinber ?ur SBufje ?u rufen. 2)iefe folgten bem 9?uf ir)re^ <germ 
unb 2Jieifter3, arbeiteten im ©egen, unb, fo erritijteten fie, fjin unb roieber 
t)errlid^e ©ememben, unb fitfyrten ©^rifio manege eble ©eele m. %latf) unb 
nacf) erroeiterte ftdg il)r 2Burfung3rrei3, bafj fie babeo genotfjiget roaren, fief) 
um SJiitarbetter im SBetnberg ummfetjen ; benn bie ©rnbte roar fo grofj, unb 
oer 2lrbeiter nur roenig. ©ott erroecfte anbere bie and) roillig rourben, iljre 
$rafte bem &erm ?u roibmen. ©oltf)e rourben bann von einem ober bem 
anbern aI3 9Jlttarbeiter angenommen. 

£)ie Slnjaljl ber ©emeinb§=©lieber in ben oerfdfjiebenen ©egenben roucfjg 
oon $eit ?u 3eit, unb oerbreitete fid) in ben ©taaten con $irginien. 2)afjer 

fyat Dtterbein auf ben grofjen $erfammlungen ?u gziten (Sonferen? ge^alten, 

27 



28 



mit ben ^rebigern bie gegenrodrtig roaren. @r §at ifj nen bie SSidjttgfett 
im ^rebigt=2lmt trorgeftellt ; rote notf)ig e§ fen, alien ©rnfi anmroenben, urn 
©eelen ?u retten; fie f)telten baben 9iatlj rate fie am nu|Iid)ften feon fonnten, 
unb na^men folate auf \u SJiitarbeitern, Don benen fie Urfad) fatten \u glau* 
Ben, bafc fie bag ©Ijriftentfyum am SQer^en erfafjren fjatten. 2)ie 2ln?al)I ber 
©Iteber t)ermef)rte fid) immer meljr unb mef)r. Urn je|t red)t mi^lidj unb 
gemeinfdiaftlitt) \u arbeiten, fafjen fidj bie ^rebiger Derpflttt)tet eine ©onferen? 
ju beftimmen, too fie jufammen fdmen, um fid) rettjt ?u »eremigen ; benn 
ein : ge roaren 9ieformirte, anbere £utl)eraner, anbere 9Jiennoniften u. f. tt>., 
ba^er beftimmten fie ben 25ften (September 1800 in §riebrid) ©ountr), 
9ftart)lanb, in bem §aufe be§ $riebricf) $emp jufammen 2" fommen. ©3 
famen ifjrer brer^efjn §ufammen, nemlid) : 

2B. Dtterbein, ©. ©rofdj, 

% Sofnn, 2).'<5tridler, 

% ©iitfjing, ©. ©rum, 

©. 3teucommer, ©rum, 
Seaman, 21. §erfd)er), 

©. grimmer, 
flemp, 

fie t)eretnigten fid) in eine ©efeHfdjaft, bie ben ^arnen fitfjrt: „2)ie cer* 
einigten Sriiber in ©Ijrifto" ; fie erroa£)lten 2Bilf)elm Dtterbein unb SJJiarttn 
335§m, ju Dberauf)ef)ern ober Sifdjoffen ; fie rourben einig einem jeben bie 
$ret)f)eit ?u lafjen, m taufen nad) eineg jeben ©rfenntnifj. 

33on nun an Derbrettete fid) bie ©emeinbe immer meljr unb mefjr; fie 
naEjmen ^Brebtger an bie immer reiften (benn bie Sprebigt Splalje fonnten 
fonft nidjt bebient roerben) ; ba3 SSerf cerbreitete fid) in ben ©taaten con 
DJjio unb $entudt). ©3 mar jetjt nott)ig eine ©onferen? im <5taat DIjto }u 
flatten, inbem e§ ?u befdjroerlidj roar, fiir jene ^Jrebiger id'fjrlid) fo roeii nad) 
ber ©onferen? ju gef)en. 

2)er Sruber 336f)m ftarb unterbeffen, unb 33ruber Dtterbein begefjrte, 
bafj ein Sifdjof follte geroafylt roerben, (roeii er mdjt mef)r felbft nad)feE)en 
fonnte,) ber ba§ 2Berf iiber fitt) nef)me, bamit 3udjt unb Drbnung gefyalten 
rourbe ; benn e§ roar auf ber erften ©onferenj auggemadjt, bajj roenn einer 
oon ben Sifdjoffen fterben roiirbe, bafc ein anberer erroa^It roerben foHte. 
£>a roarb Sruber ©fjrtfiian ^eucommer al§ SMfd&of auf eine £eit erroafjtt, 
ber bie 2luffid)t iiber fid) nefyme iiber bie ©cmcinfc^aft. 

©d)on lange rourbe ber SWangel eiuer gud^rtmimg, in ber ©emeinbe 
tief empfunben ; e3 roar fajon mefjrmat etroag baran getfjan roorben ; enblta) 



29 



rourbe cwf ber (Sonferen? im ©taat DIjio befcfiloffen : bafs erne §aupt ober 
©eneral ©onferen? gefjalten merben follte, bie eg iiber fid) ne()men, bie 
^utfjtorbnung in etroag ooUftanbiger m maajen, fo rote fie bem SSorte ©otteg 
gemafj finb. 

3)ie ©Iieber $u biefer ©onferen? follten aug ben ^rebigem, in ben 
unterfdjieblidjen ©egenben, bura) bie ©Iieber ber ©emeinbe geindf)It merben 
burcf) bie -JMjrfjeit ber <Stimmen ; unb eg rcaren bie folgenben ^rebiger 
gegenroartig auf ber ©onferen?, nemlicf) : (Etjrifttan Dfaucontmer, 2lbraf)am 
<£ieftanb, 2lnbreag geHer, ^Daniel Srerier, ©eorge 33erebum, 2lbral)am 
Xracffel, (£r)riftcan Merger, 2lbraf)am Sfteger, ^o^nneg ©tfjnetber, §etnrttt) 
$umler, £einridj ©patty, ^faa! 9?euftt)n)anber, (Styrtftian $rum, unb %atoh 
93aulug. 2)ie oerfamleten fief) am 6ten ^unt), 1815, natye bet 9ftountr>leafant, 
in 2BeftmoreIanb Sountr), ^ennfnloanien, roo fie natf) reifer Ueberlegung, 
bie fofgenbe Setyre unb -Regeln fur gut unb niittfitf) befanben, fie ber ©e* 
meinbe in Siebe unb Semutfj m iibergeben mit bem fjer^litfjen SBimfcfj, bafj 
btefe Sefjre unb folaje Sfogeln, nebft bem 2Borte ©otteg molten beobaajtet 
merben. 2)enn ©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb mo feine Drbnung unb 
$irdf>enmcf)t ift, ba oerliefjrt fia) alle Siebe unb ©emetnfefjaft ; bafjer lafjt ung 
bem fHat^ beg £>errn folgen ber ung Ieljrt, bag mir burdf) SemutI) einer ben 
anbern fjoljer aajten alg ung felbft, futfjen gefinnt m feon mie gefug ©tyriftug 
aucr) mar, ber $nedf)tg ©eftaHt angenommen, raarb getyorfam big mm £obe 
am $reutj, unb ung bie ©rabe unb $raft m erraerben, bafj mir ung aug 
Siebe unb £)emutty einer bem anbern untermerfen fb'nnten; roer ftdf) nidjt 
untermerfen lann, bem mangelt nocr) ©nabe, Siebe unb Semutty ; bafjer 
fagt ^efu§: rcer unter e:td) ber ©rofcte ferjn mill, ber foil beg anbern Wiener 
ferm; foil einer beg anbern Siener ferm, fo miifjen mir einanber lieben; 
^efug fagt : alfo mirb jebermann erfennen, bafj ifjr meine recite ^linger 
ferjb, fo it)r Siebe fjabt, unb mer nid)t lieb fjat ber bleibt im Sobte. ©o 
laffet ung Siebe i'tben, auf bafj mir bie Igerrlicfjfeit befitjen mogen, bie $efug 
feinen $>ungern con feinem $ater erbeten ^at, ba^ mir einS fepn motfjten, 
mie er unb ber SSater eing finb. £arum i^r lieben Sriiber, laffet un3 
fud^en gleid^ gefinnet, ein^ellig unb eintrdttjtig fetjn, unb feins> Uebel »on 
bem anbern reben ober benfen, fonbern ben Sperm anflefjen, ba^ er un§ 
femen ©eift unb ©rnft geben molten urn bag ©^riftent^um recfjt ?u feiner 
(S^re m fitljren, unb §u unferem eraigen 2Bof)l 2tmen. 



@lttuben5=^ekenntni^ 

b e r 

Seretttigtett Sritkr in (Ojriftd. 



%m -ftamen ®otte§ Mennen nrir cor jebermamt, baft toir glauben an 
ben einigen toafjren ©ott, $ater, ©ofm unb fgeiligen ©eift, baft bxefe ©ret) 
©inS ftnb, ber SSaier tm ©ofm, ber ©ofjn im SSater unb ber £>eiltge ©eift 
gleia>3 SBefen ntit Benben. £aft biefer breneinige ©ott <£immel unb (Srben 
unb atteg nm§ bartnnen ift, foroo£)l ftcfjtbar al§ unfitfjtbar, erfc^affen Ijat, 
tragi, regiert, fcfjiifct unb erplt. 

2Bir glauben an Sefum ©§rtftum, baft er roafjrer ©ott unb 2Wenfd& ift, 
baft er feine SWenfd&Ijeit burdj ben §eiligen ©eift in Wlavia angenommen, 
unb uon tfjr geboren ; baft er ^eilanb unb SSerfofjner beg gan^en menfdfjlidjen 
©eftf)Iett)t3 ift. 2Benn fie bie in %eju angebotene ©nabe tm ©lauben an 
tf)n annef)men; baft biefer £>efu3 fiir un§ gelitten tjat, am ©tamme be§ 
^reuljeg geftorben, begraben, am britten £age rcteber auferftanben, gen 
Jgtmtnel gefafjren, raeldjer ift ?ur red^ten @otte§ unb uertritt un3; unb 
roieber fommen rairb, am jimgfien £age, m ridjten bie Sebenbigen unb bie 
Sobten. 

2Bir glauben an ben §eiligen ©eift, baft er gleitt>§ SBefenS mit bent 
SSater unb ©of)n, baft er bie ©laubige trofte unb fie in alle 2£al)rf)eit leite. 

28ir glauben an eine ^eilige cfjriftltdje ©entetnbe, ©emeinfdjaft ber §etli= 
gen, 2luferftef)tmg be§ $Ieifdje3 unb ein eraige§ Seben. 

2Cir glauben ba§ bie 33tbel alteS unb ueue§ Seftament, ©otte3 SBort ift ; 
baft fie ben toaljren 2Beg $u unferer ©eeligfeit entljalte, baft ein jeber nmfjre 
©fjrtft, biefelbe mit ben Gstnfliiften be§ ©etfte§ ©otteS eimig unb aHetn m 
feiner ^icfytfcfjnur ne^men foil, unb baft of)ne ©laufien an %tfum ©fjriftum, 
toafjre 23ufte, Skrgebung ber ©itnben unb -ftadjfolge Gfjriftt, niemanb ein 
roafjrer (Shrift fetm fann. 

30 



31 



3Bir glauben bafj bte <Qeilige ©djrift entr)alt, nemtid): ben $att in 
2lbam unb bie ©rlofung burdj $efum ©fjriftum, ber garden 2Belt fotte ge-- 
prebiget roerben. 

2Btr glauben bafj bie attfjere TOtel in ben ©emeinben ©Ijrifti geiibt 
roerben follten, nemlidj : bie Xaufe unb bag ©ebadjtnifj beg £obteg beg £errn 
£;efu, unter fetnen $tnbem geiibt roerben ; bie SCrt unb SBeife fott aber einem 
jeben nadj feiner ©rfenntmfj tiberlaffen roerben. 2lud) bag SBerjfptel von 
$ufjroafd)en, ftefjet einem jeben fret). 



Stoeljtcr 9llifil)ttttt. 

Son fcer 

laupt= unb Saljrlidjen^anferett^ 



$r. 9?ad) roelajer SEPeife unb $erorbnung, folten bie $err)anblungen 
auf ben ©onferenjen oorgenommen roerben ? 

2lntro. ©g rotrb oerlangt, baft, roag audj immer ben btefer (Megenljett 
getrjan roirb, foil fo getfjan roerben, alg 06 eg in ber ©egenroart ©otteg 
roctre; roer m reben r)at ber ftefje auf unb rebe fret), rote erg in fetnem 
§er§en fjat. 

%x. SDSie unb auf wag 2frt, follen bie ©tieber einer jQauptsSonferenj 
gert>af)It roerben? 

2lnrro. %n einem jeben Siftrifte follen bie reifenben ^rebiger, roenn 
foldje ba finb, menu nidjr, fo fotten bie fefjfjaften ^Brebiger, bie in bem SBenrJ 
roorjnen eg ben ©etneinben oorftetten, bafj fie mien SCelteften aug ir)rem 93e^ 
?ir! roaljlen; eg foUen after aHe bie Slelteften bie in bem SBejtrf finb bie 
auf bie ©onferen? gefjen fonnen, auf bie 2Bar)l trjun, unb eg einige geit 
oorrjer befannt madjen ; unb bie jroet) bie bie 2Jiefjrr)ett ber ©timmen befom; 
men, follen bie ©lieber von ber §aupt=6onferenj fetm; bie ©timmen 
fotten aber an jebem Drte, fdjriftlicr) aufge^eiajnet roerben unb »on einem 
anroefenben ^rebiger, ober von einem SSorganger unterfd)rieben roerben. 
2)er 2lufftcr)tgaltefte im 33ejirf fott eg unterfudjen, unb fottten jroen »on iljnen 
eine gleidje Slnjarjl ©timmen r)aben, fo fott er entfdjeiben roetdjer oon xrjnen 
erroafjlt ifi 



32 



$r. 2Bte often foE bie ^auptsSonferen^ ge§alten merben ? 
2lntm. 2We trier ^afjre. 

$r. §at bie ^aupt^onferenj eine anbere ©eroalt, bie bie ^a^rltd^e 
nidjt^at? 

2lntm. ^a, fie Ijat aHein bie ©enmlt smen SBifcpffe aug ben 2lelteften, 
auf t)ier ^a^re roaf)len ; unb aud) bie gudjtorbnung 0 ber 3iegeln ?n vet> 
anbern ober oerbeffern, natfjbem fie eg fiir gut befinbet; unter ben 23e; 
bingungen unb 2htgnaJjra, bajj fein 2lrtifel gemadjt roerbe, ber ben ©ircuit 
?u beroeifen auffjebt ober raegtljut. 2)ie §aupt=(£onferenj foil audj bie 2)iftrifte 
befthnmen, mo bie Jaljrlidjen ©onferenjen gefjalten merben foHen. 

%x. SBeldjeg finb bie ©lieber ber iafjrlidjen ©onferen? ? 

2lntm. 2llle bie 2lelteften unb ^rebiger, bie einen fdjrtftlid)en ©rlaub* 
nifjfdjein empfangen Ijaben, unb in bem 33e?irf oon einer foldjen ©onferenj 
finb, ober in foldjen aufgenommen merben. 

%x. 9^ad^ meldjer SBetfe unb SSerorbnung folten bie SBerfjanblungen 
oorgenommen merben ? 

2lntro. 1. @g nrirb ein ©opitel aug ber SBibel oerlefen, unb furje 
2tnnxerfung bariiber gemadjt, aBbann mirb gefungen unb gebeten, unb bag 
fo oft al§ bie ©onferen§ ftfct ; unb mit ©efang unb ©ebet befdjloffen. 

2. S)ie ©onferen? foil einen ©djreiber unb foHte einer ber 23ifd)offe 
abraefenb fenn, aud) einen ber 2tuffid)tg=2lelteften |um mit agteren mcujlen. 

3. SBerben bie ^rebiger unterfudjt, mie t£)r Setragen gegen ujren 9leben= 
menfdjen f eg ; ob il)r SBanbel untabelfjaft, ob fie fo oiel $eit mie moglid) 
anmenben um bag 3ieid) ©otteg augntbretten. 

4. 3Bag fiir ^rebiger finb auf bie ^robe anjunefjmen ? 

5. 2Bag fiir ^rebiger miiffen ferner auf bie ^robe bleiben ? 

6. <5inb einige ?u 2lelteften roafjlen ? 

7. ©inb mof)I einige oon ben ^rebiger geftorben ? 

8. 2Beld)eg finb bie 2luffidjtg=2leiteften ? 

9. 2Ber giebt fid) auf ?u reifen ? 

10. 2Bag ift gefammelt morben, tfjeilg nifallige 9luggaben nt beftreiten, 
unb ben reifenben ^rebigern i§ren ©ef)alt aufeumadjen ? ift 9lecf)mmg mit 
i^nen gefjalten raorben ? fjaben fie bag i^rige befommen ? 

11. SOBann unb mo fold bie nadjfte ©onferen? gefjalten merben ? 

12. ©inb bie 2lelteften georbinirt morben ? 

13. $n fite 33e?irfe finb bie ^rebiger biefe§ ^a^r angefteUt ? 

14. 3ft nod) etroaS me^r ?u t^un ? 

15. §at bie ©onfcren? bie £)iftrifte beftimmt in i^rem 33ejirf, urn bie 
2Baf)l fiir bie ©lieber ber <£>aupt=©onferen? p, fyalten ? 

16. 3ft aHe3 ma§ oerfjanbelt morben, in bag ^Srotofott itbertragen 
morben ? 



fritter %mmtt 



$on iiet 

JJJiiljluttcj tmi) ©rtonatton fcer ISifdjoflTe 

unb 

Han i|rem Wmt ttttb $flidjt. 



$r. 2Bie follen bie 33tfd)offe eingefe^t merben ? 

2lntro. £)ie §aupt=©onferen? foil fie ma^len, burd) bie 9flel)rl)ett ber 
©timmen, 2lelteften, bie ?u ber §aupt;(Sonferen2 geroafylt finb ; and) ftel)t eg 
ber ©onferen? fret), fie bie 23ifd)offe nod) auf oier ^af)re ftenmftefjalten. S)ic 
©eraaf)lte ober 23ifd)offe muff en after bie unterfd)teblid)en 33e?irfe unb (Son= 
ferenjen ftereifen fonnen, fonft fonnen fie nid)t geroaljlt roerben ; bie fo ge= 
n>af)lte fotlen von einem SBifd)of unb einem 2lelteften burd) Sluflegung if)rer 
^anbe orbinirt merben; foUte after fe'm 33ifd)of ba fenn, fo foUen e§ }voen 
Seltefte tfmn. 

gr. 3Sa§ finb ber Stfd&offe Ujre ^Bflidjten ? 

2lnttt>. 1. 33en unfern ©onferen^en al3 $orft|er \w agieren. 

2. <Sie Ijaften mit einem 2lelteften, ben toafjlen fie, ben reifenben $re; 
bigern U)re oerfd)iebenen Se^irfe an^uroeifen, bod) mtt ber @infd)ranfung, 
bafj fein reifenber ^rebiger langer al£ bren $al)re nad) einanber in einem 
geftattet roerbe, an bem nemlid)en Drte m ftleiften, .e3 fen benn, in §infid)t 
auf ftefonbern Umftctnbe, unb mit 33eroiHigung ber 23ifd)bffe. 

3. 2)ie 23ifd)offe ?eigen ben 2lufftd)t§alteften ifjren SBejtrf an, ben fie 
?u bereifen fjaften. 

4. $n ber jraif d)en gett, von ben ©onferenjen f)aften fie mit ben2luf; 
ftd)t3alteften ©eraalt, bie reifenben ^rebiger ?u oerroedjfeln, too fie e§ fiir 
beffer anfefjen, aud) ^rebiger aufmnefjmen ober ?u fuSpenbtren bt§ auf bie 
©onferen?. 

5. 6ie fja&en bie oerfd)iebenen ©onferenjen, fo roeit fie fid) erftrecfen, 
ju bereifen, unb fjaften im geiftlid)en, bie Dberaufficfjt iifter alte ©ememben. 

6. ^fjnen ftetyt e§ m, bie Drbination ju nofljiefjen. 

7. S03enn ein 33ifd)of aufprt bie oerfd)iebenen ©onferenjen §u ftebienen 

in ber @emeinfd)aft unb bie SSe^irle ju ftereifen, fann er bod) fein ftifd)of* 

33 



34 



lidjeS 2lmt unier urt§ augiiben ? -ftein, e§ fer) benn, baft er franf roare unb 
raa§ bergleicfyen Umftanbe meJjr fegn mogten. 

8. 2Benn e3 ftcf) mtragen foUte, bafj unfere ©emetnfajaft ?u einer geit 
feinen SSifd^of ptte, roeil fie entroeber geftorben ober fugpenbirt roaren, ober 
rote e§ immer fenn mag; roie foil -ftatf) ge^aft roerben? SDer SCeltefte, 
roeldjer in 2lbroefenJ)eit eine§ SBifdjofS gerocujlt rotrb, mm nut agieren an ber 
©onferen?, foil bie 23if<f)of§ ©telle fo lang bebtenen, al3 bie ©onferen? roafjrt; 
btefer fo geroafjlte 23orft|er, foil aud) bie anbere ©onferen? Bebunen ; er fott 
feinen ©i|, mit bem bort geroaljlten $orft|er nef)tnen, um mit ujm in ber 
Sonferen? m agieren, unb ber bort geraaljlte SSorfi^er, foil eben fo, bie 
anbere ©onferen? aucf) bebtenen, bamit eine jebe ©onferen? roeift, roie e§ Bet) 
ber anbern ausifieljt ; unb baft Siebe unb ©emeinftijaft ertjalten roerbe, u. f. ro. 
bis! mr §aupt=©onferen?, bie roieber 33ifdf)bffe roaf)It. 

9. ©3 foil ber 23tfcf)offe ^flidjt fetm, baft eine fttjuflitfje ^rebigt an bie 
anroefenbe ^3rebiger bet) ©tijtuft jeber ©onferen? gefjalten roirb. 



Sterter %h^nitt 



Son Sen 
3Uffi<i)ts = Mte|teit, 

if) r er 



$r. SCBie foUen bie 2Iuffid)t3afteften geroafjlt roerben ? 

2lntro. £)ie 23ifa)offe fatten ber ©onferen? einige au§ ben 2lelteften, 
bie tl^re $robe?eit auSge^alten, oorfcfjlagen, unb mit 3«f*i mmun 9 oer ©on* 
feren? auf oier $af)re rocifjlen. 
$r. IftenS. 2Ba3 finb bie «j3fltd^tcn beg 2tufficf)t3alteften ? 

2lntro. 35en tfjm oon ben 33tfa)offen angeroiefenen Sejir! fceretfen, 
unb fo oft nt prebtgen als> er fann. 



35 



2. Gsr fjat bie lleberfidjt iiBer bie reifenben unb fefjljaften $rebiger, in 
feinem SSejirf, bafj fie ftdfj bem ©oangelium gemafj betragen. 

3. @r jolt bie trierteljaljrlid)e unb grofje SBerfammtung beftellen, unb 
roo moglicf) bebienen; bag 2tbenbmaf)t fjalten, unb trierteljaljrlicf) ©onferen? 
f>alten mil ben gegenroartigen ^rebtgern unb ©rmafjnern unb SSorgangern ; 
eg unterfucfjen ob bie reifenben unb fefjfjaften ^rebiger t^re ^flicfyt tfjun, 
befonberg ob bie fefjfjaften ^rebiger roo moglicf) alle ©ontag prebigen, unb 
too mefyrere finb fie \u 3 e ^ en ? u oerroectyfeln, rote am mefjrften 5Ru|en ge= 
fc^aft roirb ; fie ermafjnen, bafi bie gucf)t unb Drbnung unb Stebe unb ©raft 
bet} ben ©emetnben erljalten. 

4. @r fann aucf) bie reifenben ^Srebtger in feinem 33e?irfe oerroedjfeln ; 
er foil aber einen 93tfcIjof mit ?u 9^ai£) jtefjen ; er fann autf) ^3rebiger aufnefj= 
men ober fugpenbiren big auf bie ©onferen?. 

5. @r foil bem Sifdfjof 3^ad>rid^t geben, rote eg in feinem 33e?irf aug= 
ftef)t, unb nacf)fefjen, bafj bie reifenbe ^rebiger Merteijaijrig eine oerfjaltnifj; 
maffige Unterftu^ung erljalten: inbem ifjnen if)r ©etjalt aug bem ©elb bag 
fie auf tf)rem Se?trf fammlen mogen gegeben rotrb ; etn lebtger foil aber 
boa) nid^t iiber adj?tg Staler, unb einem geepdjten ein fjunbert unb fedj^ig 
X^aler erlaubt fenn ; foUte aber eg nidjt mretcfjen, mag auf einem ober auf 
bem anbern Sejirf gefammelt roirb, fo foil eg einer ©omtttte aug ber 6on= 
feren? iibergeben roerben, bie nacf) gut Sefinben aug ober oon anberen tljrem 
gefammelten ©elb bem manglenben m tfjun, mo aber ein ^rebiger in einer 
©tabt'ftefjen follte, ba mufj bie ©emetnbe ifjn oerforgen. 

6. ©ollte eg fid& fo mtragen, bctfj m einer geit fein 93tfd^of ba mare, 
fo follen bie 2lufftdf)tgalteften, ein jeber in feinem 33e?irf befonberg auf bie 
©emeinben ad£)t fjaben, bamit alleg in Siebe unb ©rnft erljalten roerbe, unb 
einer bem anbern SfJad^rid^t gebe, roie eg in feinem 23e§irf augftefyt. ©ollte 
eg fief) aber mtragen, bafj fein 2luffta)tgaltefter in bem ober jenem 33e?irf 
mare, mie foil diafy gefdjaft roerben? @g foil bem 33tfct)of 9?aa)ridjt bacon 
gegeben roerben; biefer foil einen oon ben 2lelteften, im Se^irf, bam be= 
fttmmen, big mr ©onferen? roo eg ju tfjun ift ; follte aber fein 23ifdjof ba 
ferm, fo foil ber naajfte 2luffta;tgdltefte einen rodf)len, roenn er eg nic^t felber 
tf)un fann. 



pnfter Wbfdjnttt. 



Son Sen 

Helttftm if)tcr Jfaljl, JUnt, #flid)i 

urtb 

£ x b t n a t i o n . 



$r. 2Bie foil em 21eltefter geroaf)It roerben ? 

2lntn). %lati) einer jraegja^rtgen $rob=3ett, mag er ber jafjrlidjen (Son- 
feren? oorgeftellt merben unb con ben 23ifcf)offen mit 21uflegung ifyrer §anbe 
orbimrt roerben ; mit biefem SBorbeljalt fo ftrf) bie (Sonferen? ii&erjeugt fuf)It, 
baft bee ^n^alt beg 6, 7, 8, unb 9te $erg ^Saulug an £itum im erften 
(Eapitel : fid£) in unb an i§m befinben ! ! ! eg foil einem jeben bet) f einer 
Drbination oorgelefen raerben ! ! ! 

1. 2Bag ift eineg 3lelteften Stmt unb ^Sflid^t ? £u prebigen fo oft unb 
oielmal er fann unb m taufen, @f)en einnifegnen, ^elfert bem 2lufficf)tgalteften 
bag 2Ibenbmaf)l fatten,, unb menu ber 2lufftd)tgaltefte nidjt gegemodrtig feim 
fann, fo foil eg ein ober jroet) 2telteften tfjun ; er foil alle Xfyeile beg offend 
Iicr)en ©ottegbienfteg oerridjten, ©laffen=$erfammlungen fudEjen m errtdfjten, 
mo eg bie 9JZef)rf)eit ber ©lieber fiir gut erfennt, fie auc§ fjalten, unb fjelfen 
^organger m ertoaljlen. 

2. Sierteljaljrlid} eine freonriftige Collection m fjeben, fiir bie reifenben 
^rebiger unb fiir 2trme; ein ^erjeiclinifj baoon m nefjmen, an jebem Drt, 
unb oon bem SSorganger unterfdjrieben, unb roenn fein $organger gegen* 
roartig ware, eg bann oon einem anbern ©lieb unterfdEjreiben laffen, urn mit 
bem 2luffid)tgalteften ^edjnung ju flatten, auf baft alleg orbentlia) mgef)e. 

3. 3Bo ein feftljafter 21eltefter ober ^rebiger ber felber nicfjtg mangelt, 
an einem Drt prebtgt, too fein 9teifenber Inn fommt, fo foil er bie Collection 
f)eben, unb ein Serjetcfmift ebenfo baoon nef)men, unb eg bem 2luffttf,tgalteften, 
ober ?ur ©onferen? ftt)icfen, ober bringen, mr llnterftufcung ber Sebiirftigen 
feftfyaften ^rebiger bie arm finb, unb unter armen prebigen. 

4. ©ollte ein reifenber ^rebiger ober 2leltefter, feinen ifjm angeroiefe; 

nen 33e?irf nerlaffen roollen, fo foil er nioor bem 2luffid)tgalte[:en fd&rei&en — 

36 



37 



foKte etner iljn etioa oerlaffen ober oerfaumen, eg fei bann buret) $ran!I)eit 
ober fonft unoermeibltdEje Umftanbe, fo foil er ber nadfjften ©onferen? t)er* 
antroortlidfj bafur feon. 

5. 2So fid^ feftljafte befmben, roelcfje arm unb bebiirftig ftnb, unb t)er^ 
langt roirb »on ifjnen ?u prebigen ; fo ift eg billtg, baft bie 2lelteften in ben 
©emeinben ©election macfjen, urn folcfje ^rebiger nadfj t-erpltnifte ber geit 
bie fie baju amoenben ?u unterftii$en, bodg ntdjt iiber bag, toag fur bie 
reifenbe ^3rebiger oeftgefe|t ift. 



Setter SlBfdjnttt. 

San fccr 
Jiletfe PreMger aufjunetjmett, 

unb 

ijjrem 5lmt unit ^fltt&ten. 



$r. SDBie foil ein ^rebtger aufgenommen roerben, burd^ bie ja^rttct)e 
©onferen? ? 

1. S« oer jroifd^en fteit von ber ©onferenj, burdj ben 33ifcf)of, ober 
ben 2lufficf)tgalteften beg 33e?irlg, ober etneg SCeltefien, ber ben ^3ta£ eineg 
2lufftdE)tgalteften, oertritt auf einer jafjrlidEjen ober groften $erfammfung, 
big ?ur nacf)ften ©i^img ber ©onferen?; feiner rairb anberg alg auf ^robe 
angenommen, einer ber auf $robe angenommen ift, mag benbefjalten ober 
abgeroiefen roerben, ofjne baft ifjm einigeg Unrest gefcf)ef)en raitrbe, fonft 
mare eg feine $robe. 

2. (Sine jebe ^3erfon bie alg ^rebiger oorgefdfjlagen ttrirb, foil oon ber 
©onferenj unterfudEjt unb ifjm folgenbe $rage oorgelegt roerben : 

$r. $Qat er ©ott in (St)rifto alg einen oergebenben ©ott erlannt ? 
§at er 3Sergebung feiner ©iinben erlangt ? 

3ft bie Siebe ©otteg buret) ben fjetligen ©eift, in bein £er? auggegoffen 
roorben ? 

<Qat er ben $rieben ©otteg erlangt ? 



38 



^aget er ber Spetltgung na$ ? 

§at er eine rtttjtige ©rfenntnift, oon ©lauben, oon SBufe, oon ^ectyt; 
fertigung, £eiligung unb ©rlbfung ? 

3. Siegt ifjm fein eigen §eil, unb bag £etl betneg ^ebemnenfc^en meEn* 
am Jperjen, alg fonft aEeg anbere in ber SJBelt ? 

$ann er ficfj bem 3ftaiE) fetner 33ritber unterroerfen ? 
SBill er gef>orfam feon, §u reben ober fajroetgen, rote eg bie SBriiber fiir 
gut erfennen ? 

$ft er toillig, fo oiel alg in feinem Sermogen fte^t> ben retfenben ^lan 
(ober ben 58e?trf m bereifen) fjelfen aufreajt fu fatten unb ifjm fo oiel rote 
moglttt) unterftit^en ? 

4. 23ag tft bie ^flttf>t eineg $)3rebigerg ? 

Slntro. ©fjrtftum ben (Mreu^tgten ?u prebtgen, roo fid) nur guljbrer 
einftnben; ©laffen SSerfammlungen aufritfjten, roo eg nit|lid) ift, mit iljnen 
oon ifjrem ©eelen=3uftanbe ?u reben, bie angefod^tenen fud^en mrecf)t m 
roetfen, bie Sragen fudjen aufmmuntern, unb alle im ©lauben in ber ©nabe 
unb ©rfanntnifj S^fu ©fjrifti fucJien ?u erbauen, fo otel roie moglic§; nie 
untertaffen bie tenfen ju befud&en, unb mit feinem Seben unb SBanbel 
fud£)en feine SOorte m befrafttgen roag er prebiget. 

5. 2Beltf)e 2lnroeifungen roerbett einem ^Srebtger gegeben ? 

2Intro. ©r feo fleiftg, nie oerltere er feine 3ett an unnot^igen £)ingen, 
an einigem Drt, immer fen er ernftljaft, fein Sentfprudj fet) bem Sperm ge= 
f)eiliget, er meibe alien Seidjtftnn, unb ©c^erjen, er rebe befcfjetben, unb §abe 
beljutfamen Umgang mit bem roeiblic^en ®efcf)lecf)te, unb betrage fta) alg ein 
roarer ©I)rift. 

6. ©r fen immer abgeneigt 23efcf)ulbigungen nt glauben, eg fet) benn 
[jtnlanglidj erroiefen er lege alleg fo otel eg mit ber 2Sat)rr)eit befte^en mag 
?um beften aug. 

©r rebe oon niemanb nidjtg Uebelg, roag er \e oon einem benfen mag, 
befjaiie er foltf^g bet) fidj felbft, big er eg bemjenigen felbft, bem eg angefjt, 
fagen fann. 

7. <5ein ©eftfjaft fet), ©eelen ?u retten fo otel rote mbglidf) ; ju biefem 
©efcfjiifte gebe er fitf) auf. ©r befud&e bie eg bebitrfttg finb ; in alien 2>ingen 
Ijanbele er ntdjt nad^ feinem eigenen ©utbenfen, fonbern alg ein ©olm beg 
©oangeliumg, alg ein folajer ftef)t eg if)m ?u feme 3ett, fo roie btefe SSors 
fdfjrift lautet : mit ^rebigen, mit §augbefua)en, mit Se^ren unb 23eten, 
unb 33etratf)tung beg 2Sorteg ©otteg mmbringen, bamtt ge^e er urn big 
ber §efr fommt. 



Sieknter Wlif^nitt. 

Son km 

Sittenlofat iSetragen tor JfreMger, 

to i e 

wit tJjnett fnH toerfa^ren toerkn. 



$r. 2Bag foil getfjan roerben, roenn oon einem 23ifd(jof, ober 2luffid(jtg? 
alteften, ober ^rebiger, bie -iftacfjrtdfjt einfommt, alg Ijabe er ftdEj eineg SSer* 
bred)eng fcfjulbig gemadjt, bag im 2Borte ©otteg, alg eine augfajliefjenbe 
SQanblung geboten fet) ? 

2lntro. SSenn ein 23ifdjof megen ©ittenlofen Setragen befajulbigt nrirb, 
nrie foE mit tljm oerfafyren toerben ? 3Bo fitf) 23efcf)ulbigung ereignen jottte, 
bie bent ©oangelium nacfjtljeUig rcare, fo foE eg einem 2luffttf)tgalteften unb 
einem 2telteften be!annt gemadjt roerben, bie foEen eg unterfutf)en, 06 etroag 
an ber ©aclje fen; fie foUen aber !eine $lage aufcer pet) ober bret) 3eugen 
anneljmen, alg rote ber 2lpoftel fagt: fdjeint eg nun, bafj er mit redjt be* 
fd)ulbigt roirb, fo foEen fie eg fcf)riftlidEj neljmen, unb bem Sifdjof eine 
2lbfcl)rift baoon fdjitfen, unb eine £eit beftimmen mo fie ^ufammen fommen, 
too bie ^lager unb ber 33if<f>of gegenroartig fenn foEen, unb foE buret) bie 
pet) 2luffitt)tgctlteften unb bret) Slelteften unterfudjt toerben; toirb er fdfjulbig 
gefunben, fo foE er fdpetgen big ?ur ja^rlictjen ©onferen?; ba follen bie 
Slufftcfjtgalteften unb 2lelteften eg nocf) ein 9M)l unterfucfjen, roirb er fcfjulbig 
gefunben fo foil er 00m 2lmt fugpenbirt roerben. 

§r. 2. SBenn ein 2lufftc^tgaltefter roegen ©ittenlofen Setragen ht- 
fcfyulbigt roiirbe, mag foil getfjan merben ? 

2tntro. 2Bo ftd& Sefcfmlbigungen ereignen foEten bie bem (Soangelium 
nacfjtf)eilig roaren, fo foE eg ber naajfte 2leltefte unb ein ^rebiger unter* 
fucfjen ; jeigt eg fid? nun alg ob er fdfjulbtg mare, fo follen fie eg fdjriftlidjj 
nefjmen, unb bem 2lufftd)tgalteften eine 2lbfdjrift baoon fd)icEen, unb eine 
Sett beftimmen, mo fie foEen ntfammen fommen, mo bie stager unb ber 
2luffid)tgaltefte gegenroartig fegn ; in 2lbroefenljeit beg SBifajofg, foil ein anbe* 
rer Slufftd&tgaltefter unb pet) 2lelteften gerufen merben, bie foEen eg mit 
unterfud&en ; roirb er fdEjuIbig gefunben, fo foE er fcE»roetgen big jur ©on* 
feren?, ba foE er oerantroortltdj fetjn. 

39 



40 



%x. 3. SBenn ein 2leltefter ober ^rebiger ober ©rma^ner foUte be; 
fct)ulbigt roerben, roegen ©ittenlofen 23etragen, roag foil gettjan roerben ? 

2lntro. SDer ^rebiger in ber ©egenb bem eg befannt rotrb, foil noct) 
einen ^rebiger ober ©rmafmer ober einen SBorganger mit fid^ neljmen, unb 
eg unterfucfjen ; follte eg fctjemen bafc er ftfjulbtg roare, fo foil irjm 9?ati)ritf)t 
baoon gegeben roerben, unb eine $eit beftimmt roerben, roo fte, bie $lager 
unb ber SBefcfjulbigte gegenroctrtig ferm; in 2lbroefenf)eit beg Sifajofg ober 
2lufficf)tgalteften : foUen eg brer) Slelteften ober ^rebtger unterfuctjen, roirb 
er fcfmlbig gefunben, jo jolt er ftf)roeigen big jur ©onferen?, roo er oerant= 
roortlicfj foil feon. 



mux mwm. 

$on Hen 

©in jebeg ©lieb ber ©emeinbe follte befennen, baf; eg bie Sibel fur 
©otteg 2Bort fjalte ; bafj eg ftd^ oon nun an non £er§en beftreb<\ fein feetl tn 
©fjrifto ^efu ?u fucfjen, unb feine ©eeligfeit ?u fd&affen mit %uxd)t unb 3ittem ; 
um ben mfunftigen eroigen Sovn ju entfliefjen. 

©in iebeg ©lieb foil fief) beftreben einen genauen gottfeligen SBanbet §u 
fiifjren; fleijjig ferm im ©ebet, befonberg im SSerborgenen ; unb roo moglicfj 
alien SSerfammlungen beomroorjnen, beobeg bffentlict)en ©ottegbienft unb 
Setftunben, ju feiner ©rbauung. 

feaupier in gamilien follten eg nie oerfaumen beg 3Borgen§ unb 2l6enbg 
mit ben S^^9 e " 2" beten, wub benfelben ein guteg ©rempel fer^en, in alien 
Sfjriftlidjen ^ugenben. 

©in jebeg foil fid) beftreben, genau alg in ber ©egenroart ©otteg 
ju roanbeln ; fief) ber; feinen ©efepften an einen genauen Umgcmg mit ©ott 
gerobrjnen; nie Uebel oon feinem 9tebenmenfa)en reben; £iebe iiben gegen 
greuno unb $einb, bem Slrmen guteg §u trjun, unb fuct)en in ber %f)at ein 
^acfjfolger ^efu ©rjrifti $u fer»n. 

©in jebeg ©lieb foil ben &abafy fjalten, fo roie eg ©otteg'2Bort erforbert: 
nicfjtg }\x faufen nod) ?u oerfaufen, fonbern foil benfelben in 2lnbacf)t mit 
lefen unb rjoren beg SBortg ©otteg, mit fingen geiftreitfjer Sieber mr ©fjre 
unb £ob ©otteg m bringen. 



41 



(Sin jtebeS ©tieb in biefer ©emeinfcpft foEte oierteljapltcr) aug fregem 
2BilTen jo oiel bentragen, too eg feine Umftanbe erlauben, um bie reifenbe 
$}3rebiger m unterplten. 

@g ift einem jeben ©liebe feine spflicfjt, ein friblicpg fttlleg unb gott* 
feligeg Seben ?u fiipen, im Umgang mit alien SJienfcpn, rote eg einem 
©piften ge^temt, im $rieben m leben; abfonberlidE) foil jebeg ber Dbrigteit 
untertpn ferjn, fo roie ©otteg 2Bort eg forbert. 

33er; folcpn ©Itebem ber ©emeinbe, follen bie $r. eine ober mepere 
(5Iaffen:$erfammlungen erritijten, too eg bie 2fteppit ber ©lieber fiir nu|ltct) 
fatten ; bafelbft follen fidj bie ©lieber, too eg ferjn fann, einmal in jeber 
2Bocp oerfammeln, an bem bam beftimmten Drt, um Setftunben mit ein* 
anber m plten, um ftd^ m erbauen in ber ©egenroart ©otteg unb in £tebe 
ju guten SBerfen in ©pifio ^efu. 

^n jeber ©laffe follten 33organger in ©egenroart beg ^rebtgerg geroaljlt 
roerben, beren Spflidjt foil fean, bie 33et[tunben befteUen, anmfangen, unb 
ju beftftfieffen, aud) m ftexten ©laffen=Unterrebungen ju plten, ein jebeg 
©lieb m ermapen unb in Siebe erplten, unb auf fid^ felbft fepn. 

3Benn ©lieber ftct) an einanber oerfiinbigen alg Sriiber ober ©dpeftew, 
fo ftrafe eg merft mnfctyen 2)ir unb %i)m allein, pret er bier) fo pft bu ip 
geroonn n, pret er btct) nttt)t, fo nimm nodf) einen ober jroet) ju bir, auf 
baf$ alle ©aap beftep aug jroener ober brener 3eugenmunbe; pret er bie 
mdpt, fo fage eg ber ©emeinbe, pret er bie ©emeinbe nittjt, fo plte tp alg 
einen Speiben unb gollner. 

SOSenn fitt) ©treitig!eiten ereignen follten, ^nrifcpn jroerj ober mepem 
©liebern ber ©emeinbe, oon roegen ©aplben ober irgenb einer anbern 
llrfacp, unb bie ftreitenben ^artpien m feinem $ertrag lommen fonnen, 
fo foil ber ^rebiger roelcpr bie Stuffiest iiber bie ©emeinbe pt, ober ber 
^Prebiger ber in ber ©egenb roopt, bie ©adp unterfucpn, unb ben ©treiten* 
ben eine 3ieferen§ anempfepn ; biefelbe foil aug bren ©lieber ber ©emeinbe 
beftepn, roooon ber imager einen, ber Seflagte ben anbern, unb biefe jroet) 
ben britten erroctfjlen follen, biefe brer) follen bann bie groiftigfetten fdjlidjten. 
3m $all aber eine ber ftreitenten ^erfonen mit biefem 2lugfprua; unmfrieben 
fenn follte, fo mag fie fid) an bie nadjfte trierteljaplicp ober grofje $er* 
fammlung roenben eg bem ^ufftcpgalteften ober 2lelteften befannt madjen, 
um eine ^roente $rtebengfcr)ltdf)tung anplten, unb roenn bie ^rebiger fjins 
langltcr) Urfact) bant finben, fo follen fie eine jroepe ^riebengfct)licr)tung er* 
tpilen ; in roelcpm $all eine jebe ber ^art^etjen ^roet; ©lieber aug ber ©e* 
meinbe, unb biefe oiere, ben fiinften erroatjlen follen ; biefe foEen ben 2lug* 
18 



42 



fprutf) ber groiftigfeti ganglia; entfd&eiben ; foHte aber eine ber ^erfonen mit 
biefem 2(u§fprutf) bocf) nid^t bamit mfrieben feon, fo fajliefst er ftdf) bamit 
au§ ; unb roenn ein ©lieb ber ©emetnbe fidj roeigern foftte, roegen ©dEjulben 
ober anbern 3roiftigfeiten, bie ©attje fd^Iid^ten ?u laffen, nac^bem e§ ujm oon 
einem ^rebtger ober SBorgdnger, roeld&e bie Stuffiest Ijaben, anempfoJ)len 
roorben, ober ein ©lieb oon ber ©emeinbe oor ©erittjt ^ietyen fottte, e§e bie 
oor§ergef)enbe SJiaafcregeln genommen roorben, fo foil baffelbe oon biefer 
©emeinbe au§gefdf)Ioffen feon, e§ fen benn, ba§ ©treitigfeiten oon ber 2Xrt 
rodren, bajj fie eine geridfjtltdje ©ntftfjeibung erforbern unb redEjtfertige, ate : 
©recutoren ober 2lbminiftratoren. 



% n J) a n g. 

Son 

Hausbefudjen unii tier €infd)atfutt<} tines 
tJjitttgen ^rifitent^uwg ! ! ! 

$r. 2Bie fonnen roir benen bie fid) unferer Dbforge anoertrauen ferner 
befjiilflid) fetm ? 

2lntro. ^nbem roir ifjnen llnterrtcfjt ertljeilen, in tfjren £dufem, roelcf)e§ 
fefjr not^ig tft, urn ba§ SSertrauen unb bie ©emeinfefjaft mit ©ott ?u be* 
forbern: ferner ftdfj in ber SBeftliebe ab, an einen Ijimmlifttjen SBanbel 
geroofjnen ; ftdj Jjerjlidfjer 33ruber=Siebe befleifjen, auf bafc !etn argeS £>enfen 
unb Sftd&ten eine§ gegen ben anbern fegn mag, unb tljun roie roir rounftt)en 
getfjan m fjaben. 

2ten§. ^eber ^rebiger mufi e§ fttt) m feiner Spfltcfjt matf)en bie Seute 
in tfjren £>dufern befudjjen, fie erma^nen in allem ©uten gefdjicft ?u fet;tt/ 
bi§ biejj getfjan nrirb, unb par mit @rnft unb ©tfer, fo roerben roir im 
gan^en roenig gebeffert roerben, unb unfere ©ottfeligleit roirb nid£)t tief genug 
gegriinbet; folglicf) roo roir aucfj ferm mogen foil fein unnit£e3 ©efdE)rod£ 
aus> bem Sttunbe geljen. 



43 



Dfyne groeifel finb biefe £>au3;$efud)e unb fonberticfje ©rmafjnungen auf 
bie fewerlidfje SBorte be3 2lpofteI3 gegriinbet. — 

9 eoe Den SJuftrog, cor @ott unb bem £erm S^fu ©fjrifti ber 
ben feiner SBiebererfajeinung bie Sebenbige unb bie SEobten rid^ten rairb : 
23itte, prebige ba3 2Bort, Jjalte bamit an, e§ fet> ?u renter ,3^/ ober §ur 
llnjeit, ftrafe, brolje, ermafjne, mit alter ©ebult unb Sangmutfj" ! ! ! — 



Pon bem Unterridjt ber Sttgenb* 



$r. 2Ba§ foil ?um SSeften ber Ijeranraacfifenben iugenb getf)an roerben ? 

2tntra. 2Ber fur ©ott unb bag fgetl ber ©eelen einigen ©ifer f)at, ber 
fange bag SBert ofjne $er?ug an. 2Bo Kinber fief) befinben, beren ©Item in 
ber ©emeinfcfiaft finb, oerfamle fie fo oft eg iljunlia) unb nu|ltcf) ift: rebe 
mit iljnen, unterroeife unb ermafjne fie in bem @uten, bate mit ifjnen ernfilid) 
bod) finbliti); bafj fie ifjren ©ajopfer unb ©rlofer mogen fennen lernen in 
tIEjrer jugenb ! ! ! 



^rt unb Jieife Prebiger }\i ©rbtnitm 



2ln bem bant beftimmten Sag fott eine ^3rebigt ober ©rmafjnung ge* 
fatten tperben, barinnen ba§ 2lmt p, prebigen, unb beffen ^Sflid^ten ertlart 
urirb. 

9tad) biefem fpredje ber 23tfa)of alfo ju ben amoefenben 33riiber: ift 
jemanb unter eutt) bem einigeS $erf>red)en ober £inbernifj berou|t ift, roarum 
em ober bie anbere sperfon unter biefen nidjt ?u bem 2lmt eineg ©oange* 
lifajen $rebiger§ fottte orbinirt roerben, ber trette im 9^amen @otte§ Ijeroor, 
unb gebe foIti)es> $erbred)en an ben £ag. SBirb etnigeS SSerbrecfjen ober 
"Qinbermfj entbeft, fo Jjalte ber 33tfd)of mit ber Drbination ber ?perfon innen, 
bi§ ber SBefdmlbigte ftfjulbloS erfunben raerbe. 

2Il§bann lefe ein Steltefter ben 6, 7, 8 unb 9ten 33er§ be§ erften (Sapitel 
$auli an Sttunt ujnen mit ^Rac^bru^ oor : algbann nefjme ber SBifc^of mit 
einem ber ba orbinirt toerben foil, folgenbe Unterfutijung vox ! ! ! 



44 



$r. £>aft bu bag gutrauen bafj bu innertta) burcf) ben fjeiligen ©eift 
bam angetrieben roerbeft, bag Slmt eineg $J3rebtgerg auf bid) m ne^men ; urn 
barinnen ©ott m bienen, m feineg -ftameng @f)re, unb mr ©rbauung feiner 
©emeinbe ? 

2fatro. 3$ * ra " e f°- 

©Iaubeft bu ofjne $orbefjaft aUe ^anoniftfje Silver beg 2ltten unb 
9teuen Seftamentg ? 

SCntra. gtaube fie. 

f^r, SBiflft bu beinen $leifj bafjin roenben, beinen eigenen SBanbet nad) 
ber 2ef)re ©fjrifti emmridjten, unb fo triel in bir ift — bicf) ber foeerbe Sfjriftt 
m einem 9ftufter beg £f)ri[tlicf)en Sebeng t-ormfteHen ? 

2lntro. 3$ will, room mix ©ott oerfjelfen raoHe ! 

$r. SDBtUft bu benen roeldjen etroa bie Ueberftd^t iiber bid) cmoertraut 
roerben mag rntt ©fyrerbietung gefjorfamen, unb ujren guten (Srmafjnungen 
mit einem roilligen unb frieblidjen §er?en nadjfommen ? 

2lntro. 3$ roilt mid) buret) ©nabe baljtn beftreben ! 

9hm legen bie 33ifcpffe (ober 33ifcf)of unb ein 2leltefter) einem jeben 
befonberg iljre §anbe auf bag §aupt ; unb ber Sifdjof fprect)e alfo : — 

„9timm anmit fjin, bie 23ollmac£)t bag 3tmt eineg @tmngelifcf)en ^3rebt; 
gerg in ber ©emeinbe ©otteg m oertretten. %m 9?amen ©otteg beg SSaterg, 
beg 6of»neg, unb beg ^eiligen ©eifteg. 

Sllgbann gebe ber Sifdjof einem jeben befonberg bag Stbelbud) liber* 
fpredjenb : 

^Jiimrn anmit t)in bie Sollmadjt bag 2Sort ©otteg ber ©emeinbe (Sfjrifti 
m prebigen unb augmtegen. — 



Urt unb l&eife einen fifdjaf ?u ortmuretu 



9?ad) bem ©ebet mag bag 20fte Gap. von bem 17ten SSerg an in ber 
Stpoftel ©eftf)id)te getefen roerben. 

SUgbann fpredje ber 33ifdjof m bem ber orbinirt roerben foil. 

„93ruber, bieroeil bie fjeilige ©djrift befieljlt, bjfj roir niemanb nteilig 
bie Soanbe auflegen, unb ?ur 9iegterung ber ©emeinbe Sfjrifti aimefjmen, fo 
beantroorte folgenbe $ragen" : 



45 



$r. '3ft eg beine Ueberjeugung bafe in ber gbttlidjen <5cf)rift alleg m 
unferer ©eltgfeit burcfj ©fjrtfto entfjalten ift, unb bift bu entfcfjloffen bag 
$otf baraug m unterritijten ? 

Slntrt). 3<*. 

$r. aBiUft bu ^fltdjtmajjig in orbiniren, <ganbe auflegen unb Slugfens 
bung anberer getreu ijanbeln ? 
Slntro. 3a! 

2llgbann lege ber SSifd^of unb ein ober m)en 2lelteften ifjre §anbe auf 
bie enoafylte ^erfon rnienb oor ttjnen, ber 23tfttjof fage bann : 

„@mpfange bie ©nabe ©otteg sum Stmt unb Sitenft eineg 33iftt)ofg in 
ber ©emeinbe ©otteg bag bir nun burtf) 2luflegung unferer iganbe iiberge= 
ben roirb, im Xiamen beg SBaterg, beg ©oljneg, unb beg ^eiligen ©eifteg 
2tmen." 

2llgbann iibergebe ber 33ifc^of bie 33tbel fpretfi.enb : 

Sefleifige bid) beg Sefeng, Seljre unb ©rmaljnen, bebenfe bie SDinge 
vooty bie in btefem 23ucf) entljalten finb ; jet) ein £irte ber £eerbe 3efu ©firiftt, 
raetbe fie, fo'mm ben ©ajroacfien m jQiUfe, fuct)e bag SSerlorne, fer> mitleib.g 
auf bafj menu ber oberfte §irte ber <3d(jaafe erfajetnen roirb, bu bie unoer^ 
raelflidfie ©rone beg eroigen Sebeng empfangen mogeft 21 m e n. 



%nxtit an Pemierlobte. 



SB i e I ©eliebte! 

2Bir finb fjier oor bem Stngeftajt ©otteg, unb in ©egemoart 
biefer 3 eu 9 en oerfammlet, biefe begbe ^erfonen, alg 9ftann unb SEBeib eEjelidj 
mfammen m geben : 

3. Saber! 

2BiEft bu biefe 2Betbg=^erfon fur bein ©Ijeroeib anneJjmen, urn 
in bem ©Ejeftanb bein Seben mit 3 1 * rcaa) ©otteg Drbnung mmbringen ? 
roiflft bu 3 2iebe, Sroft unb ©fjre er^eigen, ©ie in ^ran^eit unb ©e* 
funbfjett fatten unb pflegen unb mit 33erlafftmg alter anbem, bid) il)r 
aHein E>alten, unb bafj fo lange bir ©ott bag Seben fdjenfen mag? raann 
bafj bein ©ntfdjlufs ift, fo antroorte, 3a ! 

(SDann raenbe fief) ber ^rebiger mm 2Seib.) 



46 



58. ©atfjar! 

SBiUft bu biefe 9ftanng^erfon fur beinett ©Ijemann anneljmen, 
urn in bem ©Ijeftanb bein Seben mit ujm nad) ©otteg Drbnung mmbringen ? 
roillft bu tfjm ©eljorfam, ©ienftroiHigfett, Siebe unb @f)re erjeigen, in ©e* 
funbfjeit unb ftxantytxt feiner pflegen, unb mit SSerlaffung alter anbern, 
bid) m ujrn aKein Ijalten, fo lang bir ©ott bag Seben fdjenfen mag : roann 
bag bein ©ntfdjlufj tft, fo antroorte, %a ! 
„3tad)t einanber bie redjte £anb." 

$e|t fafst ber ^Srebiger ifyre bepbe Sganbe mfammen, unb fpredje: raag 
©ott mfammen gefiigt t)at, foil ber 9JZenfd) nidjt fdjeiben ; alfo erflare ic£) 
@ud) alg -JRann unb SBeib; im -Kamen ©otteg beg $aterg, beg ©oljneg, 
unb beg §eiligen ©eifteg. 

©ott ber $ater ©ofjn unb §eilger ©eift, ber fegne erfjalte unb he-- 
toafjre ©udj in bem §errn, er fe£)e mit ©rbarmen auf @ud), unb erfiille 
@ u dj mit feinen ©eiftlidjen ©aben unb ©nabe, bafj § r f° & e 9 einanber 
leben moget in biefer 2Belt, bajj °$ f) r in bem gufunftigen bag etoige Seben 
fjaben moget, 21 m e n. 



2 e I) r e 

unb 

8ttdjt--£)rJ> Hung 

b e* 

^etettttgtett SSuufce* in dJjttfto, 



iebrutkt beg ©ruber unb Way* 



47 



1819. 



ttrfprung 

b er 

Seranigten 23ritber in @l)rifto. 



^n bem lefct serfloffenen 3a§rf)unbert, fjat eg bem £errn unferm ©ott 
gefallen, in »erfct)iebenen ©egenben ber 2Mt -Ultinner ju erroecfen, bie bem 
uerfallenen ©fyriftenifjum roieoer auffjelfen, unb bie £e|re »om (5reu? in tljrer 
Sauterfeit cerfiinbtgen fottten. 

©r gebacfyte babet) audE) ber 2)eutfdE)en in 2lmertfa, roelcije ^in unb roieber 
in biefem roeit auggebreiteten Sanbe lebten, unb bafyer nur felten ©elegenljeit 
fatten, bag ©oangelium com Greu?, in ifyrer Sftutterfpradje, ju if)rer 
bauung Derfiinbigen ju pren. 

Unter anbern erroecfte er aud) einen Dtterbetn, einen 33ofjm, unb 
einen ©iit§mg, riiftete fie aug mit ©eift, ©nabe unb $raft, in feinem fo 
fef)r t)ernac§laffigten SBeinberge m arbeiten unb autf) unter ben SDeutfcfjen in 
2tmerifa, ©iinber ?ur 33uf$e ju rufen. SDiefe banner folgten bem 3tuf iljreg 
<gerrn unb Sfteifterg, arbeiteten im ©egen, erricf)teten f)in unb roieber 
Ijerrlicfje ©emeinben, unb fufyrten (Sfjrifio mancfje eble (Seele ju. SRadj unb 
iifiify erroeiterte fid) ifyv SBirfunggfreig, bafc fie babet) genbtfjiget roaren ftclj 
um 9ftitarbeiter im SBeinberge ummfeljen; benn bie ©rnbte roar grofj unb 
ber 2(rbeiter nur roenige. ©ott erroecfte anbere, bie aucf) roillig rourben iljre 
Mfte bem !gerrn m roibmen; folcf)e rourben bann con einem ober bem 
anbern at§ 9Jiitarbeiter angenommen. 

£ie 2ln?af)l ber ©emeinbg=©Iteber in ben t)erfdf)iebenen ©egenben roucp 
von &\t m fttit, unb bag 2Cer! oerbreitete ficfj in ben ©taaten oon ^enn^ 
fufoamen, 2ftart)lanb unb SSirginien. @g rourben jafyrlicb einige grojje Sto 
fammlungen gefjaiten; bet) roetdjen ©elegenfjeiten fidj Dtterbein mit ben 
bafelbft gegenroartigen ^prebigern unterrebete, ifjnen bie SBtdjttgfeit beg $re* 
bigt=2lmtg trorfteHte, unb bie ^lotljroenbigfeit alien @mft anmroenben, um 
©eelen ?u retten, einfdfjarfte. 33et) einer biefer Unterrebungen, rourbe be* 
fcf)Ioffen bafj atte ^rebiger eine arrtmenf urtf t Ijalten foHten, um fid^ p, 
beratfjfcfylagen, roie fie am nii^lidjften fer>n fonnten. 



50 



Sie erfte gufammenfunft raurbe gefjalten in Baltimore, tm $af)re 1789, 
@§ voaven mgegen : 

SEifijelm Dtterbein, 2lbam Se^mann, 

■JJiartin 23of)m, ^o^cinneg ©rnft, 

©eorge 2lbam ©titling, Sjieinriti} SBetbener. 
(Sfjriftian Steufommer, 

S)ie pente ,3 u f cimmenJunf t rourbe gefjalten in tyoxl ©ouniij, ^orabieg 
£onmfcf)i:p, im igaufe be§ 33ruber ©panglerg, tm $af)r 1791, attwo folgenbe 
^erfonen gegenroartig roaren, nemlid) : 

2BiIfjeIm Dtterbein,' $ofjanne§ ©rnft, 

Martin mf)m, % ©. grimmer, 

©eorge 2lbam ©titling, So^anneS 9feibig, 

(Sfjrtftian 5fteufommer, SBenebict ©anber, 

2Kbam Sefjmann, 

unb -iftadf) retfer Ueberlegung roie fie mit bem grbfjten -ftu^en in bem 2Bein> 
berge be§ £erm arbeiten fonnten, ttmrben roieber fod^e aI3 Sftttarbeiter an; 
genommen, con roeldjen fie Urfadje ju glauben fatten, bafc fie rcafjreS 
©fjriftentfyum an il)rem eigenen §er?en erfal)ren fatten. 

$nbeffen cermel)rte fid) bie 2tn?af)l ber ©lieber immer mefjr unb mel)r ; 
bie ^rebiger faJjen ftcf) baljer uerpfliajtet atle %af)t eine 3ufammenfunft ober 
©onferen? ?u beftimmen, urn fid) naljer ?u oereinigen unb red)t nu|Iidf) m 
einem gemeinfd)aftltdf)en $voe& ?u arbeiten; benn einige roaren 9?eformirie, 
anbere Suifjeraner, anbere -Jfienoniften, unb nod) anbere 9Ketf)obtften. 6ie 
beftimmten bafjer ben 25ften September, 1800, in $rieberid() ©ountn, Tlaxr)'- 
Ianb, im £aufe be§ 33ruber§ $rieberid) $emp, mfammen ?u fommen. %oU 
genbe maren gegenraartig : 

©Ijriftian Hvum, 
<£einrtcf) tarn, 
£$oI)anne§ £errfdE)e, 
$acob ©eiftnger, 
<£>etnridf) SBofjm, 
Sietricf) 2lurauf, 



2BUf)eIm Dtterbein, 
Martin 93bf)m, 
©eorge 2lbam ©uttymg, 
©Ijrifiian -ifteutommer, 
2lbam £ef)mann, 
9lbraf)am Sradfel, 
©eorge ^frimmer, 

©ie oeremigten fid) bafelbft in eine ©efettfcfjaft, bie ben -ftamen fiif)rt : 
„£>ie SSereinigten 33ritber in ©l)rifto" ; unb erioaf)lten SEBil^elm Dtterbein 
unb Stfartin 93of)m m Dberauffefjern ober Sifd)bfen, unb ttmrben einig 
einem ieben bie $ret)J>ett ju erlauben auf bie 2lrt unb SBeife ?u taufen, nrie 
er eg nad) feiner Ueber^eugung fi'tr red)t befanbe. 



51 



23on nun an t>erbrettete fid) bie ©emeinbe immer mefjr urtb mefjr e§ 
rourben $rebiger aufgenommen, bie beftanbig reifeten (benn bie tnelen $re= 
bigtplaije fonnten auf feine anbere 2Seife bebtent merben) ; unb bag SBerf 
Berbreitete ftd^ in ben ©taaten DJjio unb tatutfg. ©3 rcurbe bafjer nbtljtg 
eine ©onferenj im <2taat DIjio ?u fjalten, inbem e§ m Befd^ioerlid^ gead)tet 
nmrbe, fiir bie bortigen ^rebiger jaljrltd) fo roeit m ber ©onferenj m retfen. 

^nbeffen ftarben bie SBritber SBofym unb ©utfymg, unb Sruber Dtterbein 
begel)rte, bafj ein cmberer mm 33ifd)of foUte errod^It roerben (roeil er felbft, 
2IIter§ unb ©d)n)ad)e ^alben, nid)t mefjr nad)fef)en fonnte), ber ba§ SSerf 
iibernafjme, bamit 3ud)t unb Drbnung erfjalten miirbe; benn e§ war bet) 
einer ber ©onferenjen befdjloffen roorben, raenn einer t)on ben 93ifdE)5fen 
fterben follte, einen anbern an feine ©telle m ernmfjlen. (S3 nmrbe affo ber 
58ruber ©fjriftian -JJeufommer al3 23tfd)of eramtylt, roefd)er bie Stuffiest 
iiber bie ©emeinbe iiber fid) nefjmen follte. 

<Sd)on lange nmrbe ber SWangel einer ^udjtorbttung in ber ©emeinbe 
tief empfunben ; e§ mar fd)on mefjrmal etroaS boran getfjan raorben ; enblid) 
nmrbe auf ber ©onferenj im ©taat Dfjio befdjloffen, bafj eine ^»aupt; ober 
©eneral ©onferen? gefjalten raerben follte, bie e§ iiber fid^ neljmen fottte, 
bie ,>$ud)torbnung in etroaS cottftanbiger m madjen, fo raie fie bem 2Borte 
©otteS gemafj fen. 

2)ie ©Iteber m biefer Sonferenj follten au§ ben ^rebigern, in ben 
unterfd)iebltd)en ©egenben, burd) bie ©lieber ber ©emeinbe geroafjtt roerben, 
burd) bie 37lef>r^eit ber ©timmen; unb e§ roaren bie'folgenben ^rebiger, 
bie gefjorig enoafjlt raaren, gegennmrtig auf ber ©onferen?, nemlid) : (Efjriftian 
;JJeufommer, 2lbrafjam fgteftanb, 2lnbrea§ getter, Samel Sreoer, ©eorge 
Senebum, 2lbral)am %vad)el, ©tjriftian Merger, 2lbrafjam 9J?et)er, !yo£janne£> 
©d)netber, SQeinrid) Kumler, igeinrid) ©pcitl), ^faa! 9Zeufd)n)anber, ©fjrifiian 
$rum unb $afob SBauluS. 

2)iefe uerfammelten fid) am 6ten Sung, 1815, nafje ben 9ftount=$leafant, 
in SKeftmorelanb ©ounh), ^ennfnfoanien, wo fie nad) reifer Ue&erlegung, 
bie folgenbe Se^re unb 9iegetn fiir gut unb nii|Iid) befanben, fie ber ©e* 
meinbe in Siebe unb Semutfj ju iibergeben mit bem fjer^lidjen SGBunfd), ba^ 
biefe Seljre unb foftfje ^egeln, nebft bem 3Borte ©otteg mod)ten beobad)tet 
roerben. Senn ©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb mo feine Drbnung unb 
$ird)enntd)t ift, ba t>erlief)rt fid) atte Stebe unb ©emetnfd)aft ; ba^er la$t un§ 
bem 3^at^ beg §errn folgen, ber un§ le^rt, ba§ roir burd) ©emut^ einer ben 
anbern pfjer ad)ten aB un§ felbft, fud)en gefinnt m fer»n nrie ^efug (£§riftu3 
and) mar, ber $ned)t3=©eftalt ariQenommen, marb geprfam bi§ mm Xobe 
am ^reu?, um un§ bie ©nabe unb Kraft m erroerben, ba§ mir un§ au§ 



52 



Siebe unb Semutf) einer bem anbern unter»erf«t fonnien; mer fic§ nid^t 
unterroerfen iann, bem mangelt noa) ©nabe, Siebe unb 2)emut$ ; ba|er 
fagt 2> e f"3 i 2B e * " n * e r eudj ber ©rofjte ferjn wiK, bcr foil be§ anbem £>iener 
ferm; jolt einer be§ anbem SDtener ferm, fo mftffe* wir einanber lieben. 
$efu3 fagt : alfo nrirb iebermarot erlennen, b«fc i$r metne re^te hunger 
ferjb, fo il)r £iebe untereinanber fjabt, unb wer mfyt SieBe Ijat ber bleibt 
im Xob. ©0 laffet un§ Siebe iiben, auf ba# wk bie $errlitf)feit befi|en 
mogen, bie ^vti feinen Siingem von feinem %&tev etbtfen $»t, bafj rati 
ein§ ferm molten, nrie er unb ber SSater einS ftnb. Samm iljr lieben 
Sriiber, laffet un§ fudjen gleid)gefinnet, ein^eHig unb emtra'e§tig §u ferm, 
unb fein§ Uebel uon bem anbern reben ober benfen, fonbern ben <perrn 
anfle^en, bafj er un§ feinen ©eift unb ©rnft geben mofyte, vm bag £E)rifien= 
tf)um red)t mr @^re feine§ ^eiligen 9teen§ m fm^rw, unb §u unferem 
eigenen eroigen 2Bof)I. 2lmen. 



©lauben0=Pekenntnt^ 

ber 

SBereintBten SBriikr in Sljrifto. 



^m 9iamen ©otte§ erflaren unb befennen roir »or jebermann, bafj icir 
glauben an ben eintgen nmfjren ©ott, SBater, ©olm unb £>eiligen ©eift, bafj 
biefe S)rer) @tn§ ftnb, ber $ater im ©ofjn, ber <Sof)n im Sater unb ber 
gieilige ©eift gleidjeS 2Se[en mtt benben. 2)afj biefer brerieinige ©ott &immel 
unb @rbe unb aHe§ mag barinnen ift, forooJjl firfjtbar. aI3 unftdjtbar, er* 
fdjaffen fjat, tragi, regiert, fd^ii^t unb ertjalt. 

SBir glaubm an ^efurn (Sfjriftum, bafj er roafjrer ©ott unb D^enfd) ift, 
bafj er feine 9ftenfti)§eit burd) ben §eiligen ©eift in 9)iaria angenommen, 
unb »on i|r geboren ; bafj er §eilanb unb SSerfb^ner be§ ganjen menfajlidjen 
©efdjledjtS ift, menu fie bie in %e\u angebotene ©nabe im ©lauben an 
i^n anne^men; bafc biefer ^efu§ fiir un§ gelitten Ijat, am ©tamme be§ 



53 



$reu£eg geftorben, begraben, am brttten Sage roieber auferftanben, 'gen 
£>immel gefab,ren, toeldjer ift ?ur reajten ©otteg unb oertritt ung ; unb 
raieber fommen ratrb am jimgften £age, \u ridjten bte Sebenbtgen unb bie 
Sobten. 

2Btr glauben an ben Sgeiltgen ©eift, baft er gleiajeg SBefeng mit bem 
SSater unb ©ofjn tft, baft er bie ©laubige trofte unb fie in alle SBaljrfjeit leite. 

2Bir glauben an eine £eiltge ©Ijrtftlic^e ©emeinbe, bte ©emeinftf)aft ber 
<Qeiligen, bie 2luferftef)ung beg ^letfdjeg, unb ein eroigeg Seben. 

20ir glauben bag bie Sibel atteg unb neueg Xeftamentg, ©otteg 2Bort tft ; 
baft fie ben toafjren 2Beg ?u unferer d>eligfeit entfjalte, baft ein jeber raaE)re 
©fjrift biefelbe mit ben ©infliiften beg ©eifteg ©otteg etn^ig unb aftein ?u 
feiner 3ttd>tfd&nur neljmen foil, unb baft ofjne ®lauben an 2>efum ©fjrtftum, 
nmfjre Sufte, SSergebung ber ©iinben unb -Jtttdjfolge ©fjriftt, niemanb ein 
raaEirer Shrift fetjn fann. 

SBir glauben, baft roa§ bie igeiltge (Sdjrtft entplt, nemlicb, : ben $aH in 
Slbam unb bie ©rlofung buret) %t\\xm ©fyriftum, ber gcwt?en 2Belt folle ge* 
prebiget raerben. 

2Sir fjalten bafiir, baft bie auftere 3Kittel in ben ©emetnben ©Ijrifti, 
nemlidj, bie Saufe unb bag ©ebacf)tnift beg £obeg beg §errn ^efu, geiibt 
raerben follten; unb baft eg feinen ^inbern oblieget biefelbe fcefonberg p. 
itben. ©te 2lrt unb 2Beife aber foK einem jeben nadj feiner @rfenntnift 
iiberlaffen roerben. 2lua) bag 23et)fpiel von ^-uftroafdjen fte|et einem jeben 
fret). 



$on iict 

$rage. -iftacfj raelcfjer SBBeife unb SSerorbratng f often bie lerljanbtungen 
auf ben ©onferenjen oorgenommen raerben ? 

Slntwort." ©g rairb oerlangt, baft, roag auti) immer bet) biefer ©elegen* 
fjeit getfjan, foil fo getfjan ro:rben, alg ob eg in ber ©egennmrt ©otteg 
roare ; raer ?u reben Ejat, ber ftelje auf unb rebe fret), toie er eg in feinem 
Sperjen fjat. 



54 



$rage. 2Bie unb auf raag 2lrt follen bie ©lieber einer $Qaupt=©onfernes 

geraaljlt raerben? 

2Intra. %n einem jeben ©iftrift foUen bie retfenben prebiger, roenn 
folcfje ba finb, raenn nid^t, fo follen bie fefjfjaften ^rebiger, bie in bem Se^irf 
raoljnen, eg ben ©emeinben trarftellen, baf$ fie ^raen SCetteften aug iljrem 23e= 
2trf raaljlen. ©g follen aber alle bie 2lelteften, bie in bem SBe^irf finb unb 
ouf bie ©onferen? gefjen fonnen, auf bie 2Ca§l getljan unb eg einige geit 
corner befannt gemadfjt raerben ; unb bie ;;raeo, raelcfje bie 9ftel)rl)ett ber ©tints 
men befommen, fotlen bie ©lieber oon ber ^aupt^onferen? feim ; bie ©ttmmen 
follen aber an jebem Drte fcfyriftlicl) aufge^eicljnet raerben, nnb won einem 
anraefenben pebtger, ober von einem 33organger unterfajrieoen raerben. 
2)er Slufficfjtgaltefte im 33e?irf foil eg unterfucf)en, unb follten jraep con ifjnen 
eine gteid^e 2ln?aljt ©ttmmen Ijaben, fo foil er burets Soog entfefjeiben, rael; 
cber won iljnen erraafjlt ift. 

$r. SGSie oft foil bie §aupt=©onferenj geljalten raerben ? 

2lntra. 2tHe trier i^afjre. 

$r. <gat bie £aupt=Goitferenj eine anbere ©eraalt, bie bie ^a^rlidge 

nidjt^at? 

Slntm. %a, fie fjat allein bie ©eraalt jioeg SStfd^ofe aug ben Slelteften, 
auf oier Sctljre ?u raaljlen ; unb audj bie 3udf)torbnung ober 9?egeln m t>er* 
anbern ober ?u oerbeffem, nacfjbem fie eg fur gut befinbet; unter ber 93e= 
bingung unb 2lugnaf)me, bafj fein 2lrtifel gemaajt raerbe, ber ben !Retfe= 
Pan aufte&t ober raegtljut. £)te ^aupt^onferen? foil ana) bie 2)iftrifte 
befiimmen, mo bie jal)rlid£)en ©onferenjen geljalten raerben follen. 

$r. SBelcfjeg finb bie ©lieber ber jd^rltcEjetx ©onferenj ? 

2lntro. Me bie Stelteften unb ^rebiger, bie einen fcfjriftltdfjen ©rlaub* 
ni^fd^ein empfangen fjaben, unb in bem Se^trf oon einer fo!d£)en ©onferenj 
finb, ober in folcfjen aufgenommen raerben. 

$r. -ftacf) welder SBeife unb SSerorbnung follen bie SBerljanblungen 
oorgenommen raerben ? 

2lntro. 1. ©g rairb etn ©apitel aug ber 23ibel oerlefen, unb furje 
2lnmerfungen bariiber gemad£)t, algbann rairb gefungen unb gebetet, unb bag 
fo oft alg bie ©onferen? ft£t ; unb mit ©efang unb ©ebet befdjloffen. 

2. S5ie ©onferen? foil einen ©cfjreiber erroiil)len, wnb foUte einer ber 
93ijcf)bfe abraefenb fenn, auc^ einen ber 2lufftcf)tg;2lelteften, urn mit bem 
33tfcf)of ju agteren. 

3. ^Berber; bie $rebtger unterfutfjt, rate tljjr 93ctragen gegen i^ren dleben- 
menftt)en fet) ; oh i^r SBanbel untabelljaft, ob fie fo oiel Qe'xt rate mbgltct) 
anraenben, urn bag 9?ei$ ©otteg au§?u6reiten. 



55 



4. 2Bag fur ^prebtger finb auf bie ^robe anjuneljmen ? 

5. 2Ba3 fiir ^rebtger miiffen ferner auf ber ^robe bleiben ? 

6. ©inb einige ?u Slelteften ?u nmljlen ? 

7. ©tub roof)l einige oon ben ^rebiger geftorben ? 

8. Mdjeg [tub bie Slufftd&i^elteften ? 

9. 2Ber giebt fidj auf ?u reifen ? 

10. 2Ba3 ifi gefammelt worben, tljeilg jufaUige 2lu£gaben ?u beftreiten, 
unb tfjeilg ben teifenben ^rebig^rn iljren ©eljalt aufnunadjen ? &t 9led)> 
nung mit tljnen geljalten roorben ? fgaben fie bag tljrige befommen ? 

11. SBann unb too fott bie nadjfte ©onferenj gefjalten toerben ? 

12. <Sinb bie 2lelteften orbtnirt toorben ? 

13. $n toa§ fiir 33e?irfe finb bie ^prebiger biefeg $af)r angefteUt ? 

14. Sft etnmg tuefjr ju tf)un ? 

15. §at bie (Eonferenj bie £>iftrifte beftimmt in iJjrem Se^irf, um bie 
2Baf)l fiir bie ©lieber ber §aupt=6onferenj ju fjalten ? 

16. Sft ^tteg toag oertyaubelt toorben, in bag ^rotofoll iibertragen 
toorben ? 



fritter Slfcfdjmtt. 

Son iJcr 

i$iil)htng unb ititination ber Pifdjofe 

unb 

ban intern Stmt unb $flidjt. 



$r. 2Bie f often bie 23ifcf)bfe eingefe^t toerben ? 

Stntto. £)ie §aupt=(Eonferen? foil fie toaljlen, burd) bie 9JiefjrJ)eit ber 
©thnmen ber Slelteften, bie ?u ber §aupt= Confer en? getoap finb ; aud) fte^t e§ 
ber ©onferen? fret), fie, bie 23tfcf)ofe, nod) auf oier ^aljre beontbeljalten. 2)ie 
©eioiifjlten ober S3ifcr)i3fe tniiffen aber bie unterfcf)iebUrf)en 93e?irfe unb (Som 
ferenjen bereifen fbnnen, fonft fbnnen fie nid)t geroap toerben ; bie fo ge; 
toapen ^erfonen follen oon einem SBifdjof unb einem 2lelteften burdj 2luf= 
legung ifjrer §anbe orbinirt toerben; follte aber fein SBifdjof ba feon, fo 
follen e§ ?ioet) Slelteften tljtm. 



56 



%v. 2Bct§ fmb bie ^flicf)ten ber Stfc&ofe ? 

Slntro. 1. 23en unfern ©onferen^en al3 $orfi|er m agiren. 

2. ©ie Ijaben mit einem 2lelteften, ben fie auSroafjlen, ben reifenben $re* 
bigern ifjre oerfajtebene SSe^trfe anjuroetfen, botf) nut ber ©infcfjrctnfung, 
bajj Jeinem ^eife^rebiger geftattet rcerbe, langer al3 bren aufeinanber fol= 
genbe %a§ve an berfelben ©teHe oerbleiben, auSgenommen befonbere ltm= 
ftanbe matfjen eg notfjtoenbig unb bann nur tnit 33etoilIigung ber 23tfct)ofe. 

3. 3)te SBifcfjofe ?eigen ben 2luffiti)t3=2Wteften tljren Sejirf an, ben fie 
m bereifen Ifjaben. 

4. ^n ber gtoifdjenseit »on Den ©onferen^en Ijaben fie mit ben 2luf* 
fid^tg=2lelteften ©etoalt, bie reifenben Sjftebtger §u oertoedjfeln, too fie e§ fiir 
beffer anfefjen, autf) ^prebiger aufmnetjmen ober m fu3penbiren bi3 auf bie 
(Sonferen?. 

5. ©te Jjaben bie oerfdjiebenen ©onferenjen, fo toeit fie fitf) erftrecfen, 
m bereifen, unb §aben im geiftlicfjen, bie Dberaufftdjt iiber altte ©emeinben. 

6. 2$nen ftefjt e§ m, bie Drbination m oollpefjen. 

7. SBenn ein SSifd^of auffjort bie oerfdjiebenen (Eonferenjen in ber 
metnfcfyaft m bebienen unb bie SBe^irfe ju bereifen, fann er bod) fein bifdjof* 
Iicf)e3 2lmt unter uns> au3iiben ? -Jlein, e§ fer) benn, bafj er franf toare unb 
roa^ bergletdjen lltnftanbe mefjr feon mbdjten. 

8. 2Benn e§ ftd) mtragen foUte, baf; unfere ©emetnfdjaft einer geit 
feinen 23ifd)of fjatte, roeil fie enttoeber geftorben ober fuSpenbirt toaren, ober 
toie e§ immer fetjn mag ; toie foil 3iatf) gefajaft toerben ? S)er 2lettefte, 
toeldjer in 2lbtoeienb,eit eineS 58ifdjof§ getoafjlt toirb mm 9ftitagieren an bee 
©onferen?, foil bie 23ifd)of3=©teIIe fo lang bebienen, alS bie ©onferen? toafjrt; 
btefer fo geroaJilte SSorfi^er foil audj bie anbere ©onferen? bebienen ; er foil 
feinen ©i£ mit bem bort getoapen SSorfi^er nef)tnen, urn mit if)m in ber 
©onferenj ju agieren ; unb ber bort getoafylte $orfi£er foU eben fo bie 
anbere ©onferen? aud) bebienen, bamit eine jebe ©onferen? toeifj, tote e3 bet) 
ber anbern au3fie£)t ; unb bafj Siebe unb ©emeinftfjaft erfjalten toerbe, u. f. to. 
bB mr §aupt=(5onferen?, bie toieber 33ifd)5fe toaf)lt. 

9. @g fofit ber Sifcpfe ^Sflid^t fenn, ba^ eine fa)icflicf)e ^prebigt beam 
©d)Iu^ jeber ©onferenj ge^alten rairb. 



main mtynitt 



$on ben 

i f) r er 



$r. SGBie folten bie 2lufftd)t§:2lelteften erroftfjlt toerben ? 

2lntn>. ©ie 93ifd^ofe follen ber ©otxferenj einige t)on ben Stelteften, 
bie ifjre $robe?eit auSgefjalten, oorfdjlagen, unb mit 3 ur * immun S *> er 
feren? auf oier iyaljre roaljlen. 
$r. 2Ba3 ftnb bie ^fUdjten be§ 2luffidjt3=2lelteften ? 

2lntra. 1. Sen i§m t)on ben 23tfcfjbfen angenriefenen 23enr! m bereifen, 
unb fo oft m prebigen al§ er fann. 

2. ©r Ijat bie Ueberftcf)t in feinem 23e?irf itber bie reifenben unb fefjs 
Ijaften $rebiger, bafj fie fidO bem ©oangelium gemafj betragen. 

3. ©r foil bie trierteljal)rlidf)e unb grofte SSerfammlung befteHen, unb 
too moglidf) bebienen; bag 2lbenbmaf)l ertljetlen, unb oterteljaljrlidl ©onferen? 
fjalten mit ben gegentoartigen ^rebigern, ©rmaljnern unb $organgern; 
auc£) unterfud^en ob bie reifenben unb fef^aften ^rebiger i|re ^ffti^t tfjun, 
15efonber§ ob bie fef$aften ^rebiger mo moglidj alte ©onntag prebigen, unb 
too meljrere finb, btefelben m geiten m oerroedjfeln, true am meljrften 9Zu|en 
gefefjafft rcirb ; fie ermafjnen, bafj fie gudjt unb Drbnung unb Stebe unb 
©rttft ben ben ©emetnben erl)alten. 

4. ©r fann audi) bie reifenben ^rebiger in feinem 23enrfe oerroecfjfeln ; 
er foil aber einen 93ifcf)of mit $u dtatl) §ief)en; er fann audj ^rebiger aufne^ 
men ober fu&penbtren Big auf bie ©onferenj. 

5. ©r foil bem 23ifcfjof -iftadfjricijt geben, toie e§ in feinem 33enrf au3= 
fief)t, unb nad()fe£jen, baji bie reifenben ^Srebiger merteliafjrig eine oerfjaltnifc 
maftge Unterftii|ung erfialten: inbem ifjnen if)r ©e^alt au3 bem ©elb bag 
fie in iljrem 33enr! fammlen mogen gegeben roirb ; einem lebtgen foil aber 
bocij nidf)t itber ad^jig Staler, unb einem »ereljlic§ten nidfjt itber ein fjunbert 

19 57 



58 



unb fetf^ig Xfyalex erlaubt fetm ; foHte aber e§ nidjt mreittjen, roa§ in einem 
ober bem anbern SBejirf gefammelt roirb, fo foil e§ einer Committee au§ ber 
(Sonferenj itbergeben roerben, bie nacf) ©utbefinben au§ ober von cmberen 
iljrem gefammelten ©elb bem 9ftangelnben ?u tljun ; roo aber ein ^rebtger in 
einer ©tabt ftefjen foHte, ba mufj bte ©emeinbe ifm oerforgen. 

6. ©elite e§ ftcg f* mtragen, bafj 3U einer &eit fein SStfd^of ba roctre, 
fo fotlen bie Sluffic^tS-Slelteften, ein jeber in f einem 5§e^irf, befonberS auf bte 
©emeinben 2(cfjt l^aben, bamit alleS in Siebe unb ©rnft er^alten roerbe, nnb 
einer bem anbern 9lad(jridjt gebe, roie e§ in femem Sejirf auiftefjt. ©ottte 
e§ fidE) aber mtragen, oa fj fein 2luf[itt)t§altefier in bem ober jenem Sejirf 
roctre, roie foK 9?atl) gefdEjaft roerben? ©3 foil bem 93ifc|of ^a^ri^t bacon 
gegeben roerben; biefer foil einen oon ben 2lelteften im Se^rf ba?u be* 
ftimmen bi§ mr ©onferen?, mo e§ m tfjun ift; follte aber fein ^ifcfjof ba 
ferm, jo foil ber nadjfte 21uffid^t§=2leltefte einen roarjlen, roenn er eg nitf)t 
felber tljun fann. 



iiinfter 5tbfi^ttttt. 



SSon ben 

Mtejteit tljar llaljl, Jlrot, Pflidjt 

unb 

Drittttttian. 



$r. 2Sie foil ein 2leltefter geroctfylt roerben ? 

Hntro. 3^ad| einer sroetfjafjrigen ^robe^eit, mag er ber jaljrltdjen (Son* 
feren? oorgeftelli roerben unb oon ben SBifdjofen mtt Sluflegung iljrer §anbe 
orbtniri roerben; mit biefem SSorbefjalt fo fid^ bie ©onferenj iiberjeugt fii^lt, 
ba& ber gnfjalt im 6t. 7t. 8t. unb 9ten SSerfe $auli an Strum, im lften 
©apitel, fief) in unb an ujm befinbe! 3)iefe 33erfe fotten einem jeben, ber 
orbinirt roirb, be» feiner Drbination uorgelefen roerben ! 



59 



1. SOBag ift etneS 2lelteftcn 2Imt unb ^flidjt ? £u prebigen fo oft unb 
uielmal er fann; unb m taufen, @l)en einmfegnen, bem 2lufftcf)tg=2lelteften 
fjelfen bag 2lbenbmafjl fatten, unb menu ber 2lufficf)tg=2teltefte ntcfit gegen* 
roartig feon fann, jo foil eg ein ober ^oeg 2Ielteften tE)un; er foil alle Xfjeile 
beg offentltcfjen ©ottegbtenfteg oerrtdjten, ©laffen=$erfammlungen fudjen \w 
errtdjten, too eg bie 9Jief)rf)ett ber ©Iteber fitr gut erfennt, fie audj fatten, 
unb Ijelfen SSorganger ju erractfjlen. 

2. aSterteIidt)rttd^ eine freotoillige Collection ?u Ijeoen fiir bie reifenben 
^rebiger unb fiir 2lrme; ein SSerjeidjnifj baoon ?u ne|men an jebem Drt, 
unb oon bem SSorganger unterfcfjrieben, unb menu fein SSorganger gegen- 
roartig mare, eg bann oon etnem anbern @lteb unterfdjretben laffen, urn mit 
bem 2luffic$tgalteften 3iecf)ttung m fallen, auf bafc aUeg orbentltd} mgefje. 

3. 2Bo etn fejjljafter Sleltefter ober ^rebiger, ber felber nidjtg mangelt 
an einem Drt. prebtgt, mo fein 3ftetfenber Ijtn fommt, fo foil er bie Collection 
f)e6en, unb ein SSerjetdOmfj e&enfo baoon neljmen, unb eg bem 2tufftcf,tgalteften 
ober mr ©onferen? fct)icEen ober brtngen, ?ur Unterftii|ung ber Sebiirftigen 
feftfjaften ^Brebtger bie arm finb, unb unter 2lrmen prebigen. 

4. ©ollte etn retfenber ^rebtger ober Sleltefter feinen ifjm angeroie[e= 
nen Se^trf oerlaffen roollen, fo foil er juoor bem 2luffia)tgalteften fa)rei6en ; 
follte etner i£)n etroa oerlaffen ober oerfaumen, eg fei bann burtfj ^ranf^eit 
ober fonft unoermeiblidje Umftanbe, fo foil er ber nadjften (Eonferen? oer? 
antroortlidj bafiir fetm. 

5. 2Bo fief) fefjfjafte ^rebtger oefinben, roeldje arm unb oebiirftig finb, 
unb oerlangt rotrb oon iljnen ?u prebigen, fo ift eg billig, ba£ bte 3lelteften 
in ben ©emeinben ©election madden, urn foldje ^3rebtger nad) Serljaltntfj 
ber 3ett, D j e fj e ^, a ^ u anmenben m unterftii|en ; bod) nid)t iioer bag, mag 
fiir bie retfenbe ^rebiger oeftgefetjt ift. 



Scrfjfter %mnitt 



Peifc Iprettger aufjunetjmett, 

unb 

i|tcm Stmt ttttb gJfliditctt. 



$r. 9Bte foil em ^rebiger aufgenommen roerben ? 
2tntn>. 1. 2)urdj bie ja^rtid^e ©onferen? ? 

2. S« ^er gimfd&enjeit von ber ©onferenj, burdO ben 33ifd^of, ober 
ben 2lufficE}i3=2lelteften beg 23e2lrl3, ober eineg 2lelteften, ber ben $pla£ etneg 
2luffic§tS*2CeIteftert oertrttt auf einer ja^rttd^en ober grofjen Serfammlung, 
big ?ur nac^ften ©ifcung ber (Sonf:renj. Reiner rcirb anberg alg auf ^ro&e 
angenotnmen; einer ber auf ^Srofie angenommen ift, mag beobefjalten ober 
abgeroiefen roerben, olfme baft ifjm etmgeg Unrest gefc^e^en raiirbe, fonft 
mare eg feine ^robe. 

3. (Sine jebe ^erfon bie alg $rebiger oorgefdjlagen rairb, foil oon ber 
(Sonferenj unterf udEjt unb Ujm folgenbe §ragen oorgelegt merben : 

Jgat er ©ott in (Sfjrtfto alg einen oergebenben ©ott erlannt ? 
<gat er SSergeoung feiner ©iinben erlangt ? 

3ft bie Siebe ©otteg burdp ben Ijettigen ©eift, in fein £er? auggegoffen 
morben ? 

§at er ben ^rieben ©otteg erlangt ? 
$aget er ber £eiligung nad^ ? 

£at er eine riti)tige ©rlenntnifj oon ©lauben, von Sufe, »on f^ec^t^ 
fertigung, £eiligung unb ©rlbfung ? 

Siegt tt)m fein eigen JiQeil, unb bag §eit fehteg -Jteoenmenfcfjen mefjr 
am §erjen, alS fonft aUeg anbere in ber SBelt ? 

$ann er fid^ bem 3tatfj feiner Sriiber unterroerfen ? 

2BiH er geljorfam femt, ju reben ober fclnoeigen, raie eg bie 33riiber fiir 
gut erfennen ? 

60 



61 



3ft er ttriKig, fo tiiel aB in feinem $ermogen ftefjt, ben ^eije?^Ian 
(ober ben SBeprf m beretfen) fjelfen aufredjt in fatten unb ujn fo xriel roie 
moglicf) m unterftit^en ? 

gr. 2. M ift bie ^fltd^neg ^rebigerg ? 

2lntro. ©Ijriftum ben ©efrewjigten \n prebtgen, too ftcfj nur guljorer 
einfinben; (Slaffen=$erfammlungen aufmricfjten, too eg nu|lid() tft, mit tfjnen 
von tfjrem <Seelen;3 u ft flnoe 2" reben, bie angefoajtenen fuajen jurecfjt ?u 
meifen, bie Xragen fucfjen aufmmuntern, unb alle im @Iau6en in ber ©nabe 
unb ©rfenntnijj ^efu ©Ijrtfti fucfjen ?u erbauen fo oiel rate tnogltd^ ; nte 
unterlaffen bie $ran!en ju befudjen, unb ntit fetnem Seben unb 2Banbe( 
fud£)en feine 2Borte m belraftigen toag er prebigei. 

%x. 3. SBeldje 2lnroeifungen toerben einem ^rebiger gegeben ? 

2lntto. 1. ©r fet) fletfjtg ; nie oerliere er feine $eit an umtotfyigen £)in* 
gen, an einigem Drt ; immer fet) er ernftfjaft ; fein 2)en!tprud^ fet) bem §errn 
gefjeiltget; er nteibe alien Seid^tfinn unb ©a^erjen; er rebe befdEjetben, unb 
Ifjabe befjutfamen Umgang ntit bem toetblicf)en ©efdfileefjte, unb betrage ftdj 
in alien ©tttdEen alg ein toafjrer ©Ijrift. 

2. @r fet) immer abgenetgt 33efcf)utbigungen $n glanben, eg fet) benn 
fjinlangltd) erraiefen; er lege alleg fo otel eg mtt ber 2Baf»r£)eit beftefjen mag 
Sum Seften aug, 

@r rebe oon niemanb tttdjtg Uebetg ; mag er je oon etnem ben!en mag, 
beljalie er foltijeg bet) fid) felbft, big er eg bentjenigen felbft, bem eg angeljt, 
fagen fann. 

3, ©ein ©efd)aft fet), ©eelen ?u retten fo oiel raie mogltd) ; ^u biefem 
©efd)afte gebe er fid) auf. @r befud)e bie eg bebiirftig ftnb. %n alien 2)mgen 
£»anbele er nid^t nad) fetnem eigenen ©utbiinfen, fonbern alg ein <3of)n beg 
©oangeltumg ; alg ein foldjer fte^t eg t!jm \n feme 3 e ^/ f° rote biefe 33or; 
fd)rift tautet : mit prebtgen, mtt §augbefud)en, mit Seljren unb 23etett, 
unb SBetradjtung beg SBorteg ©otteg mmbringen; bamit gelje er um, big 
ber iQerr fommt. 



©teli enter 9H)fd)mtt 

Son iicro 

jittenlofen ^etragen iier Pretoger, 

rote 

mit iljnen futt berfa^rett toerben. 



%v. 1. 2Bag foil geifjan roerben, roenn con einem SBtfd^of, Stuffing* 
SCelteften, ober ^rebtger bie ^adEjrid^t einfommt, alg t)abe er fid) eineg SSer* 
brecfieng fdjulbig gemadjt, bag im SBorte @otteg, alg eine augfttjliefjenbe 
§anblung oerboten fen ? 

2Intro. 2Benn em 23ifcr)of roegen fittenlofem Setragen befctjulbigt roirb, 
rote foil mit x^m »erfat)ren roerben? 3Bo fid) Sefdjulbigung ereignen fo lite, 
bie bem ©oangelium nadjtfjeilig roare, fo foil eg einem 3Cufftd^t§=2leIteften unb 
einem 2telteften befannt gemadji roerben, bie follen eg unterfucrjen, ob etroag 
an ber ©atfje feg ; fie follen aber feine $Iage auffer ^roer) ober bren geugen 
annerjmen, alg roie ber SXpoftet fagt. ©ct)eint eg nun, ba$ er ntit red)t be= 
fcijulbigt roirb, fo follen fie eg fdjrtftltct) nefjmen, unb bem 23i[d)of eine 
SCbfdjrift bauon fajicfen, unb eine geit beftimmen roo fie ni]"ammen fommen, 
roo bie $lager unb ber 33ifcf>of gegenroartig feon follen, unb foil buret) bie 
?roet) 2Iuf f td^ tg=2XeUeften unb brer) 2lelteften unterfudjt roerben. SEirb er fdjulbig 
gefunben, fo foil er fdjroetgen bio ntr jar)rlict)en ©onferenj; ba follen bie 
2luffitt)t§j2lelte[ten unb 2letteftert eg nod) einmal unierfua)en; roirb er fdjulbig 
gefunben, fo foil er oom 21mt fufpenbtrt roerben. 

$r. 2. 2Benn ein 21uffict)tg=21eltefter roegen fittenlofem Setragen be; 
fdjulbigt roitrbe, roag foil getljan roerben ? 

2lntro. 2Bo ftci> S3e[cr)ulbigungen ereignen follten, bie bem ©oangelium 
nact)tr)eilig roaren, fo foil eg ber nadjfte 2leltefte unb ein ^rebiger unter= 
fudjen ; fetgt eg fid) nun alg 06 er fct)ulbig roare, fo foITen fie eg fcr)rtftlict) 
net)men, unb bem ^uffict)tg=21elteften eine 2l6fcr)rtft baoon fdjidren, uub eitte 
3eit beftimmen, roo fie follen mfammen fommen, roo bie Hlager unb ber 
2luffict)tgdltefte gegenroartig ferm. 3n 2lbroefenl)eit beg &ifd)©fg foil ein anbe= 
rer 2luffid)tgaltefter unb ?roet) 2lelteften gerufen roerben, bie follen eg mit 
unterfuct)en ; roirb er fdjulbtg gefunben, fo foil er fdjroetgen big jur (Son* 
feren?, ba foil er uerantroortltd) fet;n. 



63 



$r. 3. 28enn em 3leltefter ober ^rebiger ober ©rmatjner foUte be* 
fdjulbtgt roerbett, roegen fttienlofem SBetragen, roa§ foil getfjan rcerben ? 

3Cntro. £>er ^Srebiger in ber ©egenb, bem e§ Mount toirb, foil nod) 
einen ^Srebtger ober ©rmarjner ober einen SSorganger mit fid^ netjmen, unb 
e3 unterfudjen; foHte e3 fdfjeinen bafj er fcfjulbtg mate, fo foil irjm 9?ad)rtd)t 
baoon gegeben merben, unb eine 3ett beftimmt raerben, too fie, bte $lager 
wnb ber 23efdjulbigte gegenronrtig fetm; in SIbtoefenljett bc§ 33tfd)of3 ober 
2luf[tcr)tgalteften, foHen e§ breg 2leltefien ober Sprebiger unterfuctjen, rcirb 
er fdjulbig gefunben, jo foil er fajtoeigen bt§ mr Gonferenj, too er »erant= 
toortlid) fetm foil. 



9td)ter Mfdjnttt. 

$on Hen 
(SUebern insgemein^ 

©in jebe§ ©lieb ber ©emetnbe follte befennen, baft e§ bte aSibet fur 
©otteS Sffiort tjalte; bafj e§ ftd^ oon nun an t>on ganjem £er?en beftrebe, 
fetn fceil in ©f)ri[to 3 e fu 5" fuajen, unb feme ©eltgfeit nt fcfjaffen mit $urd)t 
unb 3^tern, um ben mfi'mfttgen eroigen 3orn m enifliefjen. 

©in jebeS ©lieb foil fief) beftreben etnen genauen unb gottfeligen 3Banbel 
§u fiir)ren ; fleifjtg fernx im ©ebet, befonb?r$ tm SSerborgenen ; unb too mbglid) 
alien SSerfanxmlungen benntrootmen, beobeg bffentlidjen ©otte^btenft unb 
SSetftunben, m fetner ©rbauung. 

§aupter in $amilien foKten e§ nte oerfaumen be§ 9Dforgen§ unb 2lbenb3 
mit ben ^ffrtgen m beten, unb benfelben etn gute§ ©sempel m fe|en, in 
alien (Shrift ltd) en Xugenben. 

©in jebeS foil ftct; beftreben, genau al§ in ber ©egentoart ©oiteS 
m toanbeln ; ftd) Bet) fetnen ©efdjaften an etnen genauen Umgang mit ©ott 
getoolmen; nie Uebet oon fetnem -ftebenmenfefjen reben; Stebe itben gegen 
$reunb unb $eittb; bem 2lrmetx gute§ ?u ttjun, unb fudjen in ber £fjat etn 
Sftadjfolger ^efu (Sfjrifti \u fetm. 

©in jebeS ©lieb foil ben ©abbatE) fjalten, fo nrie e§ ©ottes) 2Bort erforbert ; 
md^tS m faufen nod) ju oerfaufen, fonbetn foil benfelben in SInbadjt mit 
Sefen unb Igoren be§ 2£ort3 ©otteS, mit ©ingen geiftreict)er Sieber mr ©tjre 
unb ^ob ©otte^ mbringen. 



64 



©in jebeg ©lieb in biefer ©emetnfdpft foltte wtertelja^rlid^ aug frerjem 
SBillen fo oiel beotragen, mo eg feine Umftanbe erlauben, um bie retfenbe 
^rebiger m unterplten. 

©g ift einem jeben ©liebe feine SPflicp, ein frteblicpg, fttfleg unb gott; 
feltgeg Seben ?u fiipen ; im Umgang mit alien 9Jienfcpn, rate eg einem 
©piften ge^iemt, tm $rieben ?u leben; abfonberlidf) foil jebeg ber Dbrigfeit 
untertpn fegn, jo raie ©otteg 2Bort eg forbert. 

Sen folapn ©liebem ber ©emeinbe, follen bie ^rebtger eine ober mepere 
©laffen:$erfammlungen errid£)ten, rao eg bie -Jfteppit ber ©lieber fur nii|Iicf) 
plten; bafelbft follen fid) bie ©lieber, rao eg ferjn fann, einmal in jeber 
SBocp t)erfammlen, an bent ba?u beftimmten Drt, um 33etfhmben mit ein= 
anber nt plten, um fta) m erbauen in ber ©egenraart ©otteg unbin£ieb~ 
m guten SBerfen in ©pifto ^efu. 

!yn jeber ©laffe foUten SSorganger in ©egenraart beg ^rebigerg gerad[)It 
raerben, beren ^flid&t foil fetjn, bie 23etftunben m befteHen, anmfangen, unb 
m fd)Iieften, aud) ?u $eiten ©laffemmterrebungen ?u plten, ein jebeg 
©lieb §u ermapen unb in Siebe ?u erplten, unb auf fid) felbft ju fepn. 

SBenn ©lieber ftd^ an einanber oerfiinbigen, alg Sriiber ober ©ajraeftern, 
fo firafe eg merft jnrifcpn 3Mr unb igfjm aHem ; ^bret er bid), fo pft bu if)\\ 
ge-comten ; pret er bid) nid)t, fo nimm nod) einen ober ^raen bir, auj 
baft alle ©acp beftep aug noerjer ober brerjer SeugemSftunbe ; pret er bie 
nid)t, fo fage eg ber ©emeinbe; pret er bie ©emeinbe nicp, fo plte ip alg 
einen £>eiben unb $o liner. 

SGBenn ftci) ©treitigteiten ereignen follten, mnfcpn jroen ober ntepern 
©liebern ber ©emeinbe, von raegen ©cplben ober irgenb einer anbern 
Urfadp unb bie ©treitenben ^artprjen \\x feinem SSertraa, !ommen lonnen, 
fo foil ber ^rebtger raelcpr bie 2luffid)t iiber bie ©emeinbe pt, ober ber 
^rebtger, ber in ber ©egenb raopt, bie ©adjje unterfucpn, unb ben ©treiten= 
ben eine deferens anempfepn ; biefelbe foil aug brer) ©lieber ber ©emeinbe 
beftepn, rcooon ber stager einen, ber 33eflagte ben anbern, unb biefe ^raen 
ben britten erraar)len foUen, biefe bret) follen bann bie graiftigfetten fa)licf)teu. 

$m $all aber eine ber ftreitenben ^erfonen mit biefem 2lugfpruct) unmfrie= 
ben ferjn follte, fo mag fie fid) an bie nad)fte oierteliapliap ober grofje $er= 
fammlung raenben, eg bem 2luffict)tg=2lelteften befannt maapn, um eine 
miepe $riebengfd)Iid)tung anplten, unb raenn bie ^rebiger fjinlanglict) 
llrfact) bant finben, fo follen fie eine jraerjte $riebengfcr)ltcr)iimg ertpilen; 
in raeld^em ^all eine jebe ber ^artprjen ?raer; ©lieber aug ber ©emeinbe, 
unb biefe triere, ben fiinften erraarjlen follen; biefe follen ben Slugfprud) 



65 



ber gnriftigfeit ganoid) entfdjetben; foHte aber eine ber ^erfonen mit 
biefem 2lu3fprud) bocf) ntdjt mfrieben fetjn, fo f<f)Iiefjt er fttf) bamit au§; 
unb menu em ©Ueb ber ©emeinbe ftd^ roeigern fottte, toegen ©tfjulben 
ober cmbern 3n#tgfeiten, bie ©atfje ftf)Iicf)ten m laffen, natf)bem eg tfjm oon 
einem ^rebtger ober SSorganger, roeldje bie 2lufficf)t tjaben, anempfofilen 
toorben, ober ein ©Ueb oon ber ©emeinbe oor ©ertct)t §tef)en folfte, ef)e bie 
»orfyergef)enbe 9ftaaf$regeln genommen roorben, fo foil baffelbe oon biefer 
©emeinbe au3gefti)Ioffen fer>n, e§ fer> benn, bafc ©treitigfeiten oon ber 2lrt 
toaren, bafj fie eine geritijtlicfje ©ntfdjeibung erforbern unb recf)tfertige, ate : 
©jrecutoren ober 2tbmimftratoren. 



Kn|ang. 

Son iier 
jStotljitieniiigkeit 

ber 

Sereimpng uttfrer felfiften. 



Saffet un§ (au3 bem, roefd^eg rair fttjon erfannt fjaben) ba§ Uebel ber 
©paltungen in ©runbfafcen, ber llneinigfeit im ©eift, ober in ber 2lusttbung, 
roie audj bie fcfyrectlidjen f^olgen baoon fiir un§ felbft unb anbere tief e.u* 
pfinben. ©inb rcir einig, nm§ fann un§ roiberfte^en ? Sfjeilen loir un§, 
fo oerberben tutr un§ felbft, bag 2Berf @otie3, unb bie ©eelen unferer 
SJlitglieber. 

$r. 2Ba§ fann bafjer getfjan roerben, urn eine genauere SSeretnigung 
unter un3 §u SBege \u bringen ? 

2lntro. 1. Safet un3 oon ber -ttotfjioenbigfeit berfelben ooEig unb tief 
iiber^eugt fenn. 

2. 33etet ernftlta) fiir, unb rebet treu unb offentjerjig mit einanber. 

3. SSenn rair un§ oerfammten, fo lafjt un3 niemalg ofme ©ebet au& 
einanber ge^en. 



66 



4. <QctItet fe^r barauf, bafj feineg be§ anbern ©aben reroute. 

5. 3iebet niemal§ urtlauter ober letdjtfinmg con etnanber. 

6. Sajjt un3 fudien eine§ be§ anbern ©fjaracter in alien Stngen ?u 
oertfyeibtgen, in fo fern e§ mit ber 2Ba^r^ett it&eremftimmenb fen. 

7. 2Ir6eitet in @f)ren, adjtet einer ben anbern ptjer al§ ftd^ felBft. 

8. 2Btr empfefjlen eine ernftlidje llnterfud)ung ber Urfatijen, UeBeln, 
unb $ur be§ JgerjenS, unb ber firdjlidjen Srennungen. 



San 

lau0befudjen nni iin* ffinfdjarfnng mm 
tpligcn (£J)tijienfSjtting. 



$r. 2Bie fbnnen rair benen, bie ftdj unferer DBforge anoertrauen, f enter 
fceljitlflid) femt ? 

2httra. 1. ^nbem rair ifjnen Unterrtd)t ertfjeilen, in ifjren ipufem, weU 
d)e§ fef)r notf)ig ift, urn ba§ SBertrauen unb bie ©emeinfdjaft mtt ©ott ?u Be* 
forbern: ferner fid) in ber 2BeIts£ie6e aB, an einen Ijtmmltfdjen 2Sanbel 
geraoljnen ; fid) fjer^Itdjer 23ruber=£ieBe Befteifjen, auf ba§ fein arge§ SDenfen 
unb 3ittf)ten eine§ gegen ben anbern fenn mag, unb ti)un rate rair raiinfdjen 
getljan ?u fjaBen. 

2. Seber ^rebiger mufs e§ fid) m fetner $PfIid&t madjen bie Seute 
in iljren §aufern ?u Befudjen, fie ermaJjnen in aflem ©uten gefdjtcft m femt. 
23ts> bie§ getfjan roirb, unb jtoar mtt Gsrnft unb ©ifer, fo raerben rair tm 
©anjen raentg geBeffert raerben, unb unfere ©ottfeligfett ratrb md)t tief genug 
gegritnbet: folglid) rao rair and) femt mogen, foil fein unnii£e§ @efd)roa§ 
au§ bem -JJhmbe gefjen. 

Dfjne graeifel ft nD ^i e l* e §au§*$efuc§e unb Befonbere ©rmaljmtngen auf 
bie fenerlidje SBorte beg 2lpofteI§ gegritnbet. 

„3<f) gebe bir ben 2luftrag oor ©ott unb bem igerm $efu (Sfjrifti, ber 
ben feiner SBiebererfdjeututtg bie Sefcenbigen uno bie Sobten rtajten rairb : 
23ttte, nrebige ba§ 2Bort, §alte bamit an, eg fen ?u renter Beit, ober mr 
Un^ett, ftrafe, brot)e, ermafjne, mtt alter ©ebulb unb Sangmtttf)." — 



Pan torn Itotemdjt tier Sugent)* 



$r. 2Ba£ foil mm Seften ber fjeramoatftfenben $ugenb getljan roerben? 

2lnttt>. 2Ber fitr ©ott unb bag §etl ber ©eelen einigen ©ifer fjat, ber 
fange ba§ 3Berf ot)ne $ermg an. 2Bo Jftnber fict) befinben, beren ©Item in 
ber ©emeinfd&aft finb, oerfammle fie fo oft eg tfjunlidf) unb nu|Iid) ifi : rebe 
mit ib,nen ; unterroeife unb ermaljne fie in bem ©uten ; bete mit iEmen ernftlidj 
bod) tinbttd), bafj fie ib,ren ©eppfer unb ©rlofer mbgen lennen lernen in 
itjrer S«senb 



^rt unb Petfe PreMger }\i arMnirau 



1. 2ln bem bam beftimmten Sag fott eine fcfjicflidje ^rebigt ober ©r* 
mafjnung gefyalten toerben. 

2. -ttacfibem itjre tauten taut oorgelefen ftnb, fprectje ber 23tfc§of m 
ben 2tnroefenben, alfo : 

3. ©eliebte 23riiber in ©fjrifto! ift jemanb unter eudj bem etnigeg 
23erbrect)en ober iQinbernijs fienmfjt ift, marum ein ober bie anbere ^erfon 
unter biefen nidfjt m bem 2lmt etneg ©Iteften (ober SDiaconug, raie ber 
$all feon mag) foftte orbinirt toerben, ber trete im Stamen ©otteg fjeroor, 
unb gebe folcfieg $erbrecf)en ober jQtnbermjs an ben Sag. 

4. SBirb eine §inbemifj eingebradjt, fo fjalte ber SSifcpf ein mit ber 
Drbination ber ^erfon big er fdjulbtog ift. 

Sann toirb getefen 1. Sim. 3, 8—13. 

©effelbigen gleidjen follen bie Wiener enrbar ferm; nict)t m)er)$ngigt, 
md&t SBetnfaufer, ntc^t unefjrlicfje ^anbirung treiben; bie bag ©eljetmnifj 
be§ ©laubeng in reinem ©erotffen t)abe,». Unb biefelbigen taffe man moor 
oerfudgen ; barnacf) taffe man fie bienen, menu fie unftraflidj finb. 2)effelbi= 
gen gleidjen xfyre SBetber f often efjrbar ferm ; nid^t Safterinnen, nitdjtern, treu 
in alien SHngen. 2)ie S5iener lafc einen jeglidjen fegn eineg SBetbeg 3JJann, 
bie ifjren tobern root)l »orftet)en, unb tfjren eigenen £aufem. 2Belcr)e aber 
toot)l bienen, bie erroerben ifjnen felbft eine gute ©tufe, unb eine grofce 

^reubigfeit im ©tau&en, in ©fjrifto ^efu. 

H7 x 



68 



$r. £aft bu bag gutrauen, bafj bu mnerlicf) bur$ ben fjeiligen ©eift 
bam angetrieben roerbeft, bag Stmt eineg ©ienerg auf bid) m nefjmen, um 
bartnnen ©ott m f eineg 9taen§ ©Jjre, in ber ©ernembe ©Ijrtfti m bienen? 

Slntra. 3$ traue, mit ber §iilfe ©otteg. 

$r. ©laubeft bu ber ^eiligen ©thrift, alteg unb neueg Seftament ? 

2lntm. £>a idf) gtaube. 

$r. SCBiCfft bu beinen $Ieifj ba^in anraenben, beinen etgenen 2BanbeI 
nacf) ber Sefjre S^rifti emmridfjten, unb fo tuel in bir ift bia) ber §eerbe 
@|)riftt m einem Rafter beg d&riftltajen Sebeng Dormftetfen ? 

2lntm. 3$ will, fo ©ott mein <gelfer ift. 

$r. SBiHft bu benen, meldjen etma bie Ueberftajt itber bicfj anoertraut 
merben mag, mit @f)rerbtetung gefjorfamen unb ujren guten ©rmafjmmgen 
mit einem mtHigen unb frieblidjen §er?en natf)fommen ? 

2lntro. will ourc ^ oie ©«abe ©otteg bafjin beftreben ! 

S)ann ratrb gebetet. 

3tfatt) bem ©ebet legen bie SBifajofe (ober SBifajof unb 2letteften) einem 
jeben bie Sjbanbe auf bag §aupt unb fpreaje : 

„9fiimm anmit E)in, bie SSoIhnacfjt bag 2lmt eineg 2Wteften (ober 5)ies 
nerg) in ber ©emeinbe ©otteg m oou^iefjen. %m Seamen ©otteg beg SSaterS, 
beg ©of)neg unb beg §eiligen ©eifteg," 2lmen. 

§ierauf iibergebe ber 23ifcf)of einem jeben befonberg bag SBibelbucf), 
fprectjenb : 

^imm anmit §in, bie $oHmaa)t bag 3Bort ©otteg m tefen unb m 
prebigen in ber ©emeinbe ©Jjrifti." 

2U§barm lefe ber 23tfa)of aug bem 12ten £apitel Suca, 23. 35—38 : 
Saffet eure Senben umgiirtet fenn, unb eure Sifter brennen ; unb fenb 
gletdE) ben Sftenfajen, bie auf ifjren £errn marten, menu er aufbreajen mirb 
von ber §odfoeit, auf bafs menn er fommt, unb anflopft, fie iljm balb auf* 
tf)un. ©elig finb bie ^nett)te, bie ber £err, menn er fommt, roadEjenb finbet. 
2Baf)rlidf) idj fage euaj: @r rairb ftdf) auffajurjen, unb mirb fie ?u £ifdfje 
fe^en, unb cor iljnen geljen, unb i^nen bienen. Unb fo er fommt in ber 
dnbern SSaaje, unb in ber britten 28aa;e, unb mirb eg alfo finben, felig 
finb biefe $neajte. 

SDann bete ber 33ifti)of, ober einer ben er Ijeijst ; raorauf bann ber folgenbe 
©egen com 23iftf)of gefproajen mirb. 

2)er $riebe ©otteg erfjalte eure §erjen unb Sinnen in ber (Srferniinifj. 
Sefu ©fjrifto unferm <perrn. 2lmen. 



?lac§ bem @e£>et lefe ber 23ifcf)of rate folget : 
<$oret beg £errn SBort ! 

3JiattJj. 28. 18—20. Unb $efug trat ?u ifjnen, rebete mit ifjnen unb 
fpracfy : Wiv ift gegeben alte ©eroalt im §tmmel unb auf ©rben. £)arum 
gefjet fjtn, unb lefjret afle SSotfer, unb taufet fie tm Seamen beg Waters, unb 
beg <3oI)neg, unb beg Sjbeiligen ©eifteg; unb lefjret fie fjalten alleg, raag id) 
eu<$ fcefoljlen f)abe: Unb fielje 2>cf) bin bet) eudf) aide Sage, Big an ber 
Belt @nbe. 

2lpofteIgefct)tcf)te 20. 27—32. 2)emt tdj §abe eud) nidjtg »er§alten, 
bafj id) nidjt oerfunbtget Ijatte afle ben 3tatlj ©otteg. ©o f)abt nun ad)t 
auf eucfj felbft, unb auf bie ganje Speerbe, unter roeld£)en end) ber Spetlige 
©etft gefe^et Ijat ?u Sifdjofen, ?u raeiben bie ©emeinbe ©otteg, roeldje er 
burcfj fein etgeneg SStut erraorben §aL 

2)enn bag roeifs ic§, bafc nacf) meinem 2ibfd(jieb nmben unter end) fommen 
graulidje SBolfe, bie ber ^eerbe nidjt oerfdfjonen merben. 2lud£) aug end) 
felbft raerben auffteljen banner, bie ba oerfeljrte Se^ren reben, bie hunger 
an ftdf) m ste^ert. ©arum fetjb raader, unb benfet baran, baft iclj md)t ab- 
gelaffen Ijabe bren ^a^re, Sag unb 9iad§t einen jeglidjen mtt Sfjranen m 
Dermafmen. Unb nun, Itebe Sritber, id) befeljle eucf) ©ott, unb bem 2Bort 
feiner ©nabe, ber ba tnaagtig ifi end) ?u exbauen, unb ?u geben bag @rbe, 
unter alien, bie gefjeiliget merben. 

1 £imotf)eum 3. 1—7. 2)ag ift je genrifclid) rcafjr, fo jemanb ein 
33ifdEjofg=2lmt begef)ret, ber begefjret ein toftlidjeg 2Ber!. — ©jj foil aber ein 
33ifd)of unfiraflid) ferm, eineg SBeibeg 2ttann, ntid^tern, mafjig, fitttg, gaftfret), 
lefjrfjaftig ; ntdjt ein 3Beinfaufer, nic^t podjen, ntcfjt uneljrlidje ^anbirung 
treiben; fonbern geltnbe, ntdjt fjaberljaftig, nidjt gei^ig; ber feinem eigenen 
£aufe rcoljl uorftefje, ber gefjorfame Kinber fjabe mit alter ©fjrbarfett; (fo 
aber jemanb feinem eigenen" £aufe nidjt roeifj tjormftefjen, rcie toirb er bie 
©emeinbe ©otteg tjerforgen? nidjt em -Keuftng, auf baft er fid) ntcfjt auf- 
Blafe, unb bem Safterer ing Urt^eit fatte. @r mujj aber aud^ ein guteg 
geugmjj ^aben von benen, bie brauffen finb, auf ba^ er nid^t falle bem 
Safterer in bie (SdjmadE) unb ©tridf. 

SBann bie 2l6Iefung beg ©oangeltumg unb ber ©piftel gefc^e^en, unb 

bie barauf folgenbe 9tebe geenbet ift, fo erfucfje ber SBifd^of bie erroafjlte 

69 



70 



Sperfon fjeroor m tretert, erimtere bie anraefenbe Serfammtung mm ©ebet, 
unb fpredje algbann m bem ber orbimrt raerben foil, rate folget : 

33 r u b e r ! SDBett bie gottlidje Jjetlige ©djrift beftefjlt, baft rair ^temanben 
m eilxg bte <ganbe auflegen, unb mr Sfcgierung ber ©emeinbe ©brifti, roeldje 
er urn feinen geringem $reig alg mit 2)arretd)ung unb SSergte^ung fetneg 
etgenen 33(uteg erfauft f)at, annefjmen : fo rotll td; bid), bieferroegen, eE)e unb 
beoor id) bid) m biefer SSerraaltung amtefjme, iiber einige geraiffe ^unfte, 
biefer ©adje betreffenb, fragen. 

2) e r S3 1 f d) o f. ^ft bag beine Ueberjeugung, bafj in bem atten unb 
neuen Seftament, aHe m unferer, burdj %e\um ©fyriftum erraorbenen, erotgen 
<5elig!eit notfjigen ^eljre entfjalten fet) ; unb bift bu entfdjloffen bag $otf, fo 
betner Dtyut anoertrauet raerben mag, aug eben btefer £>etltgen ©djrift, nad) 
bem 23ermogen bag bir ©ott gibt, m unterridjten, unb nidjtg m leljren, als 
raag bartnnen erraiefen raerben fann ? 

21 n t ra. 3a, i$ itber^eugt, unb ratU mtt ber £iilfe ©otteg barnad^ 
tE)un. 

SDer 23ifd)of. Sift bu ratfteng bid) in eben btefer Sgeiligen ©djrift 
fo ?u itben mtt Ijer^idjem ©ebet m ©ott, urn ben redjten SSer'ftanb berfelben 
m erfennen, bamit bu f)eilfa«t leljren f annft ? 

21 n t ra. Wit ber jQiilfe ©otteg raiH id) fo tfmn. 

2)er 23ifd)of. 2Bittt bu, fo triet an btr Itegen mag, frteblid) unb 
liebreitf) gegen S^bermann fetjn ; unb foldjeg aud) jroif djen anbere m befbrbern 
fudjen, nadj ber ©eroalt, bie bir nadj ©otteg SBort mftetyet ? 

21 n t ra. 3d) f° ^ un > oetr £ err f e 9 weine §iUfe. 

2) e r 33 i f tf) o f. SBillt bu in Drbinirung, 2lu§fenbung unb £anbe=2luf- 
legung, §u foldjen graeden, geraiffen^aft unb pflidjtmctfjig Jjanbem ? 

21 n t ra. 3d) raiU burd) bie fcttlfe ©otteg. 

2Hgbann fpredje ber 33tfdjof : 

2)er attmadjtige ©ott unb J)immlifd)e $ater gebe bir bie $raft, unb bag 
SSermogen mm SSoIIbringen, bafj bu a(g ein getreuer SDiener mogeft erfun* 
ben raerben am Xage beg ©eridjtg, burd; unfern ^errn ^efum Sfjriftum, 
2(men. 

2)er 33ifd;of. Sa^t ung beten. 

9tad) bem ©ebet !niet ber ber orbinirt raerben foil nieber, unb ber 
33ifa;of fammt ben anraefenben 2Ie(teften legen if;re §anbe auf fein §aupt. 
2)er S3ifd;of fpredje : 

©mpfange ben ^eiligen ©eift mm 2lmt unb Sienft eine§ S3ifd;of§ in 
ber ©emeinbe ©otteg, bag bir nun bura; 2luflegung unferer ^anbe itber- 



71 



geben nrirb. %m 3lamtn ©otteg beg Waters, unb beg ©ofjneg, unb beg 
£etltgen ©eifteg, 2lmen. 

2ttgbann iibergeoe tfjm ber Stfdfjof bie a3ibet unb fprecfje : 
23efletfjtge btd^ beg Sefeng, Sefjreng unb ©rmafmeng. 23ebenfe bte £e!j; 
ren roo§I, bte in biefem Ijeiligen 23ucf)e entEjalten finb ; fen fleifjig biefelben 
ju itben. Sttage ©orge ii&er bid^ felBft unb itber betne Seljre. SBeibe bte 
£>eerbe ^efu ©E)riftt. Somme ben ©cffroadjen ?u §ulfe. ©en ntttletbtg. 
§alte 3udjt mit 23arml)erngfeit, auf baft bu bte tone beg erotgen SeBeng 
empfangen mogeft, burdj $efum Gijriftum unferm :gerrn, 2(men. 

S)ann bete ber 33ifd)of mm SSefdjluft, ober f)etfje fonft jemanb Beten. 



form, hit (ffljen rinjufcpnu 



% n t e iJ e . 

$iet ©elieBte! 

2Btr finb Ijier nor bem 2lngefidjite ©otteg unb biefen gegen* 
rocbtigen 3 e U9 er t tierfammlet, bieie Benbe ^erfonen, nemltcf) 31. uub 31. alg 
3Wa-nn unb 2BeiB efjeltcf) jufammen ?u ge&en. 3)ie @^e ift etn eJjrBarer 
©frnb, con ©ott felbft im ©tanb ber llnfdjuft her erften 2Jienfdjen etngefe^t. 

% r a g e. $ft nun jemanb gegemoarttg bem etroan eintgeg <Qinbernifj he- 
fartnt ift, roarum btefe Beobe ^erfonen nicfjt nereljeltdjt merben follten, ber 
jetge eg nun in geBitljrenber Drbnung an, ober fcrjraeige auf erotg barnadj. 

SBirb nun feine ftinberntfi ange^eigt, fo frage ber ^rebiger bie aftanng* 
perfon : 

91. 31. 2BtUt bu biefe 2Betbgperfon (91. 31.) fitr betn ©fyeraetB annefjmen, 
urn in bem ©fjeftanb mit tfjr nadj ©otteg Drbnung m leBen? SBiHt bu 
iljr SieBe unb £roft er^etgen; in ©efunbfjett unb tenffjeit, in 9leicfjt§um 
unb in 2lrmutf) ifjr pflegen ; unb bid) ?u ifjr a Heine fjalten, rate eg einem 
djriftltajen (Sfjemann mfte£)t ; fie rtict)t m oerlaffen Big eudj ber 3?ob fdjeiben 
nrirb ? fo antroorte $ a. 

&ann frage ber ^rebiger bag SSeiBgBUb. 



72 



■ft. 31. 5Bittt bu biefe ^anngperfon 0ft. 31) fiir beinen @§emann annef)= 
men, um in bem (Sfjeftanb mit ujm natt) ©otteg Drbnung ju leben ? 2Mt 
bu iJjm ge£)orfam unb bienftroiHtg femt, tfmt Siebe imb ©fyrfurd^t er^etgen, 
unb if)n pflegen in $ranf§eit, in ©efunbfje't, in ^eidjtfjimr unb Slrmutf) ; mit 
SSerlaffung alter anbevn, bt(f> alleine m ifjm flatten, nrie eg etnem djrifc 
lidtjen ©tyeroeib mftef)t ; u)n nicr)t m oerlaffen, big eutt) ber Xob fdjeiben nrirb ? 
f o antroorte 3 a. 

9fom Iaffe ber ^rebiger bie SBerlo&ten einanber bte redjte <Qanb geben, 
unb ber ^rebig'er fpreaje : 

2Bag ©ott ?ufammen gefiiget l)at, foil ber 9ftenfdj nict)t fdjeiben. 

SBeil nun 31. unb 91. ftct) in ben (Sfjeftanb begeben, unb folct)e§ allfjier 
vox ©otteg 2fngefid)t unb ben gegenroartigen Beugen beutlitt) befennt unb 
be^eugt fjaben, fo erflare idfj fie fjiemit afg Wlann unb 2Beib, im Stamen 
©otteg beg $aterg, beg ©ofmeg,unb beg £eiftgen ©eifteg. 2)er ©ott 2t6ra* 
Ijamg, unb ^aac, unb ^acob fegne btefen 9Jiann unb btefeg 2Bei6, unb fete 
ben ©amen beg eroigcn Sebeng in iljre ^er^en, 2lmen. 

Safjt ung beten. 

Sag @nbe. 



unb 



b er 



£$eretttt<jtett SBrttfcetr in ©Imfto, 



^atti no re. 

$5e6ruc?t bet XDtUtam Hatne. 
1841. 

73 

20 



ttrfp tun g 

ber 

Sereinigtcn $riti>er in Sljrifto 



$n bem atf^efynten ^a^r^unbert gefiel eg bem £erm unferm ©ott in ben 
Derfdjtebenen ©egenben ber SBelt Scanner m erroecEen, bie bem t)erfa(Ienen 
©J)riftent£)um raieber aufljelfen, unb bie £ef>re vom $reus in i^rer Sauterfett 
rerfimbigen foHten. 

Ungefafjr urn bie -JJiitte beg fcefagten $saljrf)unbertg gebatf)te ber Sperr audj 
ber SDeutfdjen in 2lmerifa, roeldje f)tn wnb rcieber in biefem roeit auggefjreiteten 
#anbe Ie&ten, unb ba^er nur felten ©elegenfjeit fatten, bag ©tmngelium »om 
$reu?, in iljrer 9Jiutterfpracf)e m ifjrer Srfcauung nerfimbtgen y\ pren. 

IXnter anbern erroecfte er SBillielm Dtterfcein unb Martin SSBfjm in ^emts 
fnloanien, unb ©eorg 31. ©iitfjing in -JRarnlanb, riiflete fie aug mit ©eift, 
©nabe unb $raft, in jetnem \o fe^r »ernadE)laffigten SBeinberge ?u arbeiten, urn 
and) unter ben £>eutfcf)en in Slmerifa ©iinber mr SBufte ju rufen. £>tefe Warn 
ner folgten bem SRufe if)reg "oerrn unb 3Jieifter§, arbeiteten im ©egen, erri^te* 
ten f)in unb raieber fjerrlidje ©emeinben, unb fiitjrten S^rifto manege eble 
©eelen §u. 

Sftadj unb nad) erroeiterte ftdj tjjr SBirfunggfreig, bafj fie baEier genotfjiget ' 
roaren fid) nad) 3ftitarbetter im SBeinberge ummfe^en ; benn bie ©rnbte war 
grofe unb ber SJrbetter nur rcentge. ©ott erroecfte anbere, bie audj nulltg 
nmrben, xfjre 5Mfte bem £errn ?u raibmen ; fold>e nmrben bann von einem 
ober bem anbern alg 3J?ttarbeiter angenommen. 

2)ie Slnjafjl ber ©emeinbgglieber in ben ©erfdjiebenen ©egenben truajg 
von $eit j U g e it, unb bag SBerE nerbreiteie ftd^ fdmeU in ben ©taaten ^cnnfpl* 
t>amen, 9ftart)lanb unb SSirginien. ©g nmrben jalprlid) einige gro|e SSerfamm* 
lungen gefjalten, bei roelajen ©elegenljetten fid) Dtterbein mit ben bafelBft gegen* 
roarttgen ^rebigern unterrebete, ifmen bie SBicfytigleit beg ^rebigt^mtg vox* 



76 



fiellie, unb bie 9?otf)roenbigteit alien Srnft an^uroenben, urn ©eelen ?u retten, 
ein[df)drfte. S3ei einer biefer llnterrebungen raurbe Befajloffen, baft alle ^rebi= 
ger erne gufammenfunft fatten foftten, urn fief) ?u Beratf)fcf)Iagen, roie fie am 
9£itt5lid)ften fern formten. 

3)ie erfte gufammenfunft mar im ^afjre 1789 in Mtimore, 9Jiart)Ianb. 
@§ maren folgenbe ^rebiger jugegen : 2Btff)elm DtterBein, 2lbam 2ef)mann, 
9ftartin Sbfim, 3of)anne3 ©rnfi, ©eorg 2fb. ©iitfjing, £etnr. 2Beibner, (Sfjriftian 
Sfteutommer. 

2)ie |tr»eite gufammenfunft raurbe in 2)orf ©ountr), $arabie3 Saunffjip, 
^ennfrjfoanien, im Sgaufe be§ SruberS (£pdngler§, im 3 a ^ e 1791 gerjaften, 
mo folgenbe ^Srebiger gegenrodrttg maren : 

SBiirjefm DtterBein, 2>o*)anne§ ©rnft, 3ftartin 33bf)m, % @. ^frimer, ©eorg 
21b. ©iitfjing, goljcmn S^eibig, ©f)r. 9teufommer, 23enebi?t ©anber, 2fbam Selj= 
mann. 

3^ad£) reifer UeBerfegung, rate fie mit bem grbfjten yiufyen in bem SSeinBerge 
beg £erm arBeiten fbnnien, ranrben raieber folcfje al§ 9ttitarBeiter angenommen, 
»on raelcfjen fie HrfadEje ?u gfauBen fatten, ba£ fie raafjreS (Ef)riftentf)itm an 
ifjrem eigenen §er?en erfafjren fatten. 

^nbeffen oermefjrte fief) bie 2In?af)I ber ©fieber immer mefjr unb meljr. 
S)te ^rebiger farjen fief) bafjer oerpflicfitet affe ^cifyx eine gufammenhmft ober 
©onferen? m Beftimmen, urn fief) ndfjer m oereinigen unb recfjt ni't^tcf) ju einem 
gemeinfefjaftlidjen 3raecf 2 U ctrBeiten ; benn einige maren ^eformirte, anbere 
£ut£)eraner unb nod) anbere Sttenoniften. ©ie Beftimmten bafjer ben 25. (Sep; 
iemBer 1800, in $riebrief) ©ountn, -Hftarolanb, im <gaufe be§ SruberB ^rtebrid^ 
#emp, mfammen |U !ommen. folgenbe ^Brebiger maren ?ugegen : 

SBilfielm DtterBein, ©fjrifiian £rum, Martin 33bf)m, £>einricf) $rum, ©eorg 
" 21. ©titling, ^o^ann Sperrfdje, Gfjr. 9Zeutommer, %acoft ©eifinger, 2tbam Sefj* 
mann, <peinrief) Sbfjm, 2lBrafjam Srarjel, ©ietritf; Sturauf, ^o^ann ©eorg 
^frimmer. 

©ie oereinigten fief) bafelBft in eine ©efeff)d)aft, bie ben 9?amen fitf)rt: 
„2)te SSereinigten 23 r ii b e r in (S E) r i ft o" ; unb erroafjlten 3Bilf)eIm 
DtterBein unb Martin SSbfjm ?u DBer=2Uif[ef)ern ober Sifcpfen, unb raurben 
eintg einen jeben bie $reif)eit ju erlauBen auf bie 2Irt unb SBeife ju taufen, rate 
er e§ nacf) feiner UeBerjeugung fiir redpt Befanbe. 

SSon nun an oerBreitete fid) bie ©emeinbe immer me^r unb mefjr ; e§ raur* 
ben ^rebiger aufgenommen, bie Beftdnbig reifeten (benn bie oielen ^prebigt^ 
pldfje Jonnten auf !eine anbere SBeife Bebient merben), unb ba3 SSerf oerBreitete 
fta) in bie ©taaten Dfjio unb ^entudft). raurbe ba^er nbtfjig, eine (Sonfe; 



77 



ren? im ©taate DI)io 311 tjalten, inbem e§ m befcf)toerIidfj geaajtet tourbe, fiir bie 
bortigen ^rebiger jafjrlid) fo roeit m ber ©onferenj m reifen. 

^nbeffen ftarben bie SBrtiber SBbfnn unb ©titling, unb SSruber Dtterbein 
begefjrte, baft em anberer mm 33tfd)of foUte ertoaljlt toerben (toeil er felbft, 
SllterS unb ©djtoadtje fjalber, ntd^t meE)r natfjfeljen fonnte,) ber ba§ SEBerf iiber* 
nefjme, bamit 3 UC ^^ itnb Drbnung erfjalten toitrbe ; benn e§ roar bet enter ber 
(Sonferen^en befd^Ioffen toorben, toenn einer oon ben SBifcpfen ftirbt, foil ein 
anberer an feme ©telle ertoafjlt toerben. @3 tourbe alfo ber 23ruber ©^rtftian 
■ifteufommer al§ S3ifd^of ertoafjlt, toelcfjer bie 2luffid£jt tiber bie ©emehtbe iiber 
ftd) neljmen foflte. 

©cfjon lange tourbe ber Mangel einer ,3udE)t: Drbnung in ber ©emeinbe 
tief entpfunben; e§ toar fdjon mer)rmaI3 ettoaS baran getljan toorben ; enbliti) 
tourbe auf ber ©onferenj im ©taate Dfjio befdf)loffen, baft eine §awpU ober 
©eneral*Gonferenj gefjalten toerben follte, bie e§ iiber ftdj nerjmen follte, bie 
3ucf»t= Drbnung in etroaS oollftanbiger m mad£)en, forote bem 2Borte ©otte§ ge* 
maft fein. 

2)ie ©lieber biefer ©onferen? foHien au3 ben ^rebtgern, in ben unterfdjteb* 
lidfjen ©egenben, burcr) bie ©lieber ber ©emeinbe geroarjlt toerben ; unb e§ touts 
ben bie folgenben 23riiber ertoafjlt, nctmlicfj : 

(Sfjr. ^eufommer, SIbrafj. fgieftanb, 2lnbrea§ geller, Daniel £ret)er, ©eorg 
SBenebum, Slbrafjam Sfcarel, ©Ijrifiian Merger, 2Ibrar)am Verier, Sofjamx 
©cijneiber, §einria) ft'umler, ^einricr) ©patfj, 3. 9ieufdf)toanber, ©fjr. $rum, 
Safob" 33aulu§. 

2)iefe oerfammelten fid) am 6. Sum 1815, nalje bei 3ftomtt>peafant, in 
2BeftmoreIanb ©ounto, Spemtftfocmien, too fie nacf) reifer Ueberlegung bie fols 
genbe £ef)re unb ^egeln fiir gut unb nii^Iia) befanben; fie ber ©emeinbe in 
Siebe unb SDemutJ) m itbergeben, mit bem rjer^licrjen SBunfttje, baft biefe Sefjre 
unb foldfje ^egeln, nebft bem SBorte ©otte§ molten beobadEjtet toerben. £)enn 
©ott ift ein ©ott ber Drbnung, unb too feine Drbnung unb ^ircfjenmdjt ift, ba 
oerliert fid) aHe Siebe unb ©etnetnfdjaft ; barjer laftt un§ bem 3^at^e be§ §errn 
folgen, ber uns> lefjrt, baft toir burcf) SDemutr) einer ben anbern fjofjer acfjten, 
al§ un§ felbft, fuajen gefinnet m fein, tote $efu§ ©fjrifiuS aua) roar, ber 
$nedEjt§geftalt angenommen, rcarb ge^orfam big ^m Sobe am ^reu?, um un§ 
bie ©nabe unb taft m erraerben, baft toir un§ au§ Siebe unb S)emut^ einer 
bem anbern unterraerfen !onnten, toer fitt) nia;t unterroerfen fann, bem mangett 
nodg ©nabe, ^iebe unb SDemutf) ; ba^er fagt $efu§ • 2B^r unter eud^ ber 
©rbftre fein mill, ber foil be§ anbern Wiener fein. ©oil einer be§ anbern S)tcs 
ner fein, fo muff en toir einanber lieben. 



78 



3efu3 fagt: oaxan roirb ^ebermann erfennen, bafj iljr meine reajte ^itnger 
fetb, fo i§r SieBe unter einanber fjaBt, unb roer ntdjt SteBe Ijat, ber BleiBt im 
Sob. ©o laffet un§ SieBe iiBen, auf bafj mix bie <Qerrlidf)fett Beft|en mogen, 
bie ^efug feinen S««9^n »on feinem $ater erBeten Ijat, bafj rair ein§ fein 
molten, tote er unb ber $ater ein§ finb. 2)arum, tyx lieBen Sriiber, laffet 
un6 fud&en gleidjgefmnet, einfjeftig unb eintradjtig ?u fein, unb feiner UeBet von 
bem anbern reben ober benfen, fonbern ben £errn anfletjen, bafj er un3 feinen 
©eift unb ©mft ge&en motfjte, urn ba§ (Sfjriftentfjum rectjt mr (Sljre fetne§ Jjeilis 
gen -ftamenS ?u fitEjren, unb ?u unferem eigenen ewigen 3BoE)I. 2lmen. 



Jfe (Blaubenshekemttttt^ 



Seamen ©otte§ erfldren unb Befennen mix vox ^ebermann, bafj roir 
glauBen an ben einigen matjren ©ott, Sater, ©olm unb Jjeiltger ©eift, bafj biefe 
S)rei ©tn§ finb, ber SSater im <So£m, ber <Sofm im SSater unb ber §eiltge ©eift 
gleidfjeg SBefen mit Beiben. SDafj biefer breieintge ©ott igimmel unb ©rbe unb 
aHe§ raag barinnen tft, fotooEil ficf)tBar als> unftcfytBar, erfcfjaffen Ijat, tragi, 
regiert, fdptjt unb erplt. 

2Bir glauBen an Sefum ©Jjriftunt, bafj er rcafyrer ©ott unb 3Jienf<f> ift, bafj 
er feine 3ftenfd£jljeit burdf) ben Ijeiltgen ©eift in 9ftaria angenommen, unb con 
tljr geBoren, bafj er §eilanb unb SSerfo^ner be§ ganjen menfcfjlitfjen ©efdjledjtS 
tft, menu fie bie in ^efu angeBotene ©nabe im ©lauBen an ifjn annefjmen ; bafj 
biefer 2>ef u 3 fiir un§ gelitten fjat, am ©tamme be§ $reut?e§ geftorBen, Begra- 
Ben, am britten Sage nrieber auferftanben, gen fgimmel gefafjren, melajer ift wr 
3iecf)ten ©otteg unb rertritt un§ ; unb nrieber !ommen nrirb am jiingften Sage, 
w rtdEjten bieJ&Benbigen unb bie Sobten. 

3Bir glauBen an ben feeiligen ©eift, bafj er gleidfjeS SBefen mit bem 95ater 
unb ©ofjn ift, bafj er bie ©lauBige trofte unb fie in aUe 2Bal)rI)ett lette. 

2Bir glauBen an eine Speiltge @f)riftlicf)e ©emeinbe, bte ©emeinfrfiaft ber 
feetligen, bie Sluferftefyung beg £eiBe§, unb ein eraigeg SeBen. 



79 



28ir glauben, bafj bie 83ibel, alteg unb neueg Xeftament, ©otteg 2Bort ift ; 
bafj fie ben roafjren 2Beg imferer ©eltgfett ent^alte, bafj em jeber toaljre 
(Sfjrift biefelbe mit ben (Sinflttffen beg ©eifteg ©otteg eti^tg unb aUein ?u feiner 
3fttt)tfcf)mtr ne^men foil, unb bafj ofjne ©lauben an ^e[um (Sljriftum, toafjre 
S3ufje, $ergebung ber ©iinben unb -iftacfjfolge ©fjrtfti, -ftiemanb etn toaJjrer 
©Ijrifi fein fann. 

2Bir glauben, bafj nmg bie Ejeilige ©cfjrift entplt, natnlid} : ben $aH in 
Slbam unb bie (Srlofung burdjj %e\um ©fjrtftum, ber gan^en SGBelt foKte geprebigt 
roerben. 

SBir ftnb iiber§eugt, bafj bie aufjeren SBerorbnungen, nemlicfj bie Xaufe unb 
bag ©ebadjtmfj beg Stobeg unfereg <gerrn £>efu ©Ijrifti, in alien ©fjriftlidEjen ©e* 
nteinben geiibt roerben foUten, unb bafj eg ^inbern ©otteg befonberg gejtemt, 
biefelben §u gebrautipen. 3)te 2trt unb SBeife aber, nrie biefelbe geiibt rcerben 
fottten, foil bem lXrt^eil unb bent ©rfenntnifj etneg $egltdf)en ii&erlaffen fein. 
2lucfj bag 33eif»tet beg $ufjn>afcf)eng ftefjt einem ^eben fret §u iiben ober ^u 
unterlaffen. $ebocf) ift e§ leinem unferer ^Srebiger ober ©emeinbeggliebern ge* 
^iemenb, feinen 9Jiitbruber, beffen Urt^eil unb ©rfenntnifj von bem feinigen uer* 
ftfiieben ift, befjroegen offenilid) ober in ^rioat §u cerfleinern, ober feine 2trt 
unb SBeife, roie er biefelbe iibt, ju reradjten ; raer fid^ fjiertn fcfmlbig macf)t, foil 
alg ein SBerlaumber feiner Sriiber gead&tet, unb begfjalb oerantroortlid^ fein. 



tottjUtutiatt tur Itrdje* 



2Bir, bie ©lieber ber $trcfje ber SSereinigten Sriiber in 6> § r i« 
ft o, fe|en in bem Sftamen ©otteg, jur SBeroottfommmmg ber @ottegfiirct)ttgen, 
bag 2Betf beg $rebigt=2lmtg, bie Seforberung bee $trd&e ©fjrifti, forao^l alg 
eine regelmafjtge S3eftimmung bet aEen ^anblungen im (3lauhen unb in ber 
Slugfttfjrung ?u ftdEjern, foroie and) bie Wlatyt unb bie ©efcpfte ber t)ierteljaljr= 
lichen, jafjrlidjen unb ©eneral=©onferenjen p, befttmmen, roie eg biefe $trd&e an* 
genommen Ijat, folgenbe Slrtifet feft : 



'80 
Slritfel I. 

2lBfd£jnitt 1. — 2tHe J)ierin Beroilligte getftltcfje ©eroalt, irgenb eine gudjt* 
regel ?u mafym ober aufeufyeBen, foil einer fgaupt-Sonferen? iiBertragen fein, 
roelttje au§ 2leltefte Befte^en foil, bie von ben ©liebern in jebem Gonferen^ 
SDiftrifte, bureaus ber ©efeHfc^aft geroafjlt roerben follen. $eftgefefct roirb 
jebocf), bafj bie 2lelteften in ben ©onferen^Siftriften, con roelttjen fie geroafjlt, 
brei %afyve geftanben rjaBen. 

2lBfd(jmtt 2. — 2HIe r>ier ;yaf)re foil eme ©eneral=©onferen? geljalten roer^ 
ben, in roeldfjer bie 33ifd^ofe aI3 -Jftitglteber unb praftbirenbe Seamte BetradEjtet 
roerben foUen. 

2lBfcf)mtt 3. — ^ebe jafjrlidje (Sonferen? foil ber ©efellfdjaft bie Seamen ber* 
jenigen 2lelteften trorlegen, roelclje ?ur SBafjl, al3 ©lieber ber ©eneralsSonferen?, 
fa^ig finb. 

2IrtileI II. 

2l&ftt)nitt 1. — Stte ©eneral^onferen? foil bie ©ranjen ber jafjrlidjen (Sons 
ferenjen Beftimmen. 

2lBfd£jnitt 2. — £ie ©eneral-Sonferen? foH in jeber tE>rer ©i^ungen au3 
ben 2lelteften, roelttje fecp ^aljre in berfelBen geftanben f)aBen, 33ifcf)bfe erroarjs 
len. 

2lB)tt)nitt 3. — 3)ie ©efdjafte jeber jcujrlicfjen ©onferen? foUen ftreng ber 
3ud£)torbnung gemajj getljan roerben. iyrgenb eine jtiEjrlidfie ©onferen?, bie ge« 
gen bie SSerfiigung ber Jgaupt^onferen? fjanbelt, foil buret) 2luflage con berfels 
Ben geridjtet roerben. 

2tBftf)nitt 4. — $eine SWegel ober ©e)"e£ foil §u irgenb einer fteit pafftren, 
rooburd^ ba§ @IauBen§Befenntni|, roie eg je|t BefteEjt, oeranbert ober oerroors 
fen, unb ber Steifeplan jerftbrt roirb. v 

2lBfdfjnitt 5. — $eme Ifteget foil angenomtnen roerben, bie ben 9tett)ten 
irgenb eineg 3Jienfct)en ©intrag tf)ut, in Se^ug auf bie 2lrt unb SBeife ber Saufe, 
ba§ (Sacrament beg 2lBenbmaf)l§ be§ §errn, ober be§ ^I'tfseroafdEjenS, tc, 

2lBfcfmitt 6. — ©§ foil feine !RegeI gemacrjt roerben, rooburcf) ben fe^t)aften 
^rebigern tt)re ©timmen in ben iar)r£icr)en ©onferen^en, ?u benen fie oerfdjies 
bentlidfj gefjoren, BerauBt roerben. 

2lBfcf)nitt 7. — $eine SSerBinbung mit gefietmen ©efeHftt)aften, noa) unfrei* 
roiUige 2>ienftBarteit foil unter irgenb einer Sebingung erlauBt roerben. 
2lr t iie r III. 

2)ie 9iett)te, bie Xiamen, bie ^ntereffen unb bie 2lnred£)te aUeg @igentl)um§ 
in liegenben ©riinben, $trcfjen, SSermadjtniffen ober ©ttjenfungen irgenb einer 
2lrt, roeldje burc^ 2lnlauf ober auf anbere SBeife oon einer ober me^rere ^erfo^ 



81 



nen, fiir ben ©ebrcntcfj, SBortfjeil unb 9tu|en ber ^irdfje ber SBereinigten SBriiber 
in ©E)rifto, beftimmt finb, foil permit oollfommen oeritc!fidf)ttget unb alg ©igens 
tl)um oefagter $ircf)e 6etrad)tet toerben. 

Strtifel IV. 

$eine SSeranberungen ber oorftergefjenben ©onftttution foil gemadjt voev 
ben, eg fet benn, burdj eine <5timmen?aE)I von jroei 2)rittf)etlen ber ganjen @e« 
fcttfc^aft. 



fritter m\Wtt. 



General = (ftanferen^ 



1, $rage. 2Belcf)e finb bie ©lieber ber ©eneral ©onferen? ? 
JUsT ©ielje ©onftitution. 

2. $r. SBte imb auf roelcf)e 2lrt finb biefel&en ?u roaljlen ? 

1. 2lntroort. ^n ber 3Baf»l oon 2togeorbneten ?ur §aupt=©onferen? foil eS 
bie ^flicf)t jeber ja^rltc^en Gonferen? fein, eine Committee oon breien in ifiren 
unterfcf)ieblid)en ©onferen^&iftriften ernennen, urn bie ©timmen ju empfan* 
gen unb ^u $§Ien, unb eg unmittel&ar benjenigen anjujetgen, roetctje geroa^It 
roorben fein mbgen, fotote audj ben oorfteljenben 2tetteften eine Sifte after vo'dfyU 
haven 2lelteften ?u!ommen ju laffen. 

2. 2tntn>. £>te 2lnfftcf)tg:2lelteften fotten fie jebem oeauftragten 9ietfe;$res 
biger Uefern, beren ^fltdjt eg fein foil, jeben ©lafjleiter ober 3Iuffe^er burd) ben 
gan?en llmfretg feting donate oor ber ©eneral^onferenj mit einer 2l6ftf)rift 
baoon ?u oerfefyen. 

3. 2lntro. @g foK bie ^fltdfjt eineg jeben ©lafjleiterg ober 2luffeljerg fein, 
eine $erfammlung ber 2ftitglieber jeber ©laffe anntorbnen, urn burcE) Saftotiren 
ober auf anbere SBeife einen ober tnefjre Stbgeorbnete ?u nmtylen, biefelben in 
ber SQaupt^onferen? ju reprafentiren. 

4. 2Intro. @g foil gteicfjerroeife bie ^flicfjt eineg jeben (Slafjleiterg ober 
Sluffefjerg fein, jeben 2Ba§loerid()t unterfdjjret&en, einnifdfjliefjen unb jugefies 
gelt bem beauftragten ^rebiger einjupnbigen ; biefer Ijumneberum bem 2luf* 
fid(jtg=21elteften, beffen ^flidpt eg fei, foldjen ber oon ber jaJjrlid&en ©onferenj 
ernannten Committee ju uberfenben. 



82 



5. 2lntro. 3)ie mm ©mpfange unb mr 3cif)lung ber ©timmen ernannte 
©ommitte foil ein Skrjeicfmifj ber ^erfonen, fiir raeltije geftimmt roorben, unb 
bie 2ln?a^I oon ©timmen, bie jebe erfjalten, augfertigen. ©ottten jroei ober 
mefjr ber (Sanbibaten eine gleic^e Slnjafjl ©timmen Ijaben, fo foUen bie fo er* 
nannten ^erfonen burdj'g £oo3 entfdjeiben, roer ober meldje t)on ifjnen geroaljlt 
ftnb. ©ie foflen ebenfo bie Harnett berer, bie geroafjlt ftnb, an bie ©onferen^ 
33ucf)brucferet mr 33efanntmad)ung einfenben. 

3. $rage. SGSie niel 2lbgeorbnete foHen mr ©eneral^Sonferen? gefdjuft 
merben ? 

2lntm. 2)rei oon jebem jtifyrltdjen ©onferen^SDiftrtfte. 

4. $rage. 2Bie foHen bie Soften ber 2lbgeorbneten mr ©eneral=©onferen? 
gebecft merben ? 

2lntro. 2Benn ber ©lafjleiter ober 2luffeljer bie ©timmen fiir bie 2lbges 
orbneten mr ©eneral^Sonferenj fammelt, foil eine ©oUefte m bem groecfe oon 
il)m oeranftaltet merben, bie er ber Committee, roeldje mit bem $af)Ien ber 
©timmen befcfyafttgt, iibergeben foil, bie eg an bie gerociljlten 2l6georbneten m 
jafjlen fjat. 



Wkxttx m^nitt 



jliiljrlidje (Sanf erett^ 



1. $rage. 2Ber finb bie ©lieber ber ja^rlid^en ©onferenj ? 

2lntroort. 2U'Ie 2leltefte unb licenfirte ^prebiger, meld)e m ber 3eit in bem 
Siftritte finb, mo bie ©onferen? gefjalten merben foil ; menu aber foltfje Iicen; 
firte ^rebiger mr Drbination »orgeftf)Iagen finb, fo foHen bie 31elteften allein 
baffelbe buret) 2l6ftimmen entfdjeiben. 

2. $rage. 2luf raeldje SBeife finb bie 23erfjanblungen einer (Sonferenj \u 
fii^ren ? 

1. 2lntroort. ©3 foil bei ber ©roffnung ber ©onferen? jeben Sag eine 216= 
tljeihmg au3 ber S3tbel gelefen unb gefungen unb gebetet, unb beim ©djluffe 
gebetet unb gefungen merben. 

2. 2lntro. 2)ie ©onferen? foil jroei ©efretaire maljlen menn e§ ndtf)ig ift, 
einen ©eutfdjen unb einen @nglifcf)en unb ift nur ein S8ifct)of mgegen, fo foU 
bie ©onferen? einen ©efjiilfen ernennen, urn in SSerbinbung mit bem SMfcfjofe p, 
Ijanbeln. 



83 



3. 2lntro. SBerben bie SjSrebtger unterfudjt, in 2tnfeEmng if)reg SSertyalteng 
gegen i^re 9Jtitmenfdjen, 06 ifjr Sebengroanbel untabelljaft, unb ob fie fo t»iel 
3eit alg moglid) amoenben, bag fftetd^ (Sotted ?u beforbern. 

$otgenbe $ragen follen bann erlebigt raerben : 

1. ©inb toafjrenb bem oergangenen ^a^re ^rebiger geftorben ? 

2. SOBeldje finb (Sanbibaten fur bag ^rebigtamt ? 

3. Strtb toeldje ?u bem Slelteften^mte m orbiniren ? 

4. 2Bag ift fur ^ufaHige 2Iuggaben unb ben ©ef)alt t)on ^etfeprebigern 
gefammelt roorben ? 

5. $ft Slbredjnung mit bett retfenben 'prebigern ge^alten roorben ? 

6. §aben fie iljre ©ebiifjren erfjalten ? 

7. 22er ift nrillig, bag fommenbe 3aE>r m reifen, ofjne SSorbetjalt ? 

8. 2Md)e finb 2luffttf)tg=2Ieitefte ? 

9. SQBie finb bie ^rebiger biefe§ %a§v angeftettt ? 

10. SBann unb too foil unfere nadjfte ©onferen? ge^alten toerben ? 

11. 3ft fonft nodj ettoag ?u tf)un ? 

12. 3ft 2We§, mag getfyan roorben, in bag 'protofoll eingetragen ? 



Pttftet 9lMd)nitt. 



lie ^ufttttfjme t>on PreMgenu 



1. $rage. 2Bie foil ein SJkebiger aufgenommen roerben ? 

2lntroort: ©ine jebe alg ^rebiger t»orgefd)Iagene ^erfon foil oon ber ©on? 
feren? ober oon einer (Sommittee er,amintrt, unb tfjm folgenbe $ragen oorgelegt 
roerben : 

<gaft bu ©ott in (S^rifto alg einen ©irnbe oergebenben ©ott erfannt unb 
f elbft SSergebung beiner ©iinben erlangt ? 

<gaft bu nun $rieben tnit ©ott, unb ift bie Siebe ©otteg burd) ben ^eiligen 
©eift in beitt §er? auggegoffen ? 

Sageft bu ber £>eiltgung nad) ? 

©laubeft bu, bafj bie 23ibel ©otteg SBort ift, unb bafj biefelbe attein ben 
roafjren 2Seg §u unferer ©eelen ©eligfeit entfjalt ? 
2BeId)en ©runb fjaft bu fiir biefen ©lauben ? 



84 



2Bag ift bein Seroeggrunb, bafj bu (grlaubmfj oerlangft bag ©oangeu'um 
ju prebigen ? 

2Bag ift bein ©rfenntnifj oom ©lauben, von ber <3unblid)feit beg 2Jienfdjen, 
von 33ufje, oon ber 3tetf)tfertigung, <geiligung unb (Srlbfung ? 

Stegt btr bein eigen §etl unb bag §eil beineg -Kebenmenfdjen mefjr am 
£er?en, al§ fonft aHeg anbere in ber 28elt ? 

£annft bu btdj bem 9?atf)e beiner Sriiber unterroerfen ? 

Sift bu mit ber 3ua)torbnung unferer $trttje einoerfianben ? 

SBiftft bu geljorfam fein unb Bereit, m reben ober m ftfjroeigen, rate eg bie 
Sriiber fiir gut finben ? 

SSift bu roiUtg, fo triel in beinem SSermogen ift, ben 3teifeplan tyelfen m er* 
fatten, unb tfjn fo triel alg mogfta) ?u unterftii^en ? 

Reiner fann auf anbere 2Beife mie auf ^robejeit aufgenommen roerben, 
unb fei er aufgenommen ober mrMgenriefen, fo foil ujm fein Unrest gefajefjen. 



Pie tnerteljitljrlidje donferen^ 



1. $rage. SBeldje finb bie ©lieber ber oierteliafjrlittjen ©onferen§ ? 
2lntwort. 2IIIe ^rebiger, ©rmalmer, %tyvex unb 2luffel)er, roeldje in bem 

$reife ober ber Station mofmen. 

2. $rage. SBeldjeg finb bie ©efdjafte ber trierteljafjrlidjen ©onferenj ? 

1. 2lntroort. ©inen ©efretair ?u ernennen, beffen ^flidjt eg fein foil, ein 
genaueg SSer^etd^ni^ after tfjrer llntemeljmungen k. in ein befonberg bam- be* 
ftimmteg 33ua) einm?eid}nen unb in felbem eine Sifte ber ©lieber aug benen bie 
©onferen? befief)t, §u fufjren. 

2. 2lntra. @ine aftgemeine, ober menu notfjig, eine befonbere Sfadjfrage 
in fginfidjt beg moralifdjen SSer^alteng ber ©onferen^glieber anmftellen. 

3. 2lntm. 2lnmnefjmen unb m unb m unterfudjen, aCTe Slppellationen, 
9iadjroeifungen unb $Iagen, meldje regelmafjtg oor bie (Fonferen? gebradjt roer* 
ben. 

4. Slniro. 2Ibredjnungen mit bem 2Iuffefjer unb retfenben ^rebigern m 
madden. 



85 



5. Slntto. Stenjenigen ^erfonen, tveltye buret) mentgften3 mjei SDritt^etle 
ber Piaffe, 5U welder fie gepren, empfo^len, bie ©rlaubnijj m geben, m prebi* 
gen, ober m ermaljnen. £>ebo<2) f 0 ^ Reiner angenommen merben ber ber (Son* 
ferenj nicf)t Ijinlanglitfpe Sefriebigung, in <Qtnfttf)t feineS 9htfe§ : (Srfafirung, 
$efitgfeit in ber SeEire, unb (ginoerftanbnift mit unferer $ird)e unb ber 3ud)t* 
orbnung berfeloen geben fann. 

3. SBie joHen ^rebiger t)on anbern ©efellfdjaften aufgenommen raerben ? 
2lntro. SBenn fie mit guten 3 eu S n ^ff ert u & er ^ r £>is^erige§ Serfyalten 

bet ber ©efellfdjaft, m melcfjer fie »orbem gefjorten, m un3 fommen wnb ber 
tneriepfirlidjen ©onferenj 3^ad^rict)t geben, bajj fie fid) ben $egeht unferer ©e^ 
feflfdjaft fonrie tfjren ©ebraucf)en unterraerfen raollen. 3)ann ntag bie vievteU 
jafjrftdje (Sonferen? fie licenftren bis mr ©itmng ber nacf)ften ja^rltctjen Gonfe; 
renj, itnb f often fie bann, rcenn if)r SSeiragen ntit bem ©oangefium (Stjrifti tiber* 
einftimtnt, aB ^Srebiger ober 2leltefte betracf)tet roerben. 

4. $rage. SBeld^e ^a^raeifungen finb bet einer Appellation erforberlicf) ? 
2lntioort. SDBenn ein Grmafjner ober ^rebiger mit bem 2lu3fprud)e ber 

oiertelja^rlic^en ©onferenj nidf)t mfrieben ift, foU er innerfjalb brei|ig £agen 
nad) einer folcfjen t)iertelj[ar)rlicr)en ©onferen?, bem ©efretair fjieoon fdjriftltdfj 
Sln^eige mad§en, mit ber <£>inmfugung, ber ifjn bam oeranlaffenben Urfadje, unb 
e§ f oH bann bie ^flidjt be§ ©efretairS fein, bie SSerJjanblung mit bem Appellant 
ten ftijriftlidf) ber jafjrlicfjen Sonferen? einmfcf)icfen. 

foil bie $Pf[id&t ber t)ierteljar)rltd^en ©onferen? fein, btefelbe mit ©efang 
wnb ©ebet §u offnen unb m befd^Iie^en. 



©iefienter 9l6fd)Httt. 



Pitglietier im Mganeinetu 



1. $rage. SBie f often ©fieber in unferer ©efellfcfjaft aufgenommen raer* 

ben? 

.Slntroort. SBenn fid) Bei irgenb einer SSerfammlung eine ^erfon attmefc 
bet, ein 2Jiitglieb in unferer ©efeftfdjaft §u raerben, fo foil ber ^rebiger, ber 
gegenroartig ift, tf)m folgenbe $ragen »orlegen : 

£aft bu SSerge&ung beiner ©iinben ertangt unb bift bu jefct entfdjtoffen 
burd) bie ©nabe ©otte§ beine Oeele m retten ? 



86 



SBenn bie $erfon biefe $rage mit ja fceantroortet, unb -Kiemanb nid)tg gegen 
feitt SBetragen einwtoenben f)at, fo foil ifnn ber ^rebiger bie recite <£>anb geben, 
folcfje $|3erfon foil alg em Mglieb in unferer ©emeinbe geatf)tet fcin, unb mit 
ber ©innrilligung eineg ^eben foil ber ^rebiger beffen Xiamen in bag $Iafj6udj 
etnfd^ret&en ; aber fo lange eine ^Berfon obige ^rage nidjt avfrtd)tig mit %a be* 
antroorien fann, fo foil er nid)t alg ein oolleg ©lieb unferer ©emeinbe ange* 
fef)en roerben. 

©in jebeg ©lieb ber ©emeinbe foil befennen, baft eg bie 33ibel fiir ©otteg 
SDSort b,alte, bafj e§ fid) »on nun an t>on gan^em §er?en beftrebe, fein <jbetl in 
©Ijrifto ^efu ?u fudjen, unb feine ©eligfeit ju fd)affen mit $urd)t unb Bittern, 
urn ben mfiinftigen erotgen gorn m entfliefjen. 

©in jebeg ©lieb foil fief) befireben, einen gottfeligen SBanbel m fiirjren ; 
fleifjig fein im ©ebet, befonberg im SBerborgenen, unb mo mbglid) nt feiner eige* 
nen ©rbauung, alien SSerfammlungen beimrooEinen, beibeg bffentltd)en ©otteg* 
bienft unb Setftunben. 

ipupter von $amilien follen eg nie oerfaumen, beg 2florgeng unb 2Ibenbg 
mit ben ^^rigen ju beten, unb bertfelben ein guteg ©jempel m fetjen in alien 
©f)rifilid)en Sugenben. 

©in jebeg foil fid^ befireben, genau alg in ber ©egenraart ©otteg ju roan* 
beln, fid) bei feinen ©efdjaften an einen genauen llmgang mit ©ott gerobtynen ; 
nie Uebel oon feinem -iftebenmenfdjen reben, Siebe iiben gegen $reunb unb 
$einb ; bem SKrmen ©uteg m tf)un, unb fudjen in ber %§at ein 9?ad)foIger ^efu 
©f)rifii m fein. 

©in jebeg ©lieb foil ben ©abbatlj b,eilig fatten, forate eg ©otteg SBort er* 
forbert ! nid)t m faufen nod; ju oerfaufen, fonbern foil benfelben in 2lnbad)i mit 
Sefen unb Sjbbren beg SBorteg ©otteg, mit ©ingen geiftreid)er Sieber mr ©fjre 
unb Sob ©otteg mbringen. 

©in jebeg ©lieb in biefer ©emeinfd)aft foHte tnerteljab,rlid) aug freiem 
SEBxIIen fo tnel beitragen „ba ber £err if)n gefegnet fyat," 1. ©ortntfjer 16, 2, um 
bie reifenben ^Srebiger ju unterfjalten. 

2)ie oorJ)ergeb,enben ERegeln finb gur befferen Drbnung in unferer ©efeHs 
fd)afi oorgefdjrieben, unb nrir glauben, bafj btefelben in bem SBorte ©otteg ge* 
griinbet finb, roegljalb ein jebeg ©lieb ber ^ird)e felbe, alg ib,m obliegenb, genau 
m hearten f)at. ©oEten rceld)e fie iibertreten, fo follen fie merft ermaljnt, im 
aBieberb.oIunggfafle aber fbnnen rair fie nid)t Icinger unter ung bulben. 



$nbem e§ bie ^fttdfjt ber ^rebiger unb Slelteften ift, (Slaffen ?u errtdjten, 
unb £Iafj=$erfammlungen ^u Ijalten, roelcf>e3 immer mit grower Sftafjigung unb 
©anftmutf) gefcf)efjen fottte, jo ift in Siebe ?u fjoffen, bafj fein ©lieb ber @e* 
meinbe in btefem £f)eile einem ^rebiger in ber 2lu§iibung feiner ^Pflid)t anftofcig 
ober f»inberlidj fein roerbe. ©ollte a&er ein 9Jiitglieb bagegen f)anbeln, fo ift er 
ber nacfyften t)ierteljaf)rlicf)en (Sonferen§ oerantroortlicf). 



Wtnntex 9ll>fdjttitt 



(tlaffett. 



1. ©ine ©laffe foH au3 brei ober mef)rere ©lieber Beftefjen, voeltye jatyrUdj 
ein ©lieb aus> ifjrer eigenen ober anbern (Slaffe ernennen follen, raeld&er ifjr 
$iif)rer genannt roerben foil, 

$rage: 2Ba§ ift bie $flicf)t eineS pljrerS ? 

2lntroort : ©3 foil bie ^3flicf)t eineg fold&en fein, raenigftenS einmal in ber 
SBocfye in Set* ober ©Iaf^23erfammlungen, feme ©Iaffe mfammen m Berufen 
urn mit iljnen itBer bie geiftlidje 2Bof)Ifaf)rt i^rer ©eelen ju fpredjen unb jur 
©inigfeit unb SteBe unter einanber m ermal)nen. ©obann foH er bie fjreifjeit 
unferer Sets unb ©la£;=2Serfammlungen auf alle ficfj gut auffii^renbe ^erfonen 
au^beljnen, bie benfelBen Betmraofjnen touttfd&en. 

2. $ebe ©Iaffe fott jafjrlid) einen erroaljlen ber ©teroart ober SSerroalter 
genannt merbe. 

grage : 2Ba3 ift bie ^flidjt eineS SernmlterS ? 

©rfte Slnitoort : ©r foU tnertelja£)rlic£)e fioUelten mm 33eften ber retfen. 
ben ^rebtger fatten ; eine genaue 3?ecf)nung barii6er fiiljren, unb biefelBe jeber 
oterteliafjrlid&en ©onferen§ ii&erltefern. 

87 



83 



groeite 2lntroort : (Sr foU ber tnerteljcifjrlicfjen ©onferen§ fur bie Xreue 
unb forgfaltige SrfiiHung feirter Spflid&teti alg SBerroalter feiner Gfaffe vevanU 
roortlidE) fein. 

$rage : 2Bag foil gefd£>ef)en, im $aUe eineg unmorafifdEjen 23ernef)meng ? 

2lntroort : ©iejenigen ©Ueber, roelcfje fief) ber Umrtoralitat fcfjulbig ma; 
dfjen, foffen con ber (Slaffe ?u roelcfjer fie geljoren, ober etner Committee, Be; 
fte^enb aug SJittgUeber ber Slaffe fiir unb gegen ifjn, gericfjtet roerben, unb ber 
^Srebiger ber (Station ober SBejtr!, mom ber 2fngeflagte gefjort, foil ber (Elaffe 
ober (Committee oorfif$en ; unb toenn ber Slngeflagte fcf)ulbtg Befunben toirb, fo 
foU er aug ber ©emeinbe auggefcf)loffen raerben, eg fei benn, bafj er fein 3Ser= 
gef)en buret) 33ufj unb 33efef>rung roafir^aft bereue. inbejj ein 9J2itgIieb mit 
bem 2Iugjprucf)e ber (Slaffe ober Committee unwfrieben, jo fann befjroegen an 
bie oierteljaljrlidje ©onferenj appeliert toerben, menu bem ^Brebiger, roeldjer Bet 
ber SRicfitung beg 2lngeflagten bie 2tuffid§t fix^ret, moor 2ln^eige taoon gemacfjt 
ift, jebocf) foU eg ben ^Serfonen, bie moor ben 2lnaeflagten ritfjteten, nicfit er^ 
lauBt fein, in bag Urtfjeil ber oierteljafjrlicfjen (Sonferenj einmfpredfjen. 

$rage : 2Bag foil getfjan toerben, toenn fief) OTtglieber gegen einanber 
oerfiinbigen ? 

2fnttoort: ©iinbiget aber bein 33ruber an bir, fo gefje f)in, unb ftrafe tfjn 
|roifd)ert bir unb if)tn aHein. §bret er bicf), fo Ijaft bu beinen 23ruber geraon*. 
nen. <goret er bict) nicfjt, fo nimm nocf) einen ober m)een m bir, auf bajj aHe 
©acf»e Beftefje auf jraeier ober breier 3 eu 9 en 3ftunb. <poret er bie nidEjt, fo fage 
eg ber ©emeinbe. ^oret er bie ©emeinbe nicfit, fo fjalte ujn alg einen §eiben 
unb Conner. aJJatt^at 18, o. 15, 16 u. 17. 

$rage : 2Bag foil gefcfjeljen, toenn mrifefjen ©lieber unb ^rebiger Uneinig; 
!eiten entftefjen. 

2Initoort : SDer ^prebiger, toelcfjen eg befannt toirb, foil bie ©aa)e unterfu* 
d)en unb foil ben ftreitenben ^partfjeien oorfcfjlagen, bafj jebe ein ©lieb ernenne, 
roeldje toieber einen britten ernennen, ber bie $rage entfefjeiben foil. 

©ollten aber bie ©ertcf)teten mit ber ©nfefjeibung ber Committee unmfrie-- 
ben fein, fo Ibnnen fie an bie t)ierteliaf)rlicf)e ©onferenj appeHiren, aug beren 
©liebern bie SlppeUanten erne Committee con uieren ernennen fann, bie toieber 
einen fiinften erroafjlen, um bie ©acfje m entfcf>eiben, unb nadj) biefem Urtfjetle 
ift bie <3aa)c befdEjloffen. ^rgenb eine ^erfon, bie bennod^ unmfrieben mit bie= 
fern 2lugfprud^e ift, unb jebeg ©Iteb, bag fid^ raeigert, in §infic§t oon <Scf)ulben 
ober anberen gnnftigfeiten bte <Satt)e emer (Eommtttee ju iibergeben, naa^bem 
eg tf)m von emem ^prebiger ober ^iifirer geratljen ift, ober rcenn er ein ©lieb 
beim ©ertcf)te oerflagt, e^e bag oorf;er ©efagte von i§m befolgt ift, fo foU er 
»on ber ©ememoe auggefc^Ioffen loerben, eg fet bemi, bte ©ac^e ift oon folder 



89 



5lrt, bctjj er |. 33. ctl§ SSernmlter ober ©jecutor einen geridjtlidfjen ^rojejj anfjans 
gig madjjen mufj, ober menu er in ©efafjr tft, einen SSertuft erleiben. $eber 
©Iafj=$ttt)rer foil ein 9iegifter in einem 33uct)e, in §inftdjt ber SSerfjanblungen 
ber $irct)e, ^rojeffe, £obe3falIe, 2lu3ftt)Iiefjungen unb 2lppeHationen fiit)ren, 
unb eine SXbfd^rift beg 3iegifier3 ber m^rteljatjrlitfjen ©onferenj mfct)id:ett. 

Srgenb eine ^erfon, bie eine ©rlaubnifs §um ©rmafjnen, ober ^rebigen \u 
ertyalten nmnfct)t, mufj t>on mjeibrittet ber ©laffe, oon ber er ein ©Iteb tft, folct)e 
buret) ben $iit)rer unterjeid^nete @mpfet)Iung beft^en, bie erforberltct) ift, unb 
fie ber oterteIiat)rltct)en ©onferenj feiner Station ober SBejirfeS iibergeben. 



Setter m\$m. 



$rage : 2Belti)e3 ftnb bie ^Pflicfjten eines> 'prebtgerS ? 

2lntroort : ©fjrtftum ben ©efreujigten ju prebigen, mo fict) nur guljorer 
einfinben ; ©Iaffen;33erfammlungen m erridjten, mit tfmen iiber ttjren ©eelen- 
mftanb ju reben, unb fie m trbften, bie 2Ingefod)tenen ?u ftarten unb mredjt m 
raeifen, bie Sragen aufmmuntern unb aKe im ©lauben, in ber ©nabe unb 
©rfenntnifc $efu ©fjrifti ju erbauen fuct)en, nie unterlaffen bie $rcmfen }u be* 
fud)en, unb Bex alien ©elegenf)etten fid) m beftreben, bie Sefjren bie er prebtgt, 
buret) einen orbentlicfjen unb muftertjaften Seben^raanbel ?u befraftigen. 

%t. 28elti)e Stoeifungen roerben unfern ^prebigern gegeben ? 

3lntro. @r fei fletjjig ; nie t)erliere er feine $eit mit unnottjigen Singen 
an einigem Drte; er fei itnmer ernftfjaft ; fein SBaljlfprudj fei : bem § err n 
gefjetliget; er meibe alien Seidjtfinn unb ©dEjer^en ; er rebe rcenig, fei be* 
Imtfam im Umgange mit bem roetblicfjen ©efdjledEjt, unb oerfjalte fict) in alien 
©tttcfen aI3 ein raaf)rer Shrift. 

1. @r fei immer abgeneigt, iible ©eruct)te m glauben ; glaube uon -Jtie* 
manb etroaS 2lrge3 ofjne gute Seroeife, unb lege aUe biefe Singe immer fo gun* 
ftig au3, fo trie! e§ bie 33efct)affent)eit berfelben ber 2Baf)rt)ett gemafj, sutajjt. 

2. @r rebe con 9liemanb nidjt3 IXebleS ; roa§ er je »on einem benfen mag, 
betjalte er foIctjeS bet fict) felbft, bi§ er e§ bemjentgen felbft, bem e§ anget)t, 
fagen fann. 

21 



90 



3. ©ein ©efcpft fei, ©eelen §u retten fo trie! rote moglttt) ; §u btefem ©e« 
fd^afte gebe er fid) auf. ©r befudje bie eg bebiirftig finb. $n alien ©ingen 
Ijanble er rttdfjt nadj fetnem eigenem ©utbihtfen, fonbern alg em <5oI)n be§ 
©»angeliumg ; alg em foldjer ftef)t eg tfjm m feme geit, fo tote biefe SBorfcfjrift 
lautet : mit ^Brebigen, mit igaugbefudjen, mit Se^ren unb SBeten, unb 33etrad£js 
iung beg SCBorte^ ©otteg mmbringen ; bamit gefje er urn, big ber §err fommt. 



(lifter 9lBf(J)ttitt, 



$rage : SSeldEjeg finb bie ^flid^ten eineg 3teifeprebigerg ? 

1. 2Inttoort : ©id) friebltd) ber tfjm von ber ©onferen? itbergebenen 
©telle m unterroerfen. 

2. ©r foil bie SefteEungen auf feinem SSe^irfe regelmafjig beforgen, prebi* 
gen unb @efeHfd;aftg=23erfammlungen mit ben ©liebern fjalten, mo immer eg 
ber ©laffe annefjmlid) ift. 

3. ©g foil bie ^flidit beg beauftragten ^rebigerg fein, m fetyen, bafj paf* 
fenbe ^erfonen alg ^luffe^er ober Setter in jeber ©laffe angefteEt finb. 

4. @r foil alle fed)g donate brei 2l6fd^rtttte unferer 3ucfjt=Drbmmg in 
jeber ©laffe oorlefen, namlidj : ben @laubengs2lrtt!el, bie $p f 1 1 dj t 
ber 2Ji i t g I i e b e r unb bie $ f I i d) t ber Seiter unb 21 u f f e fj e r. 

5. S3ei bem SSerfjor von ©liebern foil er alg ^Srafibent fitjen, unb einen 
ridfjtigen 33ericf)t bariiber fatten. 

6. ©r foil bem 21uffid)tgs2lelteften einen genauen 33ertd)t iiber bie 33e* 
fdjaffenljeit feineg SSejtrfg bei jeber oierteljafjrigen ©onferen? abftatten, unb er 
foil t)erantroort(id) fein, fiir jebe regelmafjige 33efteUung, bie er §u bebienen uns 
terlafst. 

7. ©r foil alien Unter=2Igenten beg 3ieligibfen Xellegcope'g 2Iufirag ge* 
ben, einen SBertdjt iiber alle Unterfdjreiber beffelben in ifjren refpectioen -ttad)* 
barfdjaft m I) alien. 

8. ©ben fo foil er einmal beg ^afjreg mit ben Unter*2lgenten abredjnen, 
unb einen SBericfjt bariiber an ben 2)tftrift=2Igenten abftatten. 

9. ©r foil ferner eine Sifte »on alien 33efteIIungen auf feinem Seattle aug* 
fertigen, unb bem 2luffid)tg:2telteften bei jeber ialjrlidEjen ©onferen? iiberretdjen, 
mm 53eften begjenigen roeldjer biefen SSe^ir? nad) ifjm bereifen mag. 



©rbination tut JUlteJletu 



1. 2ln bem bam beftimmten Sage foil erne fdjidlidje $rebtgt ober (5r* 
maf)nung geljalten merben. 

2. Sftadjbem iEjre Harnett Iaut oorgelefen finb, fo foil ber SSifdjof ober 
2leltefte folgenbe 2Irtt5eI bem* ober benjenigen t>orlefen, bie mr Drbination ge= 
voafylt fern mbgen : 

„£)enn eirt Steltefter foil untabelid) fein, alg ein £augf)alter ©otteg : mtfjt 
eigenfinnig, rtid^t prnig, ntcf)t ein SBeinfaufer, nidjt podjen, rtxcr)t unefjrlidje 
§anbt^terung treiben ; 

„<5onbern gafifrei, giitig, ^udjtig, geredjt, fjeitig, Jeufd). 

„llnb Ijalie ob bem 23ort, bag geroifi ift unb le^ren fann, auf bafs er madjs 
tig jet, m ermatjnen burd) bie fjeilfame Se^re, unb m ftrafen bie SBiberfpredjer." 
Situg 1, 7-9. 

$r. §aft bu bag gutrauen, oa £ ou wnerlid; burd) ben fjeiligen ©eift bam 
angetrieben roerbeft, bag 9lmt etneg 2telteften auf bid) m nefjmen, urn barinnen 
©ott m feineg ^ameng ©f)re, in ber ©emeinbe ©fjrifti ?u bienen ? 

2lntn>. 3^ trcwtC/ wit ber Sgiilfe ©otteg. 

$r. ©laubeft bu ber igeittgen ©djrift alien unb neuen Seftamentg ? 
2lntro. 2> a td^ glaube biefelben. 

$r. SDBiEft bu beinen $leifj baljtn amoenben, beinen eigenen SBanbet nadj 
ber Sefjre GJjrtfti einmridjten, unb fo viel in bir ift, bid) ber £eerbe m einem 
■Jftufter beg d^rtfttic^en Sebeng Dormftellen ? 

Slntro. raid, fo ©ott mein Sjbelfer xft. 

gr. SQBtUft bu benen, roeldje etroa bie Ueberfidjt iiber ung anoeriraut fein 
mag, mtt @()rerbietung ge^orfamen unb iE)ren guten ©rmafmungen mit einem 
raittigen unb frieblidjen ^erjen nacp ommen ? 

2lntro. Sdj totH mid; burd) bie ©nabe ©otteg baE)tn beftreben. 

£>ann roirb gebetet. 

Sftad) bem ©ebete lege ber 33ifd)of unb bie 2lelteften einem jeben bie igembe 
auf bag £aupt unb fpredje : 

„9famm permit §in bie 23ottmad)t, bag Stmt eineg 2lelteften in ber ©e* 
meinbe ©otteg m oott;;ielj)en. S m Sftamen ©otteg, beg SSaterg, beg ©oljneg unb 
beg Ijeiligen ©eifteg." 2lmen. 

^ierauf iibergebe ber SBtfdjof ober 2feltefte einem jeben befonberg bag 
SBibetbud), fpredjenb : 

91 



92 



„yiimm permit bie SSolImattjt, ba3 SBort ©otte§ ju lefen unb ?u oerlitnbt- 
gen in ber ©emetnbe (£J)rifti. 

2)ann foil ber SBifdjof ober 2XeItefte beten. 5ftadj bem ©ebete foil er au§ 
bem 12. (Sapttel Suca, $er§ 35—38 tefen : 

£affet eure Senben umgiirtet fein, unb eure Sifter brennen ; unb feib gleidEj 
ben 2ftenfdf)en, bie auf ujren £erm marten, menu er aufbreajen roirb oon ber 
<£>odj2ett, auf bafj menn er fomtnt unb anflopft, fie ifjm balb auftljun. ©eltg 
finb bie $ned£)te, bie ber £err, menu er fommt, matijenb finbet. SBaljrlidj, id) 
fage eucfj : ©r mirb fidj auffdjiirjen, unb mtrb fie ?u £ifcf)e fe|en, unb vox 
ifjnen geljen, unb ujnen bienen. llnb fo er fommt in ber anbern 2Badje unb in 
ber britten 2Bad)e, unb roirb fie fo finben, felig ftnb biefe $necf)te. 

©ann Bete ber SStfdjof, ober 2leltefie ; roorauf bann ber folgenbe ©egen 
au§gefprod£jen roirb : 

S)er $riebe ® otte§ erfjalte eureigerjen unb Sinnen 
in ber ©rfenntnifj 3 e f u © t) r i ft o unfer§ £ e r r n. 2lmen. 



^elte(ie t iljre $0al)l t ©rtmwtion ttnii PJHdjt 



$rage. SBoburdE) toirb ein ©lieb Sleltefter ? 

1. Wad) einer ^Srooe^eit oon brei S^en mag ein ^3rebiger ber jaljrlidfjen 
(Sonferen? §ur lleberlegung Dorgefdjlagen, unb menu er nad) tfnterfucfiung con 
berfelben al§ ein 2leltefter geroaEilt toirb, tnag er burti; 2luflegung ber Jganbe 
oon einem 23ifcf)ofe unb jroei 2telteften orbinirt roerben. 25ie jafjrlidje (Sonfe* 
ren? foE jebodf) ba§ ^Srioilegium Ijaben, Sicentiaten einen ©rlaubnifjfcfjein ju 
ertljeilen, bie Saufe m oerriajten, unb ba§ ©acrament ?u reidEjen, mo e§ bie Mm- 
ftanbe notE)ig madden. 

2. &ta§ ift bie ^PfCid^t eine§ 2TeIteften ? 

©o oft al§ er fann §u prebigen, ju taufen, unb bem 2htffid£)t§=2lelteften ba§ 
SKbenbmafjl be3 §errn au3tf)etlen m fjelfen ; menu aber ber 2luffic§t§=2leltefte 
nid)t betroof)nen fann, bann f often ein ober jroei Sleltefte biefe ^fItd()toerricf)ten; 
ebenfo foil er alle ^r)etle be§ ©otte§bienfte§ oerricf)ten ; fid) bemiiljen, (Slaffen* 
SSerfammlungen ju erridEjten unb ju fatten, unb in ber 2BaF;I ber 2luffefjer unb 
Setter betfteljen. 



93 



3. 2Bo ein fef$after 2tettefter ober $rebiger, roeld)er felbft nitijt Mangel 
leibet, an einem Drte prebtget, roof)in fein SKeifeprebiger tommt, fo foil er eine 
©ollefie madden, auf gleicfje SOBeife ein SSer^eid^ni^ baritber aufnefjmen, unb 
foldje bem 2Cuffid^t§=2leIteften ober ber ©onferen? jur Unterftiitmng biirftiger 
$Prebiger, roeldje unter armen Seuten prebigen, itbergeben ober itberfenben. 

4. ©elite ein 9ieifeprebiger ober SCeltefter rounfdf)en, ben u)m angenriefe* 
nen 33ejirf y\ oerlaffen, fo mujj er juerft bem 2Iufftd)tg;SCelteften fdjriftlitf) mit 
f enter 2lBftd^t befannt madden ; unb follte einer feine <5teHe oerlaffen ober oer* 
natf)laffigen, eg fei bemt, roegen $ranff)ett ober anbern unoermetblidjen Umftan* 
ben, fo foil er ber nad)ften jaf)rlitf)en ©onferen? oerantraortlidE) fetn, unb ?u fet* 
nem ©exalte fitr bie geit beredfjttgt fein, bie er toafjrenb bem $af)re gereifet 
fein mag. . 

5. 2So ^rebiger an einem Drte angefiebelt gefunben merben, roeltf)e arm 
unb biirftig ftnb, unb bennod) prebigen fol!en, fo ift e§ billig unb recf)t, bafj bie 
2lelteften fiir u)ren llnterl)alt forgen, in SBerfjaltmfj ber gelt, bie fie anroenben, 
unb inbem fie eine (Sofleue ?u tl)rem SBeften unter ben ©efeUfd)aften ifjreg 
£>iftri!te§ madden ; bod) foil biefeg bie fitr bie ffteifeprebiger auggefefete unb be* 
ftimmte ©umme rttctjt itberfteigen. 



$rage. SBie follen bie 2lufftd)tg=2lelteften geroaljlt roerben ? 
2lntroort. ©te follen »on ber iafjrlitfjen (Sonferen? aug ben 2telteften fitr 
ein $al)r genmfjlt roerben. 

ftr. 28ag finb bie <PfIid)ten beg 2Iufftd)tg ; 2telteften ? 

1. 2lntr». 2)en tfjm angemiefenen Sttftrift ?u bereifen unb fo oft ju prebt* 
gen alg er fann. 

2. (Sr Ijat bie tteberftdfjt in fetnem SDiftrifie itber bie reifenben unb fefc 
§aften ^rebiger, bafj fie fid) bem ©oangelium gemafj betragen. 

3. @r foU bie merte(ja^rlid^e unb grofje SSerfammlung befteKen unb too 
moglid) bebtenen, bag 2lbenbmaf)l ertfjeilen unb trierteljaljrltdfje ©onferen? f)aU 
ten mit ben gegentoartigen ^rebtgern, ©rma^nern unb SSorgangern, and) 
unterfutijen, ob bie reifenben unb fepaften ^rebiger tt)re ^flidjt tfjun, befon* 
ber§ ob bie fefjfjaften ^3rebiger mo mogltd) atte ©onntage prebigen ; unb mo 



94 



merjrere finb, biefelben ?u geiten §u oermeajfeln, rote am metften 9lu|en gefd^afft 
rairb : fte ermafmen, bafj fie gudfjt unb £)rbnung unb Stebe unb ©rnft bei ben 
©emeinben erfjalten. 

4. @r fann gleicfjerroetfe, in SSereinigung mit ^roei 2lelteften, ^rebtgern, 
©rmaljnern ober Settern, (einen von jebem llmfretfe,) bie ^rebiger auf fetnem 
Siftrifte roecrjfeln. ©oUte ein Umfreig ofme einen !ftetfeprebtger gefunben 
raerben, fo foil eg feine ^fltcfjt fein, einen ^rebiger mm Sereifen biefeg Urn* 
freifeg big mr nacfjften iarjrlicfyett (Sonferet^ anmfteUen. 

5. ©oflte eg ftdj wtragen, bajj fein Stuffing -2leltefter in irgenb einem 
SDiftrifte mare, fo foil bem SBifdjof augenblitflidE) 9?adEjricfjt baoon gegeben roer* 
ben, biefer foil einen 2lelteften im 2)tftrttte bam beftimmen, big mr idr}rlid()en 
©onferenj. 



|»al)t iitr lifdjofc unb tljre Pfltdjt. 



$rage. 2Bie fotten bie SStfd^ofe geraafjlt merben ? 

2lntroort. S)ie §aupt=©onferen? foil fie erroafjlen, buraj bie 9fteljrfjeit ber 
©timmen; auct) ftefjt eg ber (Sonferenj frei, fie, bie SBifdjofe, nocf) auf trier $;aE)re 
beimbeljalten. S)ie ©eraafjiten ober SSifd^ofe miiffen aber bie unterfd&ieblicfjen 
©onferen^en bereifen fonnen, fonft fonnen fie mcfji gerad£)lt roerben. 

$r. 2Bag finb bie ^fttd&ten ber Sifdjofe ? 

2lntro. 1. Set unfern jdfjrlidfjen unb ©eneral=©onferen§en alg Sorfi^er 
ju rjanbeln. 

2. ©te 'fjaben mit ben 2tufftdf)tgdlteften, bie auf ber ©onferen? gegemoar* 
tig finb, ben reifenben ^prebigem iljre oerfctjiebenen 33e§trle anmroeifen, bod) mit 
ber ©mfdjranfung, bafj feinem SReijes^rebiger geftattet roerbe, langer alg brei 
auf einanber folgenbe $>a*)re <wt berfelben ©telle m oerbleiben, auggenommen, 
befonbere tlmftanbe madden eg notfjroenbig, unb bann nur mit 23enriHigung ber 
©onferenj. 

3. S)te 33ifdEjbfe in 3Sereinigung mit jroei oon ber ©onferenj ernannten 
2telteften jeigen ben 2lufficf)tgdlteften bie 23ejtrfe an, bie fte m bereifen Ijaben, 

4. ©te fjaben bie (Sonferenjen ju bereifen, unb fjaben im ©eiftltdfjen, bie 
Dberauffitt)t iiber afte ©ememben. 

5. ^^nen ftefjt eg m, bie Drbination m oolljiefjen. 



95 



6. 2Benn em aSifd^of aufprt, bie if)m angenriefenen ©onferen^en in ber @e* 
tneinfttjaft m bebtenen, fantx er bodO fein bifcfjoflidEjeg 2Kmt unter ung augiiben? 
yiein, eg fei benn, baft er franf raare, unb roag bergletdjen Umftanbe mefjr fein 
molten. 

7. 2Benn eg fidE) mtragen foKte, baft unfere @emeinfdf)aft m einer $eit 
feinen 33ifdfjof ptte, raeil fie entroeber geftorben ober fugpenbirt raaren, ober 
raie eg immer fein mag ; raie foil SRatfj gefcf)afft raerben ? £er 2leltefte raelajer 
in 2lbraefenl)eit eineg 33ifd^ofg geraa^It rairb mm -JJiitagiren an ber ©onferen?, 
foil bie 23tfcf)ofg--<3teIIe fo lang bebienen alg bie ©onferenj raafjret ; biefer foge* 
roatjlte S8orfi|er foil aucf) bie anbere ©onferenj bebtenen ; er foil feinen <&ty mit 
bem bort geraafjlten S3orft|er nefymen, urn mit iljm in ber ©onferenj m agiren ; 
unb ber bort geroafjlte $orft£er foil eben jo bie anbere ©onferenj and) bebienen, 
bamit eine jebe ©onferen? raeift, raie eg bei ber anbern augfieEit ; unb baft Siiebe 
unb ©emeinfajaft erfjalten raerbe, u. f. to. big mr £aupk ©onferen^, bie raieber 
SSifcpfe raaljtt. 

8. ©g foil ber 33ifdf)ofe $flidjt fein, barauf m feljen, baft raafjrenb jeber 
jafjrlidjen ©onferen§ eine fdEjicflxdje ^Srebigt gefjalten raerbe. 



Sedjgjeljnter Stbfdjnttt. 



Stttettlofe0 ISetragett uon PreMgenu 



$rage. 2Bag foil gefdjeljert, raenn ein Sifdfjof, 2luffidfjtgaltefier ober ^re* 
biger fid^ eineg SSerbredjeng fdE)ulbig gemacfjt, bag im SBorte ©otteg oerboten 
ift? 

2lntraort. 2Benn ein S3tfct)of roegen fittenlofem 23etragen befcf)ulbigt rairb, 
fo foil eg einem Slufftcfjtgalteften unb einem Slelteften befannt gemadbt raerben, 
bie follen eg unterfudtjen, ob etraag an ber <3adf)e fei — fie follen aber feine 
$Iage aufter jroei ober brei geugen annefjmen, alg raie ber Slpoftet fagt. 
©ttjeint eg nun, baft er mit IRetyt befdEjulbtgt rairb, fo follen fie eg fdjriftlid) 
nefjmen, unb bem 33ifct)of eine 2(&fcf)rift baoon fcfjicfen, unb eine geit beftimmen 
too fie mfammen fommen, mo bie stager unb ber S3ifct)of gegenraartig fein 
follen, unb foil burd^ bie ^roei 2lufftcl)tgalteften unb brei Stelteften unterfudfjt 
roerben. 2Cirb er fcfjulbig befunben, fo foil er fdjroeigen big mr jar)rltct)ert 
©onferen^ ; ba follen bie Slufficfjtgalteften unb 2lelteften eg noc^ einmal unters 
fud^en ; rairb er fcgulbig befunben, fo foil er vom 2lmt fugpenbirt raerben. 



96 



2. SBenn etn 2luffic§t3;2leltefter roegen fittenlofent SBetragen Befcfmlbigt 
nrirb, fo foE eg ber nacf)fte 2leltefte unb ein Sjkebiger unterfucfjen. Seigt e§ 
ficfj nun alg oB er fcfjulbig toare, jo foEen fie eg fcfjriftlict) neljmen, unb bem 
2lufftcf)tgalteften eine SCbfc^rift baoon fcfjitfen, unb eine geit Beftimmen, too fte 
foEen ^ufammen fommen, too bie $Iager unb ber 2lufftcf)tgaltefte gegennmrtig 
fein. %n 2lBroefenfjeit beg SBifdjofg foil ein anberer 2luffid§tgaltefter unb \votx 
2leltefte gerufen toerben, bie foEen eg tnit unterfud^en ; rcirb er ftfjulbig gefun* 
ben, fo foil er fdfjroetgen Big jur ©onferen?, ba foE er oercmiioortlidf) fein. 

3. SBenn ein 2leltefter ober ^rebiger follte Befdfjulbigt toerben, toegen 
fittenlofent 33etragen, fo foE ber Sprebiger in ber ©egenb, bem eg Mannt toirb, 
nocij einen Sprebiger ober ©rntafmer ober einen SBorganger tnit ft<$ nefjmen, 
unb eg unterfud)ett ; foEte eg fdjeinen bafj er fcf)ulbig mare, fo foU tfjm 9ladf)ricf)t 
baoon gege6en unb eine geit Beftimmt toerben, too fie, bie $lager unb ber SBe* 
fdEjulbigte gegemoartig fein. Srei Sleltefte ober ^prebiger follen biefen $aE 
unterfudfjen unb entfd£)eiben, toeldfje oon ben bie <Sac§e Betreffenben $partf)eien 
ernannt toerben follen, inbem jebe ^artljei einen, unb biefe Beiben ben britten 
ernennen ; toirb er uBerfii^rt, fo foil er Big ?ur ©onferen^ fd£)toeigen, unb ber* 
felBen oeranttoortlicl) fein. 

©oEte aber Ijinreidjenbe ©enugtf)uung in irgenb einem ber oorgeljenben 
$aEe gegeben toerben, entioeber buret) bie 2leujjerung oon dime ober auf anbere 
SBeife, fo tnogen fie BeiBef)alten toerben, toenn eg fitr ratljfam eracfjtet toirb. 

©oEte aBer ber angeflagte ^rebiger, 2leltefte ober SBifd^of eg oerioeigern, 
?u erfdEjemen, nadfjbem er Senad^rid^tigung erfjalien, raann unb unb mo er jur 
llnterfud&ung unb 3tedE)tfertigung fommen mufi, fo foil er fugpenbirt toerben, 
unb bie Committee foE ifjm Benad^rid^tigen, oor ber oierteljaljrlid&ett ober 
fcif)rltc^en ©onferen? ^u erfc^einen, urn fidj toegen ber gegen if)n anfjangigen 
Elagen ?u oeranttoorten, follte er aber aud) Ijier nicf)t erfd^einen, fo foE er 
(toenn er nic^t burcf) $ranf£)eit ober fonftige triftige llmftanbe aBgelialten 
toirb) foE er fugpenbirt ober auggefdfjloffen toerben, tote eg bie ©onferenj fitr 
ratfjfam pit. 



©teknjeljttter ^Uifdjititt. 



1. Sag ©efjalt eineg reifenben ^rebigerg ober 23ifdjofg, raenn er feme 
$amilie f)at, foil 100 SoHare unb feine 3teifeunfoften fein ; roemt er erne $a* 
milie fjat, fofl er 200 Sotlare, unb feine 3ietfeuuf often, unb §augrente, bie 
jeboct; ntd^t itber $40 fid) belaufen barf, fein. 

2. SBenn aber ein SReife^rebiger eine §amilie ntit ^inbern fjat, foil bie 
oierteliafjrl. (Eonferen? feineg $reifeg eg in tteberlegung nefjmen, unb nacfj 
ifjrem ©utbiinfen, folajem ^rebtger, nebft obiger Summe, nod) eine meitere 
Unterftii|ung geftatten, fo bafj eg im ©an?en ben SBerfjaltnifj unb Umftanb 
foldjer $amtlie gemafj fetn mag. 

$rage. SBag fold fur folaje $rebiger getfjan roerben, toeldje nid)t mefjr 
fafjig finb, ifjre ©tellen ju bebienen, ober beren SBitttoen unb SBaifen ? 

2tntroort. £)ie ^ntereffen, roeldje ben oerfdjiebenen ©onferenjen oon bem 
„33eneoolent §onb" m fallen, follen m beren Unterftii^ung oertoanbt jebodj 
fireng barauf geljalten raerben, bafj ber „33eneoolent §onb" m feinem anbern 
groecfe oertoanbt raerbe. SGBenn fief) foldje $aUe, tote in ber $rage befagt, nicfjt 
ereignen, fo follen bie ^ntereffen oon %a§v ju aufbetoaljrt toerben, Big fief) 
foldje $alle ereignen ; unb in biefem $aHe foil eg bie ^pfltd^t ber ©onferen? fein, 
eine Committee m emennen, oon toelajer ein 9J2itglteb ein 33ifcf)of fein foil, bie 
^ntereffen beg $onbg m oertfjetlen. $ebocf) totrb feftgefe^t, bafj einem unfafji; 
gen ^rebtger, toelcfjer oerfjeiratfyet, nicfjt mefjr toie $150 jafjrlicf), unb toenn 
unoerfjeiratfjet niefjt mefjr toie $75, einer 2Bitttoe $75 unb einem SSaifen, niefjt 
mefjr toie $20 jafjrlicf) menu eg unter 12 $afjr alt ift, bejafjft toerben foil. 



® e f cfj e n ! e. ^eber IReifeprebiger in unferer ©efellfcfjaft foil ber (Sonfe* 
renj jafjrlicl) einen SBeriefjt abftatten iiber alle ©efd^enle m bem Setrage oon 
einem Xfjaler ober mefjr, bie er in feinem SBenrfe fiir ftcf) felbft ober fiir feine 
gamilie erfjalten fjaben mag. Unb follte bie ©onferen? iiberjeugt fein, bafj 
irgenb ein SBe^irf ©efcfjenfe anftatt ©ollectionen gegeben f)at, ober bafj ficfj 
ber ^rebiger bemiiFjt fjat, ©efd&enfe anftatt ©ollectionen $u erfjalten, in fofdjem 
$aHe follen bie ©efcfjenfe, alg ©oHectionen oon ber ©onferen? betraa;tet toer^ 
ben. ©oUte eg fief) aber nacf; Unterfucfjung nicfjt fo ?eigen, fo follen biejenigen 
^rebiger, bie ©efcfjenfe erfjielten, biefelben alg t£)r @igent£)um befjalten, unb 

mfa^Iicf) alleg, mag ifjnen bie 3«djtorbnung erlaubt, erljalten 

97 



Winter mWuitt 



letratlj0=Ceremottie* 



21 n r e b e. 

SBtr ftnb Ijier vov bem 2lngeftd)te ©otieg unb btefer gegenroartigen geugen 
Derfammelt, biefe beiben Sperfonen, namlid) -ft. unb Wl. alg ^ftann unb 2Beib 
efjeud) ntfammen ?u geben. 3ft nun jemanb gegemoartig, bem etroa einige 
^inbernif* befannt finb, roarum biefe beiben ^erfonen md)t nerel)eltd)t toerben 
foHten, ber §eige eg nun in gebiifjrenber Drbnung an, ober fd)roetge auf eroig 
barnad). 

(SBtrb nun feine frinbernifj angejeigt, fo frage ber ^rebiger ben Wlann :) 
SR. SBiflft bu biefeg ^rauenjimmer fur bein Slieroetb anneljmen, urn in 
bem @§eftanb mit u)r nad) ©otteg Drbnung §u leben ? SJBtUft bu u)r Siebe unb 
Xroft er^eigen, in ©efunbljeit unb ^ranffjeit, in SReidEjtbum unb in 2lrmut§ u)r 
pflegen, unb bid) §u ifjr aHeine Ijalten, note eg einem d)riftlid)en (S^emanne ju* 
fteljt ; fie nid)t ju uerlafjen Big end) ber Sob fcfjeiben rcirb ? <So antroorte $ a, 
(S)ann frage ber ^rebiger bag ^rauen^immer :) 

(2Ji. SBiflft bu biefen 2J?ann fiir beinen ©Ijemann anneljmen, urn in bem 
©fjeftanb mit i§m nad) ©otteg Drbnung ju leben ? 2BiIlft bu tfjm gefjorfam 
unb bienftmiHig fein, u)m Siebe unb ©§rfurd)t er§etgen, unb if)n pflegen in 
$ranft)eit, in ©efunbfyett, in 3teicf>t!mm unb 2trmutl) ; mit Serlaffung after an* 
bem, bid) alteine ?u u)m §alten, vo'xe eg einem d)riftlid)en ©Ijeroeib juftefjt ; ifjn 
nid)t ?u nerlaffen, big end) ber Xob fd)eiben rairb ? 
antmorte $ a. 

9lun Iaffe ber ^rebiger bie SBerlobten einanber bie red)te §anb geben, unb 
fpred)e : 

2Bag ©ott mfammengefugt §at, foil ber 9ftenfd) md)t fd)etben. 

3BeiI nun 2Ji. unb 31. fid) in ben @f)eftanb begeben, unb fold)eg attfjter cor 
©otteg 2lngeftd)t unb ben gegenrocirtigen geugen beuttid) befannt unb bejeugt 
tyaben, fo erflare id) fie permit alg 9ttann unb SDBexB, im Seamen ©otteg beg 
SSaterg, beg ©ofjneg unb beg ^eiligen ©eifteg. Stmen. 



98 



SHemtjelittier SHjfdjttiti 



Hon tier iottjmeniiigkeit tier (fftntgkett 
unter nm felbft 



Saffet un3, (au§ bent toelcfjeg toir fdjon erfannt fjaben,) ba§ llebel ber 
©paltungen in ©runbfatjen, ber Uneintgfeit im ©etft, ober in ber 2lu3ubung, 
tote aud) bte ftf)retflt<f,en $olgen bacon fitr utt§ felbft uttb anbere lief empfin* 
ben. <5inb toir einig, toaS fann un3 totberftefyen ? Sfjeilen toir un3, fo oer* 
ieroen loir un3 felbft, ba§ 3Berf (Sotted, unb bie <3eelen unferer SKttglieber. 

$r. 2Ba3 fann bafjer getfjan toerben, um eine genauere SSereinigung unter 
atn§ ju SBege §u bringen ? 

1. 2lnftt>. Safjt un£ won ber ytotfjtoenbigfeit berfelben oolltg unb tief 
iiberjeugt fein. 

2. 33etet ernftlttt) fitr, unb rebet treu unb offenfyerjig ntit einanber. 

3. 2Benn totr un3 oerfammeln, fo la^t un§ ntetnaB otjne ©ebet au^einans 
"ber geljen. 

4. Jjbaltet feljr barauf, bajj feiner beg anbern ©aben oeratijte. 

5. 3iebet nientatS unlauter ober leicfjtftnnig oon einanber. 

6. £afct un§ fucfyen, einer be§ anbern (5!)arafter in alien SDingen ju t>er* 
tfjetbigen, in fo fern e3 ntit ber SSafjrfyeit uberetnfiimmenb ift. 

7. Slrbeitet in ©fyren, aajtet einer ben anbern f)ofi,er al§ ftd) feloft. 

8. 2Bir empfefjlen eine ernftlidje Unterfucfiung ber Urfadjen, IX es 
b e I n, unb 6ur beg §erjen§ unb ber f t r d& I i df) e n Xvennuns 
gen. 



99 



Pom ^efudjen tion l<ut0 \u I1M0, unii bent 
fftnfdjarfen praktifdjer Meltgionau 



$r. 2Bie fbnnen roir benen, bie ftd) unferer Dbforge an»ertrauen, ferncr 
befjUpcf) fern ? 

2tntit>. Snbem rcir ifjnen Unterricf)t ertfjeilen, in ifiren £aufem, roelajeg 
fe^r nbt^ig ift, urn bag SSertrauen unb bie ©emeinfajaft mit ©ott befbrbern : 
ferner ftc§ in ber SSeltliebe ab unb an etnen f)imtnlifdf)en SBanbel gerobtmen; 
fid) ^er^Iidjer SSruberliebe befleifjigen, auf bafj fein arge§ SDenfen unb 3itcf)ten 
einer gegen ben anbern fein mag, unb tf)un tt)ie nrir roiinfcfien get^an $u fya* 
ben. 

$eber Sprebtger mu^ eg fid^> gu feiner $flid)t mad)en bie Seute in ifjren 
<paufern ?u befudjen, fie ermafjnen, in aHem ©uten gefcfjtcft §u fein. 23i§ bteS 
nitfjt getfjan rairb, unb ^roar ntit (Srnft unb ©ifer, fo roerben roir im ©anjen 
roenig gebeffert merben, unb unfere ©ottfeligfett rairb nidjt tief genug gegriht* 
bet : fotglidj roo roix audj fein mbgen, foEC fein unnii^eS ©efdjroa^ au3 bent 
50iunbe gefjen. 

Dfjne groetfel fmb biefe SjbauSbefutfje unb befonberS ©rmafmungen auf bie 
feierliajen SBorte beg 2£pofteI§ gegriinbet : 

,,3$ 9 e &e bir ben 2luftrag vox ©ott unb bem §errn 2>efu ©tjrifti, ber bei 
feiner SBiebererfd^einung bie Sebenbigen unb bie Sobter rittjten roirb. SBitte, 
prebige ba§ SBort, §alte bamit an, e§ fei ^ur redjien $eit ober ?ur Unjett, ftrafe, 
brofie, ermaljne, mit aller ©ebulb unb Sangmutf). — 2. %im. 4, 2 — 2. 



100 



Pan iiem Untemdjte ber <Sugenb* 



$rage. 20Ba£ foil mm SBeften ber f)eranroatf)fenben ^ugenb getljan toer* 
ben? 

2lntn>ort. SGBer fiir ©ott unb bag £etl ber ©eelen einigen ©ifer Jjat, ^er 
fange bag SBerf ofyne Sermg an. 2Bo $mber fid^ befmben, oerfammle fie fo 
oft eg tf)imltcf) unb nii|liti) ift ; rebe mit ifjnen ; unterroeii'e unb ermafme fie tm 
©uten ; bete mit iljnen ernftliti) bocf) finbltcf), bafj fie tfjren (Stopfer unb @rlo* 
fer mbgen fennen lernen in itjrer ^ugenb. 



littdjer = Prwbetu 



^einem Don unfern ^rebigern ober 9flttglieber foil eg erlaubt fein, SSer= 
faffer eineg 2)oftrinal=33uc^eg ober ^amp^Ietg m roerben, olme bie ©eneljmis 
gung ber jafjrlidjen (Sonferen? ober einer oon berfelben geroa^ten augerlefenen 
Committee. 

©ottte irgenb ein ^rebiger ober -JJiitglieb biefeg ©efe| iibertreten, fo ift er 
ber (Slaffe, ber oiertelja^rlid^en ober jafjrliajen ©onferen?, rate bie ©adje fein 
mag, oerantraortlttf). 



$m unb jtoattjigfter ^Ififdjnttt. 



2Bir glauben, bajj bie 2lrt unb SDBeife bie 2Bafjrf)eit §u be?eugen burcf) 
Affirmation, raenn rair in gefetjlidfjer $orm bam aufgeforbert raerben, feierlicl), 
geraiffenfjaft unb oor ©ott unb -Sftenfdjen b i n b e n b fiir ung ift, bie 2BafjrI)eit 
m fagen, bie ganje SBafjrfjeit, unb nidgtg alg bie 2Baf)rtjett. 



$tet nub jtoanjtgfter 5lftf(|mtt. 



£)ie SjifttUation unb ber SSerfauf linger ©etranfe jolt burcfjaug ber gan* 
jen ©efellfcfjaft oerboten fein. ©ollte irgenb ein ^rebtger, ©rmafmer, giiljrer 
ober -JRitglieb oor unb natf) ber ndifjften jdEjrlidjen ©onferen? tm S^re 1842 
fid) bamit abgeben, fo foil er fitr bag $ergef)en ber t)iertelja^rlid^en ober jd^r* 
lichen ©onferen?, oon roelcfjer er ein IJftitglieb ift, oeranttoortlidj fein. SBenn 
ber iibertretenbe SBruber ein ©rmafjner, $iif)rer ober 9Jiitgtieb ift, fo foil eg bie 
^fltdjt beg beauftragten ^rebigerg fein, iE)n in ©anftmutf) ?u oermaftnen, raenn 
eg ein ^Srebiger ift, fo foil eg bie Spflidjt beg oorfteljenben 2luffef)erg ber oiertel; 
jd^rlid^en ober jdfjrlicfjen ©onferen? fein, tfjn ?u ermafjnen, oon feinem unfjetli* 
gen ©eioerbe abntftefjen; nnb toenn atte freunblidj SSerfudje fcfjettern, fo foil 
foldj' ein Uebertreter, ber ^u unferer $trd)e geprt, oon berfelben auggefdjloffen 
toerben. ^nbeffen foil biefe 9tegel nia)t fo in 2tnroenbung gebraajt toerben, urn 
©ruggiften unb anbere in ujrem S3erfauf oon 9Jiebi;$inen, ober anbere in iJjren 
gefdjaftltajen 2lrbeiten, ab^uljalten. 



pnf uttii jtoanjigfter 9Uifd)itttt. 

Jreimauerei 

^reimauerei in jebem ©inne beg SBorteg, ift ganoid) oon ung genu> 
billiget, unb foU auf feine SBetfe in unferer ©efeUfdjaft gebulbet rcerben. 
©ottten einige unferer SDfttglieber fortfafjren, $reimauer--£ogen ^u befudjen, 
ober irgenb einer tfjrer ^ro?effionen alg ©lieber beijuroo^nen, ober fonft fta) 
ber 93riiberfcr)aft beigefellen, fo fcpefcen fie fidj baburaj aig ©lieber unferer 
£ird)e aug. 



Me ©flaoerei, in jebem ©inne beg 2Borteg, ift ganoid) oerboten, unb foil 
auf feine SBeife in unferer $ira)e gebulbet toerben. ©ollten einige in unferer 
©efellfdjaft gefunben toerben, toelcfje ©flaoen f)alten, fo fbnnen fie feine WiU 
glieber bleiben, aufjer fie manumittiren ober fe^en folate ©flaoen oerfonlidj 
frei. 102 



Conflitution kr ffionfmn? = ludjiirmfeem in 
Cftrclmlle, ©Ijio. 



I. 2trttf el. 

1. 2)ag obige ©tabliffement foil bie Gonferen2=93ucf)brutferei ber SBereinigs 
ten 23riiber in ©fjrifto genannt roerben. 

2. 2lHe fjierin benrilligte gefeijgebenbe ©enmlt ift ber <£>aupt=©onferenj be* 
fagter $ircfje ubertragen, beren $PfIitf)t eg ift, irgenb einige Sfcgeln ?u madden 
unb m oerbeffem, bie ifjrem Urtljetle nacf) ^roecfmafjig fcfieinen mogen. 

3. @g foil bie $j3flitf)t ber $aupt=6onferen? fein, alle trier ^cujre brei 
Sruftee'g ernennen, ober m roaljlen, beggleidjen einen Sjberauggeber unb 
©d)a|meifter an^une^men. 

4. 3Benn ftdj eine ©rlebigung in bem SDepartement beg £erauggeberg 
ober beg ©d)a£meifterg burdj $ranff)eit, £ob unb auf fonftige SOBetfe ereignet, 
fo foil eg bie Spfltdjjt ber Sruftee'g fein, eine anbere tauglicfje ^erfon ober $er* 
fonen ?ur 2IugfiiIIung befagter erlebigter ©telle big ?ur ©ttmng ber nadjften 
§aupt=©onferen? anmneljmen. 

5. ©leidjerroeife foil eg, im §alle fid^ eine ©rlebigung bei ben SCrufteeg 
buret) Xob ober fonft ereignet, bie SPfltcfjt ber iibrigen beiben fein, eine britte 
Sperfon ?u rcaE)Ien, um befagte erlebigte ©telle big ?ur ©i|ung ber ndcfjften 
£au»t=6onferen2 ju fiillen. 

6. 2)er ©rtrag beg befagten ©tabltffementg iiber bie 2luggaben fiir reifen* 
be unb unfaljige ^rebiger, foil fiir SBittroen unb SBaifen oerroenbet, unb m 
biefem @nbe unter bie »erfd£)iebenen jdf)rlidjen (5onferen?en oertfyeilt roerben, 
me eg bie §aupt-©onferen§ antoenben mag. 

II. 2lrti!el. 

1. @g foil bie $Pflic§t ber Srufteeg fein, aHe fecf»g donate mit bem 
©cf)cr|meifter unb §erauggeber ^edmungg=21bfdjlu|j ?u fatten unb ber ©d&afc* 
meifter foU einen 23erict)t augfertigen unb biefen ber jdr)rlicr)en ©onferenj beg 
©cioto^iftrifteg, fotoie ber ©eneral^onferen? iiberfenben. 

2. G5g foil bie $Pflicfjt ber jaljrltcfjen ©onferen? fein, in ber groifcfienseit 
ber £aupt;©onferen? barauf ?u fefjen, bafi ber Sgerauggeber, ©tf)a|meifter unb 

bie Xruftee'g ifjre 21mtgpflicf)ten tftun, nrie biefe ©onftitution eg oerlangt. 

' 103. 



104 



3. 2luf offentlid&e 2frttlage trgenb etneS ber obengenamtten SSeamten foil, 
eg bie $flic§t ber obengenamtten jdljrlidjen ©onferenj fein, bie befagte 2lnflage 
?u unterfucfjen, unb toentt fie ifjrer 9Jieinung nacr) fdfjulbig finb, fte§uoerabfa)te* 
ben, unb bie erlebigte ©telle bi3 ?ur (Strung ber nadjften ^aupfcSonferen? ?u 
befe^en. 

III. Sir til el. 

1. @§ foil bie ^fltcfyt be§ £erau§geber§ fein, ftrenge Slufmerffantfeit auf 
aUe ?um (Stnriicfen eingefanbte Mt^eilungen ?u ridjten, biefelben, toenn e§ 
notfjig ift, reoibiren, unb fie etnntritcfen ; jebod^, menu er irgenb einige er* 
Ijielie, toelcfje feiner 2Reinung nacr) nitijt mit ber Seljre unb ben Sftegeln unferer 
$ircfje ubereinramen, fo foE er foldfje bent ©dja^meifter ober einem ober mefy 
ren ber £ruftee3 oorlegen, unb toenn biefelben fie oerroerfen, fie juriicffjalten, 
fonft aber etnrttcfen. 

2. foil bie $jTicf)t be§ !§erau3geber§ fein, eigene 9Jiaterte fiirjebeS 
SBlatt ?u fajretben, ba§ Sefen be§ (SorrefturbogenS genau ?u beforgen, 2trti!et 
au^utoafjlen, 2c. 

3. ©leittjertoeife foil e3 bie ^flid^t be§ £erau§geber§ fein, erne aUgemeine 
2tuffid£)t iiber bie 3lrbeiten in ber 33ucfjbru<ferei $u fatten, unb barauf ?u feljen, 
bafj fie tfjre $ett nidfjt im 2ftuffiggange jubringen. 

4. Sie Xruftee'§ follen eine attgemeine 2htfficf)t iiber ben §erau§geber 
unb ©dja^meifter fjalten, unb barauf fefjen, bafj fie tfjre $pflicf)t tfjun, unb too 
nidfjt, ntogen fie if)re£> 2Imte§ entfe^t roerben, big ?ur ©itjung ber nadfjften jafjrs 
licfjen (Eonferen?, toeldfje bie ©ati> entfd^eiben foil, in n)eld)em ^atte bie befags 
ten £ruftee'§ bie erlebigte ©telle befe|en f often. 

IV. Slbfcfjnitt. 

foil bie ^flidEjt be§ ©cfja^meifterS fein, ©orge fiir aUe einfttoetligen 
2lngelegenf)eiten ber Sucfjbrucferei ^u fjaben, aUe bant gefjbrtgen 33iitt;er ?u 
fiifjren, auf Slmoeifung ber £ruftee'§ folate aftaterialien ?u liefern, al§ ?u alien 
3eiten notfjig fein ntogen, unb unter ber Slnroeifung befagter &ruftee'3 al§ ein 
aUgemeiner S8uti>2lgent ?u rjanbeln. 

2. ©er ©dfja|nteifter, menu er ntajt ntit fetnen amtlicfjen ^3flitt)ten Be* 
fdEjaftigt ift, foil nrie eine anbere <ganb in ber 23ud)brucferet arbeiten. 

3. ©nblitt) foUen bie £ruftee'§ ba§ 9tecfjt fjaben, irgenb einige -ftebenge* 
fe£e ?u ntadjen, aI3 trjnen ?ur Regulation ber minbern 23utf)brucf'erei=2lngelegetts 
fjeiten btenltd) fd)einen ntogen, ntit bent SBorbefjalt, bafj fie feine ber 33eftim* 
tmtngen biefer (Eonftitution oerle^en. 



9ld)t it. jtottttjigftcr ^Cbfi^nitt- 



fudj = Igentrdjoft. 



1. @g foil ein 33udE)=2lgent in jebem jafjrlidfien ©onferen^SMftrtfte ernannt 
merben, beffen SPfltcjjt eg fein foil, atte 93iid£)er 2c. m iibemeljmert bie ifjm t)on 
bem ©cf)a|meifter gefanbt raerben, unb bie bem (Sonferen^&uc^rudereisCSta&s 
iiffement in (Sircleoille mgepren. 

2. 2)er befagte 2lgent foil bem <3cf)a|meifier beg ©onferen^SBudfjbrutferets 
©tabltffementg in (SircleoiHe SRedjmtng abmlegen fdjulbig fein. 

3. @g foil bie fpfltd^t beg 23ucf)agentert fein, fo roeit eg ficf)er unb tljunltcf) 
fein mag, aHe [fym von bem <Sdja|meifier gefanbten SSiid^er an bie 3)iftrtfts 
^rebiger mm -?ht|en ber $ircf)e m oertljeilen. 

4. 25er Sud^agent foil etne ricfjtige 3tecl)nung iiber aHe fiir bag Befagte 
©onferenj-SSud^brucferebStaoIiffement gemad£)ien 33ertf)eilungen unb (Soiled 
iionen fjalten. SEenn 33itcf)er in feinem ©iftrifte fefjlen, foil er ben ©djatrntei* 
fter Bermittelft 33riefe baron benadf)rid£)tigen. 

5. ©er 2lgent foil mit bem ©dja^meifter jebe fedfjg SDfcmate oermittelft 
33riefe ober auf anbere SBeife abanbern. 



Pom $ awn twit Pnfammlungsljaufern unii tier 
imbet ?u beobadjtenben ©rimmtg* 

%x. Sfi etraaS anmratfjen im 33etreff beg 33aue§ oon SSerfammlungg; 
pufern ? 

2lnt. Safjt aHe unfere $erfammlunggpufer etnfadj unb anfianbig, mit 
freien <Si|en, unb mit nidjt mef)r Soften alg noting ift, erbaut roerben. 

$r. SBem foUen unfere SSerfammlunggpufer, unb bie bam geljbrtgen 
©runbftiidre im $auf brief e mgefcfjrieben fein ? 

Slntro. ©iner Serfammlung von Sruftee'g unb iljren -ftadfjfolgem im 
2lmte, alg anrertrauteg ©igentfyum ber ^trd&e ber 33eretmgien SBrtiber in 
©Ijrifto. 



106 



%x. SBie ttrirb eine SSerfammlung von Xrufieeg gerocifjlt ? 

2lntro. 3Bo immer etne ©efeEfajaft bie 2lBfid£jt §at, ein 33erfanttttumggs 
Ijaug ?u Bauen ober ?u faufert, fo foE eg bie ^Pfltttjt beg Setters ober 2luffel)erg 
ewer folajen ©efellfc^aft fern, eg ber trierieljafjrlictien ©onferenj beg Se^trfs 
ober ber (Station ?u toelajer fie geljoren, anjujeigen, beren ^fliajt eg fein jolt, 
eine SSerfammlnng von nitijt toeniger alg brei etnfitfjtgooEen Srufteeg ju ernens 
nen. 9Jiit bent SSorBe^alt jebocf), ba£ oon feinem nerlangt toerbe, longer alg 
trier 3>aE)re bienen, eg f et benn ununtganglicf) notfjtoenbig. 

tote ^erfon foE alg julaffig ?ur SSafjl alg ein Srufiee fur irgenb eing 
unferer $erfammlunggfjaufer fetn, toeldfje fein regelntajngeg EDittglieb unferer 
jtirc^e ift. 

%v. 2Bie foEen Srufteeg Betm 33auen eineg SSerfammlunggEiaufeg oer= 
f atjren ? 

5lntro. ©tc foEen eine ©rf»a|ung beg SBetragg ntaajen, toeld&er notfjtg ift, 
eine ©runblotte ju faufen, ?u Bauen unb folaje anbere SSerbefferungen \u ma* 
djen, alg fitr notljig eraajtet roerben ntogen ; fie foEen jebott) tric&t ?u Bauen an= 
fangen, Big noet 3)ritt£)etle beg nacfj biefer ©cptnmg notJ)tgen ©elbeg gefid^ert 
ober unterfcf)rieBen, unb gletcEierroeife ein gefeitfidfjeg Efted^t nt ber Sotte erlangt 
ift, auf roeldfjer fie \n Bauen BeaBfidfjtigen. 

<5ie foEen ja^rlic^e SBerfammlungen Ijalten, unb eine riajtige unb geredjte 
Urlunbe in einem gu biefem groecfe angefd^afften Suaje oon alien Serfjanblun* 
gen iE)rer SSerfantntlung eintragen, roelajeg 93ud£) ber oierterjaf)rIicf)en (Sonferen? 
beg Befagien S)iftrict§ ober ber (Station jeber?eit ?ur ^nfpection offen fein foE. 

<Sie foEen ©orge fitr bag ©igent^unt beg 33erfantntlunggf)aufeg, bag 
©runbftitd:, ben 93egrabmjjpfo$, ic. tragen. 

$r. 3Bag foE getljan toerben, roenn fttf) in ber SSerfammlung ber Strufteeg 
eine ©rlebigung ereignet, babura), bajj etner auf^ort ein Sftitglieb §u fein, buret) 
©ntfetung oom Slmie, £ob, ober fonft ? 

SCntro. ©g foE bie $pflidf)t ber tjterteljafjrlicfyerx ©onferen', fein, eine paffen* 
be ^erfon ober ^3erfonen ?u ernennen, folate ©rlebigung ober (Srlebigungen 
aug§ufiiEen. 

$r. 2Bag foE get^an roerben, raenn irgenb eineg unferer §aufer leer ift ? 

2lntto. @g foE bie ^flia)t einer t)iertelid^rlia;en ©onferen? beg narfijten 
33enrtg fein, nidf)t rceniger alg brei fd§id:Iitt)e ^erfonen alg Srufteeg ju ernennen, 
roelcije bie ©etoalt ^aBen foEen, rcenn fie baju van ?n>ei 2)rittf)eilen ber ©lieber 
biefer (Sonferenj ermacfjtigt rcerben, fold^eg S5erfammlungg^aug unb rcag bant 
geprt, »erpacf)ten, ^u cerrenten ober nt oedaufen, unb bag oon foldpent 33er* 
patten, SSerrenten ober SSertauf entftanbene ©elb ?u oerroenben, roie bie don* 
ferenj eg amoeifen ntag. 



107 



21 n m e r £ u n g. 2)ie Xrufteeg foflen in alien fallen ©orge tragen, bie 
UeBertraggsllrtunben gefe^mafjig auggeferttgt unb in ben (Sountr)=Urfunben 
SBuaje, too bag ©igentfjum ift, eingetragen ?u Ijaben, bag ift, bie $aufg;llrtunbe 
auf fie unb iJ)re -ftadjfolger im 2lmte al§ anoertrauteg @tgentf)um ber $irc§e ber 
$ereinigten Sriiber in (SJ)rifto gefdE)rieben ?u I)aben, unb bafj fie ein Serfamm* 
lunggtyaug ?um ©e&raud) ber TOglteber ber befagten ^irdje ben !RegeIn ber 
3utf)t=Drbnung gemafj bauen laffen, bie oon 3ett §u 3eit oon ber $irdje ange* 
nommen toerben mbgen. 



Sretjigfter %b\ djtrttt. 



JUugntffe* 



2JiitgIieber »on unferer ©efellfttjaft roeldje oon einem pfo|e nacf) bem 
anbern oer^teljen, foUen ftdj ein 3eugnifj, toelttjeg burdEj einen $iil)rer ober ^rebi* 
ger unterjeicfjnet fein foil, 'oerfdjaffen, namlitf) : „$d) be^euge permit, bafj 
21. 93. ein ©lieb, oon gutem 33etragen in ber £trd£)e ber SSereinigten 33riiber in 
©f)rifto Bigger geroefen ifi. (Saturn.) 

SBenn $Prebiger oon einem (Sonferen^SDiftrift nadf) einem anbern ^ieljen, fo 
foilen fie ftd) oon ber (Sonferen?, in toetajer fie bigger geftanben, ein 3 e wg™fj 
oerfdjaffen. 



3nl?alt. 



©eite. 



2teltefte, tyre SBctyl Drbmation unb tyre $PfIic§t . . .92 

Slufftcltg^eltefte, SBa^I unb spfltc^t ... 93 

S8udfj=2Igent[d)aft . . . . . .105 

m$ex:%)xuder\ . . . . 101 

©laffen ?u errityten unb §u gotten . . . .87 

©laffen . . . . . . 87 

Gonfittutton ber ©onferen^SBucfjbrucEeret in ©ircletritte, D^io . 103 

©onftitution ber$irtf)e 79 

Sag ©Iau6en§Be!enntmf$ . . . . .78 

2)te 2lufnafjme von ^rebtgern .... 83 

£>te tuerteljctyrlitfje (Eonferenj . . . .84 

f$fretmaueret ...... 102 

©efjalt ber ^rebiger . . . . .97 

©eneraI=©onferen? . . . . 81 

§eiratf)§s©eremome . . . . .98 

<£i£tge ©etranfe ..... 102 

^ctyrltdpe ©onferenj . . . . ' . 82 

Sftitglieber tm 2ttfgemeinen .... 85 

Drbination ber Slelteften . . . . .91 

SPfKd&ten ber ^Brebtger ..... 89 

^flityien ber 3ietfeprebiger . . . .90 

<5tf)n)bren . . . . . .101 

©toeret . . . . . .102 

©ittenlofeS 33etragen von ^rebiger ... 95 

Urfprung ber SSereinigten 33ritber in ©fjrifto . . .75 

SSon ber -JlotyttJenbigfeii ber ©inigfeit unter un§ felbft . . 99 
Son bem ttnterrtdf)te ber ^ugenb .... 101 

SBom 23efucf)en con SjbauS y\ igauS, unb bem ©infdjarfen praftifcfier 

SKeltgionen ..... 100 
3Som 33auen von SBerfammlungSfjSufem unb ber babei ju beo&ad&tenben 

Drbnung . . . . . . 105 

SBctyl ber Stfd&ofe unb tyre «PfCic^t .... 94 

Seugniffe .... .107 

108 



CERTIFICATION. 



I hereby certify that the German Discipline prior to 1815, and 
those of 1815, 1817, 1819, and 1841, as contained in this volume, 
are a faithful reproduction of the originals, including errors of 
orthography, punctuation, capitalization, and typography. 

Care Karstaedt. 

Dayton, Ohio, September 6, 1895. 



109 



